Encyclopedia_of_Chart_Patterns_2005_-_Thomas_Bulkowski.pdf

Encyclopedia
of
Chart Patterns
SECOND EDITION
Thomas N. Bulkowski
John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page iii

4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page vi

Encyclopedia
of
Chart Patterns
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page i

Founded in 1807, John Wiley & Sons is the oldest independent publishing
company in the United States. With offices in North America, Europe, Aus-
tralia, and Asia, Wiley is globally committed to developing and marketing print
and electronic products and services for our customers’ professional and per-
sonal knowledge and understanding.
The Wiley Trading series features books by traders who have survived
the market’s ever-changing temperament and have prospered—some by rein-
venting systems, others by getting back to basics. Whether a novice trader,
professional, or somewhere in-between, these books will provide the advice
and strategies needed to prosper today and well into the future.
For a list of available titles, visit our Web site at www.WileyFinance.com.
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page ii

This book is printed on acid-free paper
Copyright © 2005 by Thomas N. Bulkowski. All rights reserved.
Published by John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Hoboken, New Jersey.
Published simultaneously in Canada.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, scanning, or
otherwise, except as permitted under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States
Copyright Act, without either the prior written permission of the Publisher, or authorization
through payment of the appropriate per-copy fee to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222
Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, 978-750-8400, fax 978-646-8600, or on the Web at
www.copyright.com. Requests to the Publisher for permission should be addressed to the
Permissions Department, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 111 River Street, Hoboken, NJ 07030,
201-748-6011, fax 201-748-6008, or online at http://www.wiley.com/go/permissions.
Limit of Liability/Disclaimer of Warranty: While the publisher and the author have used their
best efforts in preparing this book, they make no representations or warranties with respect to
the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this book and specifically disclaim any implied
warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. No warranty may be created or
extended by sales representatives or written sales materials. The advice and strategies contained
herein may not be suitable for your situation. You should consult with a professional where
appropriate. Neither the publisher nor the author shall be liable for any loss of profit or any
other commercial damages, including but not limited to special, incidental, consequential, or
other damages.
For general information about our other products and services, please contact our Customer
Care Department within the United States 800-762-2974, outside the United States at 317-
572-3993 or fax 317-572-4002.
Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats. Some content that appears in
print may not be available in electronic books. For more information about Wiley products,
visit our Web site at www.wiley.com.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data:
Bulkowski, Thomas N., 1957–
Encyclopedia of chart patterns / Thomas N. Bulkowski.—2nd ed.
p. cm. — (Wiley trading series)
Includes index.
ISBN-13 978-0-471-66826-8
ISBN-10 0-471-66826-5 (cloth)
1. Stocks—Charts, diagrams, etc. 2. Commodity futures—Charts, diagrams, etc.
3. Investment analysis. I. Title: Chart patterns. II. Title. III. Series.
HG4638.B85 2005
332.63′222—dc22
2004059094
Printed in the United States of America.
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page iv

To my parents, who continued to love me even after my homemade
rocket set the lawn on fire, and to my four-legged best friend,
Rusty, who saved my life; it grieves me that I couldn’t save yours.
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page v

vii
Preface to the
Second Edition
On March 24, 2000, the financial world changed. No, that was not the date this
book first hit the store shelves, but the beginning of a bear market that lasted
2
1
⁄2 years. Finally, I had bear market data to use for finding chart patterns!
After spending nearly 5 years recovering from the work needed to com-
plete the first edition, I decided to undertake an update. I changed the editor-
ial content of the book in small ways, but made substantial improvements in
others. Here is the list of the important changes:
• Bull and bear market statistics for complete coverage.
• Expanded statistics, all in a similar format:
Results Snapshot, at the start of each chapter shows the most
important numbers and surprises.
General statistics, including the average rise or decline, busted
pattern performance, and benchmark performance.
Failure rates, a list of ten breakpoints to show how often a pattern
fails.
Breakout and postbreakout statistics, showing performance
over the yearly price range, pullback rates, and performance after a
gap.
Frequency distribution of days to the ultimate high or low,
showing when the trend is likely to end.
Size statistics, describing how performance varies for pattern
height, width, and combinations of both.
Volume statistics, including volume trend, a new concept I call
volume shapes, and breakout day volume.
For best performance, a list of trading tips and where to find
them in each chapter.
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page vii

• More chart patterns. I added 14 new chart patterns.
• Event patterns. I added 9 new types of patterns, which I call event pat-
terns. These include earnings surprises, drug approvals, store sales, and
stock upgrades and downgrades.
• More samples. I found over 38,500 chart pattern samples, more than
double the 15,000 used in the first edition, making many of the statis-
tics rock solid.
• Keyed table entries. Each table entry appears in bold at the start of its
corresponding text discussion for easy locating.
• Glossary and methodology. Instead of peppering the text with repeated
explanations, a new chapter explains how I arrived at each table entry.
Thanks to the thousands who purchased the first edition. I am confident
that this second edition will help you become a more knowledgeable and suc-
cessful trader.
THOMAS N. BULKOWSKI
January 2005
viii Preface to the Second Edition
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page viii

ix
Preface to the
First Edition
When I was a little tyke I decided the easiest way to riches was to play the stock
market. It was, after all, a level playing field, a negative-sum game with some-
body winning and somebody losing. (Hint: The winner is always the broker.)
All one had to do to win was pick stocks that went up and avoid stocks that
went down. Easy.
I kept this in mind when I graduated from Syracuse University with an
engineering degree and showed up early for my first professional job. Each
morning I cracked open the newspaper and plotted my stock picks on a piece
of graph paper taped to the wall. Bob, my office mate, used the same newspa-
per to select his stocks. I chose my selections after exhausting fundamental
research, but Bob simply closed his eyes, twirled his hand around, and plunged
his finger into the newspaper. When he opened his eyes and removed his fin-
ger, he announced another pick.
After several months of tracking both our selections, I made a startling
discovery: I was getting creamed. Bob’s random selections were beating the tar
out of my carefully researched choices. I also discovered something else: I was
learning a lot by paper trading.
With the hesitancy and distrust inherited from my parents, I studied two
dozen firms before making my final selection and first purchase: I opened a
money market account. The timing was excellent; I was earning over 17% on
my cash. At first glance, the return might imply a very risky investment but it
was not. The prime rate was, after all, at 21%.
Flush with success, I gathered my courage and opened a brokerage
account and began investing the few pennies I saved. Again, the timing was
excellent as I caught the beginning of a major bull market. I bought a stock at
a split-adjusted price of 88 cents and watched it go to $30 and change.
Lest you think that everything was easy, consider what happened. My
stock portfolio was growing by leaps and bounds, but my professional career
was about to take a turn for the worse. After switching careers more often than
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page ix

I sometimes like to admit, I landed a job with a company I could finally call
home—a job that would last a lifetime, or so I hoped. Almost 6 months after
my 10-year anniversary with the company, I received a letter from the chair-
man. He congratulated me on my decade with the company and looked for-
ward to even more success for me in the coming years.
Six weeks later I was laid off.
I took stock of the situation and decided that, at the age of 36, I had
enough. Newspapers term guys like me The Missing Million. We are the ones
who, for whatever reason, leave their jobs and decide not to go back into the
workforce. We retire. Everyone, and I mean everyone (with the notable excep-
tion of my cousin Mary Ann—bless her heart), thinks we are nuts. They are
right, of course!
For the longest time, I have been fascinated with technical analysis of
stocks. In the early years, I considered the little squiggles to be nothing short
of voodoo. Still, I was curious as to why the major brokerage houses were hir-
ing technical analysts in droves. But I did not dare take my eye off the funda-
mentals simply because I did not know anything about the technicals. Then I
discovered Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities magazine. During my
lunch hour, I would take the elevator down to the library and read back issues.
Although I saw chart patterns in the stocks I bought, I never really attached
much significance to them. As some of my selections went sour, I began to view
chart patterns with more respect. The fundamentals always looked good, but
the technicals were signaling a trend change just as I was about to pull the trig-
ger. The stocks I bought either lost money outright or I sold them too soon
and cut my profits short.
Perhaps this has happened to you. You do fundamental research on a stock
and then buy it, only to watch it go nowhere for a year or more. Even worse,
once you get in, the stock tumbles. Had you looked at the chart the answer was
always there. Prices pierced a trend line, a head-and-shoulders top appeared
out of nowhere, the relative strength index signaled an overbought situation. In
short, any number of technical indicators were screaming that a buy now
would cost you your shirt. But you never saw the signs.
You are not alone; I did the same thing for years. I eventually got so frus-
trated with the performance of my stock selections that I decided to do my own
research on technical analysis. I went to the library and read the same thing in
many books: A head-and-shoulders formation works most of the time. What
does that mean? Does it mean they are successful 51% of the time or 90% of
the time? No one had the answer. I was not willing to risk my hard-earned dol-
lars on simple bromides. As an engineer I wanted hard, cold facts, not fuzzy
platitudes. So, I wrote this book.
At the back of the book is an Index of Chart Patterns. If you suspect your
stock is making a chart pattern but do not know what to call it, the Index of
x Preface to the First Edition
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page x

Chart Patterns is the first place to look. Page numbers beside each pattern
direct you to the associated chapter.
The chapters are arranged alphabetically in two sections; chart patterns
and event patterns. Within each chapter, you are first greeted with a “Results
Snapshot” of the major findings followed by a short discussion. Then, a
“Tour” invites you to explore the chart pattern. “Identification Guidelines,” in
both table form and in-depth discussion, make selecting and verifying your
choices easier.
No work would be complete without an exploration of the mistakes, and
the “Focus on Failures” section dissects the cause of failures. The all-important
“Statistics” section follows. How do you trade a chart pattern? That is what the
“Trading Tactics” and “Sample Trade” sections explore. The “For Best Per-
formance” section includes a list of tips and observations on how to select bet-
ter performing patterns.
If you have ever worked on a car or done some woodworking, then you
will recognize the importance of selecting the right tool for the job. You would
not want to use a flat-head screwdriver when a Phillips works better. Both do
the job but they are hardly interchangeable. Sometimes it is not a screwdriver
you should be using, but a chisel. Selecting the proper tools and knowing how
to use them is half the battle. This book is a lot like that, helping to sort the
wheat from the chaff. Sometimes a chart pattern is frightening enough that you
will want to take profits. At other times, the best trade that you can make is
none at all.
I cannot give you the experience needed to make money in the stock mar-
ket using chart patterns. I can only give you the tools and say, “Go to work on
paper first.” That is the first step in developing a trading style that works for
you, one you are comfortable with, one that improves as you do. If you review
your paper trades, you will understand why a stop-loss order is more than a
tool for the professionals. You will improve your ability to predict support and
resistance levels that will, in turn, allow you to tighten your stops and get out
near the top, cut your losses short, and let your profits run. You will under-
stand why the statistics in this book are useful for comparison purposes, but
your trading results may fall short. You may discover that your girlfriend loves
diamonds, but as a chart pattern, they are a lousy investment. One word says it
all. Experience.
Good luck.
THOMAS N. BULKOWSKI
December 1999
Preface to the First Edition xi
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xi

4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xii

xiii
Acknowledgments
Perhaps several times in your life, something occurs that alters its direction.
That happened to me several years ago when I brashly submitted my first arti-
cle to Technical Analysis of Stocks and Commodities. Much to my surprise and
delight, the editor at the time, Thom Hartle, published the work. That single
event sent me spinning off in a new direction, another career.
Nearly a dozen articles later, I called Thom and chatted with him about
an idea for a book. He steered me to Pamela van Giessen, now editorial direc-
tor for John Wiley & Sons, Inc., publisher of this book. A single e-mail of my
idea to her put a new set of wheels in motion. Simple words cannot express my
thanks to these two outstanding individuals.
This is a great book made better by the tireless efforts of Bernice Pettinato
of Beehive Production Services. She did more than shepherd a 2,000 page man-
uscript through production. She read it and edited it without dying of boredom
while making astute suggestions. Simply, she’s the best. Thanks, Bernice.
T. N. B.
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xiii

4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xiv

xv
Contents
Introduction 1
PART ONE Chart Patterns 9
1 Broadening Bottoms 11
2 Broadening Formations, Right-Angled and Ascending 28
3 Broadening Formations, Right-Angled and Descending 45
4 Broadening Tops 63
5 Broadening Wedges, Ascending 81
6 Broadening Wedges, Descending 98
7 Bump-and-Run Reversal Bottoms 115
8 Bump-and-Run Reversal Tops 132
9 Cup with Handle 149
10 Cup with Handle, Inverted 164
11 Diamond Bottoms 179
12 Diamond Tops 196
13 Double Bottoms, Adam & Adam 213
14 Double Bottoms, Adam & Eve 229
15 Double Bottoms, Eve & Adam 244
16 Double Bottoms, Eve & Eve 259
17 Double Tops, Adam & Adam 275
18 Double Tops, Adam & Eve 291
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xv

19 Double Tops, Eve & Adam 307
20 Double Tops, Eve & Eve 321
21 Flags 335
22 Flags, High and Tight 350
23 Gaps 362
24 Head-and-Shoulders Bottoms 374
25 Head-and-Shoulders Bottoms, Complex 390
26 Head-and-Shoulders Tops 405
27 Head-and-Shoulders Tops, Complex 421
28 Horn Bottoms 438
29 Horn Tops 451
30 Island Reversals 464
31 Islands, Long 480
32 Measured Move Down 496
33 Measured Move Up 510
34 Pennants 522
35 Pipe Bottoms 536
36 Pipe Tops 550
37 Rectangle Bottoms 563
38 Rectangle Tops 579
39 Rounding Bottoms 595
40 Rounding Tops 608
41 Scallops, Ascending 624
42 Scallops, Ascending and Inverted 639
43 Scallops, Descending 654
44 Scallops, Descending and Inverted 670
45 Three Falling Peaks 684
46 Three Rising Valleys 698
47 Triangles, Ascending 711
48 Triangles, Descending 730
xvi Contents
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xvi

49 Triangles, Symmetrical 748
50 Triple Bottoms 765
51 Triple Tops 779
52 Wedges, Falling 795
53 Wedges, Rising 811
PART TWO Event Patterns 827
54 Dead-Cat Bounce 829
55 Dead-Cat Bounce, Inverted 844
56 Earnings Surprise, Bad 855
57 Earnings Surprise, Good 868
58 FDA Drug Approvals 880
59 Flag, Earnings 893
60 Same-Store Sales, Bad 908
61 Same-Store Sales, Good 921
62 Stock Downgrades 934
63 Stock Upgrades 950
Statistics Summary 965
Glossary and Methodology 982
Index of Chart and Event Patterns 993
Index 1001
Contents xvii
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xvii

4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xviii

Encyclopedia
of
Chart Patterns
4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xix

4366_FM.qxd 4/6/05 12:46 PM Page xx

1
Introduction
Jim is struggling.
He is the owner of JCB Superstores and his competitor across town is
beating him up; there is blood all over Jim’s ledger. He decides it is time to take
off the gloves: JCB goes public. He uses the money from the initial public
offering to buy his competitor and add a few more stores around town.
With a growing sales base, Jim’s clout allows him to negotiate lower
prices for the office supplies he is retailing. He passes on part of the savings to
his customers, while watching his margins widen, and plows the profits back
into building more stores.
Jim calls his friend, Tom, and tells him of his plans to expand the opera-
tion statewide. They chat for a while and exchange business tactics on how best
to manage the expansion. When Tom gets off the phone, he decides to con-
duct his own research on JCB. He visits several stores and sees the same thing:
packed parking lots, people bustling around with full shopping carts, and lines
at the checkout counters. He questions a few customers to get a sense of the
demographics. At a few stores, he even chats with suppliers as they unload their
wares. Back at the office, he does a thorough analysis of the financials and
looks at the competition. Everything checks out so he orders his trading part-
ners to buy the stock at no higher than 10.
When news of the expansion plan hits the wires, the Street panics. It is,
after all, a soft economy and expanding willy-nilly when a recession looms is
daft, maybe even criminal, according to the pundits. The stock drops below 10
and Tom’s crew makes its move. They buy as much as they can without rais-
ing suspicion. The stock rises anyway. It goes back up to 11, then 12, and
rounds over at 13 before heading back down.
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 1

Several months go by and the economic outlook is as bleak as ever. The
stock eases down to 9. After Tom checks in with Jim for the latest public news,
Tom’s team buys more. It is an easy score because investors are willing to
dump the stock, especially as year-end tax selling approaches.
Six weeks later the company releases the sales numbers for JCB; they are
better than expected. The stock rises 15% in minutes and closes at 10.75. And that
is just for starters. Six months later, it’s clear the economy was never in danger of
entering a recession and everyone sees boom times ahead. The stock hits 20.
Years go by, the stock splits a few times, and the holiday season looms.
Tom interviews a handful of customers leaving JCB Superstores and discovers
that they are all complaining about the same thing: The advertised goods are
not on the shelves. Tom investigates further and discovers a massive distribu-
tion problem, right at the height of the selling season. JCB has overextended
itself; the infrastructure is simply not there to support the addition of one new
store each week.
Tom realizes it is time to sell. He tells his trading department to dump
the stock immediately but for no less than 28.25. They liquidate about a third
of their large holdings before driving the stock down below the minimum.
Since it is the holidays, everyone seems to be in a buying mood. Novice
investors jump in at what they consider a bargain price. The major brokerage
houses climb aboard and tout the stock, but Tom knows better. When the
stock recovers to its old high, his trading partners sell the remainder of their
holdings. The stock tops out and rounds over. During the next month and a
half, the stock drifts down, slowly, casually. There does not appear to be a rush
for the exits—just a slow trickle as the smart money quietly folds up shop.
Then news of poor holiday sales leaks out. There is a rumor about distri-
bution problems, merchandising mistakes, and cash flow problems. Brokerage
firms that only weeks before were touting the stock now advise their clients to
sell. The stock plummets 39% overnight.
One or two analysts say the stock is oversold; it is a bargain and investors
should add to their positions. Many bottom fishers follow their brokers’ rec-
ommendation and buy the stock. Big mistake. The buying enthusiasm pushes
the price up briefly before a new round of selling takes hold. Each day the stock
drops a bit lower, nibbling away like waves washing against a castle of sand. In
2 months’ time, the stock is down another 30%.
The following quarter JCB Superstores announces that earnings will
likely come in well below consensus estimates. The stock drops another 15%.
The company is trying to correct the distribution problem, but it is not some-
thing easily fixed. It decides to stop expanding and to concentrate on the prof-
itability of its existing store base.
Two years later, Tom pulls up the stock chart. The dog has been flat for
so long it looks as if its heartbeat has stopped. He calls Jim and chats about the
outlook for JCB Superstores. Jim gushes enthusiastically about a new retailing
concept called the Internet. He is excited about the opportunity to sell office
2 Introduction
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 2

supplies online without the need for bricks and mortar. There is some risk
because the online community is in its infancy, but Jim predicts it will expand
quickly. Tom is impressed, so he starts doing his homework and is soon buy-
ing the stock again.
Investment Footprints
If you picture in your mind the price action of JCB Superstores, you may rec-
ognize three chart patterns: a double bottom, a double top, and a dead-cat
bounce. To knowledgeable investors, chart patterns are not squiggles on a
price chart; they are the footprints of the smart money. The footprints are all
they need to follow as they line their pockets with greater and greater riches.
To others, such as Tom, it takes hard work and pavement pounding before
they dare take a position in a stock. They are the ones making the footprints.
They are the smart money that is setting the rules of the game—a game any-
one can play. It is called investing.
Whether you choose to use technical analysis or fundamental analysis in
your trading decisions, it pays to know what the market is thinking. It pays to
look for the footprints. Those footprints may well steer you away from a cliff
and get you out of a stock just in time. The feet that make those footprints are
the same ones that will kick you in the pants, waking you up to a promising
investment opportunity.
Let me tell you how I followed one trail of footprints. I sold my holdings
in Alaska Air because I thought the stock was going down. Here is my note-
book entry: “9/6/2001. I put a stop at 31.50 this morning and it hit. The stock
has breeched a support level and with weakness in the economy and Septem-
ber/October upon us, it’s time to leave with a small loss [2.5%]. I should have
bought at the breakout price [of an Eve & Adam double bottom]. The relative
strength index peaked twice and now is headed down, suggesting a sale, and the
commodity channel index says sell, too.”
I sold the airline two trading days before the terrorist attacks of 9/11.
Four days after trading resumed, the stock bottomed at 17.70, nearly half the
price at what I sold. The footprints did not lie; they led away from a cliff.
This book gives you the tools to spot the footprints, where they predict
the stock is heading, how far it will travel, and how reliable the trail you are fol-
lowing really is. The tools will not make you rich; tools rarely do. But they are
instruments to greater wealth. Use them wisely.
The Database
For this book, I used several databases in which to search for chart patterns. The
main database consists of 500 stocks, each with durations of 5 years beginning
The Database 3
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 3

from mid-1991. I included the 30 Dow Jones industrials and familiar names
with varying market capitalizations. Stocks included in the database needed
a heartbeat (that is, they were not unduly flat over the 5-year period) and
did not have consistently large intraday price swings (too thinly traded
or volatile).
I usually removed stocks that went below $1.00, assuming bankruptcy
was right around the corner. Most of the names in the database are popular
American companies that trade on the NYSE, AMEX, or Nasdaq. The numer-
ous illustrations accompanying each chapter give a representative sample of the
stocks involved.
To capture the bear market of 2000–2002 and expand on the bull mar-
ket since 1996, I included two additional databases. The first uses about 200
stocks that I follow daily. The other contains about 300 stocks that I no longer
follow but that have historical data of limited duration (some issues no
longer trade).
For rare chart patterns, I use all three databases and search from 1991 to
the most recent date available. For plentiful patterns, I use already found pat-
terns and add those appearing during the bear market. Thus, the number of
stocks I use to find patterns and the amount of historical price quotes varies.
In the first edition of this book, I used a combination of computerized
algorithms and manual searching to find chart patterns. The current edition
includes the 15,000 patterns from the first edition and others found manually
since then, for a total of more than 38,500 patterns.
Stock Performance from 1991 to 2004
Before reading about the various chart patterns in this book, it is wise to review
the performance of the stock market during the period. Figure I.1 shows a
monthly price chart of the Standard & Poor’s 500 stock index. Beginning in
mid-1991, you can see that the market moved up at a leisurely pace, pausing
during much of 1994, and then resuming the climb at a steeper angle in 1995.
The index stumbled in August 1998 and made lower lows for 2 more months
before continuing upward, peaking in March 2000, and signaling an end to the
bull market. The move capped a rise of 418% from the start of the period.
After that, the downhill bear run began, reaching a low in October 2002, for a
decline measuring 51%. The index bounced once but made a higher low in
March 2003, signaling a trend change. Thus, the October low marked the end
of the bear market.
What does all this mean? The bear market measures from March 24,
2000, to October 10, 2002—about 2.5 years long. For data collection pur-
poses, the bull market is everything else, about 11 years long. That covers the
period I used to search for chart patterns in this edition.
4 Introduction
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 4

Investing Using Chart Formations
I could give a dentist’s drill to any person walking by, but that doesn’t mean I
would let that person near my teeth. This book is just like that. It gives you the
tools to invest successfully. It suggests which chart patterns work best and which
ones to avoid. Whether you can make money using them is entirely up to you.
I call this book an encyclopedia because that is how I use it. Whenever I
see a chart pattern forming in a stock I own, or am thinking of buying, I read
the applicable chapter. The information refreshes my memory about identifi-
cation quirks, performance, and any tips on how I can get in sooner or more
profitably. Then I search for similar patterns in the same stock (using different
time scales), and if that does not work, I search for similar patterns in stocks in
the same industry. I look at them closely to determine if their secrets are
applicable to the current situation. I try to learn from their mistakes.
Developing an Investment Style
The question I am asked most often is, how do I develop an investment style? It is
usually not asked like that. Most take a more direct approach: How do I make
money trading stocks? When first asked this question, I stumbled over the
answer. I think it is like showing four people the color blue and asking them to
Developing an Investment Style 5
Higher
Low
1525
1426
1360
1294
1228
1162
1096
1030
964
898
832
766
700
667
634
601
568
535
502
469
436
403
370
S & P 500 Index
Bear Market
1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004
Figure I.1 Standard & Poor’s 500 stock index from 1991 to 2004.
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 5

describe it. One person is color blind so you automatically throw out whatever
he says. One says it is solid blue. Another says it is not blue at all but green,
while the third says it looks like a combination: blue-green. To each individ-
ual, blue looks like blue—just do not try to compare answers.
Developing a trading style is a lot like that. It is an individual endeavor
that has a lot in common with experience. I cannot give you experience; I can
only suggest ways to acquire your own.
If you read a chapter on a bullish chart pattern and buy the first stock
showing the pattern in a bull market, you will probably be successful. The first
trade nearly always works for the novice, maybe even the second or third one,
too. Eventually, though, someone is going to pull the rug out from under you
(who knows, maybe it occurs on the first trade). You will make an investment in
a chart pattern and the trade will go bad. Maybe you will stumble across a herd
of bad trades and get flattened. You might question your sanity, you might
question God, but one thing is for certain: Your trading style is not working.
Most people buy stocks like they buy fruit. They look at it, perhaps sniff
it, and plunk down their money. We are not talking about $1.59 here. We are
talking about thousands of dollars for part ownership in a company.
If you have ever been a board member, you know what I am talking about.
You have a fiduciary responsibility to the people who elected or appointed you
to that position. Not only should you study the material handed to you by the
staff, but you have to get out in the field and kick the tires. Do not assume that
what the staff says is always correct or represents the best solution. Question
everything but learn in the process and try to be helpful without being a pest
(I always seem to fall into the pest category). As a shareholder—an owner of the
company—should it be any different?
Once, I considered buying a position in a company showing an upward
breakout from a symmetrical triangle. My computer program told me the com-
pany is a member of the machinery industry and further research revealed that
it makes refractory products. I continued doing research on the company until
the problem gnawing at me finally sank in. I did not have the slightest idea
what a refractory product was. Despite my search for an answer, I was not get-
ting the sort of warm fuzzies I usually get when researching a possible invest-
ment. So, I passed it over. I am trading it on paper, sure, but not in real life.
Call it the Peter Lynch Syndrome: Do not invest in anything you cannot
understand or explain in a paragraph. Good advice.
Of course, if you blindly invest in chart squiggles and it works for you,
who am I to tell you you are doing it wrong? The fact is, you are not. If you
consistently make money at it, then you have developed an investment style
that fits your personality. Good for you!
My investment style, as you might have guessed, combines fundamental
analysis, technical analysis, emotional analysis, and money management. Just
because I rely on technical analysis does not mean I do not look at the price-
to-earnings, price-to-sales, and other more esoteric ratios. Then there is the
6 Introduction
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 6

emotional element. After going for months without making a single trade, sud-
denly a profitable opportunity appears and I will take advantage of it. Three
days later, I will want to trade again. Why? Am I trading just because it feels
good to be finally back in the thick of things? Am I trading just because the sin-
gle woman living nearby does not know I exist, and I am acting out my frus-
trations or trying to impress her with the size of my wallet? That is where
paper trading comes in handy. I can experiment on new techniques without
getting burned. If I do the simulation accurately enough, my subconscious will
not know the difference, and I will learn a lot in the process.
Once I come to terms with any emotional issues, I look at money man-
agement. How much can I realistically expect to make, and how much can I
lose? What is the proper lot size to take? When should I add to my position?
How long will it take for the stock to reach my target and should I invest in a
less promising but quicker candidate?
Investing using chart formations is an exercise in probability. If you play
the numbers long enough, you will win out. Sure, some of your investments
will fail, and you must learn to cut your losses before they get out of hand. But
the winners should serve you well, providing you let them ride. Just do not
make the mistake of watching a stock double or triple only to reverse course
and drop back to where it started. Or worse.
Day Traders, Position Traders, Buy-and-Hold Investors
As I was writing this book, I kept asking myself what is the time horizon for chart
patterns? Are they best for day traders, position traders, or buy-and-hold
investors? The answer I kept coming up with is: Yes! Chart formations can be
profitable for day traders—those people who are in and out of a trade during a
single day. Many day traders have trading styles that depend on chart forma-
tions, support, and resistance. They concentrate on reliable formations that
quickly fulfill their measure rule predictions.
For position traders, those who hold the trade longer than a day but not
forever, chart patterns offer convenient entry and exit signals. I put myself in
this category. If the trade goes bad, I am out quickly. If it is profitable, I see no
need to cut my profits short. When the gains plateau, or if the stock has moved
about all it is going to, I consider moving on. Like the day trader, I try to keep
cash employed by buying formations that promise reliable returns and reach
the ultimate high quickly.
For the long-term investor, chart patterns also signal good entry and exit
points. I remember buying an oil services company knowing that the invest-
ment would not make a significant return for 2 or 3 years. (I was wrong: It dou-
bled in 3 weeks) I believe that in 3 years’ time, the stock will be in the 30s, a
sixfold increase from its low. It probably will not qualify as a ten-bagger, but it
is not small change either. In the short term, the road is going to be rocky, and
Day Traders, Position Traders, Buy-and-Hold Investors 7
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 7

I have added to my position as the stock has come down. Since I am in it for the
long term, I have an outstanding order to buy more shares. If this stock goes
nowhere, then my analysis of the market trend was wrong, and I will have
learned a valuable lesson.
The Sample Trade
Most of the sample trades included in the chapters of this book are fictitious.
Each sample trade uses techniques I wanted to illustrate, incorporating ficti-
tious people in sometimes unusual circumstances. Call it poetic license, but I
hope they give you some ideas on how to increase your profits or to minimize
your losses.
Statistics: “I Don’t Believe the Numbers”
A high, tight flag has an average rise of 69% in a bull market. Question: If you
trade this pattern often enough in a bull market, will you make an average of
69%? Answer: No. Why not? Well, you may be like a friend of mine who has
traded stocks a dozen times but made money only once (a few hundred bucks).
But here is another reason: The 69% average rise represents 253 perfect trades.
A perfect trade is one in which you buy at the breakout price and sell at the ulti-
mate high—the highest high before prices decline by at least 20%. Not only
are the trades perfect, but also commissions are not included. Your return may
be lower . . . or higher. However, I used the same spreadsheet formulas from
pattern to pattern, so you can compare performance in most cases (the excep-
tions: flags, measured moves, and pennants) without worrying about whether
you believe the numbers.
“If I reproduce your tests, will I get similar results?” Yes. A person in
India I know is pulling 30%, 40%, and more out of the market on a consistent
basis. He would claim my statistics are too conservative! A hedge fund manager
reports that my numbers for the dead-cat bounce are dead solid perfect.
Another says that while she was able to reproduce my dead-cat bounce num-
bers, she was having trouble reproducing others. If you do not follow the
methods I used, your results will vary. Guaranteed. So, this edition includes a
Glossary and Methodology chapter to explain how I measured each result.
The method I used opened a door to a new world. In this world, you will
find that a month after a breakout in a bear market, price often shows strength.
You will discover that when pullbacks occur, performance suffers. You will find
that failure rates start low but increase rapidly. Volume shapes, price gaps, pat-
tern size, and a dozen other performance clues help some patterns but not oth-
ers. Findings like these are what make this book unique. The numbers tell a
story of fact that I share with you within the following pages.
8 Introduction
4366_00.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 8

PART ONE
Chart Patterns
9
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 9

4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 10

11
1
Broadening Bottoms
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Price trend is downward leading to the formation.
Megaphone appearance with higher highs and
lower lows that widen over time. Breakout is
upward.
Reversal or continuation Short-term bullish reversal
Bull Market Bear Market
Performance rank 17 out of 23 12 out of 19
Break-even failure rate 10% 9%
Average rise 27% 21%
Change after trend ends –34% –35%
Volume trend Upward Upward
Throwbacks 41% 44%
Percentage meeting price
target 59% 53%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall patterns
perform better than short ones; narrow ones
perform better than wide ones. Patterns with
falling volume and a random shape outperform.
See also Broadening Tops
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 11

Downward Breakouts
Appearance Same, but breakout is downward.
Reversal or continuation Short-term bearish continuation
Average decline 15% 18%
Change after trend ends 52% 46%
Volume trend Upward Flat
Pullbacks 42% 56%
Percentage meeting price
target 44% 31%
Surprising findings Performs better when the breakout is near the
yearly low. Tall patterns perform better than short
ones. Patterns both tall and narrow outperform.
Patterns with a rising volume trend and random
shape do well.
See also Broadening Tops
Broadening bottoms (BBs) are middle-of-the-road performers, sporting a 9%
break-even failure rate except in bull markets when double digits prevail (a
poor showing). The average rise or decline is also below that posted by other
chart pattern types.
Surprises are many and a few appear in the snapshot. I discuss them in
more detail later.
Tour
You may be wondering what differentiates a broadening bottom from a broad-
ening top. A broadening bottom has a price trend leading down to the start of
the formation; a broadening top has prices trending up. This differentiation is
an arbitrary designation I made to separate the two formation types. I ignore
brief dips or rises a few days before the pattern as Figure 1.1 shows.
Some maintain that a broadening bottom does not exist. They simply
lump every broadening pattern into the broadening top category. I decided to
separate the two on the chance that their behavior differs.
Figure 1.1 is an example of a broadening bottom. This particular one is
called a five-point reversal because there are five alternating touches, two
12 Broadening Bottoms
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 12

minor lows and three minor highs. A five-point reversal is also rare: I located
only 5 in the 77 broadening bottoms I examined. The price trend begins mov-
ing down in late August and reaches a low 2 days before the formation begins.
Yes, prices do move up for several days, leading to the first touch of the top
trend line, but I still consider the overall price trend to be moving down to
the formation. Price overshooting or undershooting the formation start is
common.
This particular chart pattern shows a partial decline. Prices move down
from 26 to 24.50, then reverse course and shoot out the top. The stock reached
a high of 38.50 just over a year later.
Identification Guidelines
Table 1.1 lists the identification guidelines for broadening bottoms.
Price trend. As mentioned earlier, a declining price trend precedes a
broadening bottom. Even if prices rise just before the formation begins, ignore
it. It is still a bottom. This arbitrary designation also makes intuitive sense: A
bottom should appear at the end of a downtrend, not when prices are climbing
to the moon.
Identification Guidelines 13
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
Aug 94 Sep Oct Nov Jan 95 Mar
Dec Feb Apr May Jun
Partial Decline
Banc One Corp. (Bank, NYSE, ONE)
1
2
4
3
5
Figure 1.1 A broadening bottom formation, specifically a five-point reversal, so
called because of the two minor lows (the even numbers) and three minor highs
(the odd numbers).
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 13

Shape. The shape of the formation is distinct. It reminds me of chaos
theory where small disturbances oscillate back and forth, then grow un-
bounded, wreaking havoc. In the stock market, price reaches a new high then
crosses over and makes a new low, creating the broadening pattern. When you
draw a trend line across the minor highs and another connecting the minor
lows, the formation looks like a megaphone.
Trend lines. The two trend lines drawn across the minor highs and lows
are important. The top trend line should slope up; the bottom one should
slope down. The diverging trend lines distinguish the broadening bottom from
other types of formations, such as the right-angled broadening formation
(which has one horizontal trend line) or the broadening wedge (both trend
lines slope in the same direction). So it is important that each trend line has a
slope that is opposite the other.
Touches. A broadening bottom needs at least two minor highs and two
minor lows to be a valid formation. Anything fewer means you are incorrectly
identifying the formation. What is a minor high or low? A minor high is when
prices trend up, then drop back down, leaving a clearly defined peak. A minor
low is just the same thing flipped upside down: Prices move lower, then head
back up leaving a clearly defined valley. Figure 1.1 shows five minor highs or
lows, labeled by numbers. The odd numbers tag the minor highs and the even
numbers are the minor lows. Let me stress that the minor highs and lows need
not be alternating, as in Figure 1.1. Just as long as you can count at least two
peaks and two valleys—wherever they may appear—that is fine.
Volume. There is nothing magical in the volume trend. I performed lin-
ear regression from the start of each formation to the end point (not the break-
out point that is usually a month beyond the end of the formation) and found
that volume rises about 57% of the time.
Table 1.1
Identification Characteristics of Broadening Bottoms
Characteristic Discussion
Price trend The short-term price trend should be downward leading to the
formation.
Shape Megaphone shape with higher highs and lower lows.
Trend lines Prices follow two trend lines: The top one slopes up and the bottom
one slopes down.
Touches Should have at least two minor highs and two minor lows, but not
necessarily alternating touches.
Volume The overall trend is usually upward, sometimes with a U shape.
Breakout A breakout occurs when price closes above the formation’s high
(upward breakout) or below the pattern’s low (downward breakout).
See text for details. The breakout can occur in either direction and
prices may move horizontally for several months before staging a
definitive breakout.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 14

If you look closely at broadening bottoms, you will find that volume some-
times follows price. In Figure 1.1, the price decline between peak 1 and trough
2 shows a receding volume trend. When prices head up from point 2 to point 3,
so does volume. If you were to place a thin wooden plank between the volume
peaks in late November and late January, it would bow downward in a U shape.
A U-shaped volume pattern occurs slightly more often than other shapes.
Breakout. The breakout point is difficult to identify in a broadening for-
mation as it develops. I look for the place where price pierces the up or down
trend line or makes an extended move. If price pierces the trend line, then the
penetration point becomes the breakout point. If prices move up and follow
along the top trend line without piercing it, then I backtrack to the prior minor
high and draw a horizontal line forward in time until prices cross it. When that
happens, that is the breakout point.
Let me give you an example. Consider the broadening bottom shown in
Figure 1.2. The price trend over the preceding month leading to the formation
is downward. The two trend lines outline a widening price pattern as you
would expect from a broadening formation. There are more than two minor
highs and two minor lows pictured, meeting another criterion mentioned
in Table 1.1.
Where is the breakout? This formation is particularly easy. If you extend
the top trend line upward, you find that prices rise well above the line, signal-
ing an upward breakout. Then it is just a matter of backtracking to the highest
minor high and drawing a horizontal line to determine the actual breakout
price. Point A marks the highest high in the formation.
Standard Microsystems Corp. (Computers & Peripherals, NASDAQ, SMSC)
Aug
Jul 95 Sep Oct Nov Jan 96 Mar
Dec Feb Apr May
Breakout
Point
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
A
Figure 1.2 A breakout from the broadening bottom occurs when prices rise
above the highest high in the formation, shown as point A.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 15

Focus on Failures
Figure 1.3 shows a broadening bottom failure. Prices head down and appear to
suffer a small dead-cat bounce lasting from April to August. I do not recom-
mend taking a position in any stock that shows a dead-cat bounce regardless of
how attractive the formation looks. Obey this recommendation for 6 months
to a year while the stock recovers and management gets its house in order (or
solves the cause of whatever is ailing the stock).
In the 3 weeks before the formation appeared, prices were heading higher
in reaction to the dead-cat bounce. In June they moved horizontally from the
formation top for over a month before easing down. During this time, prices
rose above the high of the formation (see point A).
A breakout occurs when price closes beyond the formation high or low.
Point A is not an upward breakout because the close is at 33.88, well below the
formation high of 34.25. Two days later, price peaks above the high, but the
close is also below the formation high.
However, look what happens when prices begin sinking in mid-July.
They drop below the formation and close even lower. The price needs to drop
American Brands, Inc. (Tobacco, NYSE, AMB)
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Feb93 Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Breakout
Point
Possible Dead-Cat Bounce Begins
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
A
Figure 1.3 This broadening bottom forms as part of the recovery process from a
dead-cat bounce. When price closes below the formation low, a downward break-
out occurs. Point A shows where prices move above the high but do not close
higher. The formation is a failure because prices do not move down by more than
5% below the breakout point before reversing.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 16

below 30.38. At its lowest point, it closes at 29.88. That is just fifty cents below
the low, but it is enough to signal a downward breakout. Within a week of
moving below the formation low, prices shoot to 33 and continue up using a
slower trajectory.
Figure 1.3 represents what I call a 5% failure. Prices break out lower but
fail to continue moving in the breakout direction by more than 5% before
heading back up. The reverse is also true for upward 5% failures: Prices move
up by less than 5% before turning around and tumbling.
Statistics
Table 1.2 shows general statistics for the broadening bottom chart pattern.
Number of formations. I found 237 patterns in 500 stocks using data
from mid 1991 to 2004.
Reversal or continuation. You can see that more patterns act as rever-
sals than continuations. By definition, a bottom pattern has prices entering
from the top and exiting any way it darn well pleases.
In a bull market, reversals outperform continuations, but in a bear mar-
ket, the situation reverses: continuations outperform reversals.
Average rise or decline. Notice how upward breakout performance
improves in a bull market and downward breakout performance is better in a
bear market. Think of it as a rising tide that lifts all boats. This is an example
of how trading with the prevailing market trend will improve your results.
Statistics 17
Table 1.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Market, Market, Market, Market,
Up Up Down Down
Description Breakout Breakout Breakout Breakout
Number of formations 92 34 79 32
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 92 R 34 R 79 C 32 C
RC performance 23% R, 21% R, –11% Ra
, –9% Ra
,
13% Ca
16% Ca
–15% C –19% Ca
Average rise or decline 27% 21% –15% –18%
Rises or declines over 45% 18 or 20% 5 or 15% 1 or 1% 2 or 6%
Change after trend ends –34% –35% 51% 46%
Busted pattern performance 51%a
28%a
–26%a
–43%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 14% –3% 1% –11%
Days to ultimate high or low 112 65 40 24
Note: Minus sign means decline.
a
Fewer than 30 samples.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 17

Rises or declines over 45%. Outstanding performance is rare for BBs.
The best showing comes from upward breakouts in a bull market, with 20% of
the patterns climbing more than 45%. That may sound like a lot, but other
patterns do much better. Thus, do not expect a large move. Downward break-
outs almost never fare well in this category.
Change after trend ends. In a bull market, once prices reach the ulti-
mate low after a downward breakout, prices rise an average of 51%. Even in a
bear market, the climb measures 46%. Thus, if you can determine when the
downtrend ends, buy the stock and surf the rising tide.
Busted pattern performance. Few patterns bust, so the performance
numbers are not solid. Still, they show how much better a busted pattern does
than one that works. If you see prices move less than 5% after the breakout and
then return to the pattern, consider trading the new direction, but only if it
breaks out the other side.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Compare the change in the index with
the average rise or decline. Large moves in the index associate with large moves
in the stock. For best performance, trade with the market trend (bull markets,
upward breakouts and bear markets, downward breakouts).
Days to ultimate high or low. It takes between a month to 4 months to
reach the ultimate high or low. The numbers say that the move in a bear mar-
ket takes less time than in a bull market. Thus, the decline after a BB in a bear
market must be at a steeper slope than is the rise in a bull market.
Table 1.3 shows failure rates for BBs. The 5% break-even failure rate is
lowest in a bear market (9%). The failure rates climb quickly as the maximum
price rise or decline changes. For the 10% failure rate benchmark, BBs fail
between two and three times more often than at the 5% rate. Over half the pat-
Table 1.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Bull Bear Bull Bear
Price Rise Market, Market, Market, Market,
or Decline Up Up Down Down
(%) Breakout Breakout Breakout Breakout
5 (breakeven) 9 or 10% 3 or 9% 13 or 16% 3 or 9%
10 23 or 25% 10 or 29% 27 or 34% 8 or 25%
15 33 or 36% 14 or 41% 46 or 58% 18 or 56%
20 43 or 47% 19 or 56% 52 or 66% 19 or 59%
25 54 or 59% 20 or 59% 63 or 80% 24 or 75%
30 63 or 68% 24 or 71% 70 or 89% 26 or 81%
35 70 or 76% 26 or 76% 73 or 92% 27 or 84%
50 74 or 80% 32 or 94% 78 or 99% 30 or 94%
75 84 or 91% 33 or 97% 79 or 100% 32 or 100%
Over 75 92 or 100% 34 or 100% 79 or 100% 32 or 100%
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 18

19
Table
1.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
30
days
23
days
39
days
23
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L20%,
C44%,
H36%
L41%,
C38%,
H21%
L71%,
C27%,
H1%
L78%,
C19%,
H3%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L28%
a
,
C24%,
H30%
L19%
a
,
C26%
a
,
H15%
a
L17%,
C12%
a
,
H8%
a
L20%
a
,
C13%
a
,
H21%
a
Throwbacks/pullbacks
41%
44%
42%
56%
Average
time
to
throwback/
pullback
ends
13
days
10
days
12
days
11
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
25%
15%
a
–12%
–19%
a
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
28%
25%
a
–17%
–18%
a
Performance
with
breakout
gap
23%
a
30%
a
–15%
a
–22%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
28%
20%
–15%
–18%
a
Average
gap
size
$0.74
$0.34
$2.17
$0.92
Partial
rise,
downward
breakout
N/A
N/A
28/42
or
67%
11/17
or
65%
Partial
decline,
upward
breakout
43/54
or
80%
11/17
or
65%
N/A
N/A
Partial
rise
performance
N/A
N/A
–10%
–22%
Partial
decline
performance
29%
20%
a
N/A
N/A
Intraformation
partial
rise
failure
4/92
or
4%
2/34
or
6%
8/79
or
10%
4/32
or
13%
Intraformation
partial
decline
failure
6/92
or
7%
1/34
or
3%
5/79
or
6%
2/32
or
6%
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
N/A
means
not
applicable.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 19

terns with downward breakouts fail to drop more than 15%. For upward
breakouts, patterns cross the halfway mark between rises of 15% and 25%.
These results suggest that you should not depend on a large rise or large
decline after a BB. Scanning down each row, we also see that BBs in bull markets
with upward breakouts have the lowest failure rates. Those are the ones to buy.
Another way to use Table 1.3 is to assess how likely it is that your trade
will fail. If you have a cost of trading of 5% and you want to make 20%, how
many patterns in a bull market with upward breakouts will fail to rise at least
25% (5 + 20)? Answer: 59%. Just 41% of the patterns will meet your profit
margins. Since the majority will fail, your winners must do quite well to com-
pensate for the losses.
Table 1.4 shows statistics related to BB performance after the breakout.
Formation end to breakout. There is a delay between price touching
the trend line the final time and closing above it. This delay averages between
3 weeks and 5 weeks. It takes longer to break out in a bull market than a bear
market because the decline in a bear market is often steeper.
Yearly position. Most of the breakouts occur near the yearly low. This
makes sense for downward breakouts, especially those in bear markets. The
only exception is in bull markets. They show 44% of the breakouts occurring
in the middle of the yearly price range.
Yearly position, performance. In most entries, the sample counts are
few, making the results unreliable. Those BBs with breakouts following the
market trend (bull market, up breakout and bear market, down breakout) do
best when the breakout is near the yearly high.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. The throwback/pullback rate hovers
around 43% except for BBs in a bear market with a downward breakout. They
pullback 56% of the time. Still, the rates are too low to use in forming a reli-
able trading strategy.
The average time for the stock to return to the breakout price is less than
2 weeks. In most cases, when a throwback or pullback occurs, performance suf-
fers. Look for overhead resistance to an upward move or underlying support to
a downward breakout before investing. If the congestion zone is nearby (less
than 5% away), prices will likely push through, but overhead resistance will
retard momentum and performance will suffer.
Gaps. Gaps help performance in a bear market, but the result may change
with additional samples. In a bull market, breakout day gaps either hurt per-
formance or have no influence.
Partial rises and declines. The next four lines of Table 1.4 concern how
often a partial rise or decline occurs and if they do occur, how the pattern per-
forms. A partial decline correctly predicts an upward breakout 80% of the time
in a bull market. The other variations are less successful, being right about
two-thirds of the time. Figure 1.1 shows a good example of a partial decline
and Figure 1.4 shows a partial rise. See the Glossary and Methodology chap-
ter for more information.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 20

Performance improves when the breakout duration agrees with the gen-
eral market (upward breakouts, bull market or downward breakouts, bear mar-
ket) and a partial rise or decline occurs. For countertrend trades, performance
suffers after a partial rise or decline.
Intraformation partial rises and declines. Intraformation partial rises
and declines appear as small loops hanging from the trend lines. They are par-
tial rises or declines that failed to breakout: Prices made another crossing of the
broadening pattern. Intraformation partial rises or declines occur 13% or less
of the time.
Table 1.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate high or
low. Using numbers, it tells how soon your chart pattern will likely top or bot-
tom out. For example, in a bear market with a downward breakout, over half
(53%, or 25 + 28) bottom out within 2 weeks. At the other end of the table,
almost half the patterns (45%) in a bull market take longer than 2 months (over
70 days) to reach the ultimate high.
Notice the slight blip in the numbers around days 35 and 42. Bear mar-
kets with upward breakouts and bull markets with downward breakouts show
more trend changes during that period. Thus, 5 to 6 weeks after the breakout,
look for a trend change.
Table 1.6 shows size-related statistics. The results suffer from low sample
counts, so keep that in mind.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. Before you trade a
BB, compute its height and divide the difference by the breakout price. If the
result is above the median listed in the table, you have a tall pattern. It may not
outperform, but it places the probability on your side.
Width. Wide patterns usually perform better than narrow ones. I used
the median length as the separator between narrow and wide.
Statistics 21
Table 1.5
Frequency Distribution of Days to Ultimate High or Low
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 29% 6% 12% 6% 9% 3% 3% 9% 6% 0% 18%
Bull market,
up breakout 14% 13% 5% 3% 2% 5% 3% 1% 3% 4% 45%
Bear market,
down
breakout 25% 28% 19% 6% 3% 0% 3% 3% 0% 0% 13%
Bull market,
down
breakout 24% 15% 9% 4% 5% 10% 5% 8% 1% 1% 18%
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 21

Average formation length. The average width is between 1 and 2
months long.
Height and width combinations. Tall and narrow patterns outperform
the other combinations. You will want to avoid short and wide patterns. They
perform worst.
Table 1.7 shows volume-related statistics for broadening bottoms. The
sample counts are few in this table, so the conclusions you reach may change
with a larger sample size.
Volume trend. Up breakouts do better when the volume trend is falling,
and downward breakouts do better with a rising volume trend.
Volume shapes. In all cases, a random volume shape—neither U- nor
dome-shaped—performed better than the other shapes. A random shape
includes flat, rising (trending up), and falling (trending down) volume trends.
Breakout volume. Patterns in bear markets perform better after a heavy
volume breakout. The other two columns either show no difference or show
light volume breakouts outperforming.
Table 1.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Description Breakout Breakouta
Breakout Breakouta
Tall pattern performance 27% 28% –17% –24%
Short pattern performance 26% 16% –13% –12%
Median height as a percentage 15.13% 18.06% 17.50% 20.06%
of breakout price
Narrow pattern performance 31% 22% –15% –19%
Wide pattern performance 22% 19% –15% –18%
Median length 45 days 31 days 49 days 35 days
Average formation length 55 days 35 days 55 days 52 days
Short and narrow performance 30% 16% –14% –13%
Short and wide performance 19%a
15% –11%a
–9%
Tall and wide performance 24% 24% –16%a
–23%
Tall and narrow performance 36%a
30% –19%a
–24%
a
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 22

Trading Tactics
Table 1.8 shows trading tactics for broadening bottoms.
Measure rule. The first tactic is to determine how much money you are
likely to make in a trade. The measure rule helps with the prediction. Subtract
the highest high from the lowest low in the formation to give you the forma-
tion height. Then add the value to the highest high to get the target price for
upward breakouts and subtract the height from the lowest low for downward
breakouts.
In a bull market, this method correctly predicts an upward breakout tar-
get 59% of the time. The worst showing is from BBs in a bear market with a
downward breakout. The prediction is correct just 31% of the time. I consider
values above 80% to be reliable, so this prediction method is dismal.
Figure 1.4 makes the computation clear. Point A shows the highest high
in the chart pattern at 14.13. The lowest low is point B at 12. The formation
height is the difference between the two or 2.13. Add the value to the high to
arrive at the upward price target. This turns out to be 16.26. I compute the
Trading Tactics 23
Table 1.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakouta
Rising volume trend
performance 25% 16% –17% –19%
Falling volume trend
performance 29% 27% –12% –18%
U-shaped volume pattern
performance 29% 18% –15% –18%
Dome-shaped volume pattern
performance 21% 22% –14%a
–18%
Neither U-shaped nor dome-
shaped volume pattern
–20%
Heavy breakout volume
performance 26% 25% –15% –19%
Light breakout volume
performance 28%a
12% –15%a
–15%
a
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 23

Table 1.8
Trading Tactics
Trading Tactic Explanation
Measure rule Compute the difference between the highest high and the
lowest low in the formation. Add or subtract this value from the
most recent minor high or low, respectively. The result is the
target price for upward and downward breakouts.
Go long at the low Once recognizing a broadening formation, buy after the stock
makes its turn at the lower trend line.
Long stop Place a stop-loss order 0.15 below the minor low to protect
against a trend reversal.
Go short at the high Sell short after prices start heading down from the top trend
line.
Short stop Place a stop 0.15 above the minor high to protect against an
adverse breakout. Cover the short when price turns at the
bottom trend line and starts moving up. For a downward
breakout, cover as it nears the target price or any support level.
Move stops Raise or lower the stop to the next closest minor low or high
once prices make a new high (for long trades) or low (for short
sales).
Other If a broadening bottom shows a partial decline or rise, trade
accordingly (on a partial decline, go long; on a partial rise,
short the stock).
Acuson Corp (Medical Supplies, NYSE, ACN)
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
Support
Level
Partial Rise
Then Downward
Breakout
Stock Shorted
Short Covered
Downward
Price
Target
2
C
A
1
3
B
Figure 1.4 A broadening bottom with five alternating touches. Expect a down-
ward breakout because a partial rise appears.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 24

downward target by subtracting the height from the lowest low (that is, 12 –
2.13 or 9.87). You can see in Figure 1.4 that the price never quite reaches the
downward price target.
Go long at the low. Once you have uncovered a broadening bottom,
with two minor highs and two minor lows, you can think about trading it.
When the price bounces off the lower trend line, buy the stock. Sell when
prices turn down. The downturn may occur as a partial rise partway across the
formation, or prices may cross completely to the other side, touch the top
trend line, and head down. Remember, the formation may stage an upward
breakout, so do not sell too soon and cut your profits short.
Long stop. In a rising price trend, place a stop-loss order 0.15 below the
minor low. Should the stock reverse and head down, you will be taken out with
a small loss. As the stock rises to the opposite side of the formation, move your
stop upward to 0.15 below the prior minor low. The minor low may act as a
resistance point, so you will be giving the stock every opportunity to bounce off
the resistance level before being cashed out.
Go short at the high. The trading tactic for downward breakouts is the
same. When prices touch the top trend line and begin moving down, short
the stock.
Short stop. Place a stop-loss order 0.15 above the highest high in the for-
mation, then pray that prices decline.
Move stop. If luck is on your side and the stock heads down, move your
stop lower. Use the prior minor high—place the stop 0.15 above it.
Other. If the stock makes a partial rise or decline, consider acting on it.
This is a reliable breakout signal. Take advantage of it but make sure you place
a stop-loss order in case the trade goes bad.
Once prices break out and leave the broadening pattern, consider selling
if the price nears the target. There is no guarantee that the price will hit or
exceed the target, so be ready to complete the trade, especially if there is a
resistance level between the current price and the target. The stock may reach
the resistance point and turn around.
Sample Trade
Susan likes to think of herself as the brains in the family. While her husband is
suffering in foul weather as a carpenter, she is hammering away at her keyboard,
a slave to her computer masters. She is an active position trader who is not
afraid to short a stock, given good profit potential and an especially weak fun-
damental or technical situation. It is a stressful life, but making money often is.
When she spotted the broadening bottom shown in Figure 1.4, she began
her analysis. The stock reached a high of 37.38 in early November 1991
and has been heading down ever since. Now, with the stock trading at 14, she
Sample Trade 25
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 25

wondered how much downside remained. She drew the two trend-line bound-
aries and counted the number of alternating touches (in Figure 1.4, three are
labeled as numbers and Point A is the fourth alternating touch).
Since most broadening formations tend to break out after four alternat-
ing touches and since the price was near the top of the formation heading
down, she guessed that the stock would break out downward on the next cross-
ing. So she sold the stock short and received a fill at 13.88. It was a gamble,
sure, but one she was comfortable making. In any case, she immediately placed
a stop at 14.25, or slightly above the high at point A.
Susan was overjoyed to see the stock plummet 2 days later and race across
to the other side of the formation, touching the bottom trend line at point B.
Usually, her trades are not that easy. She decided to protect her profit and low-
ered the stop to the nearest minor high, shown as point C, at 13.75 or 0.15
above the high. Then she waited.
The stock bounced off the lower trend line instead of busting through as
she hoped. She decided to be patient and see what the stock did next. With her
stop-loss order in place at the break-even price, she felt protected and com-
fortable in letting the trade ride.
The stock bounced off the 12 support level and did a partial rise before
meeting resistance and heading back down. Two days after cresting, she made
the determination that on the next touch, the stock would pierce the lower
trend line and continue down. She doubled her stake by selling more stock
short at 12.75. She was wrong. The stock continued down 1 more day before
moving up again. Susan adjusted her stop-loss order to include the additional
shares, but kept it at the same price level (13.75). Again she waited. The stock
slowly climbed and reached a minor high of 13.13 before heading down again.
This time the decline was strong enough to punch through the support zone
at the lower trend line.
When the stock descended below point B, Susan lowered her stop-loss
order to 0.15 above that point or 12.15. Then she looked at the measure rule
for the price target. She calculated a target of 9.88 and wondered if the stock
would really reach that price. To be safe, she decided to cash out if the stock
reached 10.15, or 0.15 above the common support price of 10 (a whole num-
ber typically shows support).
When the stock plunged to 10.38 on high volume, she wondered if she
was looking at a one-day reversal chart pattern. With those formations, it is
difficult to be sure if prices would reverse or not. She decided to hold on to her
original target.
Two days later, prices zoomed upward and her stop closed out the trade
at 12.15. She did not make much money (about 9% with a hold time of just
over a month), but she gained experience and a few pennies to put in the bank.
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 26

For Best Performance
The following list includes tips and observations to help you select better per-
forming broadening bottoms. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Use the identification guidelines to correctly select a broadening bot-
tom—Table 1.1.
• Trade with the market trend. Select BBs that occur in a bull market
with an upward breakout or in a bear market with a downward break-
out—Table 1.2.
• If you see a busted pattern, trade it—Table 1.2.
• BBs in bull markets with upward breakouts have the lowest failure
rates. Avoid trading downward breakouts in a bull market—Table 1.3.
• Performance usually suffers after a throwback or pullback. Search for
overhead resistance (upward breakouts) or underlying support (down-
ward breakouts) before trading—Table 1.4.
• Use partial rises or declines to enter a trade sooner with little increase
in risk—Table 1.4.
• BBs in a bear market bottom quicker than BBs in a bull market, so
short BBs in a bear market for the quickest turnover (but the payoff will
be lower, on average)—Table 1.5.
• Watch for the price trend to change 5 to 6 weeks after the breakout—
Table 1.5.
• Select tall or narrow patterns—Table 1.6.
• BBs both tall and narrow outperform the other combinations. Avoid
short and wide ones—Table 1.6.
• Select BBs with a falling volume trend for upward breakouts. A rising
volume trend works better for downward breakouts—Table 1.7.
• Pick patterns with a random volume shape (flat, rising or falling)—
Table 1.7.
For Best Performance 27
4366_01.qxd 2/23/05 11:28 AM Page 27

28
2
Broadening Formations,
Right-Angled and
Ascending
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Horizontal bottom with higher highs
following an up-sloping trend line. Breakout
is upward.
Reversal or continuation Short-term bearish reversal
Throwbacks 47% 43%
Percentage meeting price target 68% 43%
Surprising findings Throwbacks and breakout day gaps hurt
performance. Tall patterns perform better
than short ones. Patterns both tall and wide
outperform. Heavy breakout volume helps
performance.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 28

Downward Breakouts
Pullbacks 65% 52%
Surprising findings A pullback hurts performance. Tall patterns
perform better than short ones.
Before I began studying this formation, I assumed prices would climb away
from it, simply because the word ascending is in the title. However, that is not
how the formation performs. It is bearish. The word ascending refers to the
minor highs that rise over time. The base of this formation is flat but the tops
generally follow an up-sloping trend line.
Surprises for this pattern include throwbacks and pullbacks that hurt per-
formance when they occur. They interrupt price momentum. Tall patterns
perform better than short ones, and for upward breakouts, patterns both tall
and wide perform better than other combinations.
Tour
Figure 2.1 puts the formation in perspective. There are two formations shown
in the chart. The first one is somewhat ill-formed but better performing than
the second. Both formations have a base outlined by a horizontal trend line con-
necting the minor lows. The up-sloping trend line skirts the tops of the minor
highs. The result is a triangle-appearing formation with prices that broaden out,
but do not let the ascending price pattern fool you. This formation is bearish:
Prices plummet through the base of the formation most of the time.
Why do right-angled ascending broadening formations form? Consider
Figure 2.2. The rise began in mid-December 1991 on volume that was higher
than anything seen in almost 2 months. By late February, the stock had reached
a new high and was rounding over after meeting selling resistance at 14. The
stock returned to 12.25 where it found support. At that point, it paused for
Tour 29
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 29

30 Broadening Formations, Right-Angled and Ascending
Edwards, A. G. Inc. (Securities Brokerage, NYSE, AGE)
Dec
May
Apr 92 Aug Sep Oct Nov
Jun Jul
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
Figure 2.1 Two right-angled ascending broadening formations bounded by a
horizontal base and up-sloping trend line. Prices decline after a downward breakout.
Baker J. Inc (Shoe, NASDAQ, JBAK)
Jan 92 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
Partial Rise
Pullback
Figure 2.2 A pullback to the base of the formation. Pullbacks occur often in
ascending broadening formations.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 30

about 2 weeks and established the base on which a horizontal trend line
appears.
The reason for the horizontal trend line is one of perceived value. As the
stock approached the $12 level, more investors and institutional holders pur-
chased the stock. The desire to own the stock at what they believed a good
value outweighed the reluctance of sellers to part with their shares. The
demand halted the decline in the stock and eventually sent prices skyward
again. This happened in mid-April as volume spiked along with the price. The
enthusiasm caused the stock to reach a new high. Momentum was high enough
so that the next day, prices rose even further before closing lower. With the
second peak, a tentative trend line drawn along the tops of the formation
sloped upward and gave character to the broadening formation.
The stock moved rapidly back down even as volume increased. This
decline stopped before it reached the lower trend line, signaling continued
enthusiasm. Prices pushed higher and reached a new high, this one at 15.50 on
May 6. The up-sloping trend line resistance area repelled any further advance.
The stock simply did not have enough upward momentum to push through the
selling pressure at the new level.
The next day volume dried up, but there was enough momentum remain-
ing for another try at the summit. When the attempt failed, the smart money
headed back for base camp and volume receded even further. As prices col-
lapsed, other investors joined in the retreat and volume moved up. In less than
2 weeks, prices were back at the lower trend line.
Another feeble attempt at a new high floundered on unremarkable vol-
ume. The stock moved horizontally and stalled out—a partial rise that often
spells trouble for a stock. On June 4, prices dropped on high volume and
returned to the horizontal trend line. The stock paused there for just over a
week before moving down and punching through the support level at 12.25.
A pullback in a bull market is quite common for ascending broadening
formations, so it is no surprise that after a rapid 13% retreat, the stock turned
around and pulled back to the base of the formation. Although not shown in
Figure 2.2, the stock continued moving up until it began forming another
ascending broadening formation in late October with a base at 16.50.
The ascending broadening formation represents the desire of investors
and traders to own the stock at a fixed price, in this case about 12.25. Their
buying enthusiasm pushes prices higher until mounting selling pressure causes
a halt to the rise and sends the stock tumbling. With each attempt, fewer peo-
ple are left willing to sell their shares until they receive an even higher price,
so a broadening range of prices appears at the top. Eventually, the buying
enthusiasm at the base of the formation collapses and removes the support for
the stock. When that happens, the stock punches through the support level and
declines. It continues moving down until reaching a point where other
investors perceive significant value and buy the stock.
Tour 31
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 31

What are the characteristics of an ascending broadening formation? To answer
the question, peruse the selection guidelines outlined in Table 2.1. While con-
sidering the table, look at Figure 2.3, an ascending broadening formation on a
weekly scale.
Shape. The overall shape of the formation looks like a megaphone with
one side horizontal.
Horizontal bottom support line. The bottom of the formation follows
a horizontal trend line, while an up-sloping trend line bounds the top side.
Up-sloping top trend line. The top trend line touches at least two
minor highs. The horizontal trend line also shows two minor low touches as
prices descend to the trend line. The various touch points help define the
boundary of the formation.
Volume. The volume trend is usually upward and U shaped, especially in
the last third of the pattern. In Figure 2.3, you can see the U shape from Feb-
ruary 1992 to the September 1992 peak, and then rounding down again before
heading up to the peak in March 1993.
Premature breakouts. I define premature breakouts to be prices that
close outside the formation boundary but return before the formation ends.
Table 2.1
Identification Characteristics
Shape Looks like a megaphone with the base of the
formation horizontal and bounded on the top by
an up-sloping trend line.
Horizontal bottom support line A horizontal, or nearly so, trend line that connects
the minor lows. Must have at least two distinct
minor lows before drawing a trend line.
Up-sloping top trend line An up-sloping trend line bounds the expanding
price series on top. Must have at least two minor
highs to create a trend line.
Volume Upward trend with a slight tendency to be U-
shaped.
Premature breakouts Very rare. A close below the horizontal trend line
is most likely a genuine breakout.
Price action before breakout Prices sometimes move horizontally for many
months before moving outside the formation high
or low.
Downward breakout Prices drop below the horizontal trend line usually
accompanied by a surge in volume.
Support and resistance Follows the two trend lines into the future.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 32

Premature breakouts for this formation are rare enough that they should not
be of concern.
Price action before breakout. In some ascending broadening forma-
tions, prices make higher highs and form a solid, horizontal base at the start but
then move sideways for many months. Eventually, prices rise above the for-
mation top or slide through the bottom trend line and stage a breakout.
Downward breakout. Once a breakout occurs, a pullback sometimes
happens. Prices may continue moving up but they usually bounce off the lower
trend line and continue back down. A pullback gives investors another oppor-
tunity to short the stock or add to their short position. Before shorting, how-
ever, make sure the pullback is complete and prices are declining once again.
Support and resistance. I chose Figure 2.3 because it shows the two
common areas of support and resistance. These areas follow the trend lines.
Along the base of the formation projected into the future, the support area
repels the decline over 2 years after the formation ends. The rising trend line
tells a similar tale; it repels prices three times nearly a year later. The implica-
tions of this observation can be profound. If you own a stock and it is breaking
out to new highs, it would be nice to predict how high prices will rise. One way
to do that is to search for formations such as this one. Many times, extending
the trend lines into the future will predict areas of support and resistance.
Although the trend line did not predict the absolute high, it did suggest
when prices would stall. The resistance area turned out to be a good opportu-
nity to sell the stock.
Parker Drilling Co. (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NYSE, PKD)
Minor Highs
Minor Lows
Support
Trend Line
Resistance
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
– 3
92 F M M
A A S
J J O ND 93 F M M
A A S
J J O N D 94F M M
A A S
J F M M
A J
J ON D95
Figure 2.3 Support and resistance areas on a weekly time scale. They appear
along the trend-line axis and can extend far into the future, as in this case.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 33

Focus on Failures
What can we learn from a review of the failures of this formation? Figure 2.4
shows two broadening formations; the one on the left fails to descend but the
one on the right makes up for it. The figure makes one lesson clear: Always
wait for a confirmed breakout before taking a position in a stock; that is, wait
for prices to fall below the lower trend line before selling your long position or
selling short. Even though most ascending broadening formations break out
downward, the failure rate is too high to hazard an investment before knowing
the outcome. Had you sold the stock short during the first formation, your
position would not have made money for almost half a year. Look back at Fig-
ure 2.3. A short position in the stock at the lower trend line would have lost
money for years.
Selling a stock prematurely is just as bad. If you held a long position in
the stock shown in Figure 2.4 but sold it during June, you would have regret-
ted your trade until December when the footwear company slipped. Had you
waited for a downward breakout, you would have remained in the stock as it
ascended. Once the second broadening formation took shape, a sale after
prices pierced the horizontal trend line would have gotten you out at a bet-
ter price.
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 95 Feb
May 94 Jul
Jun
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
Failure
to Descend
Barry (R.G.) (Shoe, NYSE, RGB)
Figure 2.4 Two broadening formations. The formation on the left fails to descend
below the lower trend line. You should wait for the breakout before investing in
ascending broadening formations.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 34

Statistics
Table 2.2 shows general statistics for this formation.
Number of formations. I found 380 patterns using data from mid-1991
to 2003 in 500 stocks, separated into breakout directions and market condi-
tions.
Reversal or continuation. Usually, the pattern acts as a reversal of the
prevailing price trend due to the overwhelming number of samples in a bull
market with a downward breakout. Patterns acting as continuations perform
better than do those acting as reversals.
Average rise or decline. As a bull market, upward breakout play, this
pattern performs poorly. Prices rise 29% after the breakout. In a bear market,
the rise is even less, 15%, as you would expect from a countertrend breakout.
Downward breakouts perform worse than the average decline posted by all
other chart pattern types.
Rises or declines over 45%. Just over a quarter (26%) of the patterns
with upward breakouts in a bull market climb over 45%. The remainder of the
combinations of market type and breakout direction show few large gains. This
finding is expected for downward breakouts, and the low sample size explains
the poor showing for upward breakouts in a bear market.
Statistics 35
Table 2.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), 20 R, 10 R, 136 R, 39 R,
continuation (C) 72 C 27 C 50 C 26 C
R/C performance 29% R, 11% R, –14% R, –23% R,
29% C 17% C –20% C –22% C
Rises or declines
over 45% 24 or 26% 0 or 0% 6 or 3% 4 or 6%
Busted pattern
performance 41%a
35%a
–25%a
–40%a
Standard & Poor’s 500
change 14% –4% 1% –13%
Days to ultimate high
or low 131 39 47 42
a
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 35

Change after trend ends. When prices reach the ultimate high or low,
what happens next? After an upward breakout, prices tumble between 31% and
38%. For downward breakouts, prices rise between 47% and 53%. Thus, you
can make a pile of money if you correctly call the bottom and invest for the
long term.
Busted pattern performance. Few busted patterns occur, so the num-
bers are unreliable. Still, they indicate the type of move prices make after trav-
eling less than 5% after the breakout. With downward breakouts, busted
patterns should be easy to spot as they drop below the horizontal trend line and
then shoot upward.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. In a bull market, the index moved up
and in a bear market, it closed lower. The numbers emphasize the importance
of trading with the trend. Compare the move in the index with the average rise
or decline. Breakouts in the direction of the general market trend perform
better than countertrend trades.
Days to ultimate high or low. How long will your trade last? It lasts as
long as you do not close out your position. Measuring the time from the break-
out to the ultimate high or low shows that declines in a bear market are steeper
than rises in a bull market. I am not a big fan of shorting, but to keep your cap-
ital fully employed (maximizing the number of trades per year), short this pat-
tern in a bear market. Your exposure to the market will be shorter, on average,
and your returns may be almost as good as going long in a bull market.
Table 2.3 lists failure rates for the broadening pattern. With the excep-
tion of a downward breakout in a bull market, the break-even failure rates are
Table 2.3
Failure Rates
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Maximum Price Market, Market, Market, Market,
Rise or Decline Up Up Down Down
10 21 or 23% 9 or 24% 85 or 46% 14 or 22%
15 30 or 33% 15 or 41% 117 or 63% 20 or 31%
20 40 or 43% 25 or 68% 145 or 78% 30 or 46%
25 47 or 51% 32 or 86% 158 or 85% 39 or 60%
30 53 or 58% 36 or 97% 168 or 90% 45 or 69%
35 60 or 65% 36 or 97% 176 or 95% 50 or 77%
50 71 or 77% 37 or 100% 183 or 98% 62 or 95%
75 83 or 90% 37 or 100% 186 or 100% 65 or 100%
Over 75 92 or 100% 37 or 100% 186 or 100% 65 or 100%
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 36

37
Table
2.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
31
days
23
days
13
days
21
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L7%,
C8%,
H86%
L14%,
C30%,
H57%
L31%,
C40%,
H28%
L29%,
C58%,
H12%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L18%
a
,
C18%
a
,
H31%
L16%
a
,
C18%
a
,
H13%
a
L21%,
C15%,
H10%
L23%
a
,
C22%,
H20%
a
47%
43%
65%
52%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
10
days
10
days
11
days
10
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
23%
14%
a
–15%
–20%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
35%
16%
a
–16%
–25%
Performance
with
breakout
gap
28%
a
10%
a
–25%
a
–22%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
29%
a
16%
–13%
–22%
Average
gap
size
$0.77
$0.41
$0.45
$1.48
Partial
rise,
downward
breakout
N/A
N/A
107/144
or
74%
38/48
or
79%
Partial
decline,
upward
breakout
22/27
or
81%
18/22
or
82%
N/A
N/A
Partial
rise
performance
N/A
N/A
–12%
–21%
Partial
decline
performance
27%
a
13%
a
N/A
N/A
Intraformation
partial
rise
failure
4/92
or
4%
3/37
or
8%
8/186
or
4%
7/65
or
11%
Intraformation
partial
decline
failure
7/92
or
8%
3/37
or
8%
28/186
or
15%
4/65
or
6%
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
N/A
means
not
applicable.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 37

reasonable. However, the excluded column has the most samples, so its failure
rate is probably solid.
Notice that the failures double or nearly triple for moves of just 10%. For
example, 8% of the broadening patterns with downward breakouts in a bear
market fail to drop more than 5%. This almost triples to 22% failing to drop
more than 10%. Over half (60%) fail to drop more than 25% after the breakout.
Comparing the columns, we see that the bull market, up breakout column
shows the lowest failure rates. This makes sense because it is also the best per-
former (it has the highest average rise, as per Table 2.2).
Table 2.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics.
Formation end to breakout. It takes between 2 and 4 weeks for prices
to close outside the trend-line boundary. This observation suggests that prices
often bounce off the trend line, curl around, and then take their time making
their way back to pierce the boundary.
Yearly position. Most of the breakouts occur near the yearly high for
upward breakouts, and in the middle of the yearly price range for downward
breakouts.
Yearly position, performance. Mapping the performance over the
yearly price ranges, we find that upward breakouts occurring near the yearly
high in a bull market perform well. Downward breakouts do well when the
breakout is near the yearly low.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. Throwbacks and pullbacks occur about half
the time, and it takes the stock about 10 days to return to the breakout price.
When they occur, performance suffers, as Table 2.4 shows.
Gaps. For patterns with upward breakouts, gaps hurt performance, but
the low sample count may be the reason. For downward breakouts, gaps either
help performance or cause no pain. Notice the large gap size in a bear market
after a downward breakout.
Partial rises and declines. A partial rise or decline is an accurate gauge
of an impending breakout. Consult the Glossary on how to recognize them.
Using a partial rise or decline, you can get into the stock at a better price than
if you wait for the breakout.
Does a partial rise or decline interfere with momentum? Yes. If you com-
pare the average rise or decline from Table 2.2 with the partial rise or decline
performance in Table 2.4, you will find that performance suffers after a partial
rise or decline. However, using the feature to enter a trade earlier than the
breakout will tend to help performance.
Intraformation partial rises and declines. How often does a partial rise
or decline fail to predict an immediate breakout? Answer: between 4% and
15% of the time, depending on the market conditions and breakout directions.
low. We have seen that the decline in a bear market is usually swift. Almost half
of downward breakouts reach the ultimate low in less than 2 weeks. Upward
breakouts take more time to reach the ultimate high, sometimes much longer.
In a bull market, 48% are still searching for the top after 70 days.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 38

What does all this mean? In a bull market and with a pattern having an
upward breakout, be patient. For other combinations of market conditions and
breakout directions, watch your stock closely for fatigue. Use the measure rule
to estimate a target price and consider selling if prices near the target. Remem-
ber, you never go broke taking a profit (just be sure to keep those losses in
check).
Also, watch for weakness a month after the breakout. During that time,
prices tend to reverse. Table 2.5 shows this movement during days 42 (bull
market, up breakout) and 42 to 49 (bull market, down breakout).
Table 2.6 shows size-related statistics.
Height. In all cases, broadening patterns that are taller than the median
height performed better than did their shorter counterparts.
Width. Wide patterns performed better than narrow ones for breakouts
that agree with the prevailing market trend (upward breakout, bull market or
downward breakout, bear market). Countertrend trades show either no differ-
ence or narrow patterns that perform slightly better. I used the median length
as the divider between narrow and wide.
Average formation length. The average pattern length from the first
minor high/low trend-line touch to the last averages between 2 and 2.5 months.
Height and width combinations. Tall and wide patterns outperform all
other combinations. Avoid short and wide ones for the best performance.
Table 2.7 shows volume-related statistics.
Volume trend. Some analysts suggest that low volume before the break-
out implies a powerful situation. In a bull market, that appears to be the case
with this chart pattern. Bear markets show the reverse, with patterns having a
rising volume trend performing better than do those with a falling trend.
Volume shapes. Most of the broadening patterns do well when a dome-
shaped volume pattern appears. The one exception is a bull market with a
downward breakout; they perform better with U-shaped volume.
Breakout volume. Heavy breakout volume helped the pattern perform
in all cases except downward breakouts in a bear market. There, patterns with
light breakout volume showed better performance.
Statistics 39
Table 2.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 16% 11% 16% 11% 8% 5% 3% 5% 3% 3% 19%
Bull market,
up breakout 22% 5% 3% 1% 2% 8% 4% 4% 0% 2% 48%
Bear market,
down breakout 31% 14% 11% 6% 3% 2% 2% 0% 0% 5% 28%
Bull market,
down breakout 34% 13% 8% 4% 3% 5% 5% 2% 3% 1% 22%
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 39

Table 2.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakout
Rising volume trend
performance 27% 16% –13% –23%
performance 31% 14% –18% –21%a
performance 26%a
12% –8%a
–19%a
performance 30%a
15% –17% –22%
performance 22%a
14% –11% –26%
a
Table 2.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakout
of breakout price
Short and narrow performance 25% 15% –16% –22%a
14% –10%a
–23%a
Tall and wide performance 38% 16% –17% –25%a
15% –14%a
–19%a
Notes: Minus sign means decline.
a
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 40

Trading Tactics
Table 2.8 lists trading tactics.
Measure rule. The measure rule predicts a target price. Compute the
height, the difference between the highest high and the horizontal trend line
in the formation. For upward breakouts, add the height to the highest high in
the pattern. For downward breakouts, subtract this value from the value of the
horizontal trend line. The result is the target price. The target should serve as
the minimum price move to expect, but with ascending broadening formations,
prices usually miss the target. Bull market accuracy ranges from 68% (up break-
outs) to 32% (down breakouts). Bear markets targets are correct 43% (up
breakouts) and 51% (down breakouts) of the time.
For a more conservative approach, try calculating the formation height and
dividing by 2, and then applying the difference to the pattern’s high or low price.
Figure 2.5 makes the measure rule clear. The height of the formation is
the difference between the highest high (34.13) and the trend-line price
(29.25), or 4.88. Subtract the result from the trend-line price, giving a target
price of 24.37. The nearer target in the figure uses half the formation height,
or 2.44, to give a price target of 26.81.
Partial rise or decline. A partial rise or decline can be difficult to trade
because prices often pause partway across the chart pattern on their way to the
opposite side. This pause looks like a partial rise or decline. Wait before buy-
ing to be sure that prices are unlikely to continue in the original direction. Try
buying when prices close beyond the halfway point between the minor
low/high and the trend line.
For example, if the top trend line is at 20 and prices have declined from
there to 14 then started back up in what you suspect is a partial decline, buy
when the price closes above 17 (that is half the distance between 20 and 14). You
might use Fibonacci retracements of 38%, 50%, or 62% as buying locations. If
prices turn at those retracement levels, then consider opening a position.
Trading Tactics 41
Table 2.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height from highest high to the
horizontal trend line. For upward breakouts, add the height
to the highest high in the pattern. For downward breakouts,
subtract the height from the value of the horizontal trend
line. The result is the target price. More accurate targets use
a formation height divided by 2.
Partial rise or decline Use a partial rise or decline as an entry signal.
Wait for confirmation If you own the stock and prices close below the lower trend
line, sell.
Intraformation trade For tall patterns, buy near the lower trend line and sell near
the top as prices curl down.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 41

Wait for confirmation. If you own a stock and it shows a broadening
pattern, get worried. Many times the breakout will be downward, so be ready
to sell. Only sell when the price closes below the horizontal trend line. Prema-
ture breakouts are rare, but they do occur. Do not be fooled; wait for a close
below the lower trend line.
Intraformation trade. If the pattern is tall enough, consider trading
between the two trend lines. Buy after prices bounce off the lower trend line
and sell after they turn down at the top. If you are lucky, the pattern will break-
out upward and you can ride prices even higher. Use progressive stops to pro-
tect your profits. When the stock climbs above the nearest minor high, raise
your stop to just below the prior minor low. That strategy should give the
stock plenty of wiggle room.
Sample Trade
Palmer is a wiry sort of guy, one who acts as if he has swallowed too much caf-
feine. I am sure you have met the type. Faced with the situation shown in Fig-
ure 2.5, he took swift, decisive action. At point A, where the stock touched the
top trend line, he quickly sold it short and received a fill at 33.38. He placed a
stop at 34 in case the trade went against him. Then he waited.
It did not take long for the stock to cross the formation and reach the hor-
izontal trend line. Unfortunately, Palmer did not use an order to automatically
Aug Sep
Oct 92 Oct
Nov Dec Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Broadening Top
Formation
Pullback
Target Price
Target Price
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
A
C
B
D
Wal-Mart Stores Inc. (Retail Store, NYSE, WMT)
Figure 2.5 Ascending broadening formation. Predicted price targets using half
and full formation heights. A broadening top formation appears in late October.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 42

cover his short at 29.38 (the value of the trend line). So when prices bounced
off the low, he covered his short the following day, shown as point B, at 30.50.
Immediately, he went long and bought the stock at the same price.
Palmer placed a stop-loss order just below the horizontal trend line, at
29.25, just in case. Then he extended the top trend line but worried that the
stock might not reach it. He opted to put a target price below the old high at
point A. In less than a week, the stock reached his target and sold at 33.50
(point C). Since the stock was still showing an upward bias, he laid back for a
bit and waited for the trend to reverse. Three days later he sold the stock short
again at 33. This time, he put a sell order above the lower trend line at 29.50.
The trade went against him. It rose to 34 and oscillated up and down for nearly
3 weeks, never quite reaching his stop-loss point of 34.38. Then the stock
plunged and zipped across the formation. It hit his target price at point D, and
he covered his short.
Sensing a shift in the investment winds, he went long on the stock at the
same price but put a stop loss below the lower trend line. The following day
prices hit his stop at 29.25 and he took a small loss. For some unexplained rea-
son, Palmer walked away from the stock at this point. Perhaps it was the small
loss he incurred on his last trade, or perhaps he was just running low on caffeine.
The following list includes tips and observations for selecting patterns for bet-
ter performance. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Review the identification guidelines to be sure you have the pattern
correct—Table 2.1.
• Trade with the market trend: In bull markets, buy upward breakouts;
in bear markets, short downward breakouts—Table 2.2.
• Trade busted patterns or after price reaches the ultimate high or low—
Table 2.2.
• Patterns in bull markets with upward breakouts have the lowest failure
rates for moves above 15%—Table 2.3.
• In bull markets, select patterns with the upward breakout near the
yearly high. Downward breakouts should be near the yearly low,
regardless of market type—Table 2.4.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance. Look for nearby support
or resistance to a price move—Table 2.4.
• Gaps hurt performance after upward breakouts—Table 2.4.
• Use a partial rise or decline to buy in early. They correctly signal a
breakout over 74% of the time—Table 2.4.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 43

• In a bull market, let your profits ride because it takes time for prices to
rise. In a bear market, the decline is likely to be steep and short, so use
a profit target to get out—Table 2.5.
• Watch for price weakness 6 to 7 weeks after the breakout in a bull mar-
ket—Table 2.5.
• Select tall patterns—Table 2.6.
• Wide patterns perform better when the breakout direction follows the
general market trend (upward breakout, bull market and downward
breakout, bear market)—Table 2.6.
• Select patterns that are both tall and wide; avoid short and wide ones—
Table 2.6.
• In a bull market, pick patterns with a falling volume trend; in a bear
market, look for a rising volume trend—Table 2.7.
• Select patterns with dome-shaped volume except in a bull market with
downward breakouts—Table 2.7.
• Choose patterns with heavy breakout volume except for those patterns
with downward breakouts in a bear market—Table 2.7.
4366_02.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 44

45
3
Broadening Formations,
Right-Angled and
Descending
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Horizontal top with lower lows following a
down-sloping trend line. Breakout is upward.
Reversal or continuation Short-term bullish continuation
Throwbacks 52% 50%
Surprising findings Upward breakouts occur near the yearly high.
Throwbacks and breakout day gaps hurt
performance. Tall patterns perform better
than short ones. A rising volume trend and
U-shaped volume suggests better
postbreakout performance.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 45

Downward Breakouts
Pullbacks 51% 57%
Surprising findings Downward breakouts occur near the yearly
low. Pullbacks hurt performance. Patterns
with dome-shaped volume and heavy
breakout volume do well.
After searching for this pattern in daily price data, I found 140 patterns with
upward breakouts and 134 with downward ones. Upward breakouts show the
pattern performing as a continuation of the uptrend twice as often as a rever-
sal. Downward breakouts show the opposite: more act as reversals. Continua-
tions perform better in bull markets, reversals in bear markets, regardless of the
breakout direction.
The bull market break-even failure rate is about three times the bear
market rate. This finding suggests the pattern is happier in a bear market.
That analysis changes for higher failure rates. In other words, this pattern per-
forms well in a bear market to begin with, but for longer trades, patterns in a
bull market show smaller failure rates.
After the breakout and after prices reach the ultimate low, the rebound is
spectacular: 55%. Thus, if you can correctly identify when the trend changes,
you can make a ton of money—even if you are late getting into the trade.
However, the right-angled and descending broadening (RADB) chart
pattern gives lackluster performance. The average rise or decline is well below
that of other chart pattern types, so trade this one carefully.
Tour
What do descending broadening formations look like and why do they form?
Figure 3.1 is an example of the chart pattern. The characteristic flat top and
down-sloping bottom are apparent in the figure. These are the two key ingre-
46 Broadening Formations, Right-Angled and Descending
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 46

dients. Prices at the top of the formation reach the same price level before
declining. Over time, a horizontal trend line can be drawn connecting them.
Along the bottom of the formation, the minor lows touch a down-sloping
trend line. Eventually, prices break out of the formation by either closing
above the top trend line or below the bottom one.
In Figure 3.1, the breakout is downward since prices close below the
lower trend line. I require prices to close outside the trend line so that is why the
peak on November 3 does not classify as an upward breakout. On that day,
prices close at 19, the low for the day, and below the top trend-line value of
about 19.50.
Figure 3.2 shows an example of an upward breakout. The top of the for-
mation is well formed with several minor peaks reaching the same price level.
However, three one-day touches compose the lower trend line. A trend-line
touch is a trend-line touch regardless of whether it is composed of one-day
spikes or many days of consecutive touches.
Figure 3.2 shows a broadening formation with an upward breakout pro-
viding a 10% rise in just over 2 weeks. During May 1996, the stock reached 29,
for a 25% gain. The figure also shows a throwback to the top of the formation.
This one occurs almost 4 weeks after the breakout. I consider throwbacks or
pullbacks that occur later than 30 days to be just normal price action, not due
to the throwback or pullback. This one just makes the cut at 27 days.
Tour 47
Applebees (Restaurant, NASDAQ, APPB)
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
Jan 95 Feb Mar
Jul 94 Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Support Line
One-Day Reversal
Figure 3.1 Descending broadening formation. A horizontal trend line along the
top and a down-sloping trend line connecting the minor lows is characteristic of
this chart pattern. The extended, down-sloping trend line shows future support
and resistance zones. A one-day reversal appears on November 3 when prices
pushed above the formation top on high volume, but closed at the low for the day.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 47

Why do these chart patterns form? Look at Figure 3.3. During 1993, the
stock entered the first formation in early April and moved higher on moderate
volume until it reached about 35. There, investors selling the stock matched
buyers eager to own the security and the rise stalled. It traveled sideways until
May 10 when it moved below the prior minor low. As the stock approached the
31 level, it entered a support zone set up by the retracement in mid-March.
The decline stalled and moved sideways for several days. Due to the support
level, many investors believed that the decline was at an end and the stock
would move higher. It did. As volume climbed, the price gapped upward and
quickly soared back to the old high.
The stock ran into selling pressure from institutions and others trying to
sell blocks of shares at a fixed price. The available supply halted the advance.
Prices hung on for a few days, moved a bit lower, and paused before beginning
a rapid decline to a new minor low.
As volume climbed, the stock declined until it touched the lower trend
line, a region of support. Suspecting an oversold stock, investors bought and
forced it higher again. When the stock reached the old high, there were fewer
shares available for purchase. Apparently, those investors and institutions who
were trying to get 35 a share for their stock sold most of their shares in the pre-
ceding months. Soaking up the available supply, the stock gapped upward and
closed above the old high. An upward breakout was at hand.
The stock moved higher but soon formed another descending broaden-
ing formation. This one was compact and tight but had bearish implications.
Valero Energy Corp. (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, VLO)
Jun 95 Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
Breakout
Throwback
Figure 3.2 Another descending broadening formation, but this time the break-
out is upward. Almost 4 weeks after the breakout, prices throw back to the forma-
tion before ultimately moving higher.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 48

When the stock tried to reach the top trend line but could not, the partial rise
foretold the coming decline. The stock plunged through the lower trending in
late September and continued lower.
If you look at both formations, their stories are nearly the same. There is
a supply of stock available at a fixed price. After exhausting the supply, prices
either rise above the top trend line or decline below the lower one. The deter-
mination on which way things will go is not clear. Sometimes the supply over-
whelms buyers and the stock declines, unable to recover as it pierces the lower
trend line. At other times, the supply gives out and enthusiastic buyers jump in
and push the price higher.
Are there some guidelines that can assist in identifying descending broadening
formations? Yes, and Table 3.1 outlines them.
Shape. The shape of the formation looks like a megaphone with the top
held horizontal. Prices climb until they touch the top trend line, then reverse
direction. On the lower edge, prices decline making a series of lower lows until
they touch the lower trend line.
Varity Corp. (Machinery, NYSE, VAT)
Feb 93 Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Partial Rise
Support Zone
Resistance
Resistance
Line
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
Figure 3.3 Two descending broadening formations. The first formation shows a
trend-line rebound resulting from an earlier support zone. The second formation
shows a partial rise that often precedes the ultimate breakout. Shown are two resis-
tance areas that parallel the trend lines.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 49

Horizontal top resistance line. When two minor highs achieve the
same, or nearly the same, price level, you can draw a horizontal trend line con-
necting them.
Down-sloping trend line. The same applies to the down-sloping trend
line: It requires at least two distinct touches before drawing the trend line.
There is usually ample time to recognize a broadening formation, and many
times there are more than two touches of each trend line.
Volume. Volume tends to rise over the length of the chart pattern, some-
times following the price action. The shape of the pattern looks like a dome
more often than a U-shaped pit or a random pattern.
Premature breakouts. Premature breakouts are rare, so if price closes
above the top trend line or below the bottom trend line, consider it a gen-
uine breakout.
Breakout. A breakout occurs when price closes outside (above or below)
the trend-line boundaries. The breakout can occur in any direction, but the pat-
tern acts as a reversal of the prevailing price trend slightly more often than not.
Partial rise or decline. A partial rise, as shown in Figure 3.3, or a partial
decline is often a clue to the ultimate breakout direction. When prices curl
around on a partial rise or decline and return to the trend line, they usually
break out immediately (that is, without crossing the formation again).
Table 3.1
Shape Looks like a megaphone, tilted down, with the top of the
formation horizontal and bounded on the bottom by a
down-sloping trend line.
Horizontal top resistance A horizontal line of resistance joins the tops as a trend
line line. Must have at least two distinct touches (minor
highs) before drawing a trend line.
Down-sloping trend line The expanding price series is bounded on the bottom by
a down-sloping trend line. Must have at least two distinct
minor lows to create a trend line.
Volume Upward trend with a domed shape.
Premature breakouts Very rare. A close outside the trend line is most likely a
genuine breakout.
Breakout Prices can break out in either direction, usually
accompanied by a rise in volume that soon tapers off.
Partial rise or decline For an established formation, when prices climb toward
the top trend line or decline toward the lower one but fail
to touch it, prices often reverse direction and break out of
the formation.
Support and resistance Follows the two trend lines into the future but is sporadic.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 50

Support and resistance. The trend lines, when projected into the future,
can sometimes act as areas of support or resistance, depending on which side
prices are approaching (Figures 3.1, 3.3, and 3.6 show examples). Sometimes
the support or resistance level is active for months or even years at a time.
Focus on Failures
Since descending broadening formations can break out in either direction, I
show both views of failed breakouts. The first one, Figure 3.4, is characterized
by the telltale partial decline in late November. From there, the stock climbs
and eventually pierces the top trend line, as predicted. Once price closes above
the trend line, you would expect it to throw back to the formation top then
continue higher or simply move upward. In this situation, prices stall at 45 and
return to the formation proper—a classic throwback. Unfortunately, instead of
rebounding and heading higher like a typical throwback, the stock continues
down. It does more work inside the formation before shooting out the other
side in a straight-line run.
Had you purchased after the upward breakout, you would have seen the
stock decline from a purchase point of about 44.50 to a low of 36.88. Even a
stop at the lowest point of the formation would have gotten you out at 39, still
Focus on Failures 51
Pacific Telesis Group (Telecom. Services, NYSE, PAC)
Breakout Throwback
Partial Decline
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
Jan 92 Feb Mar Apr
Figure 3.4 A descending broadening formation with prices that fail to continue
moving up. The partial decline suggests the ultimate breakout will be upward, but
the rise falters and prices move downward instead.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 51

a hefty decline. However, if you held onto the stock (not recommended, by the
way), it would have been rewarding. The low occurred on April 8 (not shown),
and it turned out to the be the lowest price reached during the next 2 years.
The stock hit its peak in early November 1993 at a price of nearly 60.
Figure 3.5 shows a more harrowing tale because it involves a short sale.
Investors watching the sharp 2-day decline beginning October 14, 1994, would
be tempted to short the stock the next day. Had they done so, or even waited
a few days, they would have bought near the low. From that point on, the stock
moved higher, back into the formation before ultimately soaring out the top.
If you were a novice investor and had not placed a stop on your short sale, your
loss would have taken you from a low of 24.38 to 53, where it peaked near the
end of the study.
Figure 3.5 represents a failure type I call 5% failures. That is when prices
break out in a given direction and move less than 5% before moving substan-
tially in the direction opposite the breakout. This type of failure can turn a
small profit into a large loss if stops are not used.
If there is a bright side to the situations shown in Figures 3.4 and 3.5, it is
that failures do not occur very often. The statistics follow, but for now let me
point out that 8 of every 10 formations continue moving in the direction of the
breakout, at least for a little while. The two figures should also provide a warn-
Healthcare Compare (Medical Services, NASDAQ, HCCC)
Jan 95 Feb
Downward
Breakout
Broadening
Top
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
Figure 3.5 A downward breakout failure. Prices decline less than 5%, turn around,
and eventually hit 42. Such failures are rare, but they do occur, so stop-loss orders
are always important. A broadening top formed in early November.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 52

ing to make sure you use stops to limit your losses. Even if you choose to hold a
mental stop in your head, be sure to pull the trigger once things begin to go bad.
Statistics
Table 3.2 shows general statistics for right-angled and descending broading
formations.
Number of formations. I searched through 500 stocks from mid-1991
to mid-1996 and from 1999 to 2003, with additional patterns found outside of
those ranges. I found 274 patterns.
Reversal or continuation. Patterns acting as reversals occur 143 times,
and 131 act as continuations of the prevailing price trend. In a bull market,
RABDs acting as continuations outperformed. In a bear market, reversals per-
formed better.
Average rise or decline. Both breakout directions perform poorly when
compared to other chart pattern types. If you insist on trading this pattern, do
so in the direction of the prevailing market trend: upward breakouts in bull
markets and downward breakouts in bear markets.
Rises or declines over 45%. Up breakouts in a bull market make a
strong showing with 25% climbing over 45%. Downward breakouts never
Statistics 53
Table 3.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 36 R, 11 R, 61 R, 35 R,
68 C 25 C 26 C 12 C
32% C 21% C –20% C –20% C
35%a
–26%a
–55%a
a
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 53

score well in this category but in the bear market, upward breakout should be
about double the 8% posted.
Change after trend ends. If you can determine when the trend ends,
trade the stock. When prices peak after an upward breakout, they drop
between 26% and 35%. For downward breakouts, after price reaches the ulti-
mate low, they climb an astounding 55%, on average.
Busted pattern performance. The numbers tell you how awful things
can get if you hang onto a stock that makes a disappointing move. For exam-
ple, after climbing less than 5% in a bear market, two stocks tumbled an aver-
age of 55%.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Compare the performance of the index
with the average rise and decline and you will see how the market influences
stocks. The numbers suggest you should trade with the prevailing market trend.
Days to ultimate high or low. It takes between 6 weeks and 5 months
before prices finish trending. Upward breakouts take longer, especially in a
bull market. The numbers demonstrate that the decline in a bear market
is steeper than is the rise in a bull market, but the move does not go as far or
last as long.
Table 3.3 shows various failure rates for the different market conditions
and breakout directions. Bull market failures start out high, at 14% and 19%
and get higher as the scale on the left increases. Bear markets show a similar
trend but start from lower numbers. Bear markets have lower failure rates until
prices move more than 15%, then patterns with upward breakouts in a bull
market have fewer failures.
Table 3.3
Failure Rates
10 31 or 30% 9 or 25% 34 or 39% 5 or 11%
15 39 or 38% 14 or 39% 51 or 59% 18 or 38%
20 49 or 47% 20 or 56% 66 or 76% 24 or 51%
25 56 or 54% 26 or 72% 73 or 84% 30 or 64%
30 66 or 63% 27 or 75% 76 or 87% 38 or 81%
35 74 or 71% 28 or 78% 82 or 94% 40 or 85%
50 79 or 76% 33 or 92% 86 or 99% 45 or 96%
75 90 or 87% 33 or 92% 87 or 100% 47 or 100%
Over 75 104 or 100% 36 or 100% 87 or 100% 47 or 100%
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 54

55
Table
3.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
a
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
25
days
34
days
45
days
22
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L1%,
C27%,
H72%
L6%,
C33%,
H61%
L45%,
C33%,
H22%
L51%,
C36%,
H13%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L11%
a
,
C37%
a
,
H27%
L26%,
C24%,
H22%
L14%,
C16%
a
,
H15%
a
L26%
a
,
C20%
a
,
H24%
a
52%
50%
51%
57%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
9
days
11
days
9
days
12
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
21%
21%
–15%
–22%
a
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
36%
26%
–16%
–24%
a
Performance
with
breakout
gap
23%
a
17%
–18%
a
–22%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
29%
25%
–15%
a
–23%
Average
gap
size
$0.26
$0.42
$0.43
$1.78
Partial
rise,
downward
breakout
N/A
N/A
27/50
or
54%
16/20
or
80%
Partial
decline,
upward
breakout
52/82
or
63%
25/38
or
66%
N/A
N/A
Partial
rise
performance
N/A
N/A
–13%
a
–22%
a
Partial
decline
performance
28%
25%
N/A
N/A
Intraformation
partial
rise
failure
12/104
or
12%
6/36
or
17%
10/87
or
11%
4/47
or
9%
Intraformation
partial
decline
failure
8/104
or
8%
4/36
or
11%
5/87
or
6%
3/47
or
6%
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
N/A
means
not
applicable.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 55

Just as with other chart pattern types, the failure rates climb substantially
for minor increases in the maximum price rise or decline. About half the pat-
terns will fail to move more than 20%.
Later I discuss the measure rule, but suppose it says that prices will climb
from 10 to 13, a 30% move. How likely is that in a bull market? Table 3.3
shows the answer. Since 63% fail to climb more than 30%, it seems unlikely
that prices will reach 13. Be conservative and set a lower target.
Formation end to breakout. It takes between 3 and 6 weeks before
prices close outside the pattern’s trend-line boundary. Thus, if you do not
immediately recognize the broadening pattern, you should still have plenty of
time to take appropriate action.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range do we find the break-
out from the broadening pattern? For upward moves, the breakout occurs most
often within a third of the yearly high. Downward moves show the reverse,
with many patterns breaking out near the yearly low.
Yearly position, performance. Which of the three price ranges per-
forms best? The results map across market conditions. Broadening patterns in
bull markets seems to perform best when the breakout is in the middle of the
yearly price range. For bear markets, those with breakouts near the yearly low
perform best.
the time, and it takes the stock less than 2 weeks to return to the breakout
price. When a throwback or pullback occurs, performance suffers. Look for
nearby support or resistance zones that might interfere with price movement
and cause a retrace.
Gaps. Most of the time, breakout day gaps hurt performance. The lone
exception is in a bull market with a downward breakout from an RABD. In that
case gaps help, but the samples are few.
Partial rises and declines. A partial rise or decline works best in a bear
market. They correctly predict the breakout direction between 66% and 80%
of the time. Bull markets do not fare as well, being correct between 54% and
63% of the time. Still, a partial rise or decline allows you to enter a position in
a stock before the breakout and at a better price.
If you compare the average rise or decline from Table 3.2, you will find
that a partial rise or decline usually hurts performance.
and declines are rare, ranging between 17% for patterns with upward break-
outs in bear markets, to 6% for patterns with downward breakouts. An
intraformation partial rise or decline looks like a loop touching the trend line.
They occur once the pattern is established (at least two touches of each trend
line), but a breakout in the anticipated direction does not follow. Instead, prices
cross the pattern to the opposite trend line. Since the numbers are so low, they
should not be of concern.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 56

low. A pattern in a bull market with an upward breakout stands the best chance
of a good gain. Just 29% (20 + 9) reach the ultimate high in two weeks—the
best (lowest) of the group—but it also shows that nearly half (49%) continue
rising after 70 days. This finding suggests that the combination (bull/up) is the
best performing, and a look back at Table 3.2 confirms that expectation.
What do all the numbers mean? If you have a broadening pattern with a
downward breakout and the general market (as measured by the S&P 500
index) is bullish, scan the table to help determine how long it will take to reach
the ultimate low. There is a good chance that it will occur in the first week, as
33% reach bottom in that period. Since the numbers are additive, nearly half
(42%, or 33 + 9) bottom within 2 weeks. If prices are still tumbling after 3
weeks, then you might be in for a good run. Lower your stops to protect your
profits as the trade progresses.
Watch for trend changes a month into the trade, especially in a bear mar-
ket (11% flame out 35 days after an upward breakout).
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones except in bear mar-
kets with downward breakouts. How do you use this result? Compute the pat-
tern height from the price of the top trend line to the last touch of the lower
trend line (the lowest low in the pattern). Divide the difference by the break-
out price. If the result is above the median, then you have a tall pattern; below
the median means it is a short one. Invest only in tall patterns unless you feel
confident of your assessment.
Width. Narrow patterns outperform wide ones in a bear market. In a bull
market, there is either no performance difference or wide patterns do slightly
better. I used the median length to separate narrow patterns from wide ones.
Statistics 57
Table 3.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 19% 14% 6% 3% 11% 0% 6% 3% 0% 0% 39%
Bull market,
up breakout 20% 9% 3% 4% 4% 2% 2% 2% 3% 2% 49%
Bear market,
down
breakout 17% 17% 17% 15% 9% 2% 0% 2% 6% 0% 15%
Bull market,
down
breakout 33% 9% 10% 3% 3% 5% 5% 6% 0% 0% 25%
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 57

Average formation length. The average length measured about 2
months long.
Height and width combinations. The worst performance comes from
patterns that are both short and wide. You will want to avoid those. The best
performance hits twice on tall and wide, once on tall and narrow, and once on
short and narrow.
Volume trend. In three out of four cases, patterns with a rising volume
trend do better than do those with falling volume. The last case resulted
in a tie.
Volume shapes. Patterns with upward breakouts and U-shaped volume
performed better than the other shapes. For downward breakouts, patterns
with dome-shaped volume worked best.
Breakout volume. Most of the time, heavy breakout volume associated
with better performance. Only from patterns in a bull market with upward
breakouts did light volume outperform, but the samples were few.
Table 3.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakouta
of breakout price
Short and narrow
performance 27%a
25% –13% –26%
14% –13%a
–16%
Tall and wide performance 39% 24% –20%a
–21%
29% –16%a
–23%
a
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 58

Trading Tactics
Table 3.8 outlines trading tactics for descending broadening formations.
Measure rule. Figure 3.6 illustrates the use of the measure rule. Com-
pute the formation height by first taking the difference between the highest
high (49.50) and the lowest low (43.50). Add the result (6) to the value of the
horizontal trend line to get a target price of 55.50. Prices reach this target dur-
ing mid-March 1996 as the stock climbs on its way to 60.
If the stock breaks out downward, the measure rule computation is nearly
the same. Subtract the formation height from the lowest low giving a target
price of 37.50. Be aware that upward breakouts in a bull market are more likely
to reach their targets (63%) than other combinations. Refer to the Results
Snapshot, “Percentage meeting price target” for the statistics.
Wait for confirmation. You might think that price will break out
upward in a rising price trend, but it does not a suprising percentage of the
time. Thus, you should wait for confirmation—price to close outside the
trend-line boundary—before trading the stock.
Trading Tactics 59
Table 3.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakout
Rising volume trend
U-shaped volume
pattern performance 34% 27% –12% –23%a
performance 14%a
13% –13%a
–19%a
performance 26% 24% –16% –23%
performance 37%a
21% –14%a
–22%a
a
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 59

Stops. Once you know the target price, you can make a profit and loss
assessment of the trade. What is the likely downward move compared with the
target price? Does the potential profit justify the risk of the trade? For Figure
3.6, there is support in the 46 to 47 area. Examining the peaks and valleys of
the prior price action determines support and resistance levels. In March 1995
(not shown in the figure), there is an area of congestion bounded by a sym-
metrical triangle with an apex at about 46. Additional resistance appears in July
and October, as shown. Together, the 46 to 47 area makes a good location for
a stop-loss order.
Let us say the stop is 45.75, just below the bottom of the support area. If
the trade happens at 50.50, which is the close the day after the upward break-
out, that gives a potential loss of less than 10%. With a target price of 55.50,
or 10% upside, the win/loss ratio is an unexciting one to one. In such a situa-
tion, you could either tighten your stop by moving it higher (and risk getting
taken out by normal price action) or look elsewhere for a more profitable trade.
Remember there is no rule that says you have to place a trade.
Intraformation trading. If the broadening pattern is tall enough, go
long after prices rebound off the lower trend line and short when they rebound
off the upper trend line.
Table 3.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height by taking the difference
between the horizontal top and the lowest low in the
formation. For upward breakouts, add the result to the value
of the horizontal trend line. For downward breakouts,
subtract the value from the lowest low. The result is the
expected target price.
Wait for confirmation It is unclear which way prices will break out, so it is best to
wait for prices to close outside the trend lines. Once they do,
expect prices to continue moving in the direction of the
breakout. Place your trades accordingly.
Stops Once a breakout occurs, consider the opposite side of the
formation as the stop-loss point. However, in many cases you
will want something closer to your purchase price, so look for
nearer support or resistance zones. Once the stock moves
substantially, advance the stop to the break-even point or
higher.
Intraformation For aggressive traders, consider placing a trade as prices
trading reverse course at the trend line. Go long at the bottom and
short at the top, but be sure to use stops to protect against
an adverse breakout.
Partial rise Short a stock if you see a partial rise once prices curl around
and begin heading back down in a bear market.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 60

Partial rise. The Statistics section of this chapter discusses partial rises—
80% of the time in a bear market downward breakouts follow. That is high
enough to risk a trade. If you see a partial rise occur (and it really does not mat-
ter how far up it rises, so long as it is not touching or coming too close to the
upper trend line) and it begins heading back down, short the stock. With any
luck, price will shoot out the bottom of the formation and continue lower. As
always, be sure to place a stop-loss order and lower it as prices drop.
Sample Trade
Ralph is a formation trader with a measure of experience milking chart patterns
for all they are worth. When he noticed what he thought was either a descend-
ing broadening wedge or a right-angled descending broadening formation, he
bought the stock. His order, placed at point C in Figure 3.6 (46.38), was just
after the stock bounced off the lower trend line.
He monitored it closely and watched the stock move up the very next day,
then ease lower. After a few days, Ralph saw a symmetrical triangle form and
he became worried. Those formations, he reasoned, usually follow the trend
and the trend was downward. When the stock moved below the lower triangle
trend line, Ralph sold the stock and received a fill at 46.50.
Sample Trade 61
Flightsafety Intl. Inc. (Aerospace/Defense, NYSE, FSI)
Close-up of
Symmetrical
Triangle Near
Point C
C
A
B
C
Likely Area of Support
Support
Zone
Target Price
Stock Sold
Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr
Apr 95 May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
Figure 3.6 An upward breakout from a descending broadening formation. To
compute the measure rule for upward breakouts, find the difference between the
high and low in the formation, denoted by points A and B. Add the result to point
A to get the target price. It took almost 7 months for prices to exceed the target.
A small symmetrical triangle appears at point C.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 61

When he erased the lines from his computer screen and looked at the fresh
price chart, he knew he had made the right decision because a partial rise, such as
where the triangle formed, usually portends an immediate downward breakout.
Sure enough, the following day prices dropped even further, tagging the
broadening formation trend line again. Then they rebounded. In the coming
days, he watched as prices surprisingly zipped across the formation and
touched the top trend line. Ralph took a small loss after factoring in commis-
sions. Did he sell too soon or was he just being cautious, and what lessons did
he learn? Spend some time searching for the answers in your own trades and
you will rapidly become a better investor.
The following list includes tips and observations for selecting broadening
patterns for improved performance. Refer to the associated table for more
information.
• Use the identification guidelines to select a pattern—Table 3.1.
• Select patterns that follow the trend: upward breakouts in a bull mar-
ket, downward breakouts in a bear market—Table 3.2.
• If you can determine when the trend changes, buy after the stock bot-
toms and hang on as price rises an average of 55%—Table 3.2.
• Failure rates are lowest for patterns with small moves in a bear market
with downward breakouts. Patterns in a bull market with upward
breakouts do better for price runs longer than 15%—Table 3.3.
• In a bull market, select patterns with breakouts in the middle of the
yearly price range. In a bear market, select those with breakouts near
the yearly low—Table 3.4.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance. Pick patterns with little
overhead resistance or underlying support—Table 3.4.
• Breakout day gaps hurt performance—Table 3.4.
• A partial rise correctly predicts the downward breakout direction 80%
of the time in a bear market—Table 3.4.
• Watch for a trend change a month after an upward breakout in a bear
market—Table 3.5.
• Pick narrow patterns in a bear market—Table 3.6.
• Choose patterns with a rising volume trend—Table 3.7.
• Patterns with a U-shaped volume pattern do well after an upward
breakout. Select patterns with dome-shaped volume and downward
breakouts—Table 3.7.
4366_03.qxd 2/23/05 11:29 AM Page 62

63
4
Broadening Tops
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Price trend is upward leading to the formation.
Megaphone appearance with higher highs and
lower lows that widen over time. Breakout is
upward.
Throwbacks 54% 53%
Surprising findings The best performers have breakouts near the
yearly low. Performance improves without a
breakout day gap. A partial decline correctly
signals an upward breakout over 70% of the
time. Light breakout volume helps performance.
Synonyms Expanding triangle, orthodox broadening top,
and five-point reversal
See also Broadening Bottoms
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 63

Downward Breakouts
Pullbacks 48% 62%
Surprising findings Most perform best when the breakout is near
the yearly low. A pullback hurts performance.
Tall patterns perform better than short ones.
Patterns with U-shaped volume perform best.
Synonyms Same as for upward breakouts
See also Same as for upward breakouts
Broadening tops, not surprisingly, act a lot like broadening bottoms. What
separates a top from a bottom is the price trend leading to the chart pattern.
For tops, the price trend is upward; for broadening bottoms, it is downward.
This is an arbitrary distinction I made just to see if the two formations act dif-
ferently. In answer to the question you have probably posed right now: The
two formations have slightly different performance.
A brief review of the Results Snapshot shows that the break-even failure
rate starts out at a high 11% to 18% unless this is a bear market with a down-
ward breakout. In that case, the failure rate is just 3%. At best, broadening tops
have gains averaging 29%, well below the average rise of 36% for all bullish
chart pattern types. Downward breakouts perform just as bad by falling short
of the 18% to 24% average decline for all chart pattern types.
Tour
Broadening formations come in a variety of styles and names. There are the
broadening tops and bottoms, right-angled ascending and descending, expand-
ing triangle, orthodox broadening top, and five-point reversal. The last three—
expanding triangle, orthodox broadening top, and five-point reversal—are
64 Broadening Tops
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 64

synonyms of the broadening top formation, with the last two being based on
five turning points.
For a tour of the formation, look at Figure 4.1. The stock began an uphill
run in December 1994 and paused for about 2 months in May and June. Then
it continued its climb and reached a high in mid-September at a price of 53.75.
Holders of the stock, witnessing the long run, decided to sell their shares, and
the stock headed lower. On September 25, 1995, volume spiked upward and
halted the decline. Investors, seeing a 40% retrace of their gains from the June
level, apparently thought the decline overdone and purchased the stock, send-
ing prices higher.
Prices peaked at a higher level, 54.50, on October 19. Many diligent
investors probably suspected that a double top was forming and promptly sold
their holdings to maximize their gains, sending the price tumbling. Prices con-
firmed the double top when they fell below the confirmation point, or the
lowest low between the two peaks, at 48.75.
Volume picked up and the struggle between supply and demand
reasserted itself. The decline stalled as traders willing to buy the stock over-
whelmed the reluctance to sell. The stock turned around and headed higher.
By this time, chart followers could draw the two trend lines—one across the
twin peaks and another below the two valleys—giving birth to the broadening
Tour 65
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr
Jul
Jun 95
ODR
Volume
Double Top
Confirmation Point
One-Day Reversal
Double Top
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
Beneficial Corp. (Financial Services, NYSE, BNL)
Figure 4.1 A double top changed into a broadening formation. The one-day
reversal appeared as the third peak after an unsustainably quick price rise. The
broadening top formation marked a struggle between eager buyers and reluctant
sellers at the lows and the quick-to-take-profit momentum players at the peaks.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 65

top formation. Astute traders jumped on the bandwagon at this point and pur-
chased the stock. They wanted to play the anticipated rise as the formation
broadened out. The stock cooperated and moved higher, reaching the top
trend line once again at a new high of 55.50.
The steepness of the ascent in the latter stages was unsustainable. The
peak looked like a one-day reversal, with a close near the low of the day and a
tall daily price swing. However, volume was unconvincing. It was higher that
day than during the prior week, but it certainly was not of the caliber of the late
November spike. In any case, the stock tumbled and soon reached a new low of
43.50, stopping right at the down-sloping trend line. Once the stock began
moving higher, the momentum players jumped on board and volume increased
along with the price. Buying enthusiasm and rising momentum pushed the
stock higher, climbing through the top trend line. An upward breakout occurred.
Throughout the various peaks and troughs of this formation, there was a
struggle between buyers and sellers. Near the lows, the buyers believed the
stock was oversold and they eagerly bought it. At the top, they quickly sold
their shares and pocketed handsome profits. This selling, of course, sent the
stock back down.
Some investors, seeing the stock decline below their purchase price and
still believing that the stock had value, bought more. That behavior also helped
turn the stock around at the lows and probably explained their heightened
nervousness at the tops. They wanted to keep their gains this time, instead of
watching them evaporate should the stock decline again.
The formation in Figure 4.1 also makes evident that identifying the ulti-
mate breakout is exceedingly difficult. It appears that each new high or new
low may be the final breakout. Only when prices move in the opposite direc-
tion is it clear that prices will not break out. We explore ways to profit from
this behavior in the Trading Tactics section.
Table 4.1 shows the identification guidelines for the broadening top formation.
Price trend. The first criterion is the price trend leading to the forma-
tion. This price trend is what differentiates a broadening top from a broaden-
ing bottom. For a broadening top, the price trend should be leading up to the
formation, not down as in its bottom counterparts. This is just an arbitrary des-
ignation I have chosen to distinguish the two formations.
Shape and trend lines. Trend lines drawn across the peaks and valleys
resemble a megaphone. Higher highs and lower lows make the formation obvi-
ous to those versed in spotting chart patterns. The slope of the trend lines is
what distinguishes this formation from some others. The top trend line must
slope up and the bottom one must slope down. When one of the two trend
66 Broadening Tops
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 66

lines is horizontal or nearly so, the formation classifies as a right-angled
ascending or descending broadening formation. When the two trend lines
slope in the same direction, the formation is a broadening wedge.
Touches.There should be at least two minor highs and two minor lows
before the chart pattern becomes a broadening top. Figure 4.1 shows three minor
highs touching the top trend line and four minor lows either nearing or touching
the bottom trend line. The minor highs and minor lows need not alternate as
prices crisscross the formation.
Volume. Linear regression on the volume trend shows it trending up.
Many times, the volume pattern mimics the price pattern: rising and falling
along with price. However, my research shows that a U-shaped volume pattern
occurs most often.
Breakout. A breakout happens when prices move outside the trend-line
boundaries or follow a trend line for an extended time. In Figure 4.1, if you extend
the top trend line upward, it will intersect prices at about 58. Prices push through
this level and move higher. When a breakout occurs, I consider the actual break-
out price to be the value of the highest peak in the formation. In Figure 4.1, for
example, the breakout price is 55.50, or the high at the early December peak.
For an example of how to apply the various guidelines, consider the
broadening top shown in Figure 4.2. At first glance, it looks like a large mega-
phone with price trends that generally follow two sloping trend lines. The top
trend line slopes upward and the bottom one slopes downward, each intersect-
ing the minor highs or lows at least twice. Prices, over time, form higher highs
and lower lows until they break out of the formation, generally moving beyond
the line of trend before retracing.
Table 4.1
Price trend The intermediate-term price trend leading to the formation
should be up.
Shape Megaphone shape with higher highs and lower lows. Five-point
reversals have three peaks and two troughs.
Trend lines Prices are bounded by two trend lines: The top one slopes up and
the bottom slopes down.
Touches Should have at least two minor highs and two minor lows, but
not necessarily alternating touches.
Volume Trends upward, often with a U-shape.
Breakout The breakout can occur in either direction and, in several cases,
prices move horizontally for several months before staging a
definitive breakout.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 67

68 Broadening Tops
Aug 91 Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 92 Feb Mar Apr May Jun
1
2
3
4
5
6
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
ASA Ltd (Investment Co. (Domestic), NYSE, ASA)
Figure 4.2 The broadening top has higher highs and lower lows as the price
action widens over time.
1
2
4
3 5
Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Jul
Jun 95
False Breakout
Prices Fail to Attain
Top Trend Line
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
Albertsons Inc. (Grocery, NYSE, ABS)
Figure 4.3 A weak example of a five-point reversal or orthodox broadening top.
It has three minor highs and two minor lows composing the five turning points.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 68

The volume pattern generally rises as prices move up and recedes as prices
move down. Figure 4.2 shows this quite clearly. During the rise in mid-November,
for example, volume jumped upward as prices peaked, then just as quickly
receded as prices declined. Figure 4.3 shows a U-shaped volume trend. Volume
is higher in September and December, and lower in the intervening months.
Orthodox broadening tops and five-point reversals describe the same type
of formation. They are simply broadening tops that have three minor highs
and two minor lows. Figure 4.3, for example, falls into this category. Other
than the name, I found no substantial difference between broadening tops and
orthodox broadening tops or five-point reversals.
Some analysts say five-point reversals are bearish indicators; that the for-
mation predicts a downward breakout. My statistics, admittedly on only 30 for-
mations, suggest this is untrue. Sixteen break out upward and the others break
out downward. The sample size is too small to make a definitive statement.
Focus on Failures
What does a failure look like? Look at Figures 4.3 and 4.4, two examples of
broadening patterns that fail to continue in the expected direction. Figure 4.3
shows a sharp downward thrust that pierces the trend line on high volume. Since
Mar 93 Mar
Apr May Jul
Jun
Breakout
Point
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
Arco Chemical Co. (Chemical (Basic), NYSE, RCM)
Figure 4.4 Prices in this broadening top moved horizontally for 6 months before
staging an upward breakout. This horizontal movement is a common occurrence
with broadening tops.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 69

this is clearly outside the lower trend line, and coupled with the failure of prices
to attain the upper trend line, a downward breakout is at hand. But the downward
movement stalls on very high volume, turns around, and moves higher. This is
an example of a 5% failure; that is, prices break out then move less than 5% in
the direction of the breakout before heading substantially in the other direction.
Contrast the behavior shown in Figure 4.3 with that shown in Figure 4.4.
I include this chart because I have noticed that a large number of broadening
formations act this way. Instead of making a clear up or down thrust that
pierces the trend line, prices move horizontally for months before finally mov-
ing above or below the formation highs or lows.
In the case of Figure 4.4, prices decline below the low in early July and
halt. They climb for a bit then recede again and reach a new low in early
August. Another recovery sees prices rise no higher than 44 for about half a
year before finally staging an upward breakout.
Statistics
Table 4.2 shows general statistics for this chart pattern.
Number of formations. I found 493 broadening tops in data from mid-
1991 to mid-1996 and from 1999 to 2003 in 500 stocks.
70 Broadening Tops
Table 4.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 183 C 62 C 182 R 66 R
R/C performance 24% Ra
, N/A R, 15% R, 20% R,
29% C 24% C 16% Ca
N/A C
42%a
–33%a
–27%a
Note: Minus sign means decline. N/A means no avilable samples.
a
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 70

Reversal or continuation. The pattern splits almost evenly between act-
ing as reversals of the prevailing price trend and as continuations. By defini-
tion, since we are dealing with a top, an upward breakout is a continuation and
a downward breakout means a reversal.
When statistics are available, continuations perform better than reversals,
but the small sample size might change results.
Average rise or decline. The pattern is a poor performer. Both upward
and downward breakouts fall short of the average rise or decline for all chart
pattern types.
Rises or declines over 45%. Almost a quarter (23%) of the broadening
patterns in a bull market with upward breakouts climb over 45%. That is
respectable. Downward breakouts never fare well in this category.
Change after trend ends. After prices reach the ultimate high, they
tumble by about 33%. Since that decline is above the average rise, you give
back all of your gains and more if you do not sell in a timely manner. Down-
ward breakouts do substantially better by rising about 50% after the breakout.
Of course, if you shorted the stock and it dropped 20% and then soared by
50%, you would be kicking yourself for not closing out your position. Trade
this one carefully.
Busted pattern performance. If a pattern busts, consider trading it in
the new direction. Due to the low sample counts, do not expect to achieve the
results shown in the table.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Notice how the general market helped
or hindered prices. The numbers, when compared to the average rise or
decline, suggest you trade with the market trend (bull market, upward break-
outs and bear market, downward breakouts).
Days to ultimate high or low. The time it takes price to rise to the ulti-
mate high or sink to the ultimate low varies from 116 days to 29. The decline
in a bear market must be steeper than is the rise in a bull market, but prices do
not move as far.
Table 4.3 shows failure rates for broadening tops. Bear markets with
downward breakouts have the lowest failure rates, 3%, but the edge over bull
markets with up breakouts does not last long. For moves of 15% and higher,
the bull market, up breakout combination shows the lowest failure rate.
Notice how the failure rate increases as the maximum price rise or decline
changes. For bear markets with downward breakouts, just 3% fail to decline
more than 5%, but 23% fail to decline more than 10%, almost eight times as
many as the 3% rate. This nearly doubles again, to 45%, for patterns that fail
to decline more than 15%.
Table 4.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics for broad-
ening tops.
Formation end to breakout. It takes about a month before prices close
outside the trend-line boundary in a breakout. Thus, even though you may be
Statistics 71
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 71

late spotting a broadening top, you may still have time to trade it. Bull markets
take about a week longer to break out than bear markets.
Yearly position. Where does the breakout from a broadening top occur
most often in the yearly price range? As you might guess, upward breakouts
appear near the yearly high, but downward breakouts occur in the middle
of the range.
Yearly position, performance. The best performing patterns have
breakouts near the yearly low, but many have low sample counts.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. A throwback or pullback occurs about half
the time, and it takes fewer than 2 weeks for the stock to return to the break-
out price. When a throwback or pullback occurs, it hurts performance ex-
cept in countertrend breakouts (bear market, up breakout and bull market,
down breakout).
Gaps. When a gap occurs during an upward breakout, performance suf-
fers. Downward breakouts show minimal performance difference. However,
notice how large the gaps are for downward breakouts.
Partial rises and declines. Using a partial rise or decline to enter a trade
before the breakout is a reliable trading technique. You get in at a better price,
and it accurately predicts the breakout direction. The best showing is when a
partial decline occurs in a bear market. An upward breakout follows 79% of the
time. Table 4.4 shows the other combinations and results.
Intraformation partial rises and declines. How often does a partial rise
or decline occur that does not lead to an immediate breakout? The rate ranges
72 Broadening Tops
Table 4.3
Failure Rates
10 53 or 29% 14 or 23% 74 or 41% 15 or 23%
15 73 or 40% 24 or 39% 103 or 57% 30 or 45%
20 89 or 49% 36 or 58% 133 or 73% 45 or 68%
25 98 or 54% 42 or 68% 149 or 82% 50 or 76%
30 109 or 60% 44 or 71% 158 or 87% 54 or 82%
35 120 or 66% 44 or 71% 167 or 92% 57 or 86%
50 145 or 79% 54 or 87% 179 or 98% 62 or 94%
75 161 or 88% 57 or 92% 182 or 100% 65 or 98%
Over 75 183 or 100% 62 or 100% 182 or 100% 66 or 100%
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 72

73
Table
4.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
33
days
28
days
34
days
26
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L3%,
C9%,
H88%
L5%,
C26%,
H69%
L19%,
C48%,
H33%
L29%,
C49%,
H22%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L36%
a
,
C19%
a
,
H29%
L34%
a
,
C27%
a
,
H23%
L18%,
C16%,
H12%
L23%
a
,
C22%,
H15%
a
54%
53%
48%
62%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
11
days
11
days
9
days
11
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
24%
25%
–15%
–18%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
34%
24%
a
–15%
–25%
a
Performance
with
breakout
gap
26%
16%
a
–15%
a
–21%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
29%
26%
–15%
–20%
a
Average
gap
size
$0.44
$0.39
$0.78
$1.00
Partial
rise,
downward
breakout
N/A
N|A
110/181
or
61%
44/59
or
75%
Partial
decline,
upward
breakout
63/88
or
72%
31/39
or
79%
N/A
N/A
Partial
rise
performance
N/A
N/A
–16%
–19%
Partial
decline
performance
29%
21%
N/A
N/A
Intraformation
partial
rise
failure
17/183
or
9%
6/62
or
10%
14/182
or
8%
3/66
or
5%
Intraformation
partial
decline
failure
15/183
or
8%
4/62
or
6%
14/182
Or
8%
13/66
or
20%
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
N/A
means
not
applicable.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 73

74 Broadening Tops
from 5% to 20%. These are the information partial rises and declines. They look
like loops touching a trend line, and they occur after the pattern is established.
Table 4.5 shows a frequency distribution of days to the ultimate high or
low. For example, in a bull market with an upward breakout, almost half (48%)
take longer than 70 days to reach the ultimate high. About a quarter (27%, or
22 + 5) top out in fewer than 2 weeks. This observation suggests that in a bull
market, you should be patient.
In a bear market with a downward breakout, 30% reach bottom in the
first week. Half (48%) bottom in 2 weeks. Just 11% are still searching for the
ultimate low after 70 days. Thus, be prepared to take profits quickly.
Scan across the rows for upward blips in the numbers. They usually occur
about a month after the breakout and signal a possible trend change. Bear mar-
kets are especially prone to this behavior (4 to 6 weeks after the breakout,
according to Table 4.5).
Table 4.6 shows statistics related to size.
Height. In most cases, tall patterns do better than do their short coun-
terparts. The one exception is in a bear market with an upward breakout.
To use this information, measure the pattern’s height from the highest
high to the lowest low. Divide the difference by the breakout price (for upward
breakouts, it is the highest high in the pattern; for downward breakout, use the
lowest low). Then compare the result with the median shown in Table 4.6. A
result higher than the median means you have a tall pattern; lower means a
shorter pattern. For best results, select tall broadening tops and avoid short ones.
Width. Sometimes wide patterns outperform (bull market, up breakout
and bear market, down breakout), and sometimes narrow ones do better (bear
market, up breakout). I used the median length as the separator between wide
and narrow.
Table 4.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 18% 10% 5% 8% 8% 3% 2% 2% 0% 5% 40%
Bull market,
up breakout 22% 5% 5% 2% 6% 3% 3% 3% 2% 2% 48%
Bear market,
down
breakout 30% 18% 12% 9% 5% 8% 5% 2% 2% 0% 11%
Bull market,
down
breakout 34% 8% 5% 4% 5% 4% 5% 4% 2% 3% 26%
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 74

Statistics 75
Average formation length. The average pattern width ranges from 49
days to 65 days, or about 2 months long. If you compare the average length
with the average rise or decline from Table 4.2, you see that the highest aver-
age length (bull market, up breakout) is also the best performer. For downward
breakouts, the widest pattern (bear market, downward breakout) is also the best
performer.
Height and width combinations. Table 4.6 shows the performance
results after combining the characteristics of height and width. Due to the low
sample counts, the results are inconsistent.
Volume trend. Patterns in bull markets do better with a falling volume
trend. Bear market patterns excel with a rising volume trend.
Volume shapes. Most of the time, patterns with U-shaped volume per-
form well. The exception is for patterns with upward breakouts in a bull mar-
ket. They perform better with dome-shaped volume.
Breakout volume. In all cases, light breakout volume either has no effect
or helps performance.
Table 4.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
of breakout price
Short and narrow performance 21% 35%a
–15% –19%a
Short and wide performance 23% 18%a
–10%a
–19%a
Tall and wide performance 36% 23%a
–17% –22%a
Tall and narrow performance 45% 19%a
–15%a
–20%a
a
Fewer Less than 30 samples.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 75

76 Broadening Tops
Trading Tactics
Table 4.8 outlines trading tactics for broadening top formations.
Measure rule. The first thing to consider about trading tactics is the
measure rule. The measure rule predicts the price to which the stock will
move. For many formations, one simply computes the height of the formation
and adds the result to the breakout price. Broadening formations are not much
different. Consider Figure 4.5. The height of the formation is the difference
between the highest high (12.13) and the lowest low (10), or 2.13. For upward
breakouts, add the height to the highest high in the chart pattern giving a min-
imum price move of 14.26, as shown in the figure.
How do you make use of the measure rules? Imagine that you are con-
sidering purchasing the stock. Since it is never clear which way a broadening
formation will ultimately break out, it is difficult to pick a good long-term
entry point. The easiest way to invest using the formation is to buy just after
the stock turns at the bottom trend line.
Go long at the low. Since a broadening formation requires two points
along the top trend line and two along the bottom before the formation appears,
point A in Figure 4.5 shows one likely investment location. Before placing the
Table 4.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Rising volume trend
performance 27% 27% –14% –21%
performance 32% 18%a
–16% –17%a
U-shaped volume
pattern performance 25% 32% –17% –22%
–15% –19%a
–9% –13%a
performance 28% 24% –15% –19%
–15% –24%a
a
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 76

Trading Tactics 77
Table 4.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the height between the highest high and the
lowest low in the formation. Add or subtract the height from
the highest high or lowest low, respectively. The results are
the target prices for upward and downward breakouts.
Go long at the low Once a broadening top appears, buy after the stock makes its
turn at the low.
Long stop Place a stop-loss order 0.15 below the minor low. Should the
stock reverse course, you will be protected.
Go short at the high Sell short after prices start heading down at the top.
Short stop Place a stop 0.15 above the minor high to protect against an
adverse breakout. Cover the short when it turns at the bottom
trend line and starts moving up. For a downward breakout,
cover as it nears the target price or any support level.
Partial decline Go long if a broadening top shows a partial decline. Consider
adding to your position once it makes an upward breakout.
Jul 91
Stop-Loss Point
Flag Formation
Target Price
B
A
Double Top
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
Esterline Technologies (Precision Instrument, NYSE, ESL)
Figure 4.5 Use the measure rule to compute the target price. First, compute the
formation height from the highest high to the lowest low then add or subtract the
height from the highest high or lowest low, respectively. Depending on the break-
out direction, the result is the expected target price.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 77

78 Broadening Tops
buy order, compute the target price using the measure rule. The target price
will help you determine if the potential gain is worth the risk. In the example
shown in Figure 4.5, the purchase price is about 10.38 and the target price is
14.25, a 37% move. The stop loss should be 9.85, for a potential loss of 5%,
which gives a reward-to-risk ratio of 7 to 1, more than enough to risk a trade.
On an upward breakout, prices reach the target about 60% of the time.
Thus, do not depend on prices reaching the target.
Long stop. Buy the stock as soon after it touches the lower trend line and
moves higher. Place a stop-loss order 0.15 below the lowest low (0.15 below
point A). Should prices drop, your position will likely be sold before a large
loss occurs.
If the stock fails to break out upward, perhaps you can join the ride to the
upper trend line. Buy when prices turn upward at the lower trend line, then be
ready to sell once prices reach the old high. Prices may pause for a bit before
moving higher and tagging the top trend line or they may reverse at this point.
Make sure your stops have been raised to protect your profits.
What about the measure rule for downward breakouts? Again, the for-
mation height is 2.13. Subtract 2.13 from the lowest low (10) to arrive at the
target price of 7.87. If prices break out downward, they should reach 7.87.
However, the reliability of the target price for downward breakouts is just 35%
—not very reassuring.
Short tips. For short positions in broadening tops, open the short after
the price touches point B and begins heading down. Place a stop 0.15 above the
highest high (12.28 in this case) to limit your losses. Lower your stop to the
next minor high or apex of the broadening top (either 11.88 or 11.13 in this
case) once the stock nears point A. Sometimes the stock will not make it down
to the trend line before beginning to move up. At other times, there is a
lengthy pause before prices turn around or continue down. A lower stop-loss
point helps you achieve at least some measure of profit.
Partial decline. The last trading tactic is to look out for partial rises or
declines, which occur when prices begin to cross the formation but do not
come close to the opposite side. Instead, prices reverse course and break out
soon after. When you see a partial rise or decline, place a trade once the stock
reverses course. If a breakout happens, then consider adding to your position.
Sample Trade
Sandra has always taken a liking to the stock market but never had enough
money to jump into the game. Still, she paper traded stocks just to get a feel for
the markets and dreamed of one day trading for real. Then her parents died in
a tragic car accident with a drunk driver.
The year that followed was tough for Sandra because she was close to
them and missed them dearly. She bought a dog to help fill the void in her life,
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 78

but it was not the same. Fortunately, her parents had insurance and a few sav-
ings, all of which she inherited. After paying taxes to the government, she sud-
denly realized there was no need to continue working. “Why wait till I’m older
when my health might be gone or I might die young like my parents?” She
retired at 29.
Sandra knew that if she cut her expenses to the bone she could live off the
savings. She paid off the mortgage, the car loan, and the credit card balances,
and she stopped going out to eat in restaurants. Her lifestyle changed to
accommodate the limited income, but one thing she would not compromise:
her paper trading.
After opening a brokerage account, she waited for the perfect trade and
finally found it; the one shown in Figure 4.5. She saw the broadening top for-
mation early enough to buy into the stock before the breakout. Two days after
the stock reached point A, she placed her order and received a fill at 10.50.
Immediately, she placed a stop 0.15 below the lowest low, or 9.85 for a poten-
tial loss of 6%.
Sandra applied the measure rule and was looking at a target of 14.25. If
everything worked as expected, that would give her a return of over 35%. After
she placed the trade, she sat back and waited but kept an eye on the price
action. When prices paused at the high of the formation, she wondered if the
trend was going to reverse. She considered taking her profits and running but
decided against it. After a few days, she recognized a flag formation and hoped
that it represented a half-staff move (the flag being a halfway point in the
upward move). If that were true, she could expect a climb to 13.25 (that is the
distance from the top of the flag (12.13) to the start of the move at 10 projected
upward using the lowest low in the flag at 11.13).
A few days later, the stock not only fulfilled the measure rule for the flag
formation, but for the broadening top as well. Did Sandra sell? No. Since the
stock was moving up, she decided to let her profits ride. However, she did raise
her stop to 11.85, or 0.15 below the formation high. She viewed this point as a
support zone and hoped that should the stock retreat to that level, it would
rebound before taking her out.
In mid-February, just after the second peak around 17 appeared, she rec-
ognized a double top formation. She moved her stop to 0.15 below the confir-
mation point, or 14.25. About 2 weeks after raising her stop, her position sold
when the stock plunged from the prior close at 15.63 to 12.13. After commis-
sions, she made 33% in less than 4 months.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select broadening
tops that perform better after the breakout. Consult the associated table for
more information.
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 79

• Review the identification guidelines for correct selection—Table 4.1
• Select patterns in line with the market trend (bull market, upward
breakout or bear market, downward breakout). They show the best
performance—Table 4.2.
• Bear markets decline at a steeper slope than bull markets rise, but the
move is not as far—Table 4.2.
• Select patterns in a bull market with upward breakouts for the lowest
failure rates—Table 4.3.
• Pick patterns with breakouts near the yearly low—Table 4.4.
• A partial rise or decline correctly predicts the breakout direction most
of the time—Table 4.4.
• Half the bear market patterns with down breakouts reach the ultimate
low in about 2 weeks. Be prepared to take profits quickly—Table 4.5.
• In a bear market, expect a trend change 4 to 6 weeks after the break-
out—Table 4.5.
• Pick bull market patterns with a falling volume trend and bear market
patterns with a rising volume trend—Table 4.7.
• Most patterns do best with U-shaped volume—Table 4.7.
80 Broadening Tops
4366_04.qxd 2/23/05 11:31 AM Page 80

81
5
Broadening Wedges,
Ascending
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Prices follow two up-sloping trend lines that
broaden out. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 50% 70%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance. Patterns with
heavy breakout volume perform better.
Downward Breakouts
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 81

Pullbacks 57% 52%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance but breakout day
gaps help. A partial rise predicts a downward
breakout. Narrow patterns perform better
than wide ones. Heavy breakout volume
propels price farther.
The Results Snapshot shows statistics for the ascending broadening wedge
(ABW). Since the pattern is so rare in a bear market, many of the remarks in
this chapter concern bull markets only. The break-even failure rate is probably
higher than the 2% shown in a bull market due to the low sample count. For
downward breakouts, the break-even failure rate is probably accurate at 11%.
The 38% average rise is above the 36% rise for other bullish chart patterns.
If you can tell when the trend changes, you can make a lot of money after
a downward breakout. For example, after the stock reaches the ultimate low,
prices rise an average of 49%. Thus, even if you miss the turn, there are still
profits waiting if you trade the pattern properly.
ABWs have a few surprises, most of which we have seen before. A partial
rise comes at the end of the pattern, and it accurately predicts a downward
breakout about 75% of the time. More about that and the other surprises in the
Statistics section.
Tour
What does an ascending broadening wedge look like? Consider the chart pat-
tern in Figure 5.1. The first thing you notice is the two sloping trend lines; the
top one has a slightly steeper slope than the bottom one. Together, the two
trend lines spread out over time but both slope upward. Once prices pierce the
bottom trend line, they drop rapidly. The chart looks like a pie-shaped wedge
that slopes uphill. That is why it is called an ascending broadening wedge. The
price action alternates and is contained by two nonparallel trend lines.
Figure 5.2 shows a better example of a broadening wedge, with two up-
sloping trend lines where the slope of the top trend line is much steeper than
the bottom one.
82 Broadening Wedges, Ascending
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 82

Tour 83
Air Express Intl. Corp. (Air Transport, NASDAQ, AEIC)
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
Figure 5.1 An ascending broadening wedge. Two up-sloping trend lines contain
prices that broaden over time.
Barrick Gold (Gold/Silver Mining, NYSE, ABX)
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
Partial Rise
Failed Partial Rise
Jan 92 Feb Mar Apr May Jun
Sep 91 Oct Nov Dec
Pullback
Figure 5.2 An ascending broadening wedge. The broadening feature is clear in
this chart. The partial rise and failure to touch the upper trend line is a signal of an
impending trend change.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 83

Figures 5.1 and 5.2 both show a similar situation. The formation appears
at the end of a rising price trend and signals a reversal. Although a reversal is
not always the case, nor is the formation required to be at the end of a rising
price trend, both situations occur more often than not.
Figure 5.2 also shows an interesting pattern that is key in identifying the
start of a new price trend: the partial rise. After touching the lower trend line,
prices again move up but fail to touch the higher trend line. As prices descend,
they pierce the lower trend line and continue moving down. The chart also
shows a similar situation that occurs earlier in the price pattern, around the
start of the new year: That rising price trend fails to touch the upper trend line.
Prices return to the lower trend line, then rebound and zoom up again to
touch the higher trend line. The partial rise fails to predict a change in trend.
We explore partial rises later.
Why does a broadening wedge form? Pretend for a moment that you are
the head of an investment conglomerate that has big bucks to spend and wants
to buy shares in another company. When the price is low, you instruct your
trading department to begin buying. The sudden buying demand forces the
price to climb even though the trading department spreads its orders over sev-
eral days and through several brokers. The trading department tries to keep its
buying quiet, but the word gets out that you are in the market. The momen-
tum players jump on your coattails and ride the stock upward by buying too.
This sends the stock higher than you expected, so your trading department
stops buying for the moment.
Value investors, sensing an overbought situation developing, are willing
to sell their shares at the higher price. Soon the stock is moving down again.
But before it can reach its old low, the buy-the-dip crowd jumps in and halts
the decline. Your trading department, seeing a higher low form, jumps back in
and buys while the price is still reasonable. Some new value investors also
decide the stock is worthy of a flyer and add to the buying pressure. The com-
pany itself gets into the act and buys shares authorized by the board of direc-
tors as a share-buyback program announced long ago. The buyback program
is nearing the expiration date and the company feels it is the right time to buy
to complete their promise to shareholders.
The stock makes a new high. When it climbs high enough, the selling
pressure overwhelms the buying demand and sends the shares lower, but the
price will not drop far—not with everyone trying to buy at a good price. What
you have then are much higher highs from the unbridled buying enthusiasm
and higher, but more sane, lows as your conglomerate and the company itself
try to buy near a fixed low price. You never quite succeed and pay higher and
higher prices as the minor lows move up.
Soon, however, the stock is too pricey even for your tastes. You may even
decide it is time to sell some, or all, of your holdings. Meanwhile, the momen-
tum players send the stock coasting higher, but this time the price does not
come close to the upper trend line.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 84

Everyone has an ear to the ground listening, trying to figure out what all the
buying enthusiasm is about. In the distance, a rumble sounds. The same-store
sales numbers are going to be lower this quarter, the shorts say. This time the
rumor finds sympathetic ears. The rumble heard earlier is the stampede of the
smart money running for the exits. The price drops quickly. It may hover for a bit
around support zones while novice investors, who have not gotten the word, buy
the stock. When they finish placing their trades, the meager buying demand
abates and the stock crashes through the lower trend line and heads down further.
There are a number of identification guidelines, outlined in Table 5.1, that
make this formation unique. As I discuss the different guidelines, consider the
ascending broadening wedge depicted in Figure 5.3. This formation is differ-
ent from Figures 5.1 and 5.2 in that it is born from a region of consolidation.
From the beginning of the study in July 1991, prices move generally horizon-
tally and do not fall much below the 15.38 level (Figure 5.3 shows only a por-
tion of the prior price action).
The situation changes just before the new year. Prices start moving up on
December 23. They reach a new high in mid-January but soon move down. At
that point, two tentative trend lines connect the highs and lows. Although it is
too early to form a definitive conclusion, a broadening wedge appears to be
taking shape. After prices move up and touch the upper trend line then pull
Table 5.1
Shape Looks like a megaphone, tilted up, with price action that
outlines two up-sloping trend lines.
Trend lines The top trend line has a steeper upward slope than the lower
one and neither is horizontal.
Touches There should be at least three distinct touches (or near
touches) of the trend lines on each side. This helps assure
proper identification and performance of the formation.
Volume Irregular with a slight tendency to rise over the length of the
formation.
Premature breakouts Very rare. A close below the lower trend line is usually a
genuine breakout.
Breakout The breakout direction is downward the vast majority of
times, but an upward breakout is not unheard of.
Partial rise Prices touch the lower trend line, climb toward the top trend
line, but fail to touch it. Prices reverse direction and break out
downward from the formation.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 85

back to the lower one again, the broadening wedge formation is clearly visible.
At the start of March, prices move higher but quickly stall, turn around, and
pierce the lower trend line. The partial rise and trend-line penetration suggest
a trend change is at hand.
It is a false breakout. Prices travel higher for 3 days in a tight, narrow pattern
then zoom upward and touch the upper trend line. The bottom trend line has to
be redrawn to accommodate the slight decline below the old trend line. Clearly,
prices have more work to do before declining below the lower trend line.
A month later, prices return to the lower trend line and move higher for
a few days. However, the rise stalls and prices pierce the lower trend line. Like
a replay of the price action a month earlier, prices pull back to the trend line
and start moving higher. However, this rise falters on low volume and prices
quickly return to the lower trend line. When prices gap down on April 16, the
genuine breakout occurs. In rapid fashion, prices plummet to below 12.75,
nearly a 50% decline from the high.
Shape and trend lines. Looking back at Figures 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3, there
are several characteristics that ascending broadening wedges have in common.
The overall shape appears as a megaphone, but this megaphone tilts upward:
both trend lines slope higher. The upper trend line has a higher slope than the
lower one, giving the formation a broadening appearance.
Touches. In my studies of ascending broadening wedges, I select forma-
tions that have at least three touches of each trend line (or at least come close). The
Fleetwood Enterprises (Manuf. Housing/Rec. Veh., NYSE, FLE)
Nov 91 Dec
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
Partial Rise
False Breakout
Figure 5.3 A broadening formation that fails to continue moving down, requir-
ing a redraw of the formation boundaries. The internal partial rise is rare, occurring
in about 5% of the formations.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 86

three-touch minimum helps remove consideration given to normal price
action and helps identify reliable chart patterns.
Volume. The volume pattern is irregular but generally rises as prices move
up and recedes as prices decline. Although it is not clear from the charts, volume
tends to rise over time. However, this tendency is slight when considering all
ascending broadening wedges and is not a mandatory selection guideline.
Breakouts. Figure 5.3 shows an exceptional premature breakout. Usu-
ally, prices follow the lower trend line and do not penetrate it until very near
the breakout. When prices do break out, the price action can be messy, as
shown in the figure. Sometimes price runs straight through the lower trend
line without pausing, and sometimes it weaves around the trend line before
finally continuing down. In either case, the breakout is usually downward.
Partial rise. The partial rise, already mentioned, occurs in half of the
ascending broadening wedges. Since it usually occurs just before a breakout, it
is an important trend change indicator. In a partial rise, prices start moving up,
after having touched the lower trend line, then stop before touching (or com-
ing close to) the upper one. Prices return to the lower trend line and usually
head lower, staging a genuine breakout. Note that a partial rise must begin
from the lower trend line, not as an upward retrace from the top trend line.
Focus on Failures
Figure 5.4 shows what a failure looks like. Although prices break out down-
ward, they fail to continue moving down by more than 5%. The breakout
Eaton Corp. (Auto Parts (OEM), NYSE, ETN)
– 62
– 61
– 60
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
Jan 94 Feb Mar
Breakout
Pullback
Figure 5.4 An ascending broadening wedge that fails to continue moving down.
Prices decline less than 5% below the breakout point before moving higher.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 87

occurs at a price of 50.13 and prices move to a low of 48.63 about 2 weeks later,
resulting in a 3% decline—too small to register as a success.
Only 22 out of 187, or 12%, of the formations breaking out downward
fail to continue moving down by more than 5%. However, failures do occur. A
friend of mine found out the hard way. She blindly shorted an ascending
broadening wedge, and, despite a 74% chance that the formation would break
out downward, she was stuck with a losing position when the probability went
against her. As with most chart patterns, it pays to wait for a confirmed break-
out before investing.
Statistics
Table 5.2 shows general statistics for ascending broadening wedges.
Number of formations. Despite searching through years of daily price
data, I did not find as many patterns as I wanted: 255. When you split them
into four categories and most of them bunch into a bull market with a down-
ward breakout, what is an author to do? I decided to leave the tables in the
standard format, hoping that even a little information is better than none.
Reversal or continuation. The vast majority of the time (64%, anyway),
the pattern acts as a reversal of the prevailing price trend. When the breakout
is upward, we find more acting as continuations of the trend than reversals.
When the breakout is in the direction of the prevailing market trend (upward
breakout, bull market or downward breakout, bear market), reversals outper-
form continuations.
Table 5.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 14 R, 44 C 1 R, 9 C 132 R, 34 C 17 R, 4 C
36% C 19% C –17% C –19% C
30%a
–37%a
N/A
Notes: Minus sign means decline. N/A means no samples available.
a
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 88

Statistics 89
Average rise or decline. When the breakout goes against the prevailing
market trend, performance suffers. Thus, it is more profitable to trade with the
trend instead of against it.
Rises or declines over 45%. Only in a bull market with an upward
breakout does the pattern begin to shine. Thirty-three percent of the 58 pat-
terns rise more than 45%. For the other categories, do not expect a large gain.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate high or low,
what happens? After the high, prices tumble 30% on average. After the low,
they climb 37% in a bear market and 49% in a bull market. If you can tell when
the stock has topped out or bottomed, take appropriate action by selling short
or buying, respectively.
Busted pattern performance. When price moves less than 5% after the
breakout and reenters the chart pattern, trade the new direction.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Table 5.2 shows the influence of the
general market on the average rise or decline. In a bull market, for example, the
rise was 17% and prices climbed 38%, the best of the upward breakouts. In a
bear market, the index dropped 7% and prices dropped 21%.
Days to ultimate high or low. How long does it take to reach the ulti-
mate high or low? It varies from 78 to 161 days to reach the ultimate high and
51 to 63 days to reach the ultimate low. The difference depends on market
conditions. Note that prices after an ABW breakout in a bear market drop at a
steeper slope than the rise in bull markets.
Table 5.3 shows failure rates. How do you make sense of the numbers?
Let me give you two examples. In a bull market with a downward breakout,
11% of the patterns failed to drop more than 5%. In a bull market with an
upward breakout, 10% failed to rise at least 10%.
Table 5.3
Failure Rates
10 6 or 10% 2 or 20% 56 or 34% 4 or 19%
15 13 or 22% 5 or 50% 84 or 51% 7 or 33%
20 18 or 31% 5 or 50% 103 or 62% 10 or 48%
25 25 or 43% 6 or 60% 127 or 77% 13 or 62%
30 31 or 53% 7 or 70% 142 or 86% 18 or 86%
35 35 or 60% 8 or 80% 145 or 87% 18 or 86%
50 43 or 74% 10 or 100% 165 or 99% 21 or 100%
75 51 or 88% 10 or 100% 166 or 100% 21 or 100%
Over 75 58 or 100% 10 or 100% 166 or 100% 21 or 100%
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 89

You can see how the failure rates start comparatively small then shoot up
as the maximum price rise or decline increases. Ignoring the small sample
counts for bear markets, the lowest failure rates occur in patterns with an
upward breakout in a bull market. Half the patterns fail to rise more than
about 27% under those conditions (bull/up).
Formation end to breakout. It takes between 12 and 30 days before
price closes outside the trend-line boundary. That is an average, so your results
will vary. Upward breakouts take longer than downward ones to pierce the
trend line. This observation makes sense because the upper trend line has a
steeper slope and prices are rising along with the trend line. For downward
breakouts, the trend line slopes up but prices are falling.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range do ABWs occur? The
breakout usually happens near the yearly high except in a bear market with a
downward breakout, which shows more breakouts in the middle of the yearly
range.
Yearly position, performance. Mapping performance onto the yearly
price range, we find that the middle of the yearly price range performs better
than the other ranges. The exception is for ABWs with downward breakouts in
a bull market, but the sample size is small.
the time, and it takes the stock between 9 and 13 days to return to the break-
out price. However, when throwbacks and pullbacks occur, performance suf-
fers, as Table 5.4 shows (except for ABWs in a bear market with upward
breakouts).
Gaps. Most of the time, when a breakout day gap occurs, performance
improves. The exception: the 51% rise in a bull market may come down with
additional samples.
Partial rises and declines. Consider the bull market, down breakout
column that has a good sample size. A partial rise correctly anticipated the
downward breakout 74% of the time. When a partial rise occurs, prices drop
17% after the breakout, on average, meeting the average decline for ABWs.
and declines—those that occur within the pattern but with prices that continue
crossing the pattern—occur, at most, 17% of the time. Thus, you should feel
safe trading a partial rise or decline. They get you into the trade before the
breakout and correctly predict the breakout direction (usually). Consult the
Glossary if you are unfamiliar with a partial rise or decline.
low. Since the bear market samples are few, look at the two bull market rows.
Over half (52%) of upward breakouts do not reach the ultimate high before 70
days. Half of all downward breakouts will bottom in the first month (20 + 10 +
14 + 7 = 51% in 28 days). If price reaches the ultimate high or low quickly, the
return is usually below those patterns that take longer. Thus, the key to this
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 90

91
Table
5.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
a
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
a
a
Formation
end
to
breakout
30
days
16
days
14
days
12
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L2%,
C11%,
H88%
L20%,
C20%,
H60%
L10%,
C32%,
H58%
L14%,
C48%,
H38%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L37%
a
,
C38%
a
,
H38%
L10%,
C26%,
H20%
L20%
a
,
C15%,
H17%
L17%,
C26%,
H15%
50%
70%
57%
52%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
11
days
9
days
10
days
13
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
32%
a
20%
–16%
–18%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
42%
a
13%
–19%
–24%
Performance
with
breakout
gap
51%
a
18%
–22%
–28%
Performance
without
breakout
gap
37%
20%
–16%
–20%
Average
gap
size
$0.29
$0.24
$0.17
$1.77
Partial
rise,
downward
breakout
N/A
N/A
97/131
or
74%
18/23
or
78%
Partial
decline,
upward
breakout
7/20
or
35%
3/3
or
100%
N/A
N/A
Partial
rise
performance
N/A
N/A
–17%
–19%
Partial
decline
performance
43%
a
13%
N/A
N/A
Intraformation
partial
rise
failure
2/58
or
3%
1/10
or
10%
10/166
or
6%
0/21
or
0%
Intraformation
partial
decline
failure
5/58
or
9%
0/10
or
0%
28/166
or
17%
2/21
or
10%
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
N/A
means
not
applicable.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 91

chart is selecting patterns that have long rises or declines. Those would be
upward breakouts in a bull market and downward breakouts in a bear market.
This pattern also plays into the “trade with the trend” theory.
Notice the slight up move in ABWs in a bull market (both breakout direc-
tions) at day 42. Look for a trend change to occur about 6 weeks after the
breakout.
Table 5.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 10% 0% 20% 10% 10% 10% 0% 0% 0% 0% 40%
Bull market,
up breakout 5% 10% 3% 5% 0% 9% 3% 2% 7% 3% 52%
Bear market,
down
breakout 14% 24% 10% 5% 10% 0% 0% 0% 0% 10% 29%
Bull market,
down
breakout 20% 10% 14% 7% 4% 6% 3% 2% 4% 3% 27%
Table 5.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Description Breakouta
Breakouta
Breakout Breakouta
of breakout price
Short and wide performance 33% 13% –12%a
–8%
Tall and wide performance 45% 22% –18% –20%
Tall and narrow performance 73% 6% –17%a
–20%
a
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 92

Height. Only bull markets with downward breakouts had enough sam-
ples to trust. Tall patterns perform better than short ones, by dropping 18%
versus 16%, respectively. How do you use this finding? Compute the price dif-
ference between the highest high and the lowest low and then divide by the
breakout price. If the result is higher than the median, the pattern is tall; lower
than the median, the pattern is short.
Width. Most of the time, narrow patterns perform better than wide ones.
I used the median length as the divider between wide and narrow.
Average formation length. The average ABW length varies from 61 to
99 days, or about 2 to 3 months long.
Height and width combinations. Even in a bull market with downward
breakouts, the sample size is small. What we can say is that ABWs that are both
short and wide have poor performance. Other combinations of height and
width show better performance.
Volume trend. The volume trend shows little influence on postbreakout
performance, especially when you take the sample size into consideration
(large samples show no performance difference).
Statistics 93
Table 5.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakouta
Rising volume trend
performance 38% 19% –17% –17%
performance 38%a
18% –17% –26%
U-shaped volume
pattern performance 48%a
18% –17% –19%
performance 39%a
20% –17% –23%
shaped volume pattern 30%a
18% –17% –22%
performance
performance 38% 18% –18% –22%
performance 37%a
14% –16% –18%
a
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 93

Volume shapes. Patterns in bull markets were either unchanged or per-
formed better with U-shaped volume. In a bear market, patterns with dome-
shaped volume did best.
Breakout volume. Heavy breakout volume helped performance across
the board.
Trading Tactics
Measure rule. The measure rule for this formation is different from
most other formations in that it is based on the lowest low in the pattern, not
on the height of the formation (for downward breakouts only). Upward break-
outs use the height from highest high to lowest low added to the highest high.
The result is the target price. The Results Snapshot lists the “Percentage meet-
ing price target” results.
Figure 5.5 shows two ascending broadening wedges and application of the
measure rule. Both formations are well formed, but the first one has a tendency
to rise slightly above the top trend line before beginning its downhill run. The
chart marks the lowest low in each formation. The low serves as the expected
minimum price move. The formation on the left shows prices reaching the tar-
get in mid-November just as prices turn around and rebound. The formation
shown on the right has prices hitting the target when they plummet.
The reason for choosing the lowest low in the formation is simply for
performance. Using the formation low as the target price allows 58% to 86%
of the formations to achieve the target. I like to see performance numbers
above 80%, so the 58% value is poor. As you look at the formation on the
right, you can see how close the price target really is to the breakout price.
Table 5.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule For downward breakouts, use the lowest price in the
formation as the minimum price move to expect. For upward
breakouts, use the formation height added to the breakout
price.
Wait for confirmation Although this formation breaks out downward 73% of the
time, it is best to wait for a downward breakout before
shorting the stock.
Partial rise If a stock shows a partial rise and begins to head back toward
the lower trend line, consider selling short. A downward
breakout follows a partial rise.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 94

Wait for confirmation. This formation has a good track record of down-
ward breakouts. However, 27% of the time prices break out upward. If you
wait for a breakout before investing, you substantially increase your chances of
a profitable trade. Once prices decline below the lower trend line, sell the stock
short. Be prepared to cover the short as prices near the target, especially if the
price approaches an area of support.
In Figure 5.5, the lowest formation low on the left is also a support point.
Prices decline to the low in early August then head up and create the formation.
Several months later, prices decline to that level and turn around. As prices
decline after the second formation, the support level at 36 changes into resis-
tance. During March, prices try to rebound but turn away near the 36 level.
Partial rise. An exception to the wait for breakout-confirmation rule is if
a partial rise occurs. Looking again at Figure 5.5, you might conclude that
there is a partial rise in the right formation. Wrong. I define a partial rise as
when prices touch the lower trend line, move up, then return to the lower
trend line. The figure shows prices starting from the top trend line, not the
lower one. Figure 5.2 shows a properly identified partial rise.
If you detect a partial rise, consider shorting the stock. In 74% to 78% of
the cases, a downward breakout follows a partial rise. Since you are buying
before the breakout, your profits should be larger. When the stock declines to
the lower trend line, move your stop-loss order to break even. If the stock
should turn around at the trend line and head up, consider closing out your
position.
Trading Tactics 95
Centex Corp. (Homebuilding, NYSE, CTX)
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
Jan 94 Feb Mar Apr
Not a Partial
Rise
Stock Shorted
Target Price
Target Price
Covered
Lowest Formation
Low
Lowest Formation
Low
Double Top
Figure 5.5 The measure rule as it applies to two ascending broadening wedges.
Astute investors will recognize the twin peaks as a double top.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 95

Sample Trade
Curtis works the night shift at a large bakery near his home. Working at night
frees the daylight hours for other activities, such as sleep. Occasionally, he
spots a situation such as that shown in Figure 5.5, one that makes the morning
sun seem even brighter.
Each day before he hit the sack, he plotted the stock and watched with
amusement as the first broadening wedge formed. When the second one
appeared, he wiped the sleep from his eyes and took notice. It was not so much
the broadening wedge that excited him; it was the wedge coupled with the dou-
ble top. Together, they spelled an especially bearish situation, one that he was
willing to shell out his hard earned money to trade.
The day after the stock closed below the lower trend line, Curtis sold the
stock short and received a fill at 39.50. He used the double top measure rule to
estimate his target price. With a top at 45.75 and a valley low of 36.25, the target
turned out to be 26.75 (that is 45.75–36.25 subtracted from 36.25). He decided to
place an order to cover the short at 27.13, just above the whole number and just
above where everyone else was likely to place theirs. Then he went to bed.
Each day, before he closed the curtains to get some sleep, he would check
on his stock. To him, it was pleasing to see the stock begin moving down
immediately and sailing below the nearest broadening wedge target price
(38.88). He lost some sleep worrying about the upward retrace in March, and
wondered if the party were over.
Curtis hung in there and the stock eventually pierced the resistance zone
and kept moving down. He hoped that the March resistance was just the cor-
rective phase of a measured move down, which would place the target price at
22.50, well below his target at 27.13. He decided not to be greedy and lower
his target.
On April 18 he was rudely awakened from his REM state by a phone call
from his broker. The short was covered at his target price. He made about $12
a share. That put a smile on his face, and he went back to his dream of telling
his boss what he could do with the night shift.
The following list includes tips and observations to select patterns that perform
well. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Use the identification guidelines to select a pattern—Table 5.1.
• Most broadening wedges breakout downward—Table 5.2.
• Trade with the market trend: Select wedges in a bear market with a
downward breakout or in a bull market with an upward breakout—
Table 5.2.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 96

• The lowest failure rates occur with patterns in a bull market and
upward breakout—Table 5.3.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance. Look for overhead resis-
tance or underlying support before trading—Table 5.4.
• Breakout day gaps usually help performance—Table 5.4.
• A partial rise or decline allows you to enter a trade sooner and usually
predicts the breakout direction—Table 5.4.
• Look for a trend change 6 weeks after the breakout in a bull market—
Table 5.5.
• Pick patterns with heavy breakout volume—Table 5.7.
4366_05.qxd 2/23/05 11:32 AM Page 97

98
6
Broadening Wedges,
Descending
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Price follows two down-sloping trend lines
that broaden out. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 53% 61%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance but breakout
day gaps help. Tall patterns perform better
than short ones. Patterns with a falling
volume trend perform better.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 98

Downward Breakouts
Reversal or continuation Short-term bearish, evenly split between
reversal and continuation
Pullbacks 53% 66%
Surprising findings Breakout day gaps help performance. Tall or
narrow patterns perform better than short or
wide ones. Patterns with a rising volume
trend and U-shape do well.
“What’s going on?” I asked, and saw my dog’s ears perk up. She was nearby
when I started comparing the statistical results with the last edition. Everything
changed. With 117 samples, the descending broadening wedge (DBW) acted as
a consolidation, but no longer. The failure rate used to be 37%, but that included
patterns breaking out in the wrong direction. The average rise was 46%, but
with three times the number of samples and a different way of measuring, the
average rise is now lower. Even the measure rule changed (that is, the percent-
age meeting the predicted price target). I used the formation height and added it
to the breakout price to get the target. Now the formation top suffices.
I took my dog outside and played ball with her until I decided what to do.
Although I had 300 samples, I needed more. So, I scoured the three databases
I used for this book and found 464 patterns. Even so, splitting the numbers
into bull and bear markets with up and down breakouts made the sample
counts sometimes too small. The Results Snapshot shows the new numbers.
Tour
What does the formation look like? Figure 6.1 shows a well-formed descend-
ing broadening wedge. The stock begins rising in June 1994 and rounds over
at the top a year later, in August. In September, the stock starts down in tight
oscillations that broaden over time. A month later, two trend lines drawn
across the highs and lows make the wedge shape clear.
Tour 99
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 99

Volume at the start of the formation is well below normal. As the forma-
tion develops, volume is erratic, but trends higher. Computing the slope of the
volume line using linear regression confirms the result; the slope is positive,
which indicates volume is increasing.
In mid-October, prices gap up and shoot above the upper trend line. A
breakout occurs. Volume spikes upward and continues to be heavy for several
days as prices climb.
As you look at the chart, you may make an interesting observation. The
price trend has three stages: The first stage is the long bull-run from June 1994
to August 1995, leading to a consolidation or retrace for 2 months (second
stage), then prices move higher (third stage). In Figure 6.1, the broadening for-
mation is a consolidation of the upward trend. Taken as a whole, it looks like
the corrective phase of a measured move up chart pattern.
Contrast Figure 6.1 with Figure 6.2, where a descending broadening
wedge acts as a reversal of the intermediate-term price trend. Prices peak in
May 1992 and head lower. During August, prices begin to broaden out as they
continue their downward spiral. By mid-September, a descending broadening
wedge forms.
Volume is low at the start of the formation but does have a few spikes. Into
September, volume moves up and becomes even more irregular. At the start of
October, as prices begin moving up, volume recedes. Prices pierce the top trend
line on negligible volume and head higher. A trend reversal is at hand.
100 Broadening Wedges, Descending
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
May 95 Jul
Jun
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
Cognex (Precision Instrument, NASDAQ, CGNX)
Price Trend
Figure 6.1 This descending broadening wedge acts as a consolidation of the
upward trend. Two down-sloping trend lines outline price action that broadens
out. Volume usually increases over time.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 100

Table 6.1 outlines the identification guidelines for the formation, and Figure
6.3 shows another example of a descending broadening wedge.
Shape and trend lines. The figure shows two down-sloping trend lines
that encompass a series of oscillating prices. The two trend lines look like a
megaphone, tilted down. The chart pattern is narrow at the start but gets wider
May 92 Jul
Jun
Canandaigua Brands Inc. A (Beverage (Alcoholic), NASDAQ, CBRNA)
Volume Trend
Price Trend
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
Figure 6.2 This descending broadening wedge formation acts as a reversal of the
intermediate-term downward trend.
Table 6.1
Shape The formation looks like a megaphone tilted down.
Down-sloping Both trend lines slope downward, with the lower trend line having
trend lines a steeper slope. Thus, the two lines broaden out over time. Neither
trend line is horizontal.
Touches The formation requires at least two distinct touches of each trend line.
Volume Usually rises over the length of the formation. However, the volume
pattern is not a prerequisite.
Breakout Can be in any direction but 55% of the time, price breaks out
opposite the prevailing price trend.
Partial decline For a partial decline, prices must touch the top trend line and move
down, turn around, then head higher without coming close to the
lower trend line. An upward breakout usually follows a partial decline.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 101

over time. Neither trend line is horizontal, which is a key consideration since
it differentiates this formation from other types of broadening formations.
Touches. There are a number of touches of the minor highs against the
top trend line and the minor lows against the bottom one. There should be at
least two distinct touches—two minor highs (top trend line) and two minor
lows (bottom trend line)—to correctly define a broadening formation.
Volume. The slope of the volume trend is usually upward, unlike forma-
tions from the narrowing wedge family. The increasing volume pattern seems
to catapult prices higher, sending them out the top of the formation. Volume
at the breakout is usually high but need not be. As long as demand exceeds sup-
ply, prices will rise.
Breakout. Just over half the time, the formation acts as a reversal of the
trend. Figure 6.2 shows an example. There is no easy way to differentiate a
budding consolidation from a reversal. Only the breakout direction decides
which is which.
Partial decline. The partial decline, such as that shown in Figure 6.3,
often indicates an impending upward breakout. This works quite well for con-
solidations or reversals.
Why do these formations form? The chart pattern, as do many forma-
tions, illustrates the struggle between supply and demand. In Figure 6.3, after
attempting to close the September gap in early December, the stock stalls.
Buying enthusiasm dries up and the stock heads lower.
Sep 95 Oct Nov Dec Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr
Alaska Air Group Inc. (Air Transport, NYSE, ALK)
Breakout Occurs Here
Partial Decline
Followed by
Upward Breakout
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
Figure 6.3 A descending broadening wedge as a consolidation of the rising
trend. Volume moves higher even as prices head down. A partial decline signals
that an upward breakout is coming.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 102

Volume sometimes rises as prices near whole dollar amounts and at 38%,
50%, or 62% retraces of the prior rise or fall. At those points, prices are some-
what more likely to stage a rebound. That is what occurs in Figure 6.3. Prices rise
from a low of 13.63 to a high of 18.88. A 38% retrace of this range takes prices
back to 16.88. This is quite close to 17, and you can see some hesitation in the
stock at that level. However, once the stock approaches the 62% retrace level
(15.63), the smart money knows the jig is up. They start buying heavily for the 5
days surrounding the new year. Prices halt their decline and move higher. How-
ever, sellers are not sitting by idly. They sell into the rally and prices eventually
stall then drift lower, forming the partial decline highlighted in Figure 6.3.
As it happens, volume dries up as prices trace a V-shaped pattern. Low
volume before an upward breakout reminds me of the calm before an
approaching storm. Formations such as ascending and descending triangles
commonly have low volume just before a breakout. Volume spikes upward the
day prices close above the prior minor high (where the top trend lines ends in
January). The momentum players take the upper hand, and prices surge higher
on very high volume.
Focus on Failures
Look at Figure 6.4. Before the formation begins, prices are rising. Immediately
after the breakout, prices are also rising. The breakout process starts on Sep-
tember 3 when prices punch through the top trend line. However, they do not
Aug Sep Oct
Jul
Jun 92
United Technology (Diversified Co., NYSE, UTX)
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
Breakout
Breakaway
Gap
Throwback
Figure 6.4 This formation is a failure according to the 5% rule. Prices fail to move
up from the formation by more than 5% before moving down.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 103

travel very far before returning to the trend line. I have extended the top trend
line in Figure 6.4 to make the throwback clear. You see that prices ride along
it until they gap down (a breakaway gap) on September 17.
This formation is what I call a 5% failure, that is, when prices breakout
and move less than 5% before reversing. This type of failure is rare, occurring
just 6% of the time.
Why these failures occur is unclear. Sometimes overhead resistance to an
up move or underlying support to a downward move will halt prices and cause
a failure. Traders change their minds about a stock and bolt for the exits, caus-
ing price to move in an unexpected direction.
Statistics
Table 6.2 shows general statistics for the descending broadening wedge.
Number of formations. I combed through the database searching for
this pattern and found 464 from 1991 to late 2003 in about 500 stocks. This is
not an easy pattern to find; it is somewhat rare. It appears most often in a bear
market if you prorate the numbers.
Reversal or continuation. If you total the reversals, 255, and continua-
tions, 209, we find that the chart pattern acts as a reversal 55% of the time.
That is just above a fair coin toss, so if you expect prices to reverse after a
Table 6.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
113 C 45 C 26 C 25 C
38% C 28% C –19% C –25% C
43%a
–20%a
–25%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 9% –5% –5% –16%
a
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 104

DBW, you may be mistaken. Always trade in the direction of the breakout and
use stops in case prices reverse.
DBWs with upward breakouts that acted as continuations of the trend
vastly outperformed those acting as reversals. For downward breakouts, rever-
sals did slightly better in a bull market, but performance was unchanged in a
bear market.
Average rise or decline. This pattern is a strong performer when the
breakout is downward (meaning the numbers beat the averages for all chart pat-
tern types). For the best performance, go long in a bull market with an upward
breakout and go short in a bear market with a downward breakout. Those
“trade with the trend” patterns have the lowest failures and highest gains.
Rises or declines over 45%. Upward breakouts do well in this category
but downward breakouts suffer. In both directions, the numbers are about
what one would expect.
Change after trend ends. Once prices reach the ultimate high or low,
what happens? On average, prices tumble 33% from the high and rise almost
50% from the low. Thus, if you can determine when the trend changes, you
can profit handsomely. Use whatever method floats your boat to spot the trend
change, and then be patient. Prices drop faster than they rise, so keep that
in mind.
Busted pattern performance. Another way to look at performance is to
see how the pattern does after it fails to climb more than 5%. Unfortunately,
the sample counts are too small to make the numbers reliable. For example, the
43% rise in a bear market uses only one sample. Another way to look at the
numbers is to be thankful that the nonbusted patterns work so well.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The index changes between rising 9%
to declining 16%. You can see how the general market supported the DBW’s
average rise or decline.
Days to ultimate high or low. How long does it take to reach the ulti-
mate high or low? The average varies from a high of 131 days to a short 23
days. If you consider that it takes 3 weeks to drop 25% and 4.5 months to rise
33%, you can guess that the decline is steeper.
Table 6.3 shows failure rates for this pattern. The lowest failures begin
with a bear market and a downward breakout until the maximum price decline
reaches 20%. At that point, the bull market, up breakout takes over and shows
the lowest failure rate. Keep in mind that downward breakouts have compara-
tively few samples.
What do the numbers mean? Look at the bull market, upward breakout col-
umn. Six percent of the patterns fail to rise more than 5%. A quarter (26%) fail to
rise at least 15%. Half fail to make a 30% rise. Bull markets with downward
breakouts are the worst performers: Half of those fail to rise more than 15%.
By matching the breakout direction and the general market condition
(bull/bear) to your DBW, you can get a sense of how your pattern will perform.
Remember that each failure occurs when prices reverse direction and move
Statistics 105
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 105

more than 20%. Thus, if you buy a stock and it moves up 5% before reversing,
failure to sell may mean incurring a large loss or an extended recovery time.
Table 6.4 shows statistics related to breakout and postbreakout perfor-
mance of the DBW.
Formation end to breakout. It takes at least 2 weeks, and sometimes 3,
between the end of the pattern and the actual breakout. During that time,
prices may cross the pattern and approach the opposite trend line before
reversing.
Yearly position. Dividing the yearly price range into thirds for each
DBW, where does the breakout occur most often? Upward breakouts appear
most often in the middle of the yearly price range, but downward breakouts
occur near the yearly low.
Yearly position, performance. Mapping performance over the yearly
price range, we find that the results show no consistent trend. In a bear market,
we can say that the worst performance comes from patterns near the yearly high.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. Bear markets show a return to the breakout
price a bit more frequently than do patterns in a bull market. This finding sug-
gests that the breakout in a bull market is stronger than in a bear market.
When a throwback or pullback occurs, it takes between 9 and 11 days, on aver-
age, to complete the return to the breakout price.
Most of the time, a throwback/pullback hurts performance. The excep-
tion is for patterns in bull markets with downward breakouts, but the sample
count is small.
Gaps. Breakout day gaps help performance under all market conditions
and breakout directions.
Table 6.3
Failure Rates
10 46 or 17% 25 or 26% 12 or 26% 3 or 6%
15 70 or 26% 34 or 35% 24 or 51% 10 or 20%
20 95 or 35% 45 or 46% 31 or 66% 18 or 36%
25 120 or 44% 55 or 57% 34 or 72% 28 or 56%
30 141 or 52% 65 or 67% 37 or 79% 33 or 66%
35 161 or 60% 74 or 76% 40 or 85% 40 or 80%
50 196 or 73% 82 or 85% 43 or 91% 49 or 98%
75 228 or 84% 91 or 94% 47 or 100% 50 or 100%
Over 75 270 or 100% 97 or 100% 47 or 100% 50 or 100%
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 106

107
Table
6.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
17
days
16
days
22
days
16
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L35%,
C37%,
H28%
L36%,
C41%,
H23%
L47%,
C42%,
H11%
L66%,
C32%,
H2%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L34%,
C34%,
H34%
L27%,
C29%,
H15%
L23%,
C17%,
H26%
L24%,
C26%,
H20%
53%
62%
53%
66%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
10
days
9
days
10
days
11
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
30%
20%
–24%
a
–23%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
37%
33%
–16%
a
–29%
Performance
with
breakout
gap
44%
38%
a
–38%
a
–32%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
32%
21%
–17%
–24%
Average
gap
size
$0.30
$0.37
$0.97
$1.39
Partial
rise,
downward
breakout
N/A
N/A
5/35
or
14%
6/13
or
46%
Partial
decline,
upward
breakout
168/193
or
87%
66/92
or
72%
N/A
N/A
Partial
rise
performance
N/A
N/A
–19%
a
–13%
a
Partial
decline
performance
35%
26%
N/A
N/A
Intraformation
partial
rise
failure
27/270
or
10%
10/97
or
10%
9/47
or
19%
7/50
or
14%
Intraformation
partial
decline
failure
12/270
or
4%
2/97
or
2%
2/47
or
4%
3/50
or
6%
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
N/A
means
not
applicable.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 107

Partial rises and declines. Figure 6.3 shows an example of a partial
decline. Prices touch the top trend line then head toward the lower trend line,
curl around, and stage an upward breakout. In a bull market, a partial decline
precedes an upward breakout 87% of the time. Partial rises do not fare as well
because of the low sample counts.
When a partial rise or decline happens, does performance suffer? Yes and
no. For upward breakouts, patterns having a partial decline show improved
performance. For downward breakouts, a partial rise hurts the postbreakout
decline, but that may change with more samples.
and declines look like normal partial rises and declines, but prices continue
crossing the pattern instead of breaking out. They look like small loops
attached to the trend line. The good news is that they do not happen often.
Thus, you can trade on a partial rise or decline and get a better price (than the
breakout), without worrying about whether a breakout will follow immediately
(without prices crossing the formation again). It usually does, at least 80%
of the time.
low. Notice how often prices reverse trend in the first few weeks. DBWs in a
bull market with downward breakouts show 58% bottoming in the first 3
weeks. DBWs in a bull market with upward breakouts show the fewest trend
reversals: 27% in 3 weeks. They also show the most after 70 days: 49% are still
looking for the ultimate high.
Notice the slight rise in bear market patterns changing trend 35 to 42
days after the breakout. I have seen this rise in other bearish chart patterns, too
(and some bullish ones like downward breakouts at day 49). Be prepared to take
profits 5 to 6 weeks after the breakout.
Table 6.6 shows statistics related to DBW size.
Table 6.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 29% 11% 7% 2% 6% 8% 3% 0% 3% 3% 27%
Bull market,
up breakout 15% 6% 6% 7% 3% 3% 3% 3% 4% 2% 49%
Bear market,
down
breakout 36% 14% 12% 8% 4% 8% 4% 2% 4% 2% 6%
Bull market,
down
breakout 30% 17% 11% 4% 4% 4% 6% 0% 0% 4% 19%
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 108

Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones across the board.
To use this finding, compute the pattern’s height from the highest high to the
lowest low in the pattern and divide by the breakout price. If the result is
higher than the median, then you have a tall pattern; lower than the median,
your pattern is short. Try to trade tall patterns for the best performance.
Width. Narrow patterns usually perform better than wide ones. The lone
exception is from DBWs in a bear market with upward breakouts. I used the
median length to separate narrow patterns from wide ones.
Average formation length. The average length ranged from 54 to 64 days.
Patterns in a bull market were slightly longer than were those in a bear market.
Height and width combinations. Combining the traits, we find that tall
and narrow patterns usually beat the other combinations. Look at the bull
market, up breakout statistics. Tall patterns climb 43% and narrow patterns
climb 34%. When you combine the results, we find that tall and narrow pat-
terns climb 49%— higher than they scored individually.
Avoid short and wide patterns because they usually perform worse than
the other combinations.
Volume trend. Does a rising or falling volume trend over the life of the
chart pattern suggest better or worse performance after the breakout? For
upward breakouts, performance improves when the pattern has a falling
Statistics 109
Table 6.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Description Breakout Breakout Breakouta
Breakouta
of breakout price
–13% –17%
–26% –33%
a
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 109

Table 6.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Rising volume trend
–26%a
–22%a
–26%a
–25%a
shaped volume pattern 38% 20%a
–20%a
–24%a
performance
performance 38% 23% –22% –25%
–27%a
a
volume trend. After a downward breakout (beware: low sample counts), pat-
terns with a rising volume trend outperformed.
Volume shapes. DBWs with U-shaped volume tended to outperform
the other volume shapes. The one exception is for DBWs with upward break-
outs in a bull market. They did better with a random volume shape.
Breakout volume. Performance split according to market direction. In a
bull market, DBWs with heavy breakout volume performed substantially bet-
ter. In a bear market, DBWs with light breakout volume performed marginally
better.
Trading Tactics
Table 6.8 outlines trading tactics for descending broadening wedges.
Measure rule. For upward breakouts, the price target is the top of the
pattern. That sounds like it would be easy to reach, but only 79% reach it in a
bull market and 58% in a bear market. Downward breakouts do not have a
measure rule that works. You might try taking the height of the pattern (high-
est high minus lowest low) and subtracting the difference from the lowest low.
That only works about a third of the time (see the Results Snapshot, “Per-
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 110

centage meeting price target”). Perhaps a better method is to look for under-
lying support and assume prices will stop there.
Wait for confirmation. If you are considering buying the stock shown in
Figure 6.5, it is not obvious at first that a broadening wedge is forming. Over
time, once enough minor highs and lows appear, draw the two trend lines.
Then, it becomes a matter of waiting for a breakout. Since most descending
broadening wedges break out upward, that is the way to trade it. Wait for
prices to close above the top trend line before buying.
Partial decline. An exception to the rule about waiting for confirmation
is the partial decline. As prices move down from the top trend line, watch them
closely. If prices reach a support zone and begin moving up, buy because that
is a partial decline, and it usually signals an impending upward breakout. Place
a stop 0.15 below the curl low, just in case.
Trade the trend lines; stops. If the formation is especially wide, try an
intraformation trade. Buy at the lower trend line and sell at the top one, or sell
short at the top and cover near the bottom. With the trend lines sloping down-
ward, a short sale will be more profitable. Use a stop 0.15 beyond the appro-
priate trend line in case of an adverse breakout. Adjust your stop as prices
move in your favor. Place them 0.15 below a support zone (long trades) or
above a resistance area (short trades).
Trading Tactics 111
Table 6.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule For upward breakouts, use the highest high. For down-
ward breakouts, use the pattern height subtracted from
the lowest low in the pattern. However, that strategy
works only 32% to 36% of the time.
Wait for confirmation Wait for prices to close beyond the trend lines before
placing a trade.
Partial decline If a stock shows a partial decline from the top trend line
and begins to head back up, consider going long. An
upside breakout most often follows a partial decline.
Trade the trend lines If the formation is especially broad, buy at the lower
trend line and sell at the top. If the stock executes a
partial rise and begins falling, close out the position as
it may break out downward. Alternatively, sell short at
the top trend line once prices are heading down and
close the position after it rebounds off the lower trend
line.
Stops For intraformation trading, place a stop on the other
side of the trend line, just to catch an adverse breakout.
Move the stop as prices cross the formation. Pick areas
showing support or resistance.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 111

Sample Trade
“Do you feel lucky, punk?” Mary says as she looks at her computer screen (Fig-
ure 6.5). She just finished watching a Dirty Harry movie and is feeling ornery.
She decides to buy the stock as an intraformation trade once it rebounds
off the lower trend line. When it is clear the stock is climbing again, she pulls
the trigger and receives a fill at 43. Immediately, she places a stop-loss order
0.15 below the lower trend line, at a price of 42. If things go wrong, she only
will lose 3%. Then she waits.
The stock cooperates by moving higher each day. Soon it is at the top
trend line, and she waits for it to ricochet off the line and begin heading down.
It does not. Prices close above the top trend line, signaling an upward break-
out. She calculates the price target, 49.63, using the formation height added to
the breakout price, and that is where she places her sell order. She raises her
stop-loss point to 44, slightly below the minor low in mid-April.
As the stock advances each day, she keeps wondering why it has not
paused. She shrugs her shoulders and does not worry about it. When the stock
makes a new high at 47.38, she raises her stop to 45.25, slightly below the two
minor highs in late April and mid-May.
Aug Sep Oct Nov
Feb 95 Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Gatx Corp. (Diversified Co., NYSE, GMT)
Minimum Price
Move Sold Here
Bought Here
Low
High
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
Figure 6.5 As described in the Sample Trade, Mary used the formation height
projected upward as a price target. For maximum profit, she should have raised
her stop-loss price until the stock triggered a sale.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 112

In a burst of energy, the stock zooms up over a 2-day period and reaches
her sell point. The stock sells at the high for the day, 49.63. She has cleared
over $6 a share on her trade. Even better, the stock moves lower for several
days, reinforcing her sell decision.
It turns out that she sold too soon, but she does not care. She spots
another promising formation in a stock she has been following for quite some
time. She leans back in her chair, smiles and mumbles something about luck,
then runs to the VCR and plugs in another Dirty Harry movie.
This trade shows the problem with placing a sell order at the price target.
Yes, Mary sold at a good price, but if she had used the stop-loss order to take
her out, she probably would have made more. To let your profits run, raise the
stop price, placing it slightly below the prior minor low, and raise it to the next
higher minor low when prices climb to a new high. Eventually, prices will
decline and your position will be sold. However, this gives the stock every
opportunity to continue making new highs.
For sophisticated traders, compute the average daily trading range of the
stock over the prior month and set a stop no closer than 1.5 times the average.
For example, if the stock has a daily trading range of $2, set the stop no closer
than $3 below the current daily low. If a minor low is $2.25 below the current
low, it is too close to use as a stop-loss point. Select one farther away. This
technique allows the stock room to fluctuate without you being stopped out.
The following list includes tips and observations on selecting patterns for bet-
ter performance. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Use the identification guidelines to select your pattern—Table 6.1.
• Trade with the trend: Select patterns with upward breakouts in a bull
market, downward breakout in a bear market—Table 6.2.
• Patterns in a bull market with an upward breakout have the lowest fail-
ure rates for extended moves—Table 6.3.
• Bull markets throw back/pull back less often than do bear markets—
Table 6.4.
• Throwback or pullbacks hurt performance—Table 6.4.
• Breakout day gaps help performance—Table 6.4.
• A partial decline in a bull market correctly predicts an upward break-
out 87% of the time and performance improves, too—Table 6.4.
• In a bear market, look for a trend change 5 or 6 weeks after the break-
out, 7 weeks in a bull market—Table 6.5.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 113

• Select patterns that are both tall and narrow. Avoid those that are short
and wide—Table 6.6.
• Patterns with a falling volume trend perform best when the breakout is
upward. A rising volume trend does well for downward breakouts—
Table 6.7
• Patterns with U-shaped volume usually perform best postbreakout—
Table 6.7.
4366_06.qxd 2/23/05 11:33 AM Page 114

115
7
Bump-and-Run
Reversal Bottoms
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Looks like a frying pan with the handle on
the left following a trend line down until a
large decline ensues. The breakout is upward.
Reversal or continuation Short-term bullish reversal or continuation
Throwbacks 59% 73%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall and
wide patterns perform better than short and
narrow ones.
See also Cup with Handle; Rounding Bottoms
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 115

More than a year after I discovered the bump-and-run reversal (BARR) top, I
decided to look for its complement: the BARR bottom. The reasoning is sim-
ple. Many formations, such as double tops, ascending triangles, and triple tops
all have bottom versions. Why not the bump-and-run reversal? It never
dawned on me to look for the formation before then. As I searched through the
data looking for candidates, I was skeptical that the formation added real value.
Some looked like cup-with-handle formations with the handle coming first,
whereas others looked like rounding bottoms. Only after I compiled the sta-
tistics did my thoughts change.
The pattern is a strong performer with postbreakout gains between 31%
and 38%. The break-even failure rate is small, coming in at 2% or less. The
pattern also has a few surprises but ones we have seen before: A throwback
hurts postbreakout performance, and patterns both tall and wide perform bet-
ter than short and narrow ones.
Tour
What is a bump-and-run reversal, anyway? If I had to name this formation
independent of all others, I would probably call it the frying pan or spoon for-
mation because that is what it looks like. However, the formation is just a
BARR top flipped upside down, so I call it a BARR bottom. I guess a more
accurate description is an inverted BARR.
Why do BARR bottoms occur? Like the top version, the BARR bottom
is a study of momentum. Consider the chart shown in Figure 7.1 on a weekly
scale. Since late 1991, the stock was moving sideways—a trading range between
6.50 and 11. However, that changed during the last week of October 1993,
when the stock moved up and closed higher than the prior week. At first, this
did not seem unusual since many weeks close higher than the prior week, but
this one was different. It initiated a long climb to the highs of early January. On
the highest volume that the stock had seen in years, the stock hit a new high of
14.38 during the week of January 14, 1994. Volume began tapering off, although
it was still high, and prices tagged a much smaller peak during the week of
March 25, at 14. The two minor highs, one in mid-January and another in late
March, formed the basis of a down-sloping trend line.
As weekly volume trended lower, so did enthusiasm for the stock. Eventu-
ally, bullish sentiment could not sustain the high price and the stock collapsed.
As it headed down, volume continued to taper off. The upward momentum
experienced during the rise to the highs in January was now working against the
stock. Over the course of a year, the stock gave back all its gains and, by mid-
February 1995, it started sinking to new lows.
High volume a month later was key as it signaled a turning point. A week
later, again on high volume, the stock closed higher by over 10%. The upward
move had begun but soon stalled out. The stock moved sideways for another 2
116 Bump-and-Run Reversal Bottoms
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 116

months, gathering strength for the uphill run. Then it took off, not jumping
up, but slowly moving higher, almost week after week. When the stock reached
the trend line in mid-August, it was clear that it had executed a massive round-
ing bottom—a turn in the trend that signaled higher prices.
The stock pushed through the trend line on relatively high volume, then
paused for a month, and formed a falling wedge or pennant. Following that, on
very high volume, prices jumped up to new highs, but this did not last very
long as the stock entered a consolidation phase just below 18. There it stayed
for many months before the stock jumped up and ran still higher. By late June,
the stock had touched 28.75, a rise of about 140% from the breakout, and
350% from the low.
Many would recognize this formation as a cup-with-handle, and indeed it
is. But it is also a BARR bottom, as a cup does not depend on a down-sloping
trend line and a larger handle on the left such as that shown in Figure 7.1.
Whatever you call the formation, the result is still the same: Prices move higher.
Table 7.1 shows a host of characteristics that correctly identify a BARR bot-
tom. Figure 7.2 illustrates the various characteristics outlined in Table 7.1.
CKE Restaurants, Inc. (Restaurant, NYSE, CKR)
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
– 3
– 2
– 1
– 0
Falling Wedge
or Pennant
Channel
Figure 7.1 Bump-and-run reversal bottom. Upward momentum propels prices
higher during late 1993 then stalls at the start of the new year. Volume tapers off
and prices follow. A cup-with-handle formation or rounding bottom takes shape
and prices climb 350% from the 1995 lows. A channel appears in late 1993 and a
falling wedge in late 1995.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 117

Arithmetic scale. Use the arithmetic scale, not a semilogarithmic one,
because the semilog scale distorts vertical distances.
Frying pan shape. Overall, the formation appears as a frying pan. The
handle, or lead-in phase, forms a trend line that slopes downward at an angle
of about 30 degrees to 45 degrees, more or less. Draw the trend line along the
daily high prices as the line signals a buying opportunity once pierced.
Unlike BARR tops, sometimes horizontal trend lines in the lead-in phase
contain valid BARR bottoms. Such situations are rare, though, and should be
avoided. The trend lines in this study are higher on the left and slope down-
ward—these give the best performance.
Down-sloping top trend line, lead-in height. Calculate the lead-in
height once a trend line forms. Do this by finding the widest distance from the
Table 7.1
Arithmetic scale Use the arithmetic chart, not a semilogarithmic one.
Frying pan shape The formation looks like a frying pan with the handle on the
left sloping downward to the pan. After a deepening decline
that takes prices into the pan base, prices level out and
eventually soar out the right side.
Down-sloping The handle forms a down-sloping trend line that approximates
top trend line, 0–45 degrees (but this varies with scaling). The handle portion
lead-in height of the formation is called the lead-in as it leads in to the bump
phase. The lead-in height measures from the trend line drawn
across the highs to the low (not necessarily the lowest low) of
the formation. Select the widest distance from the trend line to
the low, measured vertically, in the first quarter of the
formation. The duration of the lead-in should be at least a
month, but varies depending on the situation.
Bump phase The bump is analogous to the frying pan base. The down-
sloping trend line deepens to 60 degrees or more. Prices drop
rapidly then level out and turn around, usually forming a
rounded turn. After the turn, prices move up and sometimes
pause at the 30-degree trend line before moving higher. The
bump height, as measured from the trend line to the lowest
low, should be at least twice the lead-in height. Strict
adherence to this rule is not required, but it serves as a good
general guideline.
Uphill run Once prices lift out of the bump phase, they begin an uphill
run that carries prices higher.
Volume Volume is typically high during the three critical parts of the
formation: formation start, bump start, and upward breakout.
However, high volume is not a prerequisite.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 118

trend line to the daily low, measured vertically, in the first quarter of the for-
mation. In Figure 7.2, the lead-in height calculation uses prices on June 16
(point A). On that day, the low is 17.63 and the trend line has a value of about
20.38. Thus, the lead-in height is the difference between these two, or 2.75.
The minimum bump height uses the lead-in height, so the calculation is
important.
Bump phase. After the lead-in phase comes the bump phase. Prices
decline rapidly, although not as rapidly as that shown in Figure 7.2, and form
a new trend line that slopes down at about 45 degrees to 60 degrees or more.
Volume is noticeably higher at the start of the bump, but selling pressure over-
takes buying demand and the truth finally comes out: There are problems with
the company. The stock continues down as the smart money and the momen-
tum players leave the stock in droves.
Eventually, downward pressure abates allowing the stock to recover. It
rounds over and touches the original 30-degree trend line. Here, it may move
lower for a while or it may sail right through the trend line. Over half of the
time, prices start moving higher, then throw back to the trend line before con-
tinuing up.
Uphill run; volume. Volume picks up as prices break out of the forma-
tion and move higher. Rising prices characterize the uphill run phase.
Bethlehem Steel Corp. (Steel (Integrated), NYSE, BS)
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
Jan 94 Feb Mar
May 93 Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Throwback to
Trend Line
Bump Phase
Lead-in Phase
A
Uphill Run
Figure 7.2 Various components of a bump-and-run reversal bottom. A price
drop-off follows the lead-in phase where prices move in a narrow range. The bump
forms, then rounds upward as prices leave the bowl and move higher on the uphill
run to new highs.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 119

Focus on Failures
Figure 7.3 shows what a BARR bottom failure looks like. The stock starts its
ascent in June 1994 when it hits a low of 24.50 (not shown). Although the rise
is not a straight-line path, prices reach a new high a year later (the highest peak
on the left). Then it is downhill from there. The decline is quite orderly with
peaks that follow the trend line down. During early September, however,
prices drop rapidly on high volume as the bump forms. Prices quickly reach a
low of 33.63 before rebounding. Having sliced through the trend line and
moving just a bit higher, prices throw back and follow the trend line lower.
Prices following a trend line lower are not unusual, but what is unusual is that
prices do not continue their climb. Instead, they drop off the end of the trend
line and plummet. By late June, they slip to under $20 a share, less than half
what they were at the high.
Why did the BARR fail? This formation is not a perfect example of a
BARR bottom, but few formations are. In this case, the bump height is less
than twice the lead-in height. However, the height depends on how the trend
line is drawn. Drawing a trend line beginning from the peak at point A, the
bump to lead-in height is about 2 to 1. The new trend line also touches the
peak at B. So, if you wait for prices to move above the new trend line before
Apple Computer Inc. (Computers & Peripherals, NASDAQ, AAPL)
Throwback
Bump Phase
Lead-in Phase
Jan 96 Feb
A
B
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
Figure 7.3 A bump-and-run reversal bottom failure. The bump height is less than
twice the lead-in height, a clue that the pattern is not worth investing in. A trend
line drawn from point A to B (not shown) satisfies the bump to lead-in height
guideline. An investor waiting for prices to move above the new trend line would
not buy this stock.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 120

investing, you would not purchase this stock. Sometimes it is wise to draw
alternative views just to see how the chart pattern behaves.
Statistics
Table 7.2 shows general statistics for BARR bottoms.
Number of formations. I found 532 patterns in the stocks I looked at
using 500 stocks from mid-1991 to mid-1996 and another batch surrounding
the 2000 to 2002 bear market with a few others sprinkled between those
ranges. Most were found in a bull market because the duration was several
times the length of the bear market.
Reversal or continuation. Technically the pattern acts as a reversal, but
that is because six more patterns reverse than consolidate. Reversals perform
better than continuations, however.
Average rise. The average rise is a strong 38% in a bull market and 31%
in a bear market, beating the average rise of 36% and 25%, respectively, of
Rises over 45%. Continuing the strong showing, 25% to 34% of the
patterns I looked at posted rises over 45%. As you would expect, the BARR
pattern performs better in a bull market than a bear one.
Change after trend ends. What happens after the uptrend ends? Prices
decline between 29% and 34%, giving back most of the gain from the way up.
The larger decline is in a bear market, as one might guess.
Statistics 121
Table 7.2
General Statistics
Bull Market, Bear Market,
Description Up Breakout Up Breakout
Number of formations 412 120
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 203 R, 209 C 66 R, 54 C
R/C performance 40% R, 36% C 31% R, 30% C
Rises over 45% 142 or 34% 30 or 25%
Busted pattern performance –28%a
–24%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 14% –7%
Days to ultimate high 186 109
a
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 121

Busted pattern performance. Few busted patterns occur, so the perfor-
mance numbers are not solid. Still, they show decent declines. The problem
with trading a busted pattern is that a short throwback looks like a busted pat-
tern. Should prices rebound, as they do in most cases, your short position will
end in a loss. Trade busted patterns carefully.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The index had average gains of 14% in
a bull market, and it lost 7% in a bear market. The influence of the general
market on the average rise is less than what I would have expected. Between the
two markets, there was a 21 percentage point swing in the S&P but only a 7%
difference between the average rises.
Days to ultimate high. Patterns in a bull market take more than 6
months (186 days) to reach the ultimate high but about 3.5 months in a bear
market. This timeline means the rises in a bear market are steeper but they do
not climb as far.
Failure rates appear in Table 7.3 and they show respectable results. Few
patterns flame out before climbing at least 5%—in a bull market 2% fail and
in a bear market 1% fail. The failure rate increases as the maximum price rises.
Half the patterns in a bull market will climb less than 35%, and half in a bear
market will top out before rising 30%. For larger moves (over 10%), bull mar-
ket patterns show lower failures.
How do you use this table? Let me give you an example. Say your cost of
trading is 5% and you want to make a 30% profit for a total of 35%. How
many patterns will fail to rise at least 35%? Answer: 54% in a bull market and
66% in a bear market. Between half and two-thirds of the trades you make will
fail to meet your goal. That means your winners will have to perform dramat-
ically to compensate for all the losers you will have.
Table 7.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price Bull Market, Bear Market,
Rise (%) Up Breakout Up Breakout
5 (breakeven) 8 or 2% 1 or 1%
10 42 or 10% 7 or 6%
15 84 or 20% 26 or 22%
20 124 or 30% 39 or 33%
25 169 or 41% 54 or 45%
30 193 or 47% 69 or 58%
35 223 or 54% 79 or 66%
50 289 or 70% 95 or 79%
75 339 or 82% 108 or 90%
Over 75 412 or 100% 120 or 100%
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 122

Formation end to breakout. Piercing the trend line is quick with this
pattern, taking between 3 and 4 days from the end of the pattern to a close
above the trend line.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range does this pattern break-
out? Most of the time, the breakout is in the middle or low end of the yearly
price range.
price range, we find that the best performing BARRs are those with breakouts
far from the yearly high (meaning the low or middle). Those are the ones in
which you want to trade.
Throwbacks. Over half the patterns (59%) in a bull market and 73% in a
bear market throw back. The stocks return to the breakout price in a quick 7
days in a bear market and a more normal 11 days in a bull market. As with many
other chart patterns types, a throwback hurts performance, as Table 7.4 shows.
Gaps. Gaps help performance in a bull market, but hurt it in a bear mar-
ket. With additional samples, the results might change.
Number of dual bumps. About 20% of the time, the BARR bottom has
a second bump. Prices touch the trend line on their way to the breakout then,
instead of continuing higher, they decline and form a second bump.
Figure 7.4 shows a good example of a multiple bump BARR. The first
bump completes in mid-August 1993 when prices touch the down-sloping
trend line. If you purchased the stock at any time during the first bump, you
Statistics 123
Table 7.4
Breakout and Postbreakout Statistics
Formation end to breakout 4 days 3 days
Percentage of breakouts occurring
near the 12 month low (L), L40%, C41%, L36%, C53%,
center (C), or high (H) H19% H12%
Percentage rise for each 12-month L41%, C41%, L39%, C27%,
lookback period H29% H32%a
Throwbacks 59% 73%
Average time to throwback ends 11 days 7 days
Average rise for patterns with throwback 37% 28%
Average rise for patterns without throwback 40% 39%
Performance with breakout gap 46% 25%a
Performance without breakout gap 37% 33%
Average gap size $0.26 $0.18
Number of dual bumps 20% 21%a
a
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 123

would have been toast. From the high of 22.75 on August 19, the stock
declined to 17.38 on October 1, nearly a 25% fall.
After that, it is all uphill. The stock moves up smartly and crests at 28.50
in mid-January 1994. From the bump low, that is a 64% move and a 33% rise
from the breakout. Figure 7.4 imparts a valuable lesson: Consider waiting for
the upward breakout before buying into a situation. Not surprisingly, this les-
son applies to many formations, not just the BARR bottom.
The dual bump is unusual in that the second bump is lower than the first.
As mentioned, dual bumps are a rarity, occurring only 20% of the time. Of
course, that is scant comfort if you already bought into a situation and it begins
declining again.
Table 7.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate high.
Patterns in both markets perform similarly. They both have large numbers in
the over-70 column. At the other end of the scale, few patterns flame out in the
first week or two. Generally, the longer it takes to reach the ultimate high, the
larger the gain, so the table shows good news.
Inco Ltd (Metals & Mining (Div.), NYSE, N)
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
First Bump
Second Bump
Jan 94 Feb
Figure 7.4 A dual bump-and-run reversal bottom. Consider waiting to buy the
stock until after it breaks out upward. Had you bought into this situation during
July, you would have lost money in the short term.
Table 7.5
Frequency Distribution of Days to Ultimate High
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 9% 10% 6% 4% 6% 5% 5% 3% 6% 0% 47%
Bull market 7% 7% 5% 4% 3% 5% 2% 3% 3% 3% 59%
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 124

Notice how the bear market patterns show a slight blip 35 days after a
breakout and, in a bull market, at 42 days. I have seen this blip in other pat-
terns. A month or so after the breakout and the uptrend weakens. Be prepared
for a trend change then (and another one 2 months after the breakout in a
bear market).
How often does price rise to the level at the start of the pattern? The
answer depends on market conditions. In a bull market, 48% of the time the
ultimate high occurs within 15% of the starting price. In a bear market, 63%
stop within 15% of the old high. Figure 7.5 shows an example. Prices begin the
pattern at 32.88 and then form a descending triangle. In June, parts began
falling off the semiconductor stock. It plummeted over $4 to close at 23.75 on
June 7, then continued lower, reaching a low in June in the middle of the
bump phase. From the low, prices recovered and moved higher until reaching
a high just 25 cents below the price at the start of the BARR pattern.
Table 7.6 shows size statistics for the BARR bottom pattern.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. To use this infor-
mation, measure your pattern from the highest high to the lowest low and
divide by the breakout price (where price closes above the down-sloping trend
line). Compare the result with the median in Table 7.6. If your value is higher
than the median, then consider your pattern a tall one; lower than the median
means it is a short one. Trade tall patterns for the best performance.
Width. Wide patterns perform better than narrow ones. I used the
median length as the separator between narrow and wide.
Statistics 125
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. (Semiconductor, NYSE, AMD)
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
Feb 93 Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov
Lead-in
Bump
Uphill
Run
Descending
Triangle
Measure Rule
Sell Point
Figure 7.5 Bump-and-run reversal that stopped rising within 15% of its old highs.
Between 48% and 63% of bump-and-run reversal bottoms perform this way.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 125

Average formation length. BARRs are long patterns, averaging between
110 and 143 days or about 4 to 5 months long.
Height and width combinations. Patterns that are both tall and wide do
better than other combinations in a bull market. In a bear market, BARRs that
are both tall and narrow perform well. The worst performance comes from
patterns that are short and narrow, so avoid trading those.
Table 7.7 shows volume-related statistics, and it is as disappointing as
watching a helium-filled party balloon getting caught in the trees instead of
playing chicken with airplanes.
Table 7.7
Volume Statistics
Rising volume trend performance 38% 31%
Falling volume trend performance 38% 31%
U-shaped volume pattern performance 40% 35%a
Dome-shaped volume pattern performance 38% 30%
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped 32% 51%a
volume pattern performance
Heavy breakout volume performance 40% 27%
Light breakout volume performance 34% 35%
a
Table 7.6
Size Statistics
Tall pattern performance 44% 39%
Short pattern performance 34% 25%
Median height as a percentage of breakout price 35.87% 46.95%
Narrow pattern performance 34% 29%
Wide pattern performance 42% 33%
Median length 120 days 98 days
Average formation length 143 days 110 days
Short and narrow performance 31% 24%
Tall and wide performance 45% 38%
a
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 126

Volume trend. The volume trend shows no performance difference
for BARRs.
Volume shapes. In a bull market, BARRs with U-shaped volume per-
formed best. In a bear market, BARRs with random-shaped volume did well,
but the samples are few.
Breakout volume. Heavy breakout volume helps performance in a bull
market, but hurts it in a bear market.
Trading Tactics
Table 7.8 outlines trading tactics for BARR bottoms.
Measure rule. After properly identifying a BARR bottom, you will want
to determine how profitable is a trade likely to be. You do that using the mea-
sure rule. I changed the measure rule from a computation to simply the top of
the chart pattern. The highest high is the target, and prices reach the high 64%
to 68% of the time.
Wait for confirmation. The confirmation point is when price closes
above the trend line formed during the lead-in phase. Should the price close
above the trend line, buy the stock.
Sell at old high. I have discussed how often a stock showing a BARR bot-
tom stops near the old high (which is the start of the formation). Place a sell
order near the price level of the old high. That will keep your profits intact
should the stock then turn down. If you are reluctant to sell your holdings, why
not sell half when the stock reaches the old high, then see what happens?
Stops. As always, place a stop-loss order 0.15 below the nearest support
zone. Move the stop upward as the stock advances. That way, when prices turn
down, you will not lose too much. Only paying taxes is worse than riding a
stock up and following it all the way back down.
Trading Tactics 127
Table 7.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule The highest high in the pattern is the target.
Wait for confirmation Waiting for the breakout improves investment performance.
The close should be above the down-sloping trend line
before you buy the stock.
Sell at old high When prices rise to the old high, consider selling if the stock
shows weakness.
Stops Place a stop 0.15 below prior resistance. As prices rise, raise
the stop.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 127

Sample Trade
Perhaps the most interesting way to illustrate trading tactics is by example.
John is new to investing, and he did not take the time to learn thoroughly
about BARR bottoms. As he flipped through his stock charts one day, he
noticed an intriguing situation developing in the stock depicted in Figure 7.6.
During August, the stock peaked, declined a bit, then formed a second minor
high. As the stock declined from the second high, John drew a tentative trend
line down connecting them. Soon, he noticed that the stock was descending in
a sort of channel. He drew a second trend line, parallel to the first, that con-
nected the lows.
However, the stock soon pierced through the second trend line and
moved lower. When it declined even further, John thought he recognized a
BARR bottom forming. He drew a third trend line, parallel to the other two
and lead-in height apart.
As the stock dipped below the lowest trend line, he believed that the
decline was at an end. So, the following day he pulled the trigger and bought
100 shares at 18.25. He was pleased to acquire the stock a bit below the clos-
ing price for the day.
For the next week, the stock shot upward and pierced the second trend
line. John was brimming with enthusiasm and believed that picking stocks was
an easy game, as he put it. As the stock moved into a consolidation period, John
showed no concern. Flat periods of trading often follow quick rises.
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
Aug 91 Sep Oct Nov Dec
BARR Trend Line
Stock Bought
Stock Sold
Parallel Trend Lines, Lead-in Height Apart
Figure 7.6 A bump-and-run reversal bottom failure in which John invested. He
finally sold the stock just 2 days before it reached its low.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 128

When the stock neared the top trend line, John calculated the target
price, using the old method instead of the highest high in the pattern. He
computed the lead-in height by subtracting the daily low from the trend line at
its widest part in the first quarter of the formation. He used the low of August
20, at 24, and subtracted this from the trend line value of 26, measured verti-
cally. This left him with a lead-in height of $2. John believed that the stock
would likely break out at about 21.25, so this gave him a target price of 23.25,
which is the lead-in height added to the breakout price.
John was confident that he could hold out for larger gains. From his pur-
chase point, he calculated that he would receive at least a 25% return if every-
thing worked out as planned.
For about a month, the stock moved sideways, but this did not alarm him.
He even expected the stock to decline a bit and recapture some of its quick
gains. Secretly he hoped that the stock would soon break out of its trading
range and head higher. He was confident that it would move up—it was only a
question of when.
He was wrong. Indeed, the stock did break out of its trading range, but it
headed lower, not higher. After it approached the top trend line, the stock con-
tinued down and touched the middle trend line. John knew that a stock often
retraces 38% to 62% of its gains. He grabbed his calculator and computed the
retrace value.
The stock reached a high of 21.43 in a straight-line run from the low at
18, a rise of about 3.50 points. Now the stock was retracing the gains and had
moved down to 18.75, a 78% retrace. Clearly, this was out of the realm of a
simple retrace. John suspected that a trend change had occurred, but hoped
that the pause he was seeing as it touched the middle trend line would give the
stock support and call an end to the decline. For a while, it did. The stock
paused for 3 days at the trend line then started moving lower again. It quickly
fell below the purchase price and headed down.
Although John had purchased the stock as a short-term play, he con-
vinced himself that he really liked the company and would not mind holding it
for the long term. Now, at least, that is what it would take for him to recoup
his losses and get out at breakeven.
The stock moved through the third trend line, heading lower. The easy
game was now turning into a disaster. John first considered selling on Decem-
ber 11, when the stock reached 12.75, for a 30% loss. He delayed the selling
decision by saying that the holding was a long-term one and he should expect
to come across such declines in the short term.
The next day, the stock closed higher, and it gave him renewed hope.
Indeed, it closed even higher the following day. But the 2-day recovery was an
illusion and the stock declined again. As it plunged below 12.75, John threw up
his hands and told his broker to dump the dog. He received a fill at 12.25, the
low for the day. Two days later, the stock bottomed out at about 10.75. From
the buy point, John lost 35%.
Sample Trade 129
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 129

As upset as this made John, the stock was not finished tormenting him.
He continued to follow the stock and watched it move higher. He extended the
BARR trend line downward (Figure 7.7) and noticed that a new, larger BARR
had formed. After suffering through the large bump, the stock moved higher
until it touched the BARR trend line. Then, the stock followed it lower, unable
to pierce the resistance line.
During the week of March 27, 1992, the stock closed above the trend line
for the first time in months. The BARR was complete and a confirmed break-
out was occurring. Did John buy the stock? No. For several months, he
watched its progress as it moved higher almost week after week. Disgusted, he
quit following the stock.
In April 1994, John took another look at the stock and was surprised to
see that it continued moving higher. It had just reached a high of 50.13, a
climb of almost 370%. He grabbed his calculator and realized that his mistake
cost him over $3,000.
What did he do wrong? Several things. He did not wait for the BARR to
pierce the trend line and move higher. If he had, he would have purchased
closer to the low, saving him precious capital. Next, he did not cut his losses
short. After he bought the stock, he should have determined his sell point. The
middle trend line would have been a good place for a stop-loss order. In this
case, it would have taken him out of the stock at about 17.88, a small decline
from the purchase price of 18.25. Instead, he followed the stock down and
changed his investment philosophy from a short-term trade to a long-term
holding.
– 48
– 46
– 44
– 42
– 40
– 38
– 36
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
– 18
– 16
– 14
– 12
– 10
– 8
New, Larger BARR Bottom
Figure 7.7 A bump-and-run reversal bottom on a weekly scale. After the break-
out, the stock climbed over 350%.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 130

The following list includes tips and observations on selecting BARR bottoms
that perform well. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Use the identification guidelines to help select the pattern—Table 7.1.
• Select reversals in a bull market. They rise higher than in a bear mar-
ket—Table 7.2.
• Bear market failure rates start small, but bull markets do better for
gains over 10%—Table 7.3.
• Pick patterns with breakouts near the yearly low—Table 7.4.
• Throwbacks hurt performance. Look for overhead resistance before
trading—Table 7.4.
• Look for price weakness 5 to 6 weeks after the breakout—Table 7.5.
• Select patterns that are tall or wide. Avoid those that are both short and
narrow—Table 7.6.
• Heavy breakout volume helps bull market patterns, but light breakout
volume helps bear market BARRs—Table 7.7.
4366_07.qxd 2/23/05 11:34 AM Page 131

132
8
Bump-and-Run
Reversal Tops
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Prices rise steadily along a trend line, bump
up, round over, then decline through the
trend line and continue down.
Pullbacks 62% 65%
Surprising findings The best performing patterns have breakouts
in the middle of the yearly price range.
Pullbacks hurt performance but breakout day
gaps help. Tall patterns perform better than
short ones.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 132

If you were thinking of buying stock in a company, wouldn’t it be wonderful if
you knew the purchase price would be less tomorrow? Of course! But how do
you predict tomorrow’s price? That is the problem I was researching when I
discovered the bump-and-run reversal top formation. I was trying to figure out
a reliable way to determine if tomorrow’s price would be higher or lower than
today’s and by how much.
I tried all sorts of mathematical games to boost the accuracy of the pre-
diction with only limited success. Then I moved to the visual world. I drew a
trend line along a stock chart and wondered if I could determine how far prices
would decline below the line. I looked at many stock charts and trend lines try-
ing to see if there was a relationship between a trend line and the breakdown
of the trend. That is when I discovered it: the bump-and-run formation—
BARF for short. I toyed with the idea of leaving the name as is but decided that
the investment community would not believe the veracity of the new forma-
tion. So, I changed the name to bump-and-run reversal (BARR), a slightly
more descriptive and palatable acronym.
Tour
As I looked at the various trend lines, I discovered that pronounced break-
downs share several characteristics. Look at Figure 8.1, a good BARR example.
The overall formation reminds me of a mountain range. The foothills at the
start of the formation are low and subdued, not venturing too far above the up-
sloping plain. Volume at the start of the formation is high but quickly recedes.
The mountains themselves rise well above the foothills on high volume.
Investor enthusiasm continues as prices round over at the top, then diminishes
on the far side. When the mountains end, prices decline sharply and continue
moving down. That is a BARR. Prices bump-up, round over, and run back
down again. The formation is the visual representation of momentum. The
base of the formation follows a trend line that always slopes upward. It signals
investors’ eagerness to acquire the stock. As each day goes by, investors bid
higher to reluctant sellers and the price rises.
Other momentum players eventually notice the rise in the stock price.
Many jump on the bandwagon the day after a surprisingly good earnings
announcement. That is when the bump begins. Volume spikes upward along
with the stock price. Quickly rising prices entice others to join the fray
and that, in turn, sends the stock even higher. As momentum increases,
prices jump to form a new, higher-sloping trend line. Then things start go-
ing wrong.
Supply catches up with demand. As that happens, the rise slows and the
smart money turns cautious. Investor enthusiasm wanes and the war between
supply and demand turns. The stock rounds over and starts heading down.
Tour 133
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 133

When the smart money sees prices falling, they sell and the decline picks up
speed. Downward momentum increases and returns prices to the trend line.
At this point, buying enthusiasm may increase and send prices back up for
one last try at a new peak. Usually, however, prices do not bounce off the
trend line but continue moving down. Sometimes there is a pause and some-
times prices just plunge straight through the resistance line, as illustrated
in Figure 8.1.
Once prices pierce the trend line, volume increases as investors dump the
stock. This selling alarms more investors and the downward trend feeds on
itself. Eventually, after several months of declining prices, the selling pressure
abates and buying enthusiasm halts the downward slide. Prices tentatively level
out and perhaps even rebound a bit. Once the cause of the reversal fades from
memory, prices start rising again and the process begins anew.
Table 8.1 outlines the various parts of the formation that are illustrated in
Figure 8.1.
134 Bump-and-Run Reversal Tops
Fieldcrest Cannon Inc. (Textile, NYSE, FLD)
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
Jan 94 Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug
Nov 93 Dec
Lead-in
Phase
Bump
Begins
Trend Line
Bump
Phase
Downhill
Run
Figure 8.1 Good example of a bump-and-run reversal. Prices move up along the
trend line in the lead-in phase, jump up during the bump phase, then crash down
through the trend line during the downhill run. Volume at the start of the forma-
tion and again at the start of the bump is usually high but tapers off as the bump
rounds over. About half the time volume picks up as prices pierce the trend line.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 134

Arithmetic scale. Use the arithmetic scale not a semilogarithmic one
because the semilog scale distorts vertical distance.
Rising trend lines. In the figure, a trend line drawn below the lows in the
stock extends until it intersects prices as they decline in May. Volume is high
at the start of the pattern and the trend is up. That is a key consideration:
Prices must be rising. The trend line should be approximately 30 degrees, but
the degree of slope depends on the scaling used to view the chart. If the trend
line is flat or nearly so, it is not a good BARR candidate. A rising trend line shows
investor enthusiasm for the stock. However, the trend line should not be too
steep either. Steep trend lines (over 60 degrees or so) do not allow enough
room for the bump to complete properly.
Lead-in, lead-in height. The first part of the formation, called the lead-
in phase, leads to the bump phase. The lead-in phase should be at least 1 month
long and usually falls in the 2- to 3-month range, but can be considerably
longer. Prices oscillate up and down in this phase and have a range of at least $1
as measured from the highest high to the trend line. This range, called the lead-
in height, is calculated using prices from the first quarter of the formation.
Figure 8.1, for example, shows that the highest high during the first quar-
ter of the formation occurs on January 12, 1994, at 25.63. The trend line
Table 8.1
Arithmetic scale Do not use a semilogarithmic scale; instead us an arithmetic one.
Rising trend line A trend line connecting the lows rises steadily: no horizontal or
near-horizontal trend lines. The trend line usually rises at about
30–45 degrees (although this varies with scaling). Avoid trend
lines that are too steep (over 60 degrees): There is not enough
room for the bump.
Lead-in, lead-in height The lead-in is the section just before prices move up sharply in
the bump phase. Lead-in prices should have a range of at least
$1 (preferably $2 or more), as measured from the highest high
to the trend line, vertically, during the first quarter of the
overall formation length. Minimum lead-in length is 1 month
with no maximum value.
Rounded bump Prices rise up (trend line slope is 45–60 degrees or more) on
high volume usually after a favorable event (unexpectedly good
earnings, an analyst recommends or upgrades the stock, higher
store sales, that sort of thing). Prices eventually round over and
decline back to the 30 degree trend line. The bump must be at
least twice the lead-in height, measured from highest high to
the trend line, vertically.
Downhill run After returning to the trend line, prices may bounce back up
and form additional bumps or slide along the trend line. Even-
tually prices drop through the trend line and continue down.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 135

directly below this date has a value of about 24.25, giving a lead-in height of
1.38. The height is important because the minimum bump height and target
price, calculated later, use this value. A more accurate approach is to use the
largest distance from the trend line to the high, which is not necessarily found
between the highest high and the trend line. Use whatever method makes you
feel comfortable.
During the lead-in phase, subdued price action looks as if the stock is
gathering strength for the bump phase. Prices do not move very far away from
the trend line and usually appear rounded. If you visualize the formation as a
mountain range, the lead-in phase represents the foothills.
Volume during the lead-in phase is high at the start. Often this is due to
events that occur just before the formation begins. Volume drops off until the
start of the bump, when it suddenly rises. The higher share turnover and
expanding enthusiasm for the stock forces prices up. In Figure 8.1, this price
rise occurs on February 17 and is accompanied by volume that is the highest in
half a year.
Rounded bump. Prices jump up at the bump start and quickly rise from
a low of 26.50 to a high of 34.38 during late March. Volume remains high
throughout this period then quickly tapers off as prices round over at the top.
Many times, the top takes on the appearance of a head-and-shoulders forma-
tion or a double or triple top. If you recognize any of these formations on your
chart, ignore the BARR top formation and obey the implications of the indi-
vidual formations.
The bump height, as measured from the highest high to the trend line,
should be at least twice the lead-in height. In this example, the bump height is
8 (that is, 34.38–26.38). This is more than twice the lead-in height of 1.38.
The reason for the minimum two-to-one ratio is arbitrary. The idea is to
make sure that investor enthusiasm and, hence, momentum are getting carried
away. An up-sloping trend line that turns into a bump with a higher sloping
trend line emphasizes the rising momentum. Sustaining such unbounded
enthusiasm for too long is difficult and the stock price eventually declines. In
Figure 8.1, that is exactly what happens. Prices round over and start heading
down. Sometimes the decline is orderly and sometimes it is choppy. In nearly
all cases, prices return to the trend line. Once there, the stock may do several
things. Fairly often prices bump up again, and that is called a BARR with a dual
bump or a dual BARR. Occasionally, a dual BARR consists of several bumps
but the result is still the same. Prices eventually fall below the trend line.
Downhill run. Sometimes prices slide up along the trend line for a
month or so before continuing down. At other times, prices drop straight
through the trend line, turn around and climb again, before ultimately drop-
ping. In a few rare cases, prices descend from the bump high and never make
it back to the trend line before moving higher. These cases commonly appear
on weekly or monthly price charts.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 136

Focus on Failures
In Figure 8.2, a weekly chart, the first BARR on the left shows high volume dur-
ing the initial stages of the bump, as you would expect. The bump height to lead-
in height ratio looks good (over 2:1), and clearly investor enthusiasm is high.
However, prices continue climbing instead of rounding over and heading down.
Contrast the failed BARR with the one in the center. The middle BARR
has a nicely rounded appearance. The volume pattern is what you would
expect: high at the start, at the start of the bump, and when prices cross the
trend line. However, prices drop below the trend line by just 4%. Any forma-
tion recovering after moving less than 5% below the breakout point is called a
5% failure.
The BARR on the right is a dual BARR. Prices near the trend line in late
March 1994, then just as quickly climb again forming a second peak before
dropping through the trend line. Often the peak of the second bump is below
the first.
On weekly and monthly price charts, you often see prices moving up steadily
over time. However, without the sharp bump-up of prices, the rising trend should
Caterpillar (Machinery (const/mining), NYSE, CAT)
– 60
– 58
– 56
– 54
– 52
– 50
– 48
– 46
– 44
– 42
– 40
– 38
– 36
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
Failed BARR
5% Failure
Dual BARR
Figure 8.2 A bump-and-run reversal on a weekly chart. The formation on the left
fails as prices climb away instead of moving below the trend line. The rounded-
appearing center bump-and-run reversal has good volume characteristics—high vol-
ume at the formation start, bump start, and trend line crossing. However, prices
decline below the trend line just 4%. That is called a 5% failure. The right bump-and-
run reversal is a dual bump-and-run reversal formation because prices approach the
trend line in March, form a second peak, then drop below the trend line.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 137

not be labeled a budding BARR. The slope of the price trend line should rise from
about 30% at the start to 60% or higher during the bump phase.
To reduce the failure rate, wait for prices to close below the trend line.
Waiting boosts the success rate but reduces the profit that you would make if
you sold near the top. In the Trading Tactics section of this chapter, I show
you how to sell near the top before the decline really begins. That way you can
keep more of your profits or make even more by shorting.
Statistics
Table 8.2 shows general statistics for BARR tops.
Number of formations. BARR tops are plentiful. I found nearly 800 of
them with most occurring in a bull market (because it was longer than the
bear market).
Reversal or continuation. Most of the patterns acted as a reversal of the
prevailing price trend, not as a consolidation. This occurence is even truer in a
bear market, where nearly all acted as reversals. Reversals perform better than
continuations in a bull market but worse in a bear market. This may not be an
accurate comparison because of the small sample size for continuations in a
bear market.
Average decline. As you would expect, the average decline in a bull mar-
ket (19%) is less than the superb results in a bear market (27%). Both are bet-
ter than the average decline for all chart pattern types.
Declines over 45%. Rarely does a bearish pattern have many samples
showing declines over 45%, and BARR tops are no exception.
Table 8.2
General Statistics
Description Down Breakout Down Breakout
R/C performance –20% R, –13% C –26% R, –32% C
Declines over 45% 20 or 3% 7 or 7%
31%a
Days to ultimate low 68 39
a
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 138

Change after trend ends. If you can tell when the downward trend ends
(that is, when it reaches the ultimate low), buy the stock. The rise off the bot-
tom is huge: 53% in a bull market and 48% in a bear market.
Busted pattern performance. Table 8.2 shows the performance num-
bers for busted patterns, but few occur, so the numbers are likely to change.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. In a bull market, the S&P 500 index
climbed 8%, and in a bear market, the index dropped 11%. Notice how a
strong bear market helped the average BARR decline 27%.
Days to ultimate low. In a bull market, it takes just over 2 months (68
days) to reach the ultimate low, but in a bear market, the drop takes 39 days.
Thus, patterns in a bear market have prices that drop farther in less time, mean-
ing a steeper decline. This finding suggests that if you own a stock with a BARR
top and prices confirm by closing below the trend line, sell immediately. Oth-
erwise, the price riptide may drag your profitable position into a losing one.
Table 8.3 lists failure rates for BARR tops. The failures start small, espe-
cially in a bear market. Just one pattern, or 1%, fails to drop at least 5%. As one
might expect, the failure rates in a bear market are below those of the bull mar-
ket. Half the patterns in a bear market will fail to drop at least 25%. In a bull
market, the halfway mark passes at about 18%, meaning half the patterns will
fail to decline more than 18%. Compared to other bearish chart patterns, these
failure rates are small.
One way to use the table is with the measure rule. Later, in Trading Tac-
tics I discuss the rule, but suppose it predicts a decline from 20 to 15, or 25%.
How likely is it that prices will actually decline that far? Table 8.3 shows the
answer. In a bull market, 73% will fail to drop at least 25% and in a bear mar-
ket, 59% will fail. Thus, in both markets, price is unlikely to make a 25% drop.
Table 8.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics for
BARR tops.
Statistics 139
Table 8.3
Failure Rates
Decline (%) Down Breakout Down Breakout
10 134 or 20% 6 or 6%
15 275 or 41% 27 or 26%
20 386 or 57% 45 or 43%
25 490 or 73% 61 or 59%
30 569 or 85% 72 or 69%
35 610 or 91% 85 or 82%
50 662 or 98% 99 or 95%
75 673 or 100% 104 or 100%
Over 75 673 or 100% 104 or 100%
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 139

Formation end to breakout. The breakout happens quickly in BARR
tops, taking between 2 and 3 days.
Yearly position. Most of the BARR tops I looked at had the breakout
near the yearly high. This makes sense as we are dealing with an up-sloping
trend line after a price run up.
Yearly position, performance. Where do the best performing BARR
tops breakout? The star performers have breakouts in the middle of the yearly
price range.
Pullbacks. A pullback occurs between 62% and 65% of the time, and it
takes 10 days for the stock to return to the breakout price. When a pullback
happens, performance suffers.
Check for underlying nearby support—anything that might send prices
higher. If you short a stock and prices head back up, it may be a temporary sit-
uation caused by a pullback. Prices should return to the breakout price then,
eventually, resume their downward trip. If they continue moving higher, close
out your short position. If they continue down, consider adding to your short
position or opening a new one.
Gaps. Breakout day gaps help performance. Notice that the bear market
gap size is double the bull market size.
Number of dual bumps. Sometimes prices will bounce off the trendline
and form another bump. That is what I call a dual bump. Compare Figure 8.3
with Figure 8.4. The stock in Figure 8.3 has a bump with a rounded appear-
ance, giving investors plenty of time to sell the stock near the high. Figure 8.4
Table 8.4
Percentage of breakouts occurring near the L11%, C41%, L7%, C41%,
12-month low (L), center (C), or high (H) H48% H52%
Percentage decline for each 12-month L18%, C20%, L29%a
, C32%,
lookback period H18% H23%
Pullbacks 62% 65%
Average time to pullback ends 10 days 10 days
Average decline for patterns with pullback 18% 24%
Average decline for patterns without pullback 21% 32%
Number of dual bumps 28% 38%
a
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 140

Statistics 141
MagneTek, Inc. (Electrical Equipment, NYSE, MAG)
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
Generally Rounded Bump
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct
Oct 92 Nov Dec
Figure 8.3 A bump-and-run reversal with a rounded bump occurs 76% of the
time, on average. Notice the premature downward breakouts in mid-April, a week
or two before the actual breakout. The ultimate low reached in October is at a
price of 12.25, a decline of over 50%.
Micron Technology (Semiconductor, NYSE, MU)
–100
– 96
– 92
– 88
– 84
– 80
– 76
– 72
– 68
– 64
– 60
– 56
– 52
– 48
– 44
– 40
– 36
– 32
– 28
– 24
– 20
– 16
– 12
Feb 95 Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
First Bump
Second Bump
Figure 8.4 A bump-and-run reversal with a pointed-looking first bump, leaving
investors precious little time to get out of the stock. Many semiconductor stocks
showed similar price patterns in late 1995, setting the stage for an industry-wide
downturn. The ultimate low reached in mid-January 1996 comes after a decline of
nearly 70%.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 141

shows a chart pattern with a much narrower peak. Investors had only a few days
to catch the top before prices moved down quickly. The chart in Figure 8.4 is
also a dual BARR. There is a second smaller bump just before prices head
below the trend line. Dual or multiple bump BARRs occur 38% of the time
with only 8% of second or additional bumps having peaks that rise above the
first bump.
Table 8.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate low. As
with other bearish chart patterns, we find that many flame out early. By that, I
mean it does not take a long time to reach the ultimate low. Almost half (24 +
14 + 11 = 49%) of the bear market patterns bottom in less than 3 weeks.
BARRs in bull markets do better, but 39% reach the ultimate low in 3 weeks.
At the other end of the scale, where large declines come into play, we find that
17% of bear market patterns have not found the ultimate low in less than 70
days. For bull markets, 30% have not bottomed by day 70.
Notice the slight rise in patterns bottoming out around day 35 (bear mar-
ket) and day 56. If you short a stock in a bear market, the trend may change a
month after the breakout, so be on the lookout for that.
Table 8.6 shows size statistics.
Table 8.5
Frequency Distribution of Days to Ultimate Low
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 24% 14% 11% 6% 9% 4% 5% 6% 2% 3% 17%
Bull market 22% 9% 8% 8% 7% 4% 3% 4% 2% 3% 30%
Table 8.6
Size Statistics
a
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 142

Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. I computed the dif-
ference between the highest high in the pattern and the lowest low and then
divided by the breakout price. Values above the median I considered tall; val-
ues below the median, short. Do the computation for your pattern, and trade
only tall ones.
Width. Narrow patterns perform better than tall ones in a bull market,
but do worse in a bear market. I used the median length as the divider between
narrow and wide.
Average formation length. The average pattern length measures
between 4 months (bear market) and 6 months (bull market).
Height and width combinations. The best combination in a bull mar-
ket associates with patterns both tall and narrow. In a bear market, tall and
wide ones do well. Avoid BARRs that are short and wide; they perform worst.
Table 8.7 shows volume-related statistics. Judging from the numbers,
downward breakouts in a bull market are not influenced by volume. The fol-
lowing analysis pertains to bear markets.
Volume trend. BARRs with a falling volume trend performed better
than did those with a rising volume trend.
Volume shapes. BARRs with U-shaped volume performed best. BARRs
with a random shape performed worst.
Breakout volume. Heavy breakout volume helped propel BARRs in a
bear market to outsized gains.
Trading Tactics
Table 8.8 lists tools to help judge when to sell a stock that contains a BARR as
well as the minimum price decline (the measure rule—discussed later) to expect
Trading Tactics 143
Table 8.7
Volume Statistics
Falling volume trend performance 19% 30%a
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume 19% 23%a
pattern performance
a
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 143

from such a formation. As you view your stock charts periodically, some stocks
will follow trend lines upward. These are the ones to monitor closely. Occa-
sionally, one will begin a rapid climb on high volume and enter the bump phase.
Warning and sell lines. By definition, a BARR is only valid when the
bump height, as measured from the highest high to the trend line, is at least
twice the lead-in height. Two lines parallel to the trend line assist in that deter-
mination. The first line, called the warning line, is lead-in height above the
trend line. A second trend line, parallel to the first two and lead-in height
above the warning line, is the sell line.
The warning line serves as a signal that a BARR may be forming. Once
prices move solidly above the line, consider doing any fundamental or techni-
cal research on the stock to prepare yourself for a sale.
By the time prices touch the sell line, you should have a firm grasp of the
company, industry, and market outlook. The sell line is not an automatic sell
trigger, but it does confirm that a BARR is present. The sell line touch indi-
cates that the momentum players have the upper hand. The game could con-
tinue for several weeks or months before the downhill run phase sets in, so do
not be in too much of a rush to sell. Since most bumps appear rounded, there
is ample time to sell the stock. By waiting, you are giving the momentum play-
ers additional time to push the stock even higher.
However, there are situations when you will want to pull the trigger
quickly. If the company, industry, or market look dicey, then perhaps it is time
to take profits. You might not be selling at the exact top, but you never go
broke taking a profit. Also, if the bump does not appear rounded, then consider
selling. A quick decline often follows a quick rise.
Figure 8.5 shows the BARR trend line and the parallel warning and sell
lines, each line lead-in height from the other. The chart is on a weekly scale
Table 8.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the lead-in height (see Table 8.1 for the definition) and
subtract the result from the breakout price. The result is the
minimum price move to expect. About 8 out of 10 stocks meet
their price targets.
Warning line Drawn parallel to the trend line and lead-in height above it. The
line warns that the stock is making a move and is entering the
sell zone, an area between the warning and sell lines.
Sell line A second trend line parallel to the warning line and lead-in
height above it. Consider selling when prices touch the sell line,
especially if the bump is narrow. Delay selling if prices continue
moving up. Draw additional lines parallel to the original trend
line and lead-in height above the prior line. When the stock
rounds over and touches the lower trend line, sell it.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 144

and emphasizes the relaxed nature of some BARRs. If you owned the stock
depicted in Figure 8.5 and sold it when prices pierced the sell line moving
down, you would not have sold at the top. However, you would have avoided
the 40% decline that followed. The decline also points out that it can be easy
to make money, on paper, in the stock market but difficult to keep it.
Measure rule. Figure 8.5 also shows the measure rule in action. The
measure rule is a method used to predict the minimum price decline of the
stock. For BARRs in this study, about 8 out of 10 stocks decline below the pre-
dicted price.
To compute the predicted minimum decline, calculate the lead-in height
by splitting the formation along the trend line into four equal parts. In the first
quarter of the formation, compute the height from the highest high to the
trend line, measured vertically (or use the widest distance between the two).
Subtract the result from where the trend line is pierced, heading down (the
breakout). In Figure 8.5, the lead-in height is 3.50 (that is, 21.50–18). The tar-
get price is thus 21.63 (25.13–3.50), reached during the week of the breakout.
After the breakout, the stock rises back up to meet the trend line before
resuming its decline. Since a trend line denotes a resistance area when
approached from below, it is no surprise prices turn away. Prices form a dou-
ble top in the July to September period and plunge downward.
Trading Tactics 145
Comsat Corp. (Telecom. Services, NYSE, CQ)
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
92 F M A M J J A S O N D 93 94
F M 95 F
F M
A M J J A
M A M J J A S O N D
S O N D
Sell Line
Warning Line
BARR Trend Line
Sell Here When Prices
Move Down and
Touch the Sell Line
A Double Top
Forms After
Meeting Resistance
from the Trend Line
Predicted
Minimum Price
Target
Double Top
Figure 8.5 Bump-and-run reversal trend line and two parallel warning and sell
lines. There is plenty of time to take profits in this bump-and-run reversal. The stock
reached a low of 17.50 in December, a 40% decline from the sell point in July. Also
shown in the July to September period is a double top.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 145

Sample Trade
Jenny is a librarian. Before she goes home at the end of each day, she logs onto
the Internet and checks her stock portfolio. She did not notice it at first, but by
mid-September, Jenny spotted a BARR forming in a stock she owned (Figure
8.6). She spent an hour searching the Internet for anything she could find
about the company. She checked the fundamentals, analysts’ recommenda-
tions, insider buying and selling patterns, and anything else she could think of.
She reviewed the reasons she bought the stock. Using the Peter Lynch
style of investing—that of buying a stock one is familiar with—held a special
appeal to her. She liked shopping at the grocery store chain and the products
they sold were something she could really sink her teeth into. She felt com-
fortable owning the stock.
Jenny printed out the price chart and examined the BARR in detail. She
drew the trend line along the bottom, divided the length of it into four equal
parts, and computed the lead-in height. Then she drew the warning and sell
lines parallel to the trend line, each separated by the lead-in height. She com-
puted the minimum target price to which the stock was likely to decline. From
the current price of 30, the target price was 23, a decline of almost 25%. Even
though she still liked the stock, such a large decline made her nervous.
Winn Dixie Stores Inc. (Grocery, NYSE, WIN)
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
Sell Lines
Sell Lines
BARR Trend Line
Stock Sold Here
Predicted
Minimum
Price Decline
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr
Figure 8.6 Detailed bump-and-run reversal with sell lines. As described in the
Sample Trade, Jenny raised her sell point as the stock climbed. Eventually, she sold
the stock the day after it pierced a lower sell line.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 146

She looked back through the chart price history and searched for support
zones so she could better gauge the area where any decline might stop. The
first support area was in the 23 to 24 zone, where a prior advance had paused.
Interestingly, that was also the predicted decline point for the stock. If the
stock fell below the support point, she noticed a second, more robust support
area between 20 and 22.
What of the possible reward? How high could she expect the stock to
rise? Long-term price charts were no help as the stock was making new highs
almost daily. Jenny shrugged her shoulders as there was no way to determine
where the rise would stop. Her only guess was that it might pause at 35, 40, or
45, price points where investors might decide to sell. Any one of those points
could turn the stock downward, she decided. Even the current 30 level might
be the highest price the stock sees.
After her analysis was complete, she was still confident that the stock held
promise of additional gains. As with any stock caught by upward momentum,
there was no telling how high the stock would climb before it stopped. She
decided to hang onto the stock. If the stock declined to the warning line,
she would sell it. She placed a stop-loss order at 27.50, the current value of the
warning line.
During late September and into the start of October, the stock followed
the sell line upward. On October 12, the stock jumped upward again. After a
week or so, Jenny was able to draw another sell line parallel to the original
BARR trend line that intersected stock prices. She decided that should the
stock fall to the lower sell line, she would dump the stock. She raised her stop-
loss point to 31. But the stock did not return to the lower sell line.
The stock reached a minor high of 34.38 on October 19, then retraced
some of its prior gains. It curled around and reached a low of 32.88 before
turning around. Jenny printed out another price chart and drew a new trend
line. This line had a slope of about 60 degrees. She smiled as the BARR was
performing exactly as predicted.
During the first part of December, prices pierced the 60 degree trend line
when the stock began moving sideways. Jenny suspected that the rise was nearly
over, but one could never tell for sure until it was too late. She decided that should
the stock decline below the latest sell line, she would close out her position.
The stock moved up again. A few days after Christmas, the stock reached
a new high of 39.75 and Jenny was able to draw another sell line. During the
next 2 weeks, the stock declined to the lower sell line, then rebounded to chal-
lenge its recent high. On January 15, it peaked at 39.88, a smidgen below the
40 resistance number she estimated earlier.
To Jenny, the day looked like a one-day reversal, but she could not be sure.
Taken together, the two highest points looked like a double top, but the reces-
sion between them was not deep enough to qualify and the two peaks were a bit
too close together. Still, it was a warning sign and it made her nervous.
Sample Trade 147
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 147

Less than a week later, the stock declined below the lower sell line.
Should she sell or hold on for additional gains? She looked back at the profit
she had made so far and decided not to be greedy. She sold the stock at 36.75
on January 22. The next trading day, the stock closed up 1.25 at 38, and she
was crestfallen.
She continued to monitor the stock and watched it hesitantly move
higher over the next 2 weeks. She tried to take solace in the large profit she
achieved, but it was little comfort in the face of missed gains. Did she sell too
soon? On February 23, her question was answered when the stock dropped
below her sell point, heading down.
Jenny watched the stock drop to 35 and find support at that level. Then,
it continued moving down. In early April, the stock declined below the origi-
nal trend line and she calculated the minimum target price of 31. This was
reached within the week and the stock continued falling.
She turned her attention to other interesting situations and forgot her
trade until July 1994. By chance, she pulled up a chart of the company and was
horrified to see that the stock had declined to a low of about 21, almost a 50%
decline from the high.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select better perform-
ing BARR tops. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Follow the identification guidelines to select BARR tops—Table 8.1.
• Select BARRs in a bear market for the largest average decline—Table 8.2.
• The decline in a bear market is steeper than in a bull market—Table 8.2.
• Pick BARRs in a bear market for the lowest failure rate—Table 8.3.
• Select patterns with breakouts in the middle of the yearly price range—
Table 8.4.
• Pullbacks hurt performance. Look for underlying support before trad-
ing—Table 8.4.
• Breakout day gaps help performance—Table 8.4.
• Almost half of the bear market patterns reach the ultimate low in fewer
than 3 weeks. Look for a trend change a month after the breakout—
Table 8.5.
• Pick tall patterns and avoid those that are both short and wide—
Table 8.6.
• A falling volume trend may suggest better postbreakout performance
in a bear market—Table 8.7.
4366_08.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 148

149
9
Cup with Handle
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Looks like a cup profile with the handle on
the right.
Volume trend Downward Upward
Throwbacks 58% 42%
Surprising findings Patterns that are tall, have short handles, and
a higher left cup lip perform better.
See also Bump-and-Run Reversal Bottom; Rounded
Bottom
This pattern sports a low failure rate but a below average rise when compared
to other chart pattern types. The Results Snapshot shows the numbers. A few
surprises are unique to this pattern. A cup with a short handle (shorter than the
median length) tends to outperform those with longer handles. If the left cup
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 149

lip is higher than the right, the postbreakout performance is also slightly bet-
ter. The higher left lip is a change from the first edition of this Encyclopedia
where cups with a higher right lip performed better. I believe the difference is
from the change in methodology and a larger sample size.
Tour
The cup-with-handle formation was popularized by William J. O’Neil in his
book, How to Make Money in Stocks (McGraw-Hill, 1988). He gives a couple of
examples such as that shown in Figure 9.1. The stock climbed 295% in about 2
months (computed from the right cup lip to the ultimate high). Unfortunately,
it does not meet O’Neil’s criteria for a cup-with-handle formation. I discuss my
interpretation of his criteria in a moment, but let us first take a closer look at the
chart pattern. The stock began rising in early August at a price of about 5.50 and
climbed steadily until it bumped up in early December. Volume, incidentally,
was very high for the stock at this stage. The stock climbed robustly then
rounded over and plunged back through an earlier trend line. It completed a
bump-and-run reversal (BARR). During its climb, the stock reached a high of
26.88 during late December and a low of 12.38 after the BARR top—a loss of
54%. The rise and decline formed the left side of the cup. Over the next 2
months, prices meandered upward and pierced the old high during late March.
The rise to the old high completed the right side of the cup.
150 Cup with Handle
Diana Corp. (Telecom. Services, NYSE, DNA)
–115
–109
–103
– 97
– 91
– 85
– 79
– 73
– 67
– 61
– 55
– 49
– 43
– 37
– 31
– 25
– 19
– 13
– 7
– 1
– –5
Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr May
Bump-and-Run
Reversal
Cup Handle
Throwback
Figure 9.1 Bump-and-run reversal that leads to a cup-with-handle formation.
Note the price scale as the breakout occurs at about 30 and the stock climbs to
120 in fewer than 2 months. The cup handle is a high, tight flag formation.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 150

Profit-taking stunted the climb and prices moved horizontally for almost
2 weeks before resuming their rise. This movement formed the cup handle
(incidentally, the handle in this formation is a high, tight flag formation). Vol-
ume during formation of the handle was down sloping—higher at the start and
trending lower. When prices rose above the cup lip, a breakout occurred. This
accompanied a surge in volume that propelled prices higher. However, a week
after the breakout, prices threw back to the handle top before continuing
upward. This throwback allowed nimble investors the opportunity to enter
long positions or add to existing ones. By late May, just 44 days after the break-
out, the stock reached the ultimate high of 120.
In the study of chart formations, when I search a database for various patterns,
I ignore most conventional selection criteria. I let the formations determine
their own characteristics. That is the approach I used in selecting the cup-with-
handle formation. Table 9.1 shows both the O’Neil selection criteria and the
guidelines I used to choose patterns.
Table 9.1
Two Different Approaches to O’Neil’s Cup-with-Handle Pattern
Bulkowski Selection
O’Neil Criteria Guidelines
Improving relative strength None
Substantial increase in volume during prior uptrend None
Rise before cup is at least 30% Same
U-shaped cup Same
Cups without handles allowed Cup must have handles
Cup duration: 7 to 65 weeks Same
Cup depth: 12% or 15% to 33%; some decline
40% to 50% None
Handle duration: usually at least 1 to 2 weeks 1 week minimun
Handle downward price trend None
Handle downward volume trend None
Handles form in upper half of cup Selected if handle looks like
it formed in upper half
Handle forms above 200 day price moving average None
Handle price drop should be 10% to 15% from high
unless stock forms a very large cup None
High breakout volume, at least 50% above normal None
Saucer with handle price pattern has more shallow cups None
None suggested Cup edges should be at
about the same price level
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 151

In the first edition of this book, I applied as many of his guidelines as I
could and found that fewer than 10% of the patterns I considered valid cups
were chosen. Plus, the performance of the selected few was not as good as the
cups I found using the Bulkowski guidelines shown in Table 9.1. For more
information about the cup with handle pattern, consult O’Neil’s book.
Here is a brief review of the guidelines I found important.
Rise before cup is at least 30%. As I was selecting cup-with-handle pat-
terns, it became apparent that locating cups during an uptrend was important.
So I used O’Neil’s minimum rise to the left cup lip of 30%. To measure this,
I applied the same method as for finding the trend start (see the Glossary for a
definition) and reviewed those that fell short of 30%. If the trend start using
the mechanical method was shy (usually by just a few percentage points) of the
required 30% but the price trend appeared longer on examination, I accepted
the pattern. Just 15 of 471 patterns (3%) were in this category.
U-shaped cup, handle duration. I removed all V-shaped cups and kept
the U-shaped ones. I am not sure about the performance effect of this. Also
removed were those cups with handles shorter than 7 days (5 trading days). A
cup without a handle is a rounding bottom. I considered the handle length as
the distance from the right cup lip to the breakout.
Cup duration. I used a strict interpretation of O’Neil’s cup duration.
Removed were short cups (fewer than 7 weeks) and overly long ones (over
65 weeks).
Handles form in upper half of cup. I used a more lax interpretation of
where the handle forms on the cup. In other words, I visually inspected the
cups to be sure prices in the handle drifted no lower than halfway down the
cup. I removed those drifting lower (include all with downward breakouts).
When measuring distance, use an arithmetic chart, not a semilogarith-
mic chart.
Cup lips near same price. Finally, I selected cups with lips (tops) at
approximately the same price level. Cups with uneven lips are better classified
as scallops. I assign no hard percentages to the difference. Use your own judg-
ment and the figures in this chapter as guides.
Figure 9.2 shows another good example of the cup-with-handle pattern.
The cup gently rounds over and climbs just beyond the old high then pauses.
Prices drift down in the handle, along with a down-trending volume pattern
before the breakout. Then volume surges and prices move smartly upward.
Two days after the breakout, prices move marginally lower again and enter
the region of the right cup lip. After a brief throwback, prices are soon on
their way again. Less than 2 months later, the stock tops out at 15.50 for a
rise of 22%.
If you look on either side of the cup in Figure 9.2 you will find two addi-
tional cups (portions of which are shown) that fail. The one on the left breaks
out downward and the one on the right fails to continue rising by more than
152 Cup with Handle
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 152

Mentor Graphics (Computers and Peripherals, NASDAQ, MENT)
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
Prior Cup
Next Cup
Cup
Throwback
to Cup Lip
Handle
Handle
Pullback
Jan 94 Feb
Figure 9.2 A cup-with-handle pattern. The cup and handle are shaped nicely,
with the right cup lip slightly higher than the left.
5%, so it, too, is a failure. Only the center cup works as expected but even it
shows muted gains.
Figure 9.3 also shows a cup-with-handle formation but on the weekly
time scale. When I was searching for the various formations, I found that
weekly scales provide an easy way to identify many of the formations. Of
course, I also looked at daily price data to refine the weekly patterns and iden-
tify new formations that I may have missed.
The chart in Figure 9.3 shows an example of a cup-with-handle formation
in which the rise falters after rising just 11%. Fortunately, after declining back
to the handle base, the stock recovers and goes on to form new highs. Ulti-
mately, the stock gains 52%.
Figure 9.3 also highlights an incorrectly selected cup: an inner cup. There
is no 30% rise leading up to the formation (since prices are trending down-
ward) and the handle lasts just 2 days. However, inner cups offer wonderful
trading opportunities as they allow you to get in on the ground floor of an
impending rise. Even if prices only rise to the height of the outer left cup lip,
the move can be significant.
Figure 9.4 shows another example of an errant cup selection. The rise
from point A to point B is less than 30%. Had you invested in this pattern after
prices rose above the cup lip, you would have seen the stock climb to 34.50, an
increase of just 11%. After it reached the high, the stock plummeted. In less
than a month, prices declined to 21.50, a loss of 38%.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 153

154 Cup with Handle
Adobe Systems (Computer Software & Svcs., NASDAQ, ADBE)
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
Invalid Cup Selection
Rise Does Not Meet 30% Minimum
Handle
Throwback
B
A
C
Jan 94 Feb Mar
Apr 93 Apr
May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Figure 9.4 An invalid cup-with-handle pattern. The rise from point A to point B
is less than 30%. The two outer peaks (in June and March) do not create a cup
either because the handle drops down too far (point C)—well below the cup mid-
point.
Genetech, Inc. (Drug, NYSE, GNE)
– 54
– 52
– 50
– 48
– 46
– 44
– 42
– 40
– 38
– 36
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
– 18
91 92 F M A M J
Handle
Cup
Inner Cup
J
A S O N D 94
A S O N D
93F M A M J J
A S O A S O N D
F M A M J J
N D
Figure 9.3 Cup-with-handle pattern on a weekly scale. The failure at 10% to 15%
above the breakout is quite typical for this formation. However, this stock recov-
ered and continued upward.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 154

Focus on Failures
Like most patterns, cups fail because of the inability of the stock to rise by at least
5% before declining. Figure 9.5 shows this situation. The nicely shaped cup
forms after an extended price rise from 33 to 45. The two cup edges are at about
the same price level. The handle seems to form a small cup of its own. Prices
move up sharply in late September and break above the right cup lip and con-
tinue higher, but only briefly. The stock tops at 47.88, moves horizontally for
about 3 weeks, then starts down. Two months later, the stock hits a low of 37.63.
The rise after the breakout is slightly less than 5%. I classify as a failure a stock
that does not continue moving more than 5% in the direction of the breakout.
Statistics
Table 9.2 shows general statistics for cup-with-handle patterns.
Number of formations. Cups in a bear market are like birds at a feeder
when a cat is around—few cups occur. This rarity is because of the identifica-
tion guidelines that require a 30% rise leading to the cup plus an upward
breakout. Not all stocks decline in a bear market, so cups do occur—they just
underperform those in a bull market.
Reversal or continuation. By definition, with price rising into the pat-
tern and an upward breakout, a continuation of the prevailing price trend is
suggested. Sometimes, however, the cup will reverse the price trend. This
Statistics 155
Murphy Oil Corp. (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, MUR)
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
Cup Handle
Breakout
Mar 93 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Figure 9.5 A cup-with-handle formation 5% failure. Although prices break out up-
ward, they move less than 5% away from the cup lip before plunging downward.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 155

occurs as part of a bounce from a downward price trend. The performance
from these reversals is well below continuations and they are rare.
Average rise. The pattern is an average performer, falling just shy of the
average rise from all other chart pattern types.
Rises over 45%. How well does the pattern perform? Over a quarter of
the patterns (28%) rise more than 45% in a bull market. In a bear market, the
rate is nearly half that. The values are about normal for bullish chart patterns.
Change after trend ends. When the upward trend ends, what happens?
Prices drop over 30%. Keep that in mind when someone tells you to buy and
hold a stock showing a cup-with-handle pattern. The drop also means that you
return nearly all of your gains in a bull market. Pick price targets carefully and
sell when appropriate. Hanging onto a profitable position too long may spell dis-
aster. Remember that the longer you are in the market, the more risk you take.
Busted pattern performance. Few samples make the numbers in the
table, but they show how far prices decline after a busted pattern. If you see
prices climb then reverse, consider a short sale only if the industry and market
agree with the direction of the new trend.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. In a bull market, the index gained 16%,
and in a bear market, the index dropped 5%. Coupling this finding with the
average rise, we see the effect of the general market trend on a stock’s perfor-
mance. In short, a bullish pattern does better in a bull market than in a bear
one. No kidding, right?
Days to ultimate high. How long does it take price to reach the ultimate
high? In a bull market, the climb lasts 167 days (5.5 months) on average. The
lower price rise in a bear market is easier to reach, thus the climb is shorter too,
lasting just 63 days (2 months). If you prorate the bear market numbers, you will
find that the climb in a bear market must be steeper than the rise in a bull market.
156 Cup with Handle
Table 9.2
General Statistics
R/C performance 15% Ra
, 35% C 0% R, 23% C
Rises over 45% 117 or 28% 8 or 14%
–29%a
a
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 156

Table 9.3 shows cup failure rates. I removed from consideration all cups
with downward or horizontal breakouts. As with other chart pattern types, cups
show a break-even failure rate that climbs rapidly as the maximum price rises. I
mean that 22, or 5%, of the cups in a bull market fail to rise more than 5%. Over
a quarter (28%) fail to rise at least 15%, and half do not make it to a 30% gain.
Cups in a bear market show a similar trend with the failure rates a bit higher.
Statistics 157
Table 9.3
Failure Rates
Rise (%) Up Breakout Up Breakout
10 68 or 17% 10 or 17%
15 117 or 28% 18 or 31%
20 158 or 38% 27 or 46%
25 199 or 48% 34 or 58%
30 224 or 55% 41 or 69%
35 256 or 62% 44 or 75%
50 308 or 75% 51 or 86%
75 356 or 86% 57 or 97%
Over 75 412 or 100% 59 or 100%
Table 9.4
Formation end to breakout (handle length) 34 days 26 days
Percentage rise for each 12-month lookback L100%a
, C29%a
, L45%a
, C18%a
,
period H34% H23%
Throwbacks 58% 42%a
Average rise for patterns with throwback 30% 25%a
a
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 157

Formation end to breakout. How long does it take price to reach the
breakout from the right cup lip, that is, a close above the right side high?
In both markets, it takes about a month. The distance from the right cup lip to
the breakout is also the handle length.
Yearly position. As you can see in the table, the vast majority of break-
outs occur near the yearly high. Since the breakout is at the top of a 30% rise
leading to the cup, the results are no surprise.
Yearly position, performance. Where in the yearly price range do the
best performing cups reside? I consider the results meaningless because of the
low sample counts. If you believe the statistics, those cups with a breakout near
the yearly low soar well above the gains posted by the middle or high ranges. I
looked closer at this observation and found that there were 6 cups involved
(bull market only) and most showed gains any trader would love.
Throwbacks. A throwback occurs about half the time if you average the
two values. This is still too infrequent to rely on. In other words, do not depend
on a throwback allowing you another opportunity to buy into the situation.
When a throwback occurs, it takes 11 days for the stock to return to the
breakout price. In a bull market, a throwback hurts performance. In a bear
market, a throwback helps performance, but the sample count is low. In most
chart pattern types, throwbacks are detrimental.
Gaps. Gaps help performance in a bull market but hurt it in a bear mar-
ket, as Table 9.4 shows.
You can see that in a bull market, over half of all cups take more than 70 days
to reach the ultimate high. In a bear market, only a third of the patterns will
still be climbing toward the high after 70 days.
On the other end of the scale, few patterns flame out early. Usually a
quick rise to the ultimate high does not result in a large gain, so higher num-
bers on the right of the table are a plus. The table shows that 15% of the cups
in a bear market will top out in the first week. Half the patterns will drop at
least 20% before day 35. The 20% decline is part of the definition of the ulti-
mate high. See the Glossary for more details on the ultimate high.
Height. Do tall patterns perform better than short ones as they do in
many other chart pattern types? Yes. To compute cup height, measure from
the higher of the cup lips to the formation low, and then divide by the high of
158 Cup with Handle
Table 9.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 15% 3% 10% 10% 10% 5% 3% 2% 2% 5% 34%
Bull market 10% 5% 4% 5% 2% 1% 4% 4% 3% 4% 57%
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 158

the right cup lip (the breakout price). Compare the result to the median in the
table. For best performance, select tall cups.
Width. Narrow patterns perform better in a bull market but wide ones
outperform in a bear market. I used the median length as the separator
between narrow and wide.
Average formation length. The cup length was similar regardless of
market conditions, measuring over 5 months long. Recall that the cup must be
between 7 weeks and 65 weeks (49–455 days).
Height and width combinations. In a bull market, cups both tall and
narrow outperform. In a bear market, tall and wide cups perform best, but the
sample count is low. The worst performing cups are short and wide.
Handle length. In the first edition of the Encyclopedia, I discovered that
cups with shorter handles performed better than do those with long ones. In
other words, if the rise to the breakout is quick, expect better performance.
Higher cup lip. I separated cups into those with a higher right lip, cups
with equal highs, and those with higher left cup lips. Those with higher left cup
lips performed better after the breakout than the other two combinations.
Statistics 159
Table 9.6
Size Statistics
Tall pattern performance 37% 26%a
Short handle performance 37% 23%a
Long handle performance 32% 20%a
Median handle length 23 days 22 days
Higher right cup lip performance 34% 19%
Equal cup lip performance 32%a
20%a
Higher left cup lip performance 35% 29%a
a
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 159

Volume trend. The volume trend only seemed to matter in a bear mar-
ket, where cups with a falling volume trend outperformed those with a rising
volume trend.
Volume shapes. Cups with U-shaped volume performed better post-
breakout than the other volume shapes.
Breakout volume. Cups with light breakout volume performed well in a
bull market, but those with heavy breakout volume did better in a bear market.
Trading Tactics
160 Cup with Handle
Table 9.7
Volume Statistics
Dome-shaped volume pattern performance 30% 16%a
pattern performance
Light breakout volume performance 37% 17%a
a
Table 9.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height by subtracting the lowest low
reached in the cup from the high at the right cup lip. Add the
difference to the high at the right cup lip and the result is the
target price to which prices will climb, at a minimum. Only 50% of
the formations rise that far in a bull market; 27% hit the target in a
bear market. Use half the cup height to get a more realistic price
target (met 76% of the time in a bull market; 55% in a bear market).
Buy inner cup If you discover a cup within a cup, buy on the breakout of the inner
cup (when prices rise above the inner cup lip). Be prepared to sell
at the price of the old high.
Stop loss Place a stop-loss order 0.15 below the handle to limit losses. Raise
the stop to breakeven or just below the nearest support zone when
prices rise.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 160

Measure rule. The measure rule predicts the price to which the stock
will rise, at a minimum. The traditional method involves determining the
height of the formation from lowest low in the cup to the high at the right cup
lip. Adding the difference to the high at the right cup lip results in the target
price. However, this method only has a 50% success rate (half the formations
reach their price targets in a bull market—fewer, 27%, in a bear market). For
a better target, compute the cup height and take half of it. Then continue as
before. The stock reaches the new, lower-priced target 76% of the time in a
bull market; 55% in a bear market. This is still shy of the 80% number I con-
sider reliable, but it gives a more accurate indication of the likely price rise.
Figure 9.6 is an example of the two measure rules in practice. Compute
the cup height by taking the difference between the right cup high (point A at
19) and the cup low (point B at 10). Add the difference (9) to the right cup lip
to get the price target (28). Mid-May sees prices hit the target but plummet the
following week.
A more conservative price target uses half the formation height. This
method gives a target of just 23.50, reached during early July. The stock climbs
to the nearer target quickly and without the severe declines experienced on the
way to the more risky price target.
Buy inner cup. Figure 9.6 also shows an inner cup. If you are going to
trade this formation and can identify an inner cup, buy it. An inner cup appears
Trading Tactics 161
Telxon Corp. (Electronics, NASDAQ, TLXN)
M J J A S O N D 94 F M A M J J A S O N D 95 F M A M J J A S O N D 96 F M A M J J
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
93
Outer Cup with Handle
Improved Target Price
A
B
C C
D
Inner Cup with Handle
Right-Angled
Broadening
Formation
Target Price
Figure 9.6 Example of the two measure rules in practice. Compute the formation
height, divide by 2, and add the value to the right cup lip to get a conservative
price target. Trade the inner cup-with-handle formation for a better entry price. A
right-angled ascending broadening top appears during June and July 1995.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 161

as two widely spaced minor highs that are at about the same price level. You
score as the stock advances to the old high (the outer, left cup lip) and further
if the outer cup-with-handle formation succeeds. Playing the inner cup shown
in Figure 9.6 would have boosted profits about $2 a share or 12%.
Stop loss. Once you initiate a trade, place a stop-loss order 0.15 below
the handle low. The handle is a place of support and sometimes declines will
stop at that point. Placing a stop just below the low point will get you out of
those situations when the stock continues tumbling.
When the stock rises, move your stop to 0.15 below the support zone
nearest your break-even point. That way, if the stock declines, you will be pro-
tected. Continue raising the stop as prices climb. This technique forces you to
eventually take profits but saves you from watching them fritter away during a
reversal.
Sample Trade
Cody is in high school. He is not sure what he wants to do for a living, but he
still has a few years to figure it out before he graduates. When he is not chasing
cheerleaders, he either has his nose buried in the financial pages or is reviewing
charts on the computer screen. His interest in stocks follows in his father’s foot-
steps: The man works for a brokerage firm and taught Cody the ropes.
Although Cody does not belong to the investment club at school, he pals
around with the players. One day, he overheard them talking about the stock
pictured in Figure 9.6. At first he did not think much about it until he looked
deeper. That is when he saw it: a cup-with-handle pattern.
He was not convinced the stock was a good trade, and but did not have
the money to buy it anyway. He decided to paper trade it to see what he could
learn. On the daily time scale, he saw an inner cup forming at point C, so that
is the one he decided to trade.
Week after week, he waited for the buy signal but it did not come. Even-
tually, the stock climbed above the right cup lip but he missed it. When he
pulled up the stock chart on his computer, a throwback had already occurred.
So he waited for prices to climb above the cup lip again.
That happened on May 9, his girlfriend’s birthday. Sensing a positive
omen, he made a notation to buy the stock, on paper, at the closing price the
following day (filled at 15.25). When he met his girlfriend the next day, she was
not impressed with the birthday present he gave her, and the stock closed
lower as well.
Two weeks later, the stock was moving up. Cody placed his stop 0.15
below the handle low, at 14.38 (point D, which also marks the purchase point).
When the stock climbed above the outer cup, he raised the stop to 0.15 below
the handle low or 17.50. Then he noticed a problem forming: a right-angled
162 Cup with Handle
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 162

broadening top formation. To him that was a bearish signal, so he moved his
stop up to just below the base at 20.25. Then he waited.
He got word that the stock was in trouble from his pals. They were not
too happy with the company for some reason. When he pulled the stock up on
his computer screen, he noticed that it had hit his stop in late August when
prices momentarily dipped. Cody whipped out his calculator and tallied up his
gains. He made $5 a share for a gain of over 30%. He chuckled to himself that
next time he would use his paper profits to buy his girl something other than
cubic zirconium.
The following list includes tips and observations on selecting cup-with-handle
patterns for best performance. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Use the identification guidelines to select cups—Table 9.1.
• Select cups in a bull market and avoid those in a bear market—
Table 9.2.
• Cups in a bull market have a lower failure rate—Table 9.3.
• Select cups with breakouts near the yearly low—Table 9.4.
• After the breakout, prices take longer to reach the ultimate high in a
bull market, giving them a better chance of a larger gain—Table 9.5.
• Pick tall cups—Table 9.6.
• Choose cups with short handles and higher left cup lips—Table 9.6.
• Cups with U-shaped volume perform best—Table 9.7.
4366_09.qxd 2/23/05 11:36 AM Page 163

164
10
Cup with Handle, Inverted
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Price follows the shape of an inverted cup
followed by a handle. Price breaks out
downward.
Volume trend Downward Downward
Pullbacks 54% 48%
Percentage meeting price target
(based on handle height, not
cup height) 47% 49%
Surprising findings The pattern occurs more often in a bear
market. For declines less than 20%, the
pattern fails in a bull market almost twice as
often as in a bear market. Pullbacks hurt
performance but breakout day gaps help.
Tall or narrow patterns perform better than
short or wide ones.
See also Rounding tops
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 164

To find this new pattern, I had two things to work with: a picture of an ideal-
ized inverted cup from a Web site and one line of text describing it. That was
enough. I searched through my databases for the pattern, created some identi-
fication guidelines, and then gathered statistics. The pattern performed better
than I thought.
As the accompanying Results Snapshot shows, in a bear market the pat-
terns have a 2% breakeven failure rate—very low. The average decline is 26%,
a good showing for a bearish pattern.
The measure rule, the height of the pattern subtracted from the right cup
rim, fails. Just 12% of the time in a bear market (15% in a bull market) does
price reach or exceed the target. I consider values above 80% to be reliable. So
I changed the measure rule to use the handle height applied to the low at the
right rim. This approach works better, as the Snapshot shows, but still falls well
short of the 80% benchmark. I also tried half the cup height but the success
rates were in the 30% range.
Tour
Figure 10.1 shows an example of an inverted cup-with-handle pattern (icup).
The pattern looks like a rounded top but includes a handle. In this example, the
Tour 165
Inverted Cup Handle
91 Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Aug Sep Oct
B
A
Airborne Freight (Air Transport, NYSE, ABF)
35
33
31
29
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
Figure 10.1 An inverted cup-with-handle pattern appears along with dome-
shaped volume. The handle retraces the decline by rising from A to B, and then
prices move lower before gapping below the right cup rim, confirming the pattern.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 165

cup portion appears rounded and a handle follows the pattern on the right. This
particular handle is narrow and tall, retracing (from A to B) a significant portion
of the decline from the top of the pattern to the right cup rim (point A). Prices
continue dropping, confirming the pattern as a valid one when it closes below
point A, the low of the right cup rim. The figure shows price gapping lower on
high volume, but do not expect such behavior. Once the icup confirms, prices
drop but usually not as steeply as that shown.
Figure 10.1 also shows what a dome-shaped volume pattern looks like. The
rounded volume pattern roughly mimics the price pattern. That is not always
the case as sometimes the dome volume pattern is wider, extending beyond the
icup price boundaries.
Table 10.1 shows identification guidelines for icups. Refer to Figure 10.2 as I dis-
cuss them.
Upward price trend. The pattern acts as a reversal of the prevailing price
trend 57% of the time. Since the breakout is downward, that means prices
must enter the pattern from the bottom. In Figure 10.2, price drops into the
pattern. Thus, this example acts as a continuation of the downward price trend,
not a reversal.
Rounded cup. I did not check the performance of rounded cups versus
V-shaped cups, and I tried to limit my selections to the U shape. I consider Fig-
ure 10.2 to have the V-shape (but used it in the study anyway) and the other
figures in this chapter to be U-shaped or rounded. You may find it easier to pic-
ture an inverted teacup in your mind as you search for it.
166 Cup with Handle, Inverted
Table 10.1
Upward price Just over half the time, the pattern forms as a price top, meaning that
trend prices enter and exit the pattern from the bottom.
Rounded cup Look for a smooth, rounded cup, but accept deviations.
Cup rims The starting and ending points of the cup should stop near the same
price, usually less than 6% difference.
Cup handle Between the right cup rim and the breakout is the handle. It can be
any length. The median is 40 days long.
Cup retrace Price in the handle must not climb above the top of the pattern but
should bounce upward. The three most frequent retrace amounts
are, in order, 42%, 35%, and 60%.
Breakout Price must close below the right cup rim before the pattern is valid.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 166

Cup rims. The cup rims are points A and B in Figure 10.2. Few patterns
I looked at had the same price across the cup rim. Usually, prices in the bottom
of the pattern varied by no more than 6%.
Cup handle. I define the cup handle as the price pattern from the right
cup rim to the breakout (that is, until price closes below the level of the right cup
rim). In the figure, the handle is from point B until almost May. The median
handle length is 40 days, so that gives you some idea of how long handles are.
Expect variations.
Cup retrace. I followed two rules: (1) the handle could not rise above
the cup top and (2) there must be at least some rise—a bounce to the stock after
the decline from the top of the cup. When prices in the handle bounced up, the
most common retrace was 42%. That is, prices climbed 42% of the way to the
top of the cup before returning to the breakout. The next two most common
retrace amounts were 35% and 60%, respectively. All of these numbers are
closing in on their respective Fibonacci retrace values of 50%, 38%, and 62%.
For example, Figure 10.2 shows the retrace as the distance from B to D
compared to the distance from B to C. The distance from B to D is 2.16 (6.90
– 4.74). The distance from B to C is 7.70 (or 12.44 – 4.74). The retrace is the
ratio of these two values, 28%, or 2.16/7.70. Although it may not look like
the retrace is a quarter of the distance to the top, that is because the chart uses a
logarithmic scale.
Inverted Cup Handle
01 Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 02 Feb Mar Apr May
C
D
B
A
JDS Uniphase Corp. (Precision Instrument, NASDAQ, JDSU)
12
11
10
8
9
7
6
5
4
3
2
Figure 10.2 The most common retrace amount is 42%, the measure from B to D
as compared to B to C.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 167

Breakout. You must wait for the breakout with this pattern before trading.
Too many of the patterns I looked at had prices moving upward instead of
downward, especially in a bull market. A breakout is a close below point B, the
lowest low on the right rim.
Figure 10.3 shows another example of an inverted cup-with-handle. This
icup has uneven rims and a top that is really an Eve and Eve double top chart
pattern. Points A and B are 9% apart. That is wider than I like to see, but I con-
sider it a valid icup.
An interesting thing about Figure 10.3 is the volume shape. Look from
late July to the October peak in volume. See how the pattern shows higher
volume at the edges and diminished volume in the middle of the handle—a
U shape? You can see several of these shapes below the cup, too.
Focus on Failures
What do failures look like and what causes them? Figure 10.4 shows one type
of failure—an identification failure. The cup appears in an upward price trend,
suggesting it may act as a reversal. The cup itself is rounded with rims that are
5% apart in price. That is close enough for government work, as the saying
goes. The handle retrace measures 46%. The pattern qualifies as an icup with
one glaring exception. Do you know what it is?
Inverted Cup Handle
Aug
Jul
Jun Sep Oct Nov
Eve Eve
B
A
Crane Company (Diversified Co., NYSE, CR)
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
Figure 10.3 This inverted cup-with-handle has uneven rims and U-shaped volume.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 168

As you probably guessed, the breakout is upward. Had you shorted the
stock in the handle, you would be looking at a loss. Figure 10.4 is a glaring exam-
ple of why you should wait for the breakout, especially when considering a
short sale.
Figure 10.5 shows the next example of a failed trade. Running through
the identification guidelines, the price trend leading to the pattern is flat. The
cup is rounded with rims at the same price. The handle has an upward bounce
that measures 61%, close to the Fibonacci retrace of 62%. Even the breakout
is downward, as required by the guidelines. However, prices drop just 3% before
rebounding. What happened?
Looking back on the weekly scale shows extensive support beginning in
mid-1999 (not shown) and lasting for a year. Price could not pierce 6.50 (mov-
ing up) and stay above that level for any length of time, creating a support zone.
That price is also where the rim of the icup formed. When the downward
breakout occurred, prices ran into stiff support and stopped declining 3%
below the breakout.
This is a good example of how important stops are when trading. After
opening a short position, place a stop just above the prior high or above a
nearby resistance zone. Do not place it too close or you will be stopped out on
normal price volatility. Using a stop would have saved a trader from an embar-
rassing loss.
Inverted Cup Handle
96 Dec Aug Sep Oct
Dekalb Genetics (Food Processing, NYSE, DKB)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
18
17
16
Figure 10.4 This is not an inverted cup-with-handle because price fails to drop
below the right cup rim and confirm the pattern.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 169

Statistics
Table 10.2 shows general statistics for icups.
Number of formations. I split the search for this pattern into three pieces:
the bull market from mid-1991 to mid-1996 on 500 stocks, the bear market
from 2000 to 2002 on 200+ stocks, and another 300 stocks from 1999 to 2004,
but these had varying durations. I found 438 patterns. What does this mean? It
shows that this pattern occurs more often in a bear market (prorated) than it
does in a bull market.
Reversal or continuation. The pattern acts as a reversal 57% of the time
and a continuation of the prevailing price trend the remainder. In a bull mar-
ket, look for the pattern to appear near the top of the price trend. In a bear
market, the pattern is likely to appear as part of an existing downward price
trend. I found no performance difference between reversals and continuations.
Average decline. The performance of this pattern in a bull market is just
16%, below the 18% posted by many bullish chart pattern types. In a bear mar-
ket, performance excels as prices drop an average 26%, above the 24% average
decline by other chart pattern types.
Declines over 45%. Since we are dealing with a bearish chart pattern,
there are few large declines.
Inverted Cup Handle
01 Nov Dec Aug Sep Oct Nov
Triarc Cos, Inc. A (Restaurant, NYSE, TRY)
9
8
7
6
Figure 10.5 A large flat base before the start of the cup supported price and
stopped the decline.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 170

Change after trend ends. Once prices reach the ultimate low, what hap-
pens? Prices rise by an average of 54% to 56%, depending on market condi-
tions. If you can determine when the trend changes—even if you are late—you
can make a lot of money.
For example, by definition, the ultimate low occurs when prices reach a low
and rebound by at least 20%. If you used a 20% turn to mark a trend change,
that would still leave 35 percentage points of the rise remaining, on average.
Busted pattern performance. Only 20 patterns qualified as busted pat-
terns so the performance numbers are unreliable and seem high. Usually, the
numbers are closer to the “change after trend ends” findings.
If you see prices drop a small amount and then soar, trade the new direc-
tion. Expect price to pause near the handle top and pattern top.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. You can see how the general market
influenced the average decline. In a bull market, it impeded the decline but in
a bear market, it helped dramatically.
Days to ultimate low. In a bull market, it takes prices almost twice as long
to reach the ultimate low as it does in a bear market. The bear market decline
must be steeper than the decline in a bull market. If you want to short this pat-
tern, do so in a bear market.
Table 10.3 shows the failure rates for icups. In a bear market, rates start
small but shoot upward. Still, just 36% of the patterns in a bear market fail to
decline more than 20% compared to a bull market failure rate that is almost dou-
ble (66%). Trade this pattern in a bear market and avoid it in a bull market.
Half the patterns in a bear market will fail to decline more than 25%. Keep that
in mind if you think you will make a lot of money trading this pattern.
Statistics 171
Table 10.2
General Statistics
R/C performance 16% R, 16% C 26% R, 26% C
65%a
a
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 171

Formation end to breakout. Both markets show nearly the same time
from the bottom of the right cup rim to the breakout: 54 to 58 days. As I define
it, this is also the length of the handle. This extended time to the breakout gives
you an opportunity to spot the pattern.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range does the pattern occur
most often? Since the breakout is at the bottom of the pattern, you would expect
Table 10.4
Formation end to breakout
(handle length) 54 days 58 days
Percentage of breakouts occurring L68%, C27%, L84%, C16%,
near the 12-month low (L), H4% H0%
center (C), or high (H)
Percentage decline for each L17%, C16%, L25%, C29%a
,
12-month lookback period H13%a
H0%
Pullbacks 54% 48%
Performance with breakout gap –18% –27%
Performance without breakout gap –16% –25%
a
Table 10.3
Failure Rates
Decline (%) Down Breakout Down Breakout
10 90 or 35% 22 or 12%
15 121 or 47% 44 or 24%
20 169 or 66% 66 or 36%
25 200 or 78% 92 or 51%
30 221 or 86% 113 or 62%
35 233 or 91% 143 or 79%
50 253 or 98% 175 or 97%
75 257 or 100% 181 or 100%
Over 75 257 or 100% 181 or 100%
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 172

it to appear away from the yearly high. In fact, the vast majority of the time, the
breakout is within a third of the yearly low.
Yearly position, performance. Does performance change depending on
where in the yearly price range the breakout occurs? The answer is mixed. In
a bull market, the best performing patterns have breakouts near the yearly low.
In a bear market, the middle of the range works best, but the sample count uses
29 patterns. With additional patterns, the results may change.
Pullbacks. A pullback occurs about half the time. That is not often enough
in which to formulate a trading plan (such as wait for the pullback before short-
ing). It takes, on average, nearly two weeks for the stock to return to the break-
out price, completing the pullback.
When a pullback occurs, performance suffers. You can see the effect in the
table. Look for nearby support zones—regions that might repel the downward
price trend before taking a position in the stock.
Gaps. Icups with gaps show improved performance after the breakout, but
the differences are slight.
Table 10.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate low. For
example, in a bear market, 29% of the patterns bottom in the first week. Nearly
half (47% or 29 + 18) reach the ultimate low in less than 2 weeks. A quarter of the
patterns in a bull market are still searching for the ultimate low after 2.5 months.
Notice the slight rise in the number bottoming out at day 42 (bear mar-
ket) and 49 (bull market). Keep an eye out for a trend change 6 to 7 weeks after
the breakout.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. To use this obser-
vation, compute the formation height by taking the difference between the top
of the cup and the lower of the two rims and then divide by the price of the right
rim low. If the result is higher than the median, the pattern is tall.
Width. Narrow patterns perform slightly better than wide ones. I used
Average formation length. Icups are wide beasts—about 4 to 5 months
long—on average. Icups in a bull market are narrower than in a bear market,
but the reason for this is not clear.
Height and width combinations. In both markets, icups that are both tall
and narrow perform best. The worst performance comes from icups that are
short and wide, so you will want to avoid those.
Statistics 173
Table 10.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 29% 18% 13% 10% 5% 6% 3% 4% 1% 2% 9%
Bull market 24% 9% 9% 8% 7% 4% 5% 4% 3% 3% 25%
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 173

Handle retrace. In a bull market, the amount of retrace did not affect
performance. In a bear market, those patterns with retraces less than the median
showed declines of 28%, four percentage points better than handles with
large retraces.
Rims. Rims are the two lowest lows in the pattern, one on each side of the
cup. When the rims shared the same price, the patterns showed declines mea-
suring 19% in a bull market. This compares to declines of 16% when the rim
prices were unequal. In a bear market, there was no change. Let me warn you
that the sample counts were small for evenly priced rims.
Table 10.7 shows volume statistics for the icup pattern.
Volume trend, volume shapes, and breakout volume. As you scan down
the table, notice that the performance difference is minor, regardless of which
category you are looking at. Thus, volume is not a good predictor of perfor-
mance, at least for the samples I used in the study.
Table 10.6
Size Statistics
Tall pattern performance –18% –29%
Short pattern performance –15% –23%
Median height as a percentage of
breakout price 31.93% 52.95%
Narrow pattern performance –17% –27%
Wide pattern performance –15% –25%
Short and narrow performance –16% –24%
Short and wide performance –13% –21%a
Tall and wide performance –17% –27%
Tall and narrow performance –19% –32%a
Short handle retrace performance –16% –28%
Tall handle retrace performance –16% –24%
Median handle retrace as a percentage 45.20% 41.31%
of breakout price
Even rim performance –19%a
–26%a
Uneven rim performance –16% –26%
a
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 174

Trading Tactics
Table 10.8 shows trading tactics.
Measure rule. I tried various methods to get the measure rule to work and
found that using the handle height applied to the low at the right cup rim worked
best. For example, suppose the handle price peaks at 20 and the breakout (the
low at the right cup rim) is at 17. Subtract the difference, 3, from the right cup
rim, 17, to get the target price of 14. Price reaches the target 47% of the time
in a bull market and 49% in a bear market. That is far short of the 80% rate I
like to see.
Trading Tactics 175
Table 10.7
Volume Statistics
Rising volume trend performance –16% –26%
Falling volume trend performance –17% –26%
U-shaped volume pattern performance –16% –26%
Dome-shaped volume pattern performance –16% –26%
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume –16% –26%
pattern performance
Heavy breakout volume performance –16% –26%
Light breakout volume performance –17% –24%
Table 10.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the handle height then subtract it from the price of the
right rim low. Warning: This only works about half the time
Head-and- Look to the left of the cup to see if another handle appears. If so,
shoulders this might be a head-and-shoulders top with a fat head and two
handles as shoulders.
Open short When price closes below the right rim low, short the stock.
Close short If prices decline quickly, several points in a few days (almost
vertical), consider closing the short position. Prices usually rebound
after such quick declines.
Trend line Draw a trend line down from the handle. When price closes above
the trend line, cover your short.
Measured move The handle may be the corrective phase of a measured move down
down (MMD). Sell when prices near the amount of the first leg decline.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 175

Head-and-shoulders. Look to the left of the cup to see if another han-
dle looks like the one on the right. If so, then you may have a head-and-shoul-
ders top. Consult the head-and-shoulders top chapter for more information.
Open short. This reminds me of the time I tested my new circuit board
for the Patriot air defense system. Each time I applied power to the board,
the breaker tripped. I discovered that the layout people wired power to
ground. Oops.
When price closes below the right rim low, open a short position. Be sure
to use a stop or other method to exit the stock in case price rises.
Close short. If prices drop quickly—a straight-line run of several points
in a few days—consider closing out your short when prices stop declining. Usu-
ally, when the sharp decline ends, the price has reached bottom and then
rebounds quickly.
Trend line. Another exit method is to draw a trend line down the right
side of the cup. After the breakout, the slope of the decline will usually be steeper
than the slope of the cup trend line. If so, when prices have declined below the
breakout, draw another trend line from the breakout to the current price (or
use the handle high as the top of the trend line). When price closes above the
trend line, close out the position.
Measured move down. One last exit method is to look for a measured
move down. In some cases, the handle is the corrective phase of an MMD. Con-
sult the chapter on MMDs for more information.
Sample Trade
Sam, short for Samantha, works as a blackjack dealer in Las Vegas. She takes
the money earned from tips and invests it in the stock market. In the decade since
she started tossing cards, she has built a tidy nest egg. Figure 10.6 shows the
inverted cup-with-handle dealt her and how she traded it.
The first thing Sam did was to qualify the pattern. Did it meet the iden-
tification guidelines listed in Table 10.1? Quickly running through them, we find
that price leading to the pattern was drifting down in a bull market. A down-
ward price trend was good as you want to trade with the trend, but it would have
been better if the pattern appeared in a bear market. The cup looked rounded
with rims uneven but not too apart in price. The handle showed a distinct bump
up but some distance from the cup. She did not know if this made any difference.
The handle retrace measured 69%, higher than the Fibonacci retrace of 62%.
Next she reviewed the “For Best Performance” list to improve her odds of
a successful trade. Was a pullback likely? No (good), because there was no price
action as far back as late 1992 and little underlying support in the two years
before that. Was the pattern tall? No (bad). The pattern high was at 10.63, the
low at 8.13, and the breakout at 8.38. The result was 29.83%, just shy of the
31.93% median, making the pattern short. Was the pattern wide? No (good).
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 176

It was 58 days wide, about half as wide as the median. Were the rims even? No
(bad). Clearly, she faced mixed technical evidence.
Patiently, she counted cards until the odds stacked in her favor. When
price closed below the right cup lip, she shorted the stock and received a fill at
7.90. The following day’s wide trading range bothered her, but the close was
in the middle of the intraday range (so it was not a one-day reversal). Price eased
down each day (but not quickly enough to suggest a sale), attempted a pullback
at the start of July, but soon continued lower. After a few weeks, she drew a trend
line down as shown in Figure 10.6.
She measured the cup height then applied it to the right cup lip and found
that prices had declined below the target. Since only 15% of the patterns in a
bull market meet the target, she guessed the downside was limited. [Note: She
used the cup height, not the handle height, to find a price target]. So, she placed
a stop loss order at 6.10, just a few cents above the minor high in mid July (the
“Cup Target” in the figure points to just above her stop price).
After her shift ended each night at the casino, she logged onto the Web
and updated her position. When prices jumped upward in late July, the stop took
her out at 6.10. She made about 22% after commissions. The trend changed in
week six after the breakout, just as Table 10.5 warned.
Sample Trade 177
Inverted Cup Handle
A
B
Aug Sep Oct Nov
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc (Semiconductor, NYSE, AMD)
12
Cup Target
Shorted
Covered
Trend Line
11
10
8
9
6
7
4
5
Figure 10.6 As described in the Sample Trade, Samantha traded this inverted
cup-with-handle by drawing a down-sloping trend line as a sell trigger. A stop-loss
order closed out her position automatically, though.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 177

The following list includes tips and observation for improving your selection
of icups for the best performance. Refer to the associated table for more
information.
• Select inverted cup-with-handle patterns that meet the guidelines—
Table 10.1.
• This pattern performs best and occurs more often in a bear market—
Table 10.2.
• If you can tell when price reaches the ultimate low or if the pattern
busts, buy the stock and ride it upward—Table 10.2.
• Trade this pattern in a bear market because the failure rates are lower—
Table 10.3.
• Check for underlying support. Is a pullback likely? Pullbacks hurt
performance—Table 10.4.
• Gaps help performance—Table 10.4.
• Look for price to change trend 6 to 7 weeks after the breakout—
Table 10.5.
• Patterns with even rims perform better—Table 10.6.
4366_10.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 178

179
11
Diamond Bottoms
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Diamond pattern forms after a downward
price trend. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 53% 60%
yearly low. Throwbacks hurt performance
but breakout day gaps help. Tall or wide
patterns perform better than short or narrow
ones.
See also Diamond Tops
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 179

Downward Breakouts
Pullbacks 71% 40%
yearly low. Pullbacks hurt performance. Tall
patterns perform better than short ones.
Patterns with a random volume shape or
heavy breakout volume outperform.
How is a diamond bottom like asking a girl out on a date? When dealing with
either, it is all in the approach. Diamond bottoms have prices entering the pat-
tern from the top; diamond tops have prices entering from the bottom. What
more is there to know? Plenty, and the Results Snapshot just scratches the sur-
face. Here is a quick review.
Diamond bottoms have low break-even failure rates, usually in the single
digits. The average rise is respectable, too, 36%. After reaching the ultimate
high, prices tumble and give back nearly all of their gains. Thus, you will want
to take profits and not buy and hold.
Downward breakouts perform well for bearish patterns, dropping 21%.
The 44% average decline in a bear market is based on too few samples to be
believable. In fact, many of the statistics use few samples, so be careful drawing
conclusions.
Tour
Figure 11.1 shows an example of what a diamond bottom looks like. Notice that
the price trends downward into the pattern then the diamond appears and
prices reverse. Prices dropping into the pattern mean it is a diamond bottom
and not a top.
180 Diamond Bottoms
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 180

The diamond bottom begins by widening out and tracing higher highs
and lower lows, then the process reverses. The price range narrows until the
breakout occurs.
Volume throughout the formation is diminishing. The breakout usually
sports a significant rise in volume. Figure 11.1 shows high volume on the break-
out when prices gap through the diamond boundary. In less than 3 months, the
stock climbs over 20% to a high of 22.25.
A diamond bottom represents the struggle between buyers and sellers. Buy-
ing demand pushes prices up to a new minor high until selling pressure forces
prices back down. If the selling pressure is strong enough, prices drop to a new
minor low. The widening pattern continues, but usually not for many swings.
On the other half of the diamond, greedy holders—seeing a good price for
the stock—sell, and the price rise stops, turns around, and drops. Sellers buy but
do so before prices make a new low. They are excited about the stock and buy
in before prices can reverse and leave them without a position. This activity
blunts the downward momentum and creates a higher minor low. Thus, prices
begin narrowing on the far side of the diamond.
Eventually, one of the warring parties will win, and overwhelming buying
demand or selling pressure will cause prices to break out of the pattern. Prices
continue in the breakout direction until they pause several points beyond the
diamond boundary. For upward breakouts, the pause may be frightening enough
that holders sell, driving the price back to the diamond trend line (a throwback).
For downward breakouts, buying demand from traders believing they are
getting the stock at fire sale prices creates a pullback. The smart money knows
Tour 181
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 92
Jul 91
Coors, Adolph Co. (Beverage (Alcoholic), NASDAQ, ACCOB)
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
Throwback
Figure 11.1 A diamond bottom reversal. Volume typically recedes through the
formation until the breakout day.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 181

the score and takes the last opportunity to dump their holdings. This additional
selling pressure forces the stock down again, usually for quite some time (weeks
to months).
That is the life of a diamond. If you are nimble enough, you can partici-
pate in the intraformation buying and selling. Buy when prices bottom and sell
near the top then go short and cover at the bottom of the diamond. It sounds
easy, but it is not (unless you like losing money).
How do you identify a diamond bottom? Review the identification characteris-
tics shown in Table 11.1.
Prior price trend. Since we are dealing with diamond bottoms and not
tops, the prevailing price trend is downward leading to the diamond.
The hardest part of identifying any pattern is seeing the shape prices make.
For diamonds, they are especially difficult to identify. However, they occur
many times at price turning points. Thus, look for diamond bottoms at the end
of a downward price trend. Rarely, diamonds appear in the middle of the trend
and prices continue lower instead of reversing.
Diamond shape. When prospecting for diamonds look for prices to widen
out over time forming higher highs and lower lows. The price pattern should
look like a broadening bottom chart pattern. Then, prices narrow, forming lower
highs and higher lows. The second half should look like a symmetrical triangle.
If you draw trend lines around the minor lows and highs, the result should
appear diamond shaped. More likely, the diamond’s top or bottom will be
pushed to one side, making it appear as though the chart pattern is leaning over.
Volume trend. Volume usually trends downward over the course of the
pattern, but need not. Do not discard a chart pattern simply because volume
trends upward instead of downward. In fact, the volume shape most often resem-
182 Diamond Bottoms
Table 11.1
Prior price trend Prices trend down into the pattern.
Diamond shape Prices form higher highs and lower lows in the first part of the
pattern then lower highs and higher lows. Trend lines sur-
rounding the price action look like a diamond. The diamond
need not appear symmetrical.
Volume trend Downward from the start of the pattern to the end, with a
surge during the breakout.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 182

bles a dome 44% of the time, a U-shape 32% of the time, and a random pat-
tern the remainder. The volume trend (slope) is downward 69% of the time and
upward the remainder.
The breakout day volume is usually high—meaning it is above the 1-month
average 53% of the time. Again, do not discard a diamond because the breakout
volume is light instead of heavy.
Here are three examples of diamonds. Figure 11.2 shows the first exam-
ple. The price trend is downward for nearly 2 months, leading to the forma-
tion. Prices rebound slightly and the range widens as higher highs and lower
lows appear. Then the tide turns and the range narrows; higher lows follow
lower highs. The diamond pattern takes shape after connecting the boundaries
of the price movements.
Trading volume throughout the formation is receding. This occurrence
is typical but not a prerequisite for a well-formed diamond bottom. There are
often wide variations in the volume pattern. Overall, however, the volume trend
diminishes over time until the breakout, then volume usually jumps upward.
Figure 11.2 shows that breakout volume is four times the prior day but is just
slightly above average for the stock.
Figure 11.3 illustrates the support area often promoted by diamond bot-
toms. The figure shows support at the $10 level on a weekly scale. Although
support varies from diamond to diamond, when it appears after a diamond
Jun
Throwback
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
Figure 11.2 A diamond bottom with receding volume trend. Prices quickly
recover and reach new highs.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 183

bottom, it is usually near the base of the formation. Another area of support
commonly appears when the stock throws back to the level of the breakout.
Figure 11.3 shows an example of this. Climbing away from the formation after
the breakout, a stock sometimes pauses, reverses course, and heads lower. Sup-
port meets prices that decline into the formation area, usually stopping briefly
near the breakout price, then prices turn around again and head back up. This
throwback to the formation happens more than half the time (53%) and rep-
resents another opportunity to initiate a trade or add to a position.
Figure 11.4 shows the last example of a diamond bottom. Does it obey the
identification characteristics from Table 11.1? Yes. The prevailing price trend
is downward leading to the diamond. The minor highs and lows touch the asso-
ciated trend lines often enough except on the upper left facet. I scratched my
head drawing the slope of that edge because it does not have two minor highs
to connect, but one (the top of the pattern). I connected the high of a day and
joined up with the lower left trend line. Does that make it any less of a diamond?
I will let you decide.
The volume trend slopes downward (very high on the left side and dimin-
ished on the right). Breakout day volume is high, too.
The diamond is also a head-and-shoulders bottom. I have marked the
two shoulders (S) and head (H) to illustrate the pattern. The down-sloping neck-
line is the trend line marking the right top of the diamond. Whether you con-
clude it is a diamond bottom or a head-and-shoulders, the bullish implications
are clear. The rise after the breakout is exquisite.
184 Diamond Bottoms
Teradyne Inc. (Semiconductor Cap Equip., NYSE, TER)
Support Level
Support and Resistance Level
Resistance
Level
Throwback
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
3 4
93 M A M J J A S O N D 94 M A M J J A S
F
Figure 11.3 Support areas for diamond bottoms are near the base of the forma-
tion. Shown here is support at 10 on a weekly scale.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 184

Focus on Failures
I changed the definition of a failure for chart pattern types. I no longer consider
a breakout in the adverse direction as a failure. If you want to trade a diamond
with an upward breakout and it breaks out downward, you will simply look for
another trade. Thus, only 5% failures remain. These are when price breaks out
of the pattern, moves in the intended direction, but stops and reverses direction
before moving far.
Figure 11.5 shows an example. Is this a valid diamond? Prices trend down-
ward into the pattern, the diamond shape is clear, but volume trends upward
(higher on the right than the left). Is the rising volume trend cause for concern?
No. Breakout day volume is also low instead of high. Everything looks fine
except for volume. If this were my trade, the volume anomalies would not even
register. I would be more worried about something else. Do you know what it is?
Look at the figure again. See that descending triangle hanging above
the diamond like storm clouds? Although you may not recognize the triangle
pattern, you should be on the lookout for overhead resistance. That solid block
of near horizontal price movement starting in October—where the triangle
begins—to December where it ends, would scare me off. The only way I would
take this trade would be to short it once prices turned down at the triangle.
That is essentially what happened. Price broke out upward and the mas-
sive overhead resistance stopped the rise. Prices threw back to the diamond
S S
H
Transocean Inc. (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NYSE, RIG)
96 Dec Jan 97 Feb Mar Aug Sep Oct
Apr May Jun Jul
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
Figure 11.4 A diamond bottom also appears as a head-and-shoulders bottom
with bullish implications.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 185

but kept going down. Let me also mention that this pattern occurred in the
middle of a bear market. So, we had a bear market, a falling price trend lead-
ing to the diamond, and massive overhead resistance. The only surprise would
be if the price floated like pumice instead of sinking as does a diamond tossed
into a pond. Your job as a trader is to find the gems that float.
Statistics
Number of formations. In the first edition of this book, I found only 45
bottoms, so I am pleased to report that I have now located 295. Unfortunately,
that is not enough for a good statistical analysis when you split it into four
columns. You will see a notation in many of the tables (for individual entries or
the entire column) when samples are below 30. Diamonds in a bear market with
a downward breakout are a good example. I found only 20.
Reversal or continuation. As the table shows, most often diamonds act
as reversals of the prevailing price trend. For a bottom pattern, that means prices
usually break out upward. The low sample count makes a fair comparison of
reversal and continuation performance impossible.
Average rise or decline. The average rise is 36% and the average decline
is 21%. Ignore the 44% decline. No bearish pattern that I know of has such a
186 Diamond Bottoms
Throwback
Overhead
Resistance
Descending Triangle
Cisco Systems, Inc. (Computers & Peripherals, NASDAQ, CSCO)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
32
35
38
41
44
52
56
60
65
70
48
00 Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 01 Feb Mar Apr May Jun
Figure 11.5 Overhead resistance blocks the upward breakout from this diamond
bottom.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 186

large average decline. In other words, expect additional samples to drop the
number almost in half.
Rises or declines over 45%. About a third of the bull market diamonds
with upward breakouts climb at least 45%. That is the best of the bunch. As
one might expect, downward breakouts do less well in this category.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate high, it
drops over 30%, giving back most or all of the prior gain. For downward
breakouts, after price reaches the ultimate low, it rebounds an astonishing
59% in a bull market! That may sound unbelievably large, but other chart pat-
tern types do better.
Busted pattern performance. I found no busted diamonds with upward
breakouts in a bear market. The other combinations moved in a percentage
range from the low to mid-20s. Additional samples will change results.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The index helped prices rise in a bull
market and sucked them down in a bear market. What is surprising is that the
36% rise in bull and bear markets for upward breakouts are the same despite
the general market moving 11% to 2% upward. It sounds as if the bear market
had a few stocks with powerful rallies.
Days to ultimate high or low. How long does it take price to reach the
ultimate high or low? Answer: between a month and 4 months. Most of the
time, you will see upward breakouts taking longer to reach the ultimate high than
do downward breakouts reaching the ultimate low. Compare the bear market,
Statistics 187
Table 11.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 140 R 63 R 72 C 20 C
R/C performance 36%R, 36%R, 23%Ra
, 82%Ra
,
58%Ca
N/A C 21%C 34%Ca
N/A –21%a
–26%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 11% 2% –2% –8%
a
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 187

downward breakout’s 44% decline in 28 days with the bull market, up breakout’s
36% climb in 119 days. Clearly, the bear market decline must be at a much
steeper slope than the bull market rise.
Table 11.3 shows how often the pattern fails. For example, 4% of the
diamonds in a bull market with an upward breakout fail to rise more than 5%. A
total of 12% fail to rise at least 10%. One last example for downward breakouts
in a bear market: 30% fail to drop more than 25%.
That is how the table works, but what do all the numbers mean? Since
there are so few samples for bear market, down breakouts, remove that column
from consideration. The lowest failure rates usually accompany diamonds with
upward breakouts in a bull market. In second place is the bear market, up
breakout column.
Bottom line: Buy diamonds with upward breakouts for the lowest rate of
failure.
Formation end to breakout. How long does it take from the end of the
diamond to the breakout? Just a few days (2 to 3). Much of this delay is due to
the way my computer displays the diamond and from the requirement that
price must close outside the diamond boundary, not just pierce it.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range do diamonds breakout?
Most often, the breakout occurs near the yearly low or middle.
Yearly position, performance. Where are the best performers located in
the yearly price range? Diamonds that perform best break out near the yearly
low most of the time.
188 Diamond Bottoms
Table 11.3
Failure Rates
10 17 or 12% 10 or 16% 20 or 28% 2 or 10%
15 34 or 24% 14 or 22% 26 or 36% 3 or 15%
20 44 or 31% 17 or 27% 37 or 51% 5 or 25%
25 53 or 38% 26 or 41% 46 or 64% 6 or 30%
30 61 or 44% 34 or 54% 53 or 74% 8 or 40%
35 72 or 51% 41 or 66% 60 or 83% 12 or 60%
50 99 or 71% 47 or 75% 69 or 96% 15 or 75%
75 116 or 83% 58 or 92% 72 or 100% 19 or 95%
Over 75 140 or 100% 63 or 100% 72 or 100% 20 or 100%
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 188

189
Table
11.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
a
Formation
end
to
breakout
3
days
2
days
3
days
3
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L37%,
C41%,
H22%
L59%,
C35%,
H6%
L49%,
C33%,
H19%
L45%,
C45%,
H10%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L42%,
C37%,
H26%
L37%,
C38%
a
,
H20%
a
L22%,
C21%,
H15%
L57%,
C31%,
H31%
53%
60%
71%
40%
Average
time
to
throwback/
pullback
ends
11
days
12
days
12
days
16
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
30%
33%
–18%
–22%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
43%
42%
a
–26%
a
–53%
Performance
with
breakout
gap
40%
56%
a
–26%
a
–44%
Performance
without
breakout
gap
36%
33%
–20%
–45%
Average
gap
size
$0.34
$0.85
$0.51
$0.62
Note:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 189

Throwbacks and pullbacks. Throwbacks and pullbacks—when price
returns to the breakout price or diamond border—occur over half the time. The
exception is the 40% pullback rate for diamonds in a bear market, but the sam-
ple count is low.
When a throwback or pullback occurs, it takes 11 to 16 days, on average,
to complete the move back to the breakout price. When a throwback or pull-
back occurs, performance suffers as the numbers show. To avoid a throwback
or pullback, look for overhead resistance or underlying support before trading.
Avoid the diamond when congestion is nearby.
Gaps. I compared the performance of diamonds with and without break-
out day gaps. Most often, gaps help performance, but that finding might change
with additional samples.
low. This table is useful because you want to find a pattern in which prices move
as far as they can as quickly as they can. I know from experience and statistical
measures that downward breakouts drop faster than upward breakouts rise.
Upward breakouts take longer but rise farther.
Diamonds in a bear with upward breakouts seem to congregate near the
ends of the table. Fully 46% reach the ultimate high in the first 2 weeks, and 32%
take longer than 70 days. Bull market, down breakouts show a similar drop
(46%) in the first 2 weeks.
Notice the slight upticks just over a month after the breakout. More dia-
monds in a bear market with upward breakouts begin reaching the top near day
35 to 42. Diamonds with upward breakouts in a bull market top out a bit sooner,
days 21 to 28. Thus, look for your diamond to top or bottom out around a
month after the breakout.
Height. Tall formations perform better than short ones. To use this result,
compute the diamond height by subtracting the lowest low in the diamond from
the highest high and then divide by the breakout price (the point where price
190 Diamond Bottoms
Table 11.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 25% 21% 5% 2% 5% 8% 2% 0% 2% 0% 32%
Bull market,
up breakout 19% 4% 8% 6% 1% 4% 4% 1% 2% 2% 49%
Bear market,
down
breakout 20% 10% 25% 10% 5% 10% 0% 5% 0% 10% 5%
Bull market,
down
breakout 22% 24% 13% 4% 6% 6% 7% 7% 3% 0% 10%
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 190

closes outside the diamond trend-line boundary). If the result is larger than the
median, then you have a tall pattern.
Width. Most wide diamonds perform better than narrow ones, with the
exception being diamonds with downward breakouts in a bull market. I used
Average formation length. How wide are diamonds? Although it varies,
the average width is about a month long. Do not be alarmed if your diamond
is very short or excessively long.
Height and width combinations. Diamonds that are both tall and wide
perform better than most of the other combinations. The worst performers are
short and wide diamonds. Avoid those.
Volume trend. The results paired with market conditions: Diamonds
having a rising volume trend in bull markets performed best postbreakout; dia-
monds in bear markets did best with a falling volume trend.
Volume shapes. I see no consistent trend except the random shape does
well for downward breakouts. Diamonds with upward breakouts do well with
dome-shaped volume (bull market) and U-shaped volume (bear market).
Breakout volume. Does heavy volume breakout propel prices farther?
Yes, most of the time. The lone exception happens to diamonds with light break-
out volume, but the performance difference is insignificant.
Statistics 191
Table 11.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Description Breakout Breakout Breakout Breakouta
of breakout price
–19%a
–27%
25%a
–18%a
–17%
–21%a
–70%
34%a
–28%a
–46%
a
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 191

Trading Tactics
Measure rule. The Results Snapshot (“Percentage meeting price target”)
at the beginning of this chapter shows how often the measure rule works. For
an example, refer to Figure 11.6. In both diamonds, compute the height by sub-
tracting the lowest price in the pattern (point B) from the highest high (point
192 Diamond Bottoms
Table 11.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Description Breakout Breakout Breakout Breakouta
Rising volume trend
–25%a
–40%
performance 35% 41% –19% –46%
–21%a
–22%
–19%a
–47%
performance 32%a
26%a
–24%a
–53%
–23%a
–44%
performance 37% 32% –18% –43%
a
Table 11.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Measure the diamond height from the highest high to the lowest
low and then add the result to the breakout price if the breakout is
upward; subtract the result from the breakout price for downward
breakouts. The result is the target price.
Quick rise/fall Prices often return to the base following a quick rise or fall preceding
the diamond.
Wait for breakout The diamond can break out in any direction, so wait for the breakout.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 192

A) then adding to (upward breakouts) or subtracting from (downward breakouts)
the breakout price (point C). The breakout occurs the day price closes outside
the diamond boundary.
Specifically, the diamond top in Figure 11.6 shows a height of 7.62. That
is, 79.25–71.63, the high minus the low. Since the breakout is downward, sub-
tract the result from the breakout price. That gives a target of 65.88 or 73.50–
7.62 (the breakout price minus the height).
Quick rise/fall. Figure 11.6 also shows an alternative way of guessing the
magnitude of the rise or decline. When prices shoot upward (in the case of the
diamond top, pictured), a quick decline often follows, which takes prices back
to the launch point. I show this as the “Expected Decline” in the figure.
The diamond bottom shows a similar situation. Prices make a steep drop
into the pattern and soar back out in a similar trend. They stop climbing near the
launch point (shown as the “Expected Rise”).
Wait for breakout. Before you invest in a stock showing a chart pattern,
wait for the breakout. Since diamonds break out either up or down, you can-
not predict the breakout direction with much certainty. Thus, wait for the
breakout—a close outside the pattern boundary—before taking a position. Yes,
premature breakouts do occur but they are rare. A premature breakout is when
price closes outside the diamond boundary but returns in a day or two. In the
288 diamonds I looked at, I found less than a dozen with premature breakouts.
Trading Tactics 193
Aug 94 Aug
Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 95 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Dow Chemical Co. (Chemical (Basic), NYSE, DOW)
Expected Decline
Expected Rise
Diamond
Bottom
Diamond Top
Target Price
Target Price
Symmetrical
Triangle
A
B
C A
B
C
– 80
– 79
– 78
– 77
– 76
– 75
– 74
– 73
– 72
– 71
– 70
– 69
– 68
– 67
– 66
– 65
– 64
– 63
– 62
– 61
– 60
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
Figure 11.6 A diamond top and a diamond bottom. Compute the measure rule
using the formation height by subtracting point B from point A. For diamond tops,
subtract the difference from point C; for bottoms, add the difference. The result is
the expected minimum price move. Diamonds often return to their base. The
“Expected Decline” and “Expected Rise” lines are another way to gauge the mini-
mum price move. A symmetrical triangle appears in late May.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 193

Sample Trade
Scott graduated from engineering college and took his first professional job at
a growing software company. The job pays well, but he has many school loans
and a mountain of dept. He thought of using his paycheck to keep ahead of the
bills while depending on the bull market to furnish the luxuries.
He had his eye on a new stereo system and wanted it for a party he was
hosting during the Fourth of July festivities. That did not leave him much time,
so he searched for a chart pattern he could trade profitably. He chose the dia-
mond bottom shown in Figure 11.6. Scott first noticed the diamond in May, a
few days before the breakout. He believed that the price would not decline below
69.88, 0.12 below the round number of 70 and at the same level as a couple of
price peaks in January.
Risking just $0.75 with a possible reward of $3.75 gave him a risk to reward
ratio of 1:5. If everything worked as planned, he would make a tidy sum, enough
to buy the stereo.
The day after the stock broke out upward, he bought and received a fill at
71.75 (near point C in Figure 11.6). That was higher than he liked, but with
the strength shown, he was sure the trade would work out. Scott dutifully
placed his stop-loss order at 69.88 with his broker. Three days later the stock
closed at 75, above the target price. He dropped by the music store just to fon-
dle the knobs and flip the switches of his dream machine.
Then things began going wrong. The stock closed down nearly $3 to 72.13.
It dropped to 71.38 the next day and made a lower low a day later. Suddenly,
Scott was losing money and his stereo pipe dream was in danger of plugging.
Should he sell the stock and put off the party for another time?
Luck was on his side and prices began climbing again. Soon, they were at
74, but the honeymoon did not last long. Prices completed a symmetrical tri-
angle but Scott did not see it. They broke out downward through the support
trend line (extend the lower right diamond diagonal toward the triangle). The
stock even gave him another chance to get out at a profit when it attempted a
pullback to the triangle boundary. Scott was busy making party plans and missed
the signal. When he received a call from his broker in mid-June reporting that
the stop took him out at 69.88, Scott scratched his head and wondered what
went wrong. Do you know the answer?
The answer is greed. Since he needed money for a stereo, once prices
cleared the top of the diamond, he should have put a limit order to sell at his
target price. Although this technique limits the profit potential (because you
get taken out even though the stock may double after that), it allows a trader
to capture the turn near a high point. I have seen this behavior with event pat-
terns. Prices shoot up, hit the target and then just as quickly decline. If you do
not sell, you lose your profit. An example from my own trading: A few days
ago, a stop-loss order sold my position in Rohm & Haas for a $113 profit in an
earnings flag trade. If I used my profit target, I would have made $1,000.
194 Diamond Bottoms
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 194

Another factor is the psychological pressure of having to profit from a
trade. If your trading profits determine whether you will eat or not, then there
is a good chance your trading will suffer. You will feel pressured to remain in
a bad trade longer than necessary or buy into risky situations that you normally
would avoid.
Fortunately, Scott was smart enough to use a stop-loss order to protect
himself. If he had noticed the downward breakout from the symmetrical trian-
gle, that would have signaled a sell, too.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select diamond bot-
toms that perform better after the breakout. Consult the associated table for
more information.
• Review the identification characteristics for correct selection—
Table 11.1.
• Trade with the trend. Select diamonds with upward breakouts in a bull
market or downward breakouts in a bear market—Table 11.2.
• Diamonds with upward breakouts in a bull market have the lowest fail-
ure rates of the three columns with large samples—Table 11.3.
• Select diamonds with breakouts near the yearly low—Table 11.4.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance—Table 11.4.
• Breakout day gaps improve performance—Table 11.4.
• Expect a trend reversal 5 to 6 weeks after the breakout—Table 11.5.
• Tall patterns perform better than short ones—Table 11.6.
• Select wide patterns—Table 11.6.
• Diamonds with a rising volume trend do best in bull markets; a falling
volume trend, in bear markets—Table 11.7.
• Heavy breakout volume suggests better performance—Table 11.7.
4366_11.qxd 2/23/05 11:37 AM Page 195

196
12
Diamond Tops
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Diamond pattern forms after an upward
price trend. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 59% 54%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance but breakout
day gaps help.
See also Diamond Bottoms
Downward Breakouts
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 196

Pullbacks 57% 57%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance but breakout day
gaps help. Tall and narrow patterns perform
better than other combinations. Patterns
with light breakout volume perform better.
See also Same as for upward breakout.
The Results Snapshot shows the important results of diamond tops. In appear-
ance, the only difference between diamond top and bottom patterns is the
price trend leading to the formation. For tops, the prior price trend is upward,
whereas diamond bottoms have price trends that lead down to the formation.
A review of the numbers shows that the 0% break-even failure rate in a
bear market (upward breakout) is deceptive as the sample count is too small to
get an accurate measure. Still, the other failure rates are at or below 10% and
that is quite good. An odd finding is that patterns in a bear market rise 33%,
beating patterns in a bull market, which rise 27%. The low sample count (28
samples) is the reason.
Diamonds with downward breakouts do well as far as the average decline
goes. The other numbers in the Results Snapshot are self-explanatory except
for the “Percentage meeting price target.” I used the height of the diamond
added to or subtracted from the breakout price as the target. That method
worked just over half the time, far less than the 80% success rate I like to see.
Tour
What does a diamond top look like? Figure 12.1 shows a good example. This
diamond signals a reversal of the prevailing price trend and shows the typical
behavior of a top: Prices return to the level before the diamond begins. In this
regard, the reversal stands out like a sore thumb. Of course, not all tops act this
way. Some signal a reversal of the primary trend and prices not only retrace
their recent gains but continue moving down.
Tour 197
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 197

Table 12.1 lists identification guidelines for diamond tops. Consider the dia-
mond top pictured in Figure 12.2.
Prior price trend. The short-term price trend is up just before the for-
mation, leading to the minor high on the left. Then prices decline and form a
minor low before moving higher again. In late September, prices reach a new
high before cascading downward to finish below the prior minor low. Again,
198 Diamond Tops
Aug Sep Oct Nov
Jun
Baker Hughes (Oilfield Svcs./Equipment, NYSE, BHI)
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
Figure 12.1 A good example of a diamond top. Notice that prices quickly return
to the $20 level.
Table 12.1
Prior price Prices trend up to the formation. With this definition, diamond tops
trend need not form at the top of a price chart—they can form anywhere.
Diamond shape Prices form higher highs and lower lows (widening appearance),
then lower highs and higher lows (narrowing appearance). Trend
lines surrounding the minor highs and lows resemble a diamond.
The diamond need not appear symmetrical.
Volume trend Diminishing over the length of the formation.
Breakout volume Usually high and it can continue high for several days.
Support and The formation creates a location for support or resistance. Diamond
resistance tops usually show SAR near the top of the formation. SAR duration
(SAR) can last up to a year or more.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 198

prices rise up and form another minor high before breaking down through the
upward trend line on the right.
Diamond shape. The fluctuations of minor highs and lows form a dia-
mond shape when the peaks and valleys connect such as that shown in Figure
12.2. Notice that the diamond is not symmetrical; irregular diamond shapes are
common for diamonds.
Volume trend. The volume trend is receding, especially in the latter half
of the formation when the price is narrowing (and the chart pattern resembles
a symmetrical triangle).
Breakout volume. The breakout volume is usually high but is not a pre-
requisite to a properly behaved diamond. In Figure 12.2, the volume on the
breakout day and succeeding days is tepid at best but trends upward as prices fall.
The pattern is a head-and-shoulders top, with the left shoulder, head, and
right shoulder marked on Figure 12.2 The volume pattern is typical for a head-
and-shoulders top, with the right shoulder volume vastly diminished when
compared to the left shoulder or head volume.
Should you locate a diamond pattern and discover that it may be a head-
and-shoulders top, do not worry. In both cases, the formation is bearish. When
such a collision occurs, choose the formation that gives you the more conser-
vative performance results (see the measure rule).
Support and resistance. Support and resistance for diamond tops com-
monly appear at the top of the formation, as seen in Figure 12.3. The diamond
reversal forms a resistance level, repelling prices during the rise in March and
April 1993, and is not pierced until a year later.
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Jul 91
Asarco Inc. (Copper, NYSE, AR)
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
Left
Shoulder
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Head
Head
Figure 12.2 A diamond top masking a head-and-shoulders top. In either case,
the bearish outlook is certain.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 199

A congestion zone forms in October 1993 and lasts through March of the
following year before prices climb convincingly above the resistance area. Even
then, during April and May 1994, prices are buoyed by the support zone at 31
created a year and a half earlier.
Figure 12.4 shows another example of a diamond top. In the first edition
of the Encyclopedia, I called this example a failure because prices broke out upward
instead of downward. I no longer make that distinction: Breakouts can occur in
any direction.
I would expect prices to breakout downward because of the quick rise lead-
ing to the pattern (late January) and drop until they found support around the
108 level, the price range of the January lows. As you can see, that did not hap-
pen. Price broke out upward instead.
Does this diamond obey the identification guidelines? Prices rise into the
pattern from the bottom, so the prior price trend rule is intact. The diamond
shape becomes clear after drawing trend lines along the minor highs and lows.
Linear regression on the volume trend shows that it tilts downward, as expected.
The breakout volume is high, but again, this is not a rule, just an observation.
A breakout on low volume is fine. In short, the diamond top pictured in Figure
12.4 is valid. With an upward breakout, I would check for overhead resistance
to the upward move but this figure does not show any. A look at the weekly chart
would clarify the situation and allow a trader to estimate the likely rise (assum-
ing price stops at overhead resistance).
200 Diamond Tops
Gillette Co. (Toiletries/Cosmetics, NYSE, G)
Resistance
Resistance
Support
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
92 J J A S O N D 93 M A M J J A S O N D 94
F M A M J J A S O N D
F
Figure 12.3 Support and resistance for the diamond appears at the top of the
formation. A support and resistance zone at 31 created by the diamond lasts for a
year and a half. Note the weekly time scale.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 200

Focus on Failures
Figure 12.5 shows a typical diamond top failure. The diamond may look odd
by its unsymmetrical appearance, but does it qualify as a valid diamond? Yes.
The price trend leading to the pattern is up, there are plenty of trend line
touches in the pattern, and volume diminishes from being high on the left to low
on the right—all are ingredients of a properly selected diamond top. Breakout
volume, however, is timid, falling well short of the peaks posted during the
prior three days.
Is low breakout volume the reason why prices failed to descend far (just
3%)? Maybe. A high volume breakout would have given more confidence to a
bearish situation and perhaps prevented a pullback. I have noticed that high
volume downward breakouts pull back less often than do low volume ones.
This makes intuitive sense, as a high volume descent tends to push prices down
farther than a low volume one.
Perhaps the key to this failure is like many others: Support below the pat-
tern stops the decline. On the weekly chart (not shown), support appears in
August 1996, February 1996, and May 1995, all with prices peaking near 17.
Coupled with a bullish general market, the rising tide lifted all boats and pre-
vented this one from sinking.
Based on this chart, if this were my trade, I would have seen the support
in July (point A) as a warning sign. That would be my guess as to how far prices
would drop. Indeed, they do stop at that level in April, but that is well after the
pattern fails.
Nov 92 Dec Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jun
Atlantic Richfield Co. (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, ARC)
Throwback
– 128
– 127
– 126
– 125
– 124
– 123
– 122
– 121
– 120
– 119
– 118
– 117
– 116
– 115
– 114
– 113
– 112
– 111
– 110
– 109
– 108
– 107
– 106
– 105
– 104
– 103
– 102
– 101
– 100
Figure 12.4 A failure of a diamond top to reverse direction.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 201

If prices pierced the point A support zone at 15.50, I would expect a con-
tinued decline to the September low. To play it safe, perhaps a target of 14.50
(above the September tail because you do not want to place a target based on
an outlier spike) would work.
A stop would have closed out my short position at the prior minor high
(near the price level where the word “Pullback” points in Figure 12.5).
Why do chart patterns fail? Who knows? They just do. Use stops to pro-
tect your position and use conservative price targets.
Statistics
Table 12.2 shows general statistics for diamond tops.
Number of formations. I scoured my three databases to unearth enough
diamonds to make the statistics tables worthwhile. Except for the bull market,
downward breakout, I am not sure I succeeded. Still, my prospecting found
375 diamond tops. Most occur in a bull market (because that was the longest)
and downward breakouts were more plentiful than upward ones. I used 500
stocks from mid-1991 to mid-1996 and another 200 stocks bracketing the bear
market from 1999 to 2003. Additional samples came from periods between those
two ranges.
202 Diamond Tops
Tail
Breakout Volume
Ultimate
Low
Pullback
A
Cabot Oil and Gas A (Natural Gas (Diversified), NYSE, COG)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
96 Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 97 Feb Mar Apr May
Figure 12.5 A valid diamond top breaks out downward but price fails to descend
far because of underlying support.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 202

Reversal or continuation. Since tops have prices entering the pattern
from the bottom, most of the diamonds acted as reversals. These are the ones
with downward breakouts. Diamonds with upward breakouts act as continua-
tions of the prevailing price trend.
Average rise or decline. Diamonds with upward breakouts did not per-
form well, but downward breakouts held their own, meeting or beating the aver-
age decline for all chart pattern types.
Rises or declines over 45%. How well does the pattern do? Up break-
outs show a reasonable number of large climbers but downward breakouts do
not. Outsized declines are unusual, however, so do not be alarmed at the poor
showing.
Change after trend ends. When prices reach the ultimate high or low,
what happens? Here again, the showing is poor. After reaching the ultimate low,
prices climb 47%. That figure may sound great but it falls short of some patterns
that climb 60%. Once prices peak after an upward breakout, they drop between
29% and 34%. That is quite good.
Busted pattern performance. Since busted patterns are those in which
price moves less than 5% after the breakout, diamonds with downward breakouts
in a bear market had none that qualify. The others show poor performance and
low sample counts, too.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The numbers suggest how well you
could have done if you bought the stocks in the index as opposed to trading the
diamonds perfectly. The numbers also show the influence of the general mar-
ket on the average rise or decline. A large up move (bull market) helps prices rise,
while a downward move (bear market) pulls them lower.
Statistics 203
Table 12.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 88 C 28 C 203 R 56 R
28%a
–19%a
N/A
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 7% –1% –1% –9%
a
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 203

Days to ultimate high or low. How long does it take price to reach the
ultimate high or low? It ranges between 43 and 81 days, or about 6 to 11 weeks.
Notice that prices in a bear market drop quicker than they rise in a bull market.
Table 12.3 shows failure rates for diamond tops under varying breakout
directions and market conditions. I am sure your eye went first to the bear mar-
ket, up breakout with a 0% failure rate. Look down at the bottom of the col-
umn. I found only 28 patterns. Of course, downward breakouts are more likely
to happen in a bear market than upward breakouts, as the sample sizes attest (I
found 56 patterns with downward breakouts in a bear market).
For small moves, diamonds with downward breakouts are the best bets.
They have the lowest failure rates (if you exclude the low sample count, bear
market, up breakout column). This changes for moves higher than 20%. For
large moves, patterns in a bull market with an upward breakout show smaller
failure rates.
How do you make sense of the numbers? Table 12.3 shows how likely it is
that your pattern may fail to rise or drop a given amount. For example, in a bull
market, 10% of the diamonds with upward breakouts will fail to rise more than
5%. Twenty-seven percent will fail to climb 10%. Similarly, 6% of the patterns
in a bull market with a downward breakout will fail to drop more than 5%.
Formation end to breakout. The delay to the breakout is due to the way
my software draws the diamonds. Ignore the numbers.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range do breakouts occur most
often? The table shows that most diamonds have breakouts near the yearly high.
After all, we are talking about diamond tops, not bottoms.
204 Diamond Tops
Table 12.3
Failure Rates
10 24 or 27% 3 or 11% 45 or 22% 8 or 14%
15 34 or 39% 5 or 18% 69 or 34% 14 or 25%
20 40 or 45% 10 or 36% 106 or 52% 24 or 43%
25 48 or 55% 12 or 43% 136 or 67% 38 or 68%
30 55 or 63% 16 or 57% 155 or 76% 43 or 77%
35 61 or 69% 18 or 64% 171 or 84% 49 or 88%
50 70 or 80% 23 or 82% 197 or 97% 56 or 100%
75 80 or 91% 26 or 93% 203 or 100% 56 or 100%
Over 75 88 or 100% 28 or 100% 203 or 100% 56 or 100%
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 204

205
Table
12.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
a
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
3
days
2
days
3
days
3
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L7%,
C26%,
H67%
L18%,
C36%,
H46%
L9%,
C26%,
H65%
L11%,
C38%,
H51%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
look
back
period
L25%
a
,
C31%
a
,
H22%
L54%,
C21%,
H36%
L22%
a
,
C22%,
H20%
L19%
a
,
C16%
a
,
H29%
a
59%
54%
57%
57%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
9
days
13
days
12
days
11
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
23%
30%
19%
18%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
34%
35%
24%
30%
a
Performance
with
breakout
gap
16%
a
32%
20%
19%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
29%
36%
22%
27%
Average
gap
size
$0.40
$0.91
$0.63
$0.53
Note:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 205

price range, we find mixed results. Bull markets do better when the breakout is
in the middle of the yearly price range. Bear markets have too few samples to be
usable. Upward breakouts do better near the yearly low, and downward break-
outs do better near the yearly high.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. How often do prices throw back (upward
breakouts) or pull back (downward breakouts) to the diamond trend line bor-
der or breakout price? Answer: about half the time.
The time to complete the throwback or pullback ranges between 9 and 13
days. When a throwback or pullback occurs, performance suffers, as Table 12.4
shows. Thus, the key to selecting better performing patterns is to search for
underlying support or overhead resistance before investing. Nearby support or
resistance may repel the downward or upward move, respectively.
Gaps. Across the board, gaps hurt performance. By gaps, I mean a price
gap that occurs on the day price closes outside the pattern boundary (the break-
out day). The average gap size varies from $0.40 to $0.91 depending on market
conditions and breakout direction. Other chart patterns show larger gaps asso-
ciated with downward breakouts, but the small sample size may explain the large
gap size in diamonds with upward breakouts in a bear market.
Table 12.5 shows a frequency distribution of days to the ultimate high or
low. Notice how many diamonds reach the ultimate move in the first few weeks.
For example, in a bear market, 55% of those diamonds with downward break-
outs top out in the first month. At the other end of the table, 13% are still
searching for the ultimate low after 70 days (about 2.5 months).
Also notice the slight blip around a month into the trade. In a bear market,
up breakout, 11% of the diamonds top out after 35 days. Skipping down, 14%
of diamonds in a bear market with downward breakouts bottom around day 42.
In fact, all patterns show a slight rise during days 35 or 42. This finding suggests
206 Diamond Tops
Table 12.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 14% 11% 7% 7% 11% 7% 7% 4% 0% 0% 32%
Bull market,
up breakout 18% 9% 10% 10% 3% 6% 2% 0% 2% 1% 38%
Bear market,
down
breakout 23% 11% 14% 7% 4% 14% 2% 4% 7% 2% 13%
Bull market,
down
breakout 18% 11% 6% 10% 6% 8% 5% 3% 2% 4% 27%
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 206

price weakness (upward breakouts) or strength (downward breakouts) a month
after the breakout. Keep that in mind, as you may need to exit your trade then.
Height. Although the bear market columns have few samples, the trend
is clear: Most tall patterns perform better than short ones. To determine if the
pattern is short or tall, measure the diamond height from the highest high to the
lowest low in the pattern and then divide by the breakout price (where price
pierces the diamond boundary). If the result is larger than the median shown in
the table, they you have a tall pattern; less than the median, the pattern is short.
Width. Most of the time, narrow patterns perform better than wide ones
except for diamonds with upward breakouts in a bear market. In all cases, I used
Average formation length. How long is the average diamond? It varies
from 46 days to 54 days. That is just shy of 2 months. Since this is an average,
your results will vary.
Height and width combinations. No one combination performs better
than the others do, as Table 12.6 shows. However, most of the time, patterns
that are both short and wide perform worse than the other combinations.
Table 12.7 shows volume-related statistics for diamonds.
Statistics 207
Table 12.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakouta
of breakout price
18% –17% –13%
16% –28% –28%
a
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 207

Volume trend. Diamonds in bear markets do best with a falling volume
trend. Bull markets are either unchanged or do better with a rising volume trend.
Volume shapes. Diamonds show no consistent performance trends among
the various shapes. That may be due to the small sample size. However, dia-
monds with a random volume shape (neither U nor domed) perform worse than
three of four columns, so select diamonds with U- or dome-shaped volume.
Breakout volume. Oddly, diamonds with light breakout volume perform
better than do those with heavy breakout volume most of the time (the excep-
tion is for diamonds with upward breakouts in a bull market). Many of the num-
bers are close or the samples few, so do not depend on the result.
Trading Tactics
Table 12.8 shows trading tactics for diamond tops.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to predict a price target. Consider
Figure 12.6, a chart of a diamond top. Compute the formation height by taking
208 Diamond Tops
Table 12.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Breakout Breakout
Rising volume trend
performance 30%a
31% –21% –23%a
performance 25% 33% –21% –24%
performance 25%a
43% –22% –22%a
19% –19% –19%a
performance
performance 27% 28% –21% –23%
a
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 208

Trading Tactics 209
Table 12.8
Trading Tactics
from the highest high in the formation. For downward
breakouts, subtract the difference from the location where
prices pierce the diamond boundary. For upward breakouts,
add the difference to the breakout price. The result is the
minimum price move to expect. Alternatively, formations often
return to price levels from which they begin. The base serves as
a minimum price move.
Wait for breakout For best results, wait for price to close outside the diamond
trend line before placing a trade.
Risk/reward Look for support (risk) and resistance (reward) zones before
placing a trade. These zones are where the trend is likely to
pause or even stop. From the current closing price (before the
breakout), compute the difference between the zones and the
current price. The ratio of the two must be compelling enough
to risk a trade.
Resistance
Bought
Target
Throwback
B
A
C
D
E
F
Sold
Abbott Laboratories (Medical Supplies, NYSE, ABT)
Dome-shaped
Volume
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
46
48
50
52
54
02 May Jun Jul Feb
Figure 12.6 Shown is a diamond top with dome-shaped volume. To get a price
target, compute the formation height (A – B) and add it to C, the breakout price.
The result is the target price.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 209

the difference between the high in the pattern (point A at 43.85 in this exam-
ple) and the low (B at 38.08). Add the difference (5.77) to the breakout price (C
at 41.85, the point at which price pierces the diamond boundary) to get the
target (47.62). Price reaches the target between 69% and 79% of the time. See
the Results Snapshot (“Percentage meeting price target”) for the numbers. In
this example, the diamond missed the target by falling short.
However, there is an alternative method that sometimes yields more
accurate results. The method involves looking at the price chart and seeing if
there is something to reverse. By this I mean diamonds sometimes form after
a quick run-up in prices. The reversal will usually erase these gains and return
prices to where they were before the run-up.
Wait for breakout. When trading technical formations like diamond
tops, it is always safest to wait for the breakout. If you do not wait for the
breakout, you may face a situation similar to that shown in Figure 12.4. Instead
of reversing, prices resume their original trend and the investor, shorting
before the breakout, takes a loss.
Risk/reward. Before placing a trade, consider the risk/reward ratio. In
essence, you first identify the support and resistance levels and calculate the
difference between those levels and the current price. Trades that result in risk/
reward ratios of one to two or higher are worth making. With smaller ratios,
the risk may be too high to warrant a trade.
Sample Trade
Figure 12.6 shows a diamond top Lorenzo traded. He first noticed the dia-
mond well after it formed—during the throwback to be exact. The throw-
back’s hooking pattern caught his attention, and he searched for a nearby chart
pattern. In this case, he saw a diamond top, but was it a valid diamond or just
cubic zirconia?
Lorenzo reviewed the identification guidelines and found that prices were
rising into the pattern, verifying a top. The diamond shape, although pushed
to one side, had an adequate number of touches of each diamond boundary (the
trend lines). Volume receded from the middle of the pattern to the end, so it
had a downward trend. In fact, the entire volume shape appeared domed. Dome-
shaped volume for diamonds in a bull market with an upward breakout was a
decent choice (not the best or worst; see Table 12.7).
Breakout volume was high but nothing to write home about and well below
the peaks of a few days earlier. Prices also gapped upward, suggesting buying
enthusiasm. However, he knew that breakout day gaps resulted in performance
that was not as good as those diamonds without gaps. That made him nervous.
Since the breakout was upward, he checked for overhead resistance and
saw the long island in May. Prices tested the region at point D, leading to the
210 Diamond Tops
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 210

throwback. Still, he knew that prices would eventually pierce such resistance
zones, perhaps after multiple attempts to break through.
He computed the predicted price target using the diamond height pro-
jected upward from the breakout price and saw that the target was at the high
end of the resistance zone. Thus, it looked likely that prices would throw back
there. That meant watching the stock closely and selling when it neared the
target to maximize profits. On the down side, if prices dropped, he would close
out his position just below the diamond bottom (point B).
Two days after prices closed the gap in the throwback, he bought and
received a fill at 43. In the days that followed, the stock dropped, and he knew
from experience that many of his trades either did well immediately or fell
apart. This looked as if it were going to result in a loss. He placed a stop-loss
order to sell at 37.93. That was below the round number support at 38 and just
below the diamond bottom.
Prices climbed. When they closed above the prior minor high, point D,
he raised his stop to just below point E, a nearby minor low. Prices continued
higher for two more days then retraced their gains, attempted another high
(point F) and then started a long slide.
From experience, Lorenzo knew that a failure of price to make a higher
high (at point F) was a bearish sign, but he hoped price would rebound. It did
not. Instead, price gapped down and tripped his stop. The stock sold at 40.98,
for a 5% loss.
What did he do wrong? I would not have taken this trade because of the
overhead resistance. Since there are plenty of chart patterns in other stocks
under more promising circumstances, why take one with high risk and limited
profit potential? On the plus side, he used a stop-loss order and raised it as
prices climbed. Eventually, the order took him out for a small loss. That is the
way it should work when a trade goes bad. Let your profits run and cut your
losses short.
forming diamonds. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Correctly identify the pattern using the guidelines—Table 12.1.
• Downward breakouts occur most often and perform well—Table 12.2.
• Downward breakouts have the lowest failure rates for small declines, but
upward breakouts have fewer failures for larger moves—Table 12.3.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance. Avoid trades with nearby
support and resistance zones—Table 12.4.
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 211

• Breakout day gaps suggest poor performance—Table 12.4.
• Expect a trend change about a month after the breakout—
Table 12.5.
• Tall patterns usually perform better than short ones—Table 12.6.
• Avoid short and wide diamonds—Table 12.6.
• Select patterns with light breakout volume—Table 12.7.
212 Diamond Tops
4366_12.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 212

213
13
Double Bottoms,
Adam & Adam
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Double bottom pattern with narrow or spike
bottoms. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 64% 61%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall patterns
perform better than short ones. Performance
improves for those patterns with a lower right
bottom, a declining volume trend, dome-
shaped volume, heavy breakout volume, and
volume heavier on the left bottoms.
See also Double bottoms, Adam & Eve; Double
bottoms, Eve & Adam; Double bottoms,
Eve & Eve.
A A
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 213

This is the first of four chapters on double bottoms. Each chapter represents a
different bottom shape. An Adam & Adam double bottom reminds me of a per-
son on stilts: narrow legs perhaps made of single spikes that touch the ground
near the same price.
The Results Snapshot shows the important numbers. Adam & Adam dou-
ble bottoms (AADBs) sport decent break-even failure rates with mediocre aver-
age rises. Throwbacks occur in nearly two out of three trades, so you may be
able to add to your position or initiate a new one during a throwback. Surprises
are many and most relate to volume. I discuss all of them in the Statistics section.
Tour
Figure 13.1 shows the first example of an Adam & Adam double bottom. Since
we are looking at bottoms, the pattern forms at the end of a downward price
plunge. The pattern can also appear in the corrective phase of a measured move
up. Notice the twin spikes (bottoms) that happen so often in this pattern. They
drop well below the surrounding price lows yet stop near the same price level.
The rounded turn connecting the two bottoms need not be rounded at all—
many times, it appears irregular. Volume is higher on the left bottom than on the
right, as in this example. Thus, the volume trend recedes from bottom to bottom
yet takes on a U shape that extends beyond the right bottom low in this example.
214 Double Bottoms, Adam & Adam
Adam Adam
Throwback
Confirmation Line
Engelhard Corporation (Chemical (Specialty), NYSE, EC)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
02 Oct Nov Dec Jul Aug
Figure 13.1 An Adam & Adam double bottom with twin spikes, volume heavier
on the left bottom than the right, and U-shaped volume.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 214

The confirmation line marks the highest high in the pattern. A twin bottom
pattern is not a valid double bottom until price closes above the confirmation
line. That occurrence signals a breakout and time to take a position in the stock.
But before you do, check the identification guidelines to be sure you have a good
pattern.
The double bottom pattern is one of the easier patterns to identify, but I have
expanded the identification characteristics table (Table 13.1) for this pattern and
made the recommendations more specific.
Downward price trend. Look for price to be tending downward into the
pattern. A study documented in my book, Trading Classic Chart Patterns (Wiley
2002), suggests that performance improves for patterns with trends leading to
the pattern less than 6 months long. Most of the time (58%), a short-term (0 to
3 months) downtrend precedes the pattern.
Bottom shape. The shape of each bottom should appear similar. That
means both should look narrow, not one wide and one narrow, perhaps with a
long, downward price spike or tail. To gauge the width, look at the top of the bot-
tom. I know that sounds confusing, but the top end of the spike will be wider
than the base. (Eve bottoms will appear more rounded and wider than will their
Adam counterparts.)
Table 13.1
Downward price Price trends downward leading to the double bottom and should
trend not drift below the left bottom.
Bottom shape Narrow, V-shaped bottoms, sometimes composed of long, one-
day spikes.
Rise between At least 10% from the lowest valley to the highest peak between
bottoms the two bottoms. Taller patterns perform better.
Bottom low Bottom to bottom price variation is small. Best performance is
prices between 2% and 5% variation.
Bottom Bottoms should be at least a few weeks apart. Best performance is
separation 3–6 weeks apart. Wider than 8 weeks and performance deteriorates.
Price rise after Price must close above the confirmation point without first falling
right bottom below the right bottom low.
Bottom volume Usually higher on the left bottom than the right.
Confirmation The highest high between the two bottoms. A close above the
price confirmation point is the breakout and confirms the pattern as a
valid double bottom.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 215

When judging bottom shape, ask yourself if the bottoms look the same or
different. If they look the same, then you have either Adam & Adam or Eve &
Eve bottoms. Narrow bottoms signify the Adam variety and wide bottoms sig-
nify the Eve variety.
Rise between bottoms. Look for a rise between the twin bottoms of at
least 10%, as measured from the lowest bottom low to the highest high between
the two bottoms. For example, consider Figure 13.2, which shows an AADB.
The pattern has two narrow bottoms, both with spikes (the left longer than the
right), and volume that is higher on the left side than on the right. Twin bottom
AB (upper left) may look like a double bottom but the 4% rise measured from
A to C is not high enough to be a true double bottom. The 10% rise figure is
an arbitrary one, but I will show that the higher the number, the better the per-
formance (that is, tall patterns perform better than short ones).
Bottom low prices. From the lowest low on the left bottom to the low on
the right, the price variation should be small. For example, do not try to assign
double bottom status to the right bottom and point D in Figure 13.2. Point D
does not drop close enough to the right bottom to qualify it as a valid bottom.
After gathering statistics on AADBs, I found that the best performance
comes from bottoms in which the price variation is between 2% and 5%. Pat-
terns with a lower right bottom also perform better after the breakout.
Bottom separation. How far apart should the bottoms be? Some texts
say that bottoms must be at least a month apart, but I set no such limit. I stip-
A B
C
D
Confirmation Line
Throwback
Adam Adam
Coherent (Percision Instrument, NASDAQ, COHR)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
96 Jun Jul Feb Mar Apr
Figure 13.2 An Adam & Adam double bottom with a throwback. Pattern AB
(upper left) is not a double bottom because the rise to C is not high enough.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 216

ulated that the bottoms should be distinct minor lows, not lows that are part of
the same congestion pattern. I found that the best separation is for bottoms 3
to 6 weeks part. Bottoms farther apart than 8 weeks showed performance dete-
riorating. I measured the bottom distance between the lowest low in each val-
ley (which also marked the beginning and ending of each AADB pattern).
Price rise after right bottom. After price digs the second valley in the
double bottom pattern, prices take time to rise to confirmation. What you need
to avoid is prices drifting down and making a third bottom. Another bottom near
the same price as the first two qualifies the pattern as a triple bottom (but you
still have to wait for confirmation). I removed from consideration any pattern
with a third bottom falling below the other two (it is not a triple bottom and
price did not confirm the AADB).
Bottom volume. The left bottom usually shows higher volume. However,
volume higher on the right side should not exclude the pattern from considera-
tion. Figures 13.1 and 13.2 show volume higher on the left bottom than on the
right. We will see that AADBs with higher left volume perform better.
Confirmation price. A twin bottom pattern is not a valid double bottom
until price closes above the high between the two bottoms. Always wait for con-
firmation before taking a position in a stock because price continues down 64%
of the time—and that is in a bull market, too!
Figure 13.3 shows two examples of double bottoms. Are they double bot-
toms or just twin valley patterns? In both cases, the price trend leading to the
Adam
Adam
Adam
Adam
Ann Taylor (Retail (Special Lines), NYSE, ANN)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
99 Apr May Jun Jul Feb
Figure 13.3 Shown are two Adam & Adam double bottoms. The horizontal lines
are the confirmation lines. A close above the line means the pattern is a true AADB.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 217

patterns is downward, as required. The bottoms are pointed with one-day spikes.
All bottoms are V shaped, not rounded turns. The rise to the confirmation line
is 24% for the August bottom and 17% for the October pattern.
The prices at each bottom are close enough to each other that they look
like bottoms, not rising steps. The time between the twin bottoms is 3 weeks
for the August example and 2 weeks for the October bottom. Prices rise to the
confirmation point in a snappy manner, closing above the highest high in just
a few days.
The volume pattern is unexciting, including the breakout volume. In both
examples, volume is higher on the left bottom than on the right. The breakout
volume is slightly above the 30-day average, classifying the breakout as having
heavy volume. Thus, both patterns shown in Figure 13.3 are valid double bot-
toms. However, prices rise just 18% and 16% after the breakout. How can we
tell the outperformers from the also-rans?
Focus on Failures
Figure 13.4 shows the first double bottom failure and it is typical. The pattern
has valleys that form after a short-term downward price trend and bottom near
Confirmation Line
Adam Adam
Devon Energy Corp. (Natural Gas (Diversified), AMEX, DVN)
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
64
66
00 May Jun Jul
Mar Apr
Feb Aug
Nov Dec Jan 01
Figure 13.4 An Adam & Adam double bottom confirmed when price closed above
the confirmation line, but price soon stalled. Overhead resistance (not shown) may
have played a part, but other stocks in the industry were showing topping patterns.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 218

the same price. The valleys are 29 days apart, with a 17% rise between them.
The AADB pattern confirms when price rises above the confirmation line.
Price climbs just 2% after the breakout. Why so low? The first clue is that
the pattern is in a bear market, which is never good for bullish chart patterns.
The downward price trend starts at the March peak, so it is less than a month
long. Before that, prices started climbing from the October 2000 lows. In other
words, the double bottom did not act as a reversal of the longer-term prevailing
price trend, but as a consolidation.
If you extended the figure to the left, you would see a long line of peaks
stretching to May 2000. That line represented a massive zone of resistance that
the double bottom could not pierce. A check of other companies in the diver-
sified natural gas industry showed that most of them had stocks peaking in May
or June. They all started tumbling at the same time. A check of them showed
that topping patterns predominated (double tops and triple tops), signaling a
downward price trend. Thus, a smart investor would have not taken this trade.
Figure 13.5 shows an example of a second type of failure that perhaps you,
too, have seen. Ted is a novice investor with an attitude. He looks at the stock
chart, checks the identification guidelines, and believes that the stock is mak-
ing a double bottom. When prices rise after the second bottom, Ted decides to
pull the trigger early and buys the stock, receiving a fill at 42.63. He reasons
that all the indications suggest the stock has completed a valid double bottom.
Air Products and Chemicals Inc. (Chemical (Diversified), NYSE, APD)
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
Adam
Adam
Confirmation Level
Stock
Bought
Here
Stock Sold Here
After One-Day
Reversal
Figure 13.5 Example of second type of failure—failing to wait for breakout con-
firmation. Ted decided to get an early start on the double bottom but ended up
losing money.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 219

That being the case, why not get in now while the price is still low instead of
waiting for prices to rise above the confirmation point (46.25)? Ted makes a
good point. He is pleased with the stock’s performance until it begins to round
over. Does he sell out now at a small profit or should he hold on and risk a
downturn while waiting for additional gains? This is a recurring investor
dilemma.
He decides to hang onto his position. During May, the stock surges upward
again before beginning a downhill run. Ted watches in horror as his profit van-
ishes and losses mount. Eventually, when prices spike downward, he sells at the
opening the next day and close out his position.
What did he do wrong? He failed to wait for breakout confirmation. Prices
must close above the confirmation point before a trade is placed. Otherwise your
chances of success are only one in three.
Statistics
Number of formations. I found 281 AADBs in 500 stocks from mid-1991
to mid-1996 and from 2000 to 2004, with others between those dates.
Reversal or continuation. The pattern is a bottom with an upward break-
out. Thus, all acted as reversals of the downward price trend, by definition.
Average rise. The 35% rise is about what you would expect from a bull-
ish pattern in a bull market. The 24% bear market result surprised me because
it is so low, but it nears the average of all other chart pattern types (25%).
Rises over 45%. How well does this pattern do? In a bull market, over a
quarter of the patterns (28%) climbed over 45%. Patterns in a bear market also
held up well, with 15% soaring more than 45%.
Table 13.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear
Description Market Market
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 206 R 75 R
Rises over 45% 58 or 28% 11 or 15%
–35%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 16% 1%
a
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 220

Change after trend ends. Once prices top out at the ultimate high, then
what happens? They tumble about 33%. In a bear market, the decline gives up
all the gains and more.
For aggressive traders in a bear market, wait for prices to peak then short
the stock and ride it down. The trick, of course, is to buy just after it peaks. How
can you tell when the stock peaks? Look for topping patterns that break out
downward in other stocks, especially those in the same industry. A strong mar-
ket downturn is also helpful. Or, trade a busted pattern.
Busted pattern performance. Busted patterns have good bearish perfor-
mance but the samples are few. Busted patterns are easy to spot (like the one in
Figure 13.4) because price climbs less than 5% before tumbling. Short the stock
when you are sure prices are heading down and not just completing a throwback.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The S&P 500 index climbed in both
bull and bear markets by 16% and 1%, respectively. The strong push from the
general market helped the chart pattern perform in a bull market.
Days to ultimate high. How long did it take price to reach the ultimate
high? Answer: about 4 months in a bull market and 3.5 months in a bear market.
Table 13.3 lists failure rates. AADBs have single-digit break-even failure
rates that climb as the maximum price rises. For example, 5% of the patterns in
a bull market fail to rise at least 5% after the breakout. Over a quarter (26%) rise
less than 15% in a bull market and 35% fail to rise at least 15% in a bear market.
Half the patterns top out after gains of just over 25% in a bull market and 20%
in a bear market.
Perhaps the biggest surprise is how quickly the failure rates climb. In a bull
market, they triple from 5% to 17%. Bear markets double from 7% to 15% and
then double again to 35% as the maximum price climbs 5%, 10%, and 15%.
The table gives you some idea how typical double bottoms work. It also
suggests that you should stick to trading double bottoms in a bull market
(because of lower failure rates).
Statistics 221
Table 13.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price Rise (%) Bull Market Bear Market
10 36 or 17% 11 or 15%
15 54 or 26% 26 or 35%
20 77 or 37% 37 or 49%
25 93 or 45% 42 or 56%
30 110 or 53% 51 or 68%
35 128 or 62% 58 or 77%
50 155 or 75% 67 or 88%
75 180 or 87% 68 or 91%
Over 75 206 or 100% 75 or 100%
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 221

Another use of Table 13.3 is to check on the measure rule prediction, dis-
cussed in the Trading Tactics section later. Suppose it predicts a rise from 10 to
13 in a bear market. That is a 30% move. How many patterns will rise at least that
far? Answer: 32% (68%, on average, will fail to make it that far). Thus, it appears
that the target is too far away, and you should anticipate price topping out sooner.
Formation end to breakout. It takes just over a month, on average, for
prices to rise from the low at the right bottom to the breakout. As the figures in
this chapter show, there is wide variation.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly price range does the AADB break-
out occur most often? For both bull and bear markets, the middle of the yearly
trading range is the most popular.
Yearly position, performance. Where in the yearly range do the best
performing AADBs reside? The answer depends on market conditions. In a
bull market, AADBs with breakouts near the yearly low do best. In a bear mar-
ket, those in the middle of the range do best, but the samples are few.
Throwbacks. A throwback occurs in almost two of every three trades.
That is a high return rate. Thus, if you missed investing in a double bottom, you
may have another opportunity if it throws back.
The average time to throwback is 9 to 11 days. When an AADB throws
back, performance suffers, so be sure to check for (and avoid) overhead resistance
before trading.
Table 13.4
Description Bull Market Bear Market
Percentage of breakouts occurring
near the 12-month low (L),
center (C), or high (H) L32%, C43%, H25% L32%, C35%, H33%
Percentage rise for each 12-month
lookback period L40%, C32%, H39% L28%a
, C31%a
, H16%a
Throwback 64% 61%
Average rise for patterns with
throwback 28% 23%
Average rise for patterns without
throwback 44% 26%a
Performance with breakout day gap 45% 24%a
Performance without breakout
day gap 33% 24%
a
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 222

Gaps. Breakout day gaps help performance in a bull market but show no
performance improvement in a bear market. Usually, the gap size in a bear mar-
ket is huge compared to the bull market one, but not in this case. Blame the
small sample count.
Table 13.5 shows a frequency distribution of days to the ultimate high.
Many of the patterns reach the ultimate high after 70 days (50% of them in a
bull market). Fewer than 20% top out in the first week.
Look what happens after 35 days. In both markets, more patterns top out
(9% in a bear market and 5% in a bull market). That finding suggests price
weakens slightly during that time. Thus, be prepared to close out your trade a
month after the breakout.
Statistics 223
Table 13.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 19% 7% 8% 7% 9% 1% 3% 3% 3% 4% 37%
Bull market 14% 6% 4% 4% 5% 5% 2% 3% 4% 3% 50%
Table 13.6
Size Statistics
Small bottom price variation 34% 27%
Large bottom price variation 36% 21%
Median price variation 1.77% 1.64%
Lower left bottom performance 29% 23%
Lower right bottom performance 39% 26%
a
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 223

Height. Do tall patterns perform better than short ones? Yes. To use this
finding, measure the height from the highest high to the lowest low in the pat-
tern and then divide by the breakout price (the highest high). Compare the result
with the median shown in the table. A value higher than the median means you
have a tall pattern. Lower than the median and you have a short one. Trade only
tall patterns for the best performance.
Width. Narrow patterns outperform only in a bear market. The bull mar-
ket shows no performance difference for width. I used the median length as the
separator between narrow and wide.
Average formation length. The average double bottom length mea-
sured slightly fewer than 2 months. I used the time between the lowest lows of
each bottom.
Height and width combinations. AADBs both tall and wide performed
better in a bull market. Short and narrow AADBs did well in a bear market, but
the sample size is small. Avoid short and wide patterns as they showed the worst
performance.
Bottom price variation. I checked to see if AADBs with large price vari-
ations (between bottom lows) performed better or worse than did those with
minor variations. In a bull market, AADBs with large price variations performed
better. AADBs with small price variations did better in a bear market.
Lower bottom performance. When the right bottom had a lower price
than the left, the AADB tended to outperform, sometimes substantially (bull
market: 39% versus 29% rise).
Table 13.7
Volume Statistics
Rising volume trend performance 30% 19%a
U-shaped volume pattern performance 33% 22%
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume pattern 23%a
18%a
performance
Heavy left bottom volume performance 37% 27%
Heavy right bottom volume performance 32% 21%a
a
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 224

Volume trend. When volume recedes from bottom to bottom, the
postbreakout performance is superior to those AADBs that have a rising vol-
ume trend.
Volume shapes. The most common volume shape is U (then domed, then
random). Assigning performance to those patterns with various volume shapes,
we find that those with dome-shaped volume perform best. The worst perfor-
mance came from AADBs with a random volume shape.
Breakout volume. Does a heavy volume breakout propel prices farther?
Yes. I compared the 1-month volume average (leading to the breakout) to the
breakout day volume. Those patterns with volume heavier than the average did
better than did those with light breakout volume.
Bottom volume. I tallied the 5-day average volume surrounding each
bottom (2 days before to 2 days after the lowest low) and compared it to the
average of the opposite bottom. The best performance came when the left bot-
tom showed heavier volume than the right bottom.
Trading Tactics
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to compute a target price. In a bull
market, prices hit the target 66% of the time, but just 48% of the time in a bear
market.
To find the target, subtract the lowest low in whichever bottom is lower
from the highest high between the two bottoms. Add the difference to the high-
est high. The result is the minimum price move to expect. For example, look at
Figure 13.6. The highest high is at 20 (the breakout price or confirmation line)
Trading Tactics 225
Table 13.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the height from the highest high between
the two bottoms to the lower of the two bottoms then
add the difference to the highest high. The result is the
target price.
Wait for breakout Always wait for confirmation (a close above the highest
high).
Trade with market trend To improve your odds, trade this bullish pattern in a
bull market.
Check others in the industry Are other stocks in the same industry showing bottom-
ing patterns?
Throwback Initiate or add to your position once price starts
rebounding after a throwback.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 225

and the right bottom is lower, at 15.50. Add the difference, 4.50, to the highest
high to get the target, or 24.50.
Wait for breakout. Since AADBs act as reversals of the prevailing price
trend, there is 64% chance that prices will continue declining instead of con-
firming the double bottom. That is why you should wait for a breakout (a close
above the confirmation line, which is the price of the highest high between the
two bottoms). Buying before the breakout is an easy way to lose money.
Trade with market trend. Since this pattern performs best in a bull
market, avoid trading it in a bear market. Look at the fundamentals and see if
there is a reason for the stock to reverse the downward price trend.
Check others in the industry. What are other stocks in the same indus-
try doing? If they are showing signs of bottoming, then the AADB becomes
more important. If the other stocks are continuing down, avoid trading the dou-
ble bottom. Chances are the stock will fail to perform as expected.
Throwback. Since a throwback occurs 64% of the time in a bull market
and 61% in a bear market, you can initiate a position after the throwback com-
pletes or add to your position. Before investing, wait for prices to begin rebound-
ing and then buy. Otherwise, the throwback may send prices down like that
shown in Figure 13.4.
Cup
Confirmation Line
Bought
Handle
Bought More
Adam Adam
Sell
Trend Line
Trend Line
Noble Corporation (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NYSE, NE)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
32
96 Dec Jan 97 Feb Sep Oct
Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug
Figure 13.6 Randy traded this Adam & Adam double bottom, buying at the con-
firmation price, buying again when price closed above the cup-with-handle trend
line, and selling when price closed below the long, up-sloping sell trend line.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 226

Sample Trade
Randy traded the stock shown in Figure 13.6 and made a tidy sum of money. Let
me tell you how he did it. First he qualified the pattern as a true double bottom
by reviewing the identification characteristics listed in Table 13.1. Briefly, the
stock started down in early January after a long-term uptrend that began in
February 1995. The twin bottoms were narrow with one-day downward spikes.
The rise between bottoms measured 29%; the bottom lows were 1% apart in
price and separated by 64 days. Oddly, the right bottom showed higher volume.
He placed an order to buy the stock at the confirmation price. Thus, he would
get in at a good price and received a fill at 20.
The stock struggled by moving sideways for a week then achieved liftoff.
Price climbed until early June when it started retracing. The retrace turned
into a throwback when price pierced the confirmation line at 20. Prices moved
up again and retraced, forming the handle of a cup-with-handle pattern. Randy
drew a down-sloping trend line along the handle, and the day after price closed
above the trend line, he bought more, receiving a fill at 22.73.
He computed the target price for the AADB (24.50, see the “Measure rule”
in Table 13.8) and smiled when prices passed that, moving up. Then, he drew
an up-sloping trend line following the contours of the handle (called the “Sell
Trendline” in Figure 13.6). He vowed to sell the day after price closed below the
trend line, which it did in late November (not shown), and he received a fill at
32. That was down considerably from the high at 38.19, but he made 60% on
his first trade and 41% on the cup-with-handle trade.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select Adam & Adam
double bottoms that perform better after the breakout. Consult the associated
table for more information.
• Review the identification characteristics for correct selection and per-
formance tips—Table 13.1.
• Select patterns in a bull market. They have the largest average rise—
Table 13.2.
• Patterns in a bull market have the lowest failure rate—Table 13.3.
• Throwbacks hurt performance, so avoid patterns with overhead
resistance—Table 13.4.
• Look for price weakness a month after the breakout—Table 13.5.
• Select tall patterns. Avoid ones that are both short and wide—
Table 13.6.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 227

• Pick AADBs with a lower right bottom—Table 13.6.
• Select patterns with a falling volume trend and dome-shaped volume—
Table 13.7.
• Patterns with heavy breakout volume do well—Table 13.7.
• Patterns with volume heavier on the left bottom outperform—
Table 13.7.
4366_13.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 228

229
14
Double Bottoms,
Adam & Eve
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Double bottom pattern with one narrow and
one wide bottom. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 59% 54%
Surprising findings Patterns near the yearly high perform best.
Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall patterns
perform better than short ones. Patterns with
a falling volume trend do well. Volume heavier
on the left bottom suggests better performance.
See also Double bottoms, Adam & Adam; Double
bottoms, Eve & Adam; Double bottoms, Eve
& Eve.
A E
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 229

The Adam and Eve combinations of double bottoms and tops are a relatively
new addition to my trading arsenal. I found out about them in 2001 from a Web
site. The Adam bottom looks narrow and V-shaped, perhaps with a large down-
ward price spike. The Eve bottom is wide, rounded, and sometimes has many
short spikes like weeds sprouting in a lawn.
Performance is similar across the various combinations of Adam and Eve
double bottoms (AEDBs). Still, I treat each as a separate pattern just to be sure.
The Results Snapshot shows the important performance numbers.
The average rise in a bear market is quite good, almost as good as the 37%
rise in a bull market. Throwbacks occur about half the time, but when they hap-
pen, performance suffers. Speaking of performance, the following characteris-
tics appear in AEDBs that perform well: tall patterns, patterns with a receding
volume trend, and volume heavier on the left bottom. I discuss these findings
in the Statistics section.
Tour
In my neighborhood, the local phone company is installing fiber-optic cable. At
the corner of many streets, they have punched an oblong hole about 9 inches
wide by 2 feet long, and 6 to 10 feet deep. The narrow tunnel reminds me of the
Adam bottom. An excavated pit would represent an Eve bottom. Figure 14.1
shows an example of an Adam & Eve double bottom.
230 Double Bottoms, Adam & Eve
Eve
Adam
Confirmation Line
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
26
28
98 May Jun Jul Feb Mar
Figure 14.1 A tall one-day downward price spike is the Adam bottom, and the
rounded turn marks the Eve bottom.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 230

I checked two data sources to be sure I had good data because the large
downward price spike in early September bothered me. The results are correct.
The Adam & Eve double bottom appears after a long downward price trend in
this example. The Adam bottom is narrow but the Eve bottom is much wider.
Not only is the Adam bottom unusually long, but the price bottoms are uneven.
More often, the price variation between the two bottoms is slight, which segues
into the next section: Identification Guidelines.
How do you identify an Adam & Eve double bottom? First, let us look at a few
examples. Figure 14.2 shows an AEDB midway up a price trend that began in
March 2003. I show this as an example of an AEDB acting as the corrective
phase of a measured move up chart pattern. The AEDB allows prices to regroup
before renewing the attack on a new high.
The Adam bottom is a one-day downward price spike. The Eve bottom
also has a spike but it is shorter, and the nearby wide price congestion differen-
tiates the Eve bottom from the narrower Adam bottom.
Figure 14.3 shows another example of an AEDB except this one is part of
a longer-term downward price trend. Prices reverse after the pattern by moving
up for a few months before easing back down. Again, the Adam bottom appears
Eve
Adam
Chiron (Drug, NASDAQ, CHIR)
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
52
54
56
03 Mar Apr May Dec
Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov
Figure 14.2 This Adam & Eve double bottom appears as the corrective phase of
a measured move up chart pattern.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 231

narrow and the Eve bottom is wide. Eve typically has several short price spikes
and Adam has few (usually one or two). Table 14.1 shows identification guide-
lines for selecting AEDBs.
Downward price trend. Since we are dealing with double bottoms and
not tops, look for the pattern to appear at the end of a downward price trend.
The trend need not be very long as Figure 14.2 shows, but the classic situation
is like that shown in Figure 14.3. Price declines for several weeks or months lead-
ing to the pattern.
Bottom shape. The two bottoms should not appear similar to each
other. The left bottom, Adam, should be narrow, pointed, and V shaped, and
perhaps with a one-day downward price spike. The right bottom, Eve, should
be wider and rounder, not V shaped. If you compare the two bottoms and they
do not appear the same, then you are on the right track. You have either an
AEDB or an Eve & Adam double bottom. For AEDBs, the Adam bottom must
come first.
Rise between bottoms. I set an arbitrary minimum price rise between the
two bottoms of 10%. However, taller patterns perform better than do short
ones, so keep that in mind as you search for AEDBs.
Bottom low prices. The two bottoms should be close enough in price
that the pattern does not look like stairs. Figure 14.1 pushes the limit as the bot-
toms differ by 8%. Figure 14.3 is a better example as the bottoms are near the
same price.
Adam Eve
Claires Stores (Retail (Special Lines), NYSE, CLE)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
99 Jun Jul Feb Mar
Figure 14.3 This Adam & Eve bottom appears after a downward price trend. The
pattern acts as a reversal.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 232

Bottom separation. How far apart in time should the bottoms be? I found
that the best performance came from bottoms between 2 and 6 weeks apart,
and that bottoms wider than 8 weeks performed less well. However, this find-
ing does not mean you must locate an AEDB with bottoms a month apart for
best performance. Each stock performs differently.
Price rise after right bottom. You must wait for confirmation (a close
above the highest high in the pattern) because price in 64% of the potential dou-
ble bottoms will continue down. The rise from the right bottom to the confir-
mation may be brief, but it usually takes just over a month. If price drops below
the right bottom low before confirmation, then look elsewhere. In that situa-
tion, you do not have a valid double bottom.
Bottom volume. Most AEDBs will show volume heavier on the left bot-
tom than on the right. Do not exclude a pattern if it has volume higher on the
right bottom. However, patterns with heavy volume on the left bottom show
improved performance after the breakout.
Confirmation price. Confirmation price is the highest high between
the two bottoms and is also called the breakout price. When price closes above
the confirmation price, it validates the patterns as a true double bottom. Only
then should you consider buying the stock.
Why do double bottoms form? To answer that question, consider the dou-
ble bottom show in Figure 14.4. After reaching a multiyear low in June, prices
recover some of their losses by moving upward. After reaching a new low,
Table 14.1
Downward price trend Price trends downward and should not drift below the left
bottom.
Bottom shape Narrow, V-shaped, perhaps pointed-looking left bottom
(Adam), sometimes composed of a long, one- or two-day
spike. The right (Eve) bottom appears rounded and wider.
Rise between bottoms At least 10% from the lowest valley to the highest peak
between the two bottoms. Taller patterns perform better.
Bottom low prices Bottom to bottom price variation is small. Patterns with a
lower right bottom perform better.
Bottom separation Bottoms should be at least a few weeks apart. Best
performance is 2–6 weeks apart. Patterns wider than 8
weeks see performance deteriorate.
Price rise after right bottom Price must close above the confirmation point without first
falling below the right bottom low.
Bottom volume Usually higher on the left bottom than the right. Bottoms
with higher left volume perform better.
Confirmation price The highest high between the two bottoms. A close above
the confirmation point is the breakout and confirms the
pattern as a valid double bottom.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 233

a rebound is quite common with a retest of the low typically following. A retest
is just like it sounds: prices return to the low and test to see if the stock can sup-
port itself at that price level. If it cannot, prices continue moving down. Oth-
erwise, the low usually becomes the end of the decline and rising prices result.
Such is the case depicted in Figure 14.4. It seems clear from the volume
pattern that many investors believe the low, shown as point B, is a retest of point
A. Volume surges on two occasions in the vain hope that the decline has ended.
Investors are wrong.
Prices hold at 21 for a week before continuing down. As prices head
toward the level of the June low, volume surges again. This surge essentially
marks the end of the downward plunge. Prices hesitate at that level for slightly
less than 2 weeks before turning around and heading upward.
A double bottom is nothing more than a retest of the low. Investors buy
the stock in the hope that the decline has finally ended. Sometimes they are
right and sometimes they are not, which leads us into the next section: failures.
Focus on Failures
It is obvious that the formation pictured in Figure 14.5 is a double bottom. The
first bottom occurs after a downward price trend, as you would expect. The two
bottoms are far enough apart, the rise between them is sufficient to delineate two
minor lows, and the price variation between the two bottoms is small. The vol-
Central and South West (Electric Utility (Central), NYSE, CSR)
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
Breakout
Confirmation Line
Throwback
Adam Eve
B
A
Figure 14.4 Prices confirm the breakout once they close above the confirmation
point, when here as the horizontal line. The confirmation point is the highest high
reached between the two bottoms. Prices often throw back to this level after the
breakout.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 234

ume pattern is unusual in that the second bottom has a higher, denser volume
pattern than the first. However, this is not significant. After the second bottom,
prices rise at a steady rate until the confirmation point. Then prices jump up and
pierce the prior minor high at about 40.63. When price closes above the confirma-
tion line, it signals a valid breakout and confirms the double bottom formation.
In this case, as is common for many double bottoms, prices throw back to
the breakout point. However, prices continue moving down. Scrolling Figure
14.5 to the left, you would see prices making a new low in September 1993 at
31.63, below the February low of 34.
Had you purchased this stock on the breakout and held on, you would
have lost money. I call this type of failure a 5% failure. Prices do not rise by
more than 5% above the breakout before heading lower. Fortunately, 5%
failures are also rare; they occur only 15 times in this study. To put that sta-
tistic in perspective, it means that on 383 separate occasions prices continue
upward by more than 5%.
Statistics
Number of formations. I found 389 patterns using data from mid-1991
to the start of 2004 in 500 stocks. Thus, most of the patterns came from a
bull market.
Reversal or continuation. AEDBs act as reversals. Why? The price trend
leading to the pattern is downward and the breakout is upward, which means
it is a reversal by definition.
Flightsafety Intl. Inc. (Aerospace/Defense, NYSE, FSI)
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep
Breakout
Eve
Adam
Throwback
Figure 14.5 Example of a 5% failure. This rare occurrence happens when prices
plummet after rising less than 5%.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 235

Average rise. The average rise is higher in a bull market than in a bear
market, as expected, but the numbers are close. Both are above the average for
all chart pattern types.
Rises over 45%. Over a quarter (29% and 27%) of the AEDBs I looked at
soared over 45% after the breakout. That figure is quite respectable for a bullish
chart pattern.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate high, what
happens? It tumbles between 33% and 35%. Thus, you will give up almost all
of your gains, on average, and buying and holding a stock may not be as prof-
itable as a timely sale.
Busted pattern performance. Few samples appeared for busted patterns.
In fact, three samples caused the 54% decline in a bear market. If an AEDB
busts, consider shorting it but do not expect the kinds of returns shown in
Table 14.2.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. As AEDBs were climbing over 30%,
what was the general market doing? The S&P climbed 16% in a bull market
and was flat in a bear market. Certainly, the large bull market gain helped per-
formance and even the flat market may have helped those in a bear market (it
could have sucked prices lower).
Days to ultimate high. How long does it take to reach the maximum
rise? In a bull market, it takes about 5 months (160 days) and in a bear market,
about 3 months (99 days). Thus, be patient but do not fall asleep at the switch.
Not all AEDBs will take that long before starting a massive decline.
Table 14.3 lists failure rates for AEDBs. How do you read the table? Let
me give you a few examples. In a bull market, 5% of the double bottoms will fail
to rise over 5%. Four percent of the bear market patterns will fail to rise 5%.
Half will fail to rise 25% (bear market).
The table shows how quickly the failure rates rise for a given price climb.
Notice how the bull market failure rate nearly triples to 14% from 5% and
Table 14.2
General Statistics
Rises over 45% 94 or 29% 19 or 27%
–54%a
a
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 236

then doubles again to 27%. This progression, a triple then a double is com-
mon to many chart patterns. Remember that when a pattern fails, it means
prices dropped at least 20%. Thus, 36% of the patterns will give back all of their
gains or more (that number comes from the 20% “maximum price rise” row).
Formation end to breakout. How long after price reaches the right bot-
tom low does it take to climb to the breakout? Answer: about a month. It takes
8 days longer in a bull market than in a bear market for some reason.
Statistics 237
Table 14.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
Rise (%) Bull Market Bear Market
10 45 or 14% 12 or 17%
15 85 or 27% 18 or 26%
20 116 or 36% 25 or 36%
25 147 or 46% 35 or 50%
30 169 or 53% 39 or 56%
35 190 or 60% 44 or 63%
50 229 or 72% 53 or 76%
75 273 or 86% 63 or 90%
Over 75 319 or 100% 70 or 100%
Table 14.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month lookback L40%, C33%, L31%, C31%a
,
period H43% H38%a
Throwbacks 59% 54%
Performance without breakout day gap 37% 32%a
a
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 237

Yearly position. Where in the yearly trading range does the AEDB break-
out reside? Most of the time, the breakout is in the middle of the range in a bull
market and near the yearly low in a bear market.
price range shows that the best performance comes from patterns with breakouts
near the yearly high. A double bottom with a breakout near the yearly high—
sounds like the best performers take place in an upward price trend like that
shown in Figure 14.2.
Throwbacks. The next several rows in Table 14.4 concern throwbacks. Just
over half the time price throws back to the confirmation price. To complete the
throwback, it takes price 9 or 10 days. An interesting finding is that a throwback
hurts performance. Thus, look for overhead resistance before trading a stock.
Gaps. Breakout day gaps hurt performance in a bull market but help it in
a bear market. However, the numbers are close, so they may be likely to change.
Table 14.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate high as
measured from the breakout date. For example, 23% of AEDBs in a bear mar-
ket and 12% in a bull market reach the ultimate high in the first week. In two
weeks’ time, 27% and 17%, respectively, will have topped out (that is the first
two columns with numbers added together).
Notice the increase in bear market patterns topping out just over a month
after the breakout. Thus, if you see upward momentum soften then, consider
selling. The softness may indicate a trend change.
Table 14.6 shows size statistics.
Height. Tall patterns outperformed short ones in both markets. To use
this finding, compute the formation height from the highest high to the lowest
low in the pattern and divide by the breakout price (the highest high). Compare
the result to the median. Values above the median mean you have a tall pattern.
Width. Narrow patterns did well in a bull market but wide ones outper-
formed in a bear market. I used the median length as the separator between nar-
row and wide.
Average formation length. The average distance between the two bot-
toms was about 2 months.
Height and width combinations. AEDBs that are both tall and narrow
outperformed the other combinations in a bull market. In a bear market, short
and wide patterns did well, but the sample size is small.
Bottom price variation. I computed the median price difference between
the two bottoms and compared the performance of AEDBs with patterns larger
and smaller than the median. Those with large price variations outperformed
Table 14.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 23% 4% 4% 3% 9% 6% 4% 4% 3% 1% 39%
Bull market 12% 5% 4% 5% 3% 2% 4% 3% 3% 2% 56%
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 238

those with small variations in bull markets. Patterns in bear markets worked best
with small variations.
Lower bottom performance. In a bull market, patterns with a lower right
bottom performed better after the breakout that did those patterns with a lower
left bottom. In a bear market, the results reversed (lower left bottoms performed
best), but the sample size was smaller.
Volume trend. For AEDBs, a receding volume trend from bottom to bot-
tom suggests a large rise after the breakout. That is what I found in both bull
and bear markets.
Volume shapes. I looked at various volume shapes and the three most
prominent are U, dome, and random. Of the three, U-shaped volume occurs
most often but patterns with that volume shape perform worst in a bull mar-
ket. There, a dome-shaped pattern works best. For bear markets, patterns with
U-shaped volume do well, but the sample counts for the other shapes are small
and may change the results.
Breakout volume. I have read that you should only buy double bottoms
if the breakout occurs on heavy volume. Is that true? I found little performance
difference between AEDBs with breakout volume heavier or lighter than the
30-day average. In a bull market, patterns with light breakout volume do best.
In a bear market, patterns with heavy breakout volume do slightly better.
Statistics 239
Table 14.6
Size Statistics
Lower right bottom performance 41% 28%a
a
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 239

Bottom volume. Does heavy volume on the left bottom suggest better
performance after the breakout? Yes. In both bull and bear markets, patterns
with volume heavier on the left bottom than on the right performed better after
the breakout.
Trading Tactics
As a bullish chart pattern, you need only know when to buy to trade AEDBs.
Selling is, of course, the tough part. Before you buy, consider the trading tac-
tics shown in Table 14.8.
The Measure rule. The measure rule predicts the minimum price move
expected once a double bottom experiences an upward breakout. Consider the
chart pictured in Figure 14.6. To calculate the predicted price, first determine
the formation height by subtracting the lowest low from the highest high in the
formation. In Figure 14.6, the lowest low occurs at the right bottom, with a
price of 27.57. The highest high, marked on the figure by point A, is 31.09.
Add the difference, 3.52, to the confirmation point, or the highest high
between the two bottoms (that is, 31.09 + 3.52). Again, the highest high is
point A. The result, 34.61, is the expected minimum target. You can see in the
chart that prices meet the target in late December. A few days after meeting
the target, prices momentarily descend before resuming their climb. During
mid-April, the stock reaches its ultimate high price of 40.26 before declining.
After you locate a potential double bottom, review the selection guide-
lines before placing a trade. Figure 14.6 shows a declining price trend leading
to the first bottom. The rise between the two bottoms is about 13%, just above
the 10% threshold. The two bottoms are at nearly the same price level and sev-
eral months apart.
Table 14.7
Volume Statistics
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume pattern 40% 20%a
performance
a
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 240

Very high volume appears on the left bottom with substantially reduced
volume on the right bottom, which is typical. The overall volume trend slopes
downward from the left bottom to the right, as expected.
Wait for breakout. Once the second bottom of a double bottom occurs,
you can use the measure rule to estimate the minimum price move. If the
potential profit is large enough, then wait for the breakout. This instruction
cannot be overemphasized.
Trading Tactics 241
Table 14.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the height from the highest high to the lowest low
between and including the two bottoms and then add the
difference to the highest high. The result is the target price.
This works 66% of the time in a bull market and 56% in a
bear market.
Wait for breakout Always wait for confirmation (a close above the highest high).
Trade with market To improve your odds, trade this bullish pattern in a bull
trend market.
Check others in the Are other stocks in the same industry showing bottoming
industry patterns or moving up?
Throwback Initiate or add to your position once price starts rebounding
from a throwback.
Banc One Corp. (Bank, NYSE, ONE)
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr
Confirmation Line
Eve
Adam
Breakout
Target Price
Stock Bought
Bump-
and-Run
Reversal
A
Figure 14.6 Double bottom trading dilemma. How do you trade this double
bottom? Do you buy just after the second bottom or wait for prices to rise above
the confirmation point? You wait for prices to recover after the throwback, then
buy. A rounding bottom appears from point A to the breakout.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 241

A close above the confirmation point signals a breakout. The confirmation
point is simply a fancy way of saying the highest high reached between the two
bottoms. Shown is the confirmation point, marked point A in Figure 14.6, and
a line extending to the breakout point.
Trade with market trend. There is a slight performance improvement
trading AEDBs in a bull market. In other words, you want to trade with the mar-
ket trend. Avoid making the mistake of being bullish in a bear market, which is
like swimming against the current. You can still get to where you are going if you
do not drown first.
Check others in the industry. I find this tactic particularly useful. Before
I trade, I check other stocks in the same industry. If they are rebounding or
showing bottom reversals, then that gives me confidence that the trade will
work as expected. If the other stocks are heading down, that increases the risk
of a failed trade. It may be that this stock is a leading (bullish) indicator for the
industry, but why take the chance?
Throwback. Throwbacks occur about half the time. They give you the
opportunity to initiate a position or add to an existing one. Wait for prices to
begin rebounding then buy.
Sample Trade
Lauren is a school teacher. Although she loves teaching kids, she would much
prefer raking in the dough by trading stocks over the Internet. Until that time,
she shoehorns her investment activities into the few hours of free time she has
each week.
When she spotted the double bottom shown in Figure 14.6, she knew it
was love at first sight. The rounding bottom pattern (from point A to the break-
out) suggested higher highs were in store. However, she resisted the temptation
to get in early because she could not guarantee prices would continue moving
up. She justified her action by pretending that she was teaching her students
how to trade. If she could not do it properly, how could they?
When prices reached the high between the two bottoms, Lauren decided
to buy. Just before she placed her order, the broker read off the current quota-
tion. It was well above the confirmation point. So she decided to wait and pray
for a throwback.
About 4 weeks after the breakout, prices dipped to the buy point, but
would they continue down? She had to wait until she felt confident that prices
would rise. To her, this occurred a day later, on November 27. That day prices
made a higher low and she felt comfortable buying the stock. It was a gamble,
because 2 days of rising prices hardly make a trend. Still, she was getting antsy
and did not want to wait too long and watch prices rise above the level that she
could have bought a month before. So, she bought the stock and received a fill
at 31.38.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 242

The following day, volume spiked to over three million shares and prices
jumped over 0.75 points. The spike made her nervous as it reminded her of a
one-day reversal, but the stock closed at the high for the day, which is odd for
the formation. That is when she remembered to place a stop. She chose a price
of 30.88, about 0.25 below the recent minor lows, an area of prior support.
The following day prices moved down but succeeding days saw them
rebound. In mid-December, the stock went ballistic and fulfilled the measure
rule. She could not make up her mind if it was worth selling at that point. By
the time she decided to sell, the stock had returned to the up-sloping trend line
(drawn connecting the lows in September through January), so she held on.
The stock moved up. In late March, the stock jumped sharply, climbing
almost 1.50 in one day. That was a big move for the stock, and she wondered
what was going on. She followed the stock closely and it became obvious the
stock had entered the bump phase of a bump-and-run reversal. Periodically, as
the stock climbed, she penciled in the sell lines parallel to the original bump-
and-run reversal trend line. As she looked at the chart, she saw the narrow peak
appear and knew the end was near. When the stock dropped below the nearest
sell line, she placed an order to sell her holdings and received a fill at 38.63.
She cleared 22% on the trade, but on an annualized basis, she made 60%.
She smiled, knowing that annualized numbers were something her math class
needed to learn. Now she had the perfect example.
The following list includes tips and observation to help select AEDBs that
perform better after the breakout. Consult the associated table for more
information.
Table 14.1.
• Select bull market patterns—Table 14.2.
• Failure rates are slightly lower for patterns in a bull market—Table 14.3.
• Select patterns with breakouts near the yearly high—Table 14.4.
• Throwbacks hurt performance, so check for nearby overhead
resistance—Table 14.4.
• In a bear market, look for upward momentum to weaken after a
month (day 35)—Table 14.5.
• Select patterns with a falling volume trend from bottom to bottom—
Table 14.7.
• Patterns with volume higher on the left bottom tend to outperform—
Table 14.7.
4366_14.qxd 2/23/05 11:38 AM Page 243

244
15
Double Bottoms,
Eve & Adam
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Double bottom pattern with the left bottom
wide and rounded, the right bottom narrow
and V-shaped. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 57% 56%
Surprising findings Patterns without breakout day gaps do
better. Narrow patterns perform better than
wide ones. Double bottoms with a lower left
bottom perform better. Patterns with a
falling volume trend, light breakout volume,
or heavier volume on the left bottom do
better.
A
E
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 244

bottoms, Adam & Eve; Double bottoms, Eve
& Eve
Of the four combinations of Adam and Eve double bottoms, Eve & Adam is
the rarest. I found just 227. It does not perform as well as some of the others,
either. Still, the failure rate is small and the average rise posts a good showing
in both markets.
Eve & Adam double bottoms (EADBs) have a number of surprises, but in
the interest of space, I will save them for the Statistics section.
Tour
What does an Eve & Adam double bottom look like? Figure 15.1 shows a good
example of one. Prices continue down in a steady decline to the low in June.
Volume picks up as prices near the low then peg the meter at over 1.1
million shares on June 18, the day prices reach a low of 12.69. From the March
high, the stock declines 47% in 3 months. The high volume marks the turning
point and the stock moves upward. However, a retest of the low is in store and
prices round over and head down again. In late August, prices make another low
when the stock drops to 13.06, also on high volume.
Tour 245
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
Mar 92 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Confirmation Line
Adam
Eve
Figure 15.1 A double bottom occurs after a downward price trend. High volume
commonly occurs on the left bottom.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 245

The day after the low, on a burst of buying enthusiasm, the stock jumps
and reaches the confirmation point in just 2 days. Instead of continuing upward,
however, the stock throws back to the breakout point and moves horizontally
for just over a week before resuming its move upward. By late January, the stock
reaches a high 75% above the breakout price.
How do you identify an EADB? While it is easy to find a double bottom, it can
be difficult to distinguish between the combinations of Adam and Eve bottoms.
Figure 15.2 shows another example of an EADB. Although the figure does not
show the pattern confirming (a close above the highest high between the two
bottoms), the pattern does confirm (off the chart to the right), meaning that it
is a valid double bottom.
Notice the different shape between the two bottoms. The Eve bottom is
wider and rounded looking. The Adam bottom is more V shaped, narrower, and
usually composed of one or two large downward price spikes. The Eve bottom
also has spikes, but they are many and short.
Figure 15.3 shows another example of an EADB. This Eve bottom has
longer spikes than those in Figure 15.2. The Adam bottom appears congested
246 Double Bottoms, Eve & Adam
Eve
Adam
Biogen Idec (Biotechnology, NASDAQ, BIIB)
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
02 Feb Mar Apr May
Figure 15.2 The Eve bottom appears rounded and wider than the narrow and
V-shaped Adam bottom.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 246

also. Still, the V shape of the Adam bottom is obvious, especially in contrast to
the rounded shape of the Eve bottom.
The twin bottom pattern becomes a true EADB when price closes above
the confirmation line. That is also called the breakout price and it is the highest
high between the two bottoms.
Table 15.1 lists identification guidelines for EADB patterns.
Downward price trend. The pattern does not form in a rising price trend
unless it is part of a correction, usually the corrective phase of a measured move
up. More often, though, the double bottom marks the end of a downtrend. The
trend need not be very long, but averages about 4 months. I excluded any pat-
tern where there was a dip below the left bottom.
Bottom shape. Look at the two bottoms. Do they have the same or dif-
ferent shape? If the bottoms look different, then you are on the right track.
The pattern is either an Adam & Eve or Eve & Adam double bottom. The Eve
bottom should look rounded and wide (especially near the top of the bottom,
if that makes any sense), and if spikes appear, they should be short or bunched
together. The Adam bottom should look different from Eve. It should be nar-
rower and V shaped, and usually have a long, one or two day downward spike.
Rise between bottoms. Usually tall patterns perform better than do short
ones, so look for the rise between the bottoms to be at least 10%. I set no
Eve
Adam
Confirmation
Line
Alaska Air Group, Inc (Air Transport, NYSE, ALK)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Figure 15.3 The top of the Eve bottom is wider than the Adam bottom. Eve
appears rounded and Adam V shaped. The pattern becomes valid once price closes
above the confirmation line.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 247

maximum height restriction, but removed from consideration those EADBs less
than 10% high.
Bottom low prices. Look for bottoms that have almost the same low price.
They need not be the same, but patterns with variations between 0% and 4%
perform best after the breakout.
Bottom separation. Look for bottoms between 2 to 7 weeks apart for the
best results. Bottoms farther apart than that are scarce and perform less well.
Since these numbers are averages, your results will vary.
Price rise after right bottom. A twin bottom pattern becomes a valid
EADB once price closes above the confirmation price. Until that time, price
should not make a third bottom.
Bottom volume. Some patterns have volume higher on the right bottom
(more often in a bull market) and some on the left (usually in a bear market).
Confirmation price. Confirmation price is the breakout price, a close
above the highest high between the two bottoms. A twin bottom pattern
becomes a valid EADB only after price closes above the confirmation price.
Breakout volume. Look for heavy breakout volume but do not discard
an EADB just because the breakout occurs on below-average volume.
Is the twin bottom shown in Figure 15.4 a valid EADB? Running through
the characteristics shown in Table 15.1, we find that the pattern appears at the
Table 15.1
Downward price trend Price trends downward and should not drift below the left
bottom.
Bottom shape The left bottom (Eve) should be wide and rounded. The
right bottom (Adam) should be narrow and V shaped,
perhaps with one or two downward spikes.
between the two bottoms.
Bottom low prices Bottom to bottom price variation is small. Best
performance is between 0% and 4% variation.
performance is 2–7 weeks apart. Wider than 7 weeks and
performance deteriorates.
Price rise after right Price must close above the confirmation point without first
bottom falling below the right bottom low.
Bottom volume Evenly split between right or left bottom showing heavier
volume.
Confirmation price The highest high between the two bottoms. A close above
the confirmation point is the breakout and confirms the
pattern as a valid double bottom.
Breakout volume Heavy breakout volume is best.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 248

bottom of a downward price trend. The two bottoms look different—the first
one is wider than is the second and more rounded looking, too. The second
bottom is narrow and V shaped, with a two-day downward price plunge. The dif-
ference between the two bottom lows is small (1%). The separation measures
43 days from bottom low to low. No dips appear on either side of the pattern
that would turn this into a triple bottom. Volume is heavier on the right bot-
tom than the left and the breakout volume is below average. The pattern is a
valid EADB.
Focus on Failures
What can we learn from failures? Figure 15.5 shows what I call a 5% failure—
the failure of price to climb more than 5% after the breakout. Those failures are
rare. I found only 12 in 227 patterns.
The bottom price variation looks wide, but the difference is only 4%. If
you scan through the identification characteristics listed in Table 15.1, you will
find that the pattern confirms as a true EADB.
Why does price fail to rise much above the confirmation price? The
answer is typical for these types of failures: overhead resistance. If you were to
look at the historical price series in Figure 15.5, you would find two tops in
Eve
Adam
Confirmation
Line
Burlington Resources Inc. (Petroleum (Producing), NYSE, BR)
40
42
41
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
03 Mar Apr May Dec
Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov
Figure 15.4 An Eve & Adam double bottom with volume higher on the right bot-
tom and tepid breakout volume.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 249

early to mid-1996, at 37+. Those tops either peak at the EADB confirmation
line or show congestion at or above that price. In other words, the peaks high-
light a resistance zone right above the breakout. In fact, the overhead resistance
is so strong that it turns back prices in mid-1998 (not shown). This EADB
gained just 3% before tumbling 47%.
On the fundamental side, the company warned in mid-September that
full year earnings would fall about 20%, although the company raised its divi-
dend. A broker downgraded the stock. The stock gapped lower on the news.
Statistics
Number of formations. EADBs are the rarest pattern of the four dou-
ble bottom types. I found only 227 in the 500 stocks I looked at covering mid-
1991 to mid-1996 and the bear market, 2000 to 2003, with additional patterns
between those ranges.
Reversal or continuation. By definition, this bottom pattern acts as a
reversal of the price downtrend.
Average rise. The 35% average rise in a bull market is substantially
higher than the 23% rise in a bear market. This finding suggests you should
stick to trading this pattern in a bull market.
Confirmation
Line
Eve
Adam
Earnings Warning,
Broker Downgrade
Butler Manufacturing (Building Materials, NYSE, BBR)
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
97 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Figure 15.5 This is a 5% failure, where prices fail to climb much above the break-
out price.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 250

Rises over 45%. How well does the pattern perform when it performs
well? Over a quarter of the patterns (29%) in a bull market climb at least 45%.
Just 15% of the bear market patterns rise as far.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate high, it tum-
bles over 30%. In a bear market, the decline is 36%, well above the 23% rise
after a confirmed EADB. Thus, you give back all of your winnings and have to
dig into your pockets. The results show the importance of limiting your losses.
Busted pattern performance. Although the samples are few, the numbers
mirror the results after the trend changes. Figure 15.5 shows a busted pattern.
If the stock fails to climb and heads down with gusto, consider shorting it.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The S&P 500 index showed an average
change of 17% in a bull market but was flat in a bear market. This finding
helps explain the performance difference between the average rise numbers in
a bull (35% rise) and bear (23% rise) market.
Days to ultimate high. It took 50% longer to reach the ultimate high in
a bull market than in a bear market, probably because the rise was 50% higher.
The numbers suggest that for a large gain, many times you have to be patient
(and lucky).
Table 15.3 shows failure rates for EADBs. Notice how they start small but
rise quickly. For example, in a bull market, 5% fail to rise at least 5%. Fifteen
percent fail to rise 10% after the breakout; that is triple the 5% rate.
Comparing the bull and bear markets, we find that bull markets have lower
failure rates, as one might expect from a bullish chart pattern. The numbers
suggest that you trade with the market trend: Trade bullish patterns in a bull
market, bearish patterns in a bear market. And if you expect a large rise, say
50% from an EADB, realize that 76% will fail to climb that far (85% in a bear
market).
Statistics 251
Table 15.2
General Statistics
Rises over 45% 47 or 29% 10 or 15%
–29%a
a
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 251

Table 15.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics for EADBs.
Formation end to breakout. It takes 5 to 7 weeks for prices to rise from
the right bottom low (which is the end of the pattern for statistical purposes)
to the breakout price, on average.
Yearly position. Where do EADBs hide in the yearly price range? In a
bull market, you find most in the middle of the yearly trading range. In a bear
market, the breakout price is within a third of the yearly high.
Table 15.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 24 or 15% 15 or 23%
15 41 or 25% 24 or 36%
20 53 or 33% 31 or 47%
25 71 or 44% 39 or 59%
30 86 or 53% 45 or 68%
35 97 or 60% 47 or 71%
50 122 or 76% 56 or 85%
75 139 or 86% 61 or 92%
Over 75 161 or 100% 66 or 100%
Table 15.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month lookback L39%, C38%, L25%a
, C25%a
,
period H32% H21%a
Throwbacks 57% 56%
Average rise for patterns without throwback 39% 19%a
Performance with breakout day gap 32%a
22%a
Performance without breakout day gap 36% 24%
a
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 252

price range, we find that the best performance comes from patterns with break-
outs near the yearly low.
Throwbacks. Throwbacks occur about 56% of the time. When they do
occur, it takes between 8 and 10 days, on average, for price to return to the
breakout price. In a bull market, performance deteriorates when a throwback
occurs. That may also be the case with bear markets (which show throwbacks
helping performance), but the sample count is too small to make an accurate
assessment. For the record, many other chart pattern types have throwbacks
that hurt performance in both bull and bear markets.
Gaps. Gaps hurt performance in both markets, but the sample size is small.
Notice how the gap size is twice as large in a bear market than in a bull market.
This suggests you place a buy order just below the confirmation line. Hopefully,
that will get you in before a gap occurs without unduly increasing your risk of
a pattern failure.
Table 15.5 shows a frequency distribution of how long it takes prices after
the breakout to reach the ultimate high. In the first week, about 15% of the
EADBs reach the ultimate high. Most take over 70 days and they are still search-
ing for the high.
Look at 35 days after the breakout in a bear market. There, 14% of the
patterns top out for some reason, as if many are surrendering at the same time.
Keep an eye on your trade and look for weakness a month after the breakout.
You may need to close out your position then to protect your profits.
Table 15.6 shows EADB size statistics.
Height. Most chart pattern types have tall patterns outperforming short
ones, but not EADBs. When the pattern is shorter than the median in a bull
market, prices tend to outperform (by 37% to 33%). Bear markets show no per-
formance difference, as if they do not want to take sides.
Width. Narrow patterns perform better than wide ones regardless of
market conditions. I used the median length as the separator between narrow
and wide.
Average formation length. The average formation length between bot-
tom lows measures about a month (66 to 69 days).
Height and width combinations. Comparing the combinations, we find
that short and narrow EADBs do well in a bull market, and tall and narrow ones
do well in a bear market. The worst performers are tall and wide patterns, so
avoid those.
Statistics 253
Table 15.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 15% 6% 5% 2% 14% 2% 2% 5% 5% 2% 45%
Bull market 14% 7% 2% 5% 2% 6% 1% 4% 3% 5% 51%
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 253

Bottom price variation. I computed the price variation from bottom low
to bottom low and then measured the performance for those EADBs with a
price variation larger and smaller than the median. EADBs with small price
variations did well in a bull market, but large variations performed better in a
bear market.
Lower bottom performance. EADBs with a left bottom below the price
of the right bottom tended to perform better after the breakout.
Table 15.7 shows volume-related statistics for EADBs.
Volume trend. Those EADBs with a falling volume trend did better after
the breakout than did those with a rising volume trend. The performance num-
bers appear in the table.
Volume shapes. EADBs usually come in one of three volume shapes: U,
domed, and everything else (random). EADBs with dome-shaped volume per-
formed better than other volume shapes in both bull and bear markets.
Breakout volume. Does heavy breakout volume suggest better perfor-
mance? Not for EADBs. When the breakout volume was less than the prior 30-
day average, the stock climbed 43% after the breakout. EADBs with heavy
breakout volume in a bull market climbed just 33%. The same trend was evident
in a bear market, but be aware of the small sample size.
Table 15.6
Size Statistics
Lower right bottom performance 33% 19%a
a
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 254

Bottom volume. EADBs with heavy left bottom volume performed better
than did those with volume heavier on the right bottom, as Table, 15.7 shows.
Trading Tactics
Table 15.8 shows trading tactics for EADBs, and they are the same for most
double bottom types.
Measure rule. To determine how far prices may rise, use the measure
rule: the height of the EADB added to the breakout price. For example, the
EADB shown in Figure 15.6 has a confirmation price of 12.50, and the Adam
Trading Tactics 255
Table 15.7
Volume Statistics
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume 30%a
27%a
pattern performance
a
Table 15.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the height of the pattern from the highest high between
the two bottoms to the lowest bottom low. Add the difference
to the highest high. The result is the target price. Price hits the
target 66% of the time in a bull market, 47% in a bear market.
Wait for breakout Since price usually continues down, wait for a close above the
confirmation point before taking a position.
Trade with For best results, buy in a bull market.
market trend
Check others in To avoid 5% failures, check other stocks in the same industry
the industry and buy if they are showing bottoming patterns or if their stock
is rising.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 255

bottom is the lowest low at nine. The difference between the two, 3.50, repre-
sents the pattern height. Add this value to the breakout price (the confirmation
line of 12.50) to get the target of 16. Prices climb to the target in mid-March.
Wait for breakout. I conducted a study and found that 64% of the time,
price did not close above confirmation before dropping below the right bottom
low. In other words, a double bottom fails 64% of the time if you do not wait
for confirmation. Confirmation and a breakout occurs when price closes above
the highest high between the two bottoms. Always wait for confirmation unless
you have a special reason for entering the trade earlier.
Trade with market trend. Since EADBs in a bull market handily out-
perform those in a bear market, trade double bottoms in a bull market. Even if
you make mistakes, a rising tide lifts all boats and the market is more forgiving.
Check others in the industry. Are other stocks in the same industry
climbing? Are they showing bottom reversal patterns (double or triple bottoms,
head-and-shoulders bottoms, that sort of thing)? If many companies in the
industry are doing well, that should give other investors the courage buy the
stock and add to demand. That activity reduces your chance of a small gain.
However, if stocks in the industry look sick, what makes you think this
EADB will do well after the breakout? It will be swimming against the current.
Eve
Adam
LS RS
Neckline
Bought
Confirmation
Line
Ascending
Scallop
Ascending
Scallop
Checkpoint Systems (Percision Instrument, NYSE, CKP)
Sold
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
01 Jul Feb Mar Apr May
Figure 15.6 As described in the Sample Trade, Willie bought early into this Eve &
Adam double bottom. He sold when price dropped below the narrowing, ascend-
ing scallop.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 256

Save yourself some money and avoid the stock. Look for a more promising chart
pattern in another industry.
Sample Trade
Figure 15.6 shows a trade Willie made in the stock. He ran through Table 15.1
and checked the identification characteristics against the pattern. Briefly, the
stock price was trending down to the EADB. The Eve bottom caused him con-
cern as the twin spikes were long but separated by a few days. Was that really
an Adam bottom? The Adam bottom had a shorter spike. Was it an Eve bottom?
He looked above the spikes and saw that the Eve bottom was several weeks wide
but the Adam bottom remained narrow. He concluded that the pattern was an
EADB. The rise between bottoms was over 10% and the bottoms looked to be
about 6 weeks apart. Volume was higher on the left bottom than the right,
spelling good news for performance.
As he watched the pattern develop, he saw what looked like a head-and-
shoulders bottom. He drew in the down-sloping neckline and when price closed
above it, confirming the head-and-shoulders bottom, he bought and received
a fill at 11. After that, it took just 2 days for price to confirm the EADB.
Willie rode the stock higher and the price took on the shape of an ascend-
ing scallop—a rounded turn with a right handle. When the second, higher scal-
lop appeared, he grew concerned. Sometimes, consecutive ascending scallops
get narrower as they appear higher in the price trend. An unusually narrow one
sometimes appears just before prices peak. So he decided to sell the stock as
soon as price dropped below the scallop bowl. That occurred in early May, and
he received a fill at 14.93, for a net gain of 35%—and that was in a bear market.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select EADBs that
information.
Table 15.1.
• Select patterns in a bull market—Table 15.2.
• Bull market patterns have lower failure rates—Table 15.3.
• Patterns with breakouts near the yearly low perform best—Table
15.4.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 257

• Throwbacks hurt performance in a bull market—Table 15.4.
• In a bear market, look for price weakness a month after the breakout—
Table 15.5.
• Select patterns narrower than the median length—Table 15.6.
• Pick patterns with a lower left bottom—Table 15.6.
• Choose patterns with a falling volume trend—Table 15.7.
• Patterns with a dome-shaped volume trend perform well—Table15.7.
• EADBs do well after a light volume breakout—Table15.7.
• Select patterns with heavier volume on the left bottom—Table15.7.
4366_15.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 258

259
16
Double Bottoms,
Eve & Eve
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Double bottom pattern with wide, rounded
bottoms. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 55% 46%
Surprising findings Performs best when breakout is near the
yearly low. Throwbacks hurt performance.
Narrow patterns outperform. Patterns with a
lower right bottom and volume heavier on
the right bottom do well.
bottoms, Adam & Eve; Double bottoms, Eve
& Adam.
E E
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 259

The Eve & Eve double bottom is what many refer to as the classic “double bot-
tom.” It sports two rounded bottoms, well separated with a rounding climb
between them. That is the ideal pattern, but few look like that in the real
world. Of the four varieties of double bottoms, the Eve & Eve double bottom
(EEDB) has the highest average rise—40%—in a bull market. Not only that,
but it has a low break-even failure rate: 4% What more could a trader want?
Tour
What does an EEDB look like? Figure 16.1 shows a good example of the twin
Eve bottom. This EEDB forms after a broadening bottom chart pattern. The
two Eve bottoms are wide, rounded, and distinct lows separated so that they are
not part of the same congestion region. The rise between the two bottoms in this
example measures an unusually large 40%. In March, price closes above the
highest high in the pattern, confirming the twin bottom as a true double bottom.
Why does a double bottom form? All chart patterns show the struggle
between buying demand and selling pressure. When the price drops to a point
where traders view the stock as a steal, they buy. If enough buy, the stock moves
up in price. That is why the bottom usually shows a volume spike or high vol-
ume. In an EEDB, selling pressure balances buying demand, making the bottom
turn long and gentle.
260 Double Bottoms, Eve & Eve
Eve
ENSCO International (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NYSE, ESV)
Eve
Confirmation Price
Throwback
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
98 Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul
Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 99
Figure 16.1 A broadening bottom leads to an Eve & Eve double bottom. The
two Eve bottoms are wide and rounded appearing. Prices climbed 67% after the
breakout.
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 260

Prices rise and continue to rise until sellers, viewing the stock as over-
bought, take profits. This selling pressure eventually stalls the upward move.
When other traders see the upward momentum slowing, they dump their shares.
This selling forces the stock down again.
When the price drops to a low enough level, the smart money accumulates
shares again, sometimes quietly and sometimes not. Others see the slowing
downward price trend and predict a turn. They buy, too.
As price pulls out of its dive, more traders buy and the second Eve bottom
forms as a gentle turn. Price begins climbing again. When it approaches the high
between the two bottoms, it often stalls there as traders take profits. In a valid
EEDB, the selling pressure does not send the price down again. Instead, traders
sense the intrinsic strength and buy. This buying demand forces the price to tick
upward, moving above the high between the two bottoms. That is the break-
out signal.
Technical traders watching from the sidelines buy the stock in droves. Vol-
ume skyrockets along with the price. Reluctant sellers dump the stock to eager
buyers. The price climbs for several days and then things change. About half the
time, the price throws back to the breakout price. The throwback is brief before
price gathers strength and rises again, soaring to new highs.
I find that identifying EEDBs are easier than identifying birds, but, in both
cases, you have to know what to look for. Not just any two bottoms at the same
price level will suffice for a double bottom. Listed in Table 16.1 are guidelines
that make correct selection easier. While considering the guidelines, look at
Figure 16.2.
Downward price trend. The stock begins declining in mid-October
1993 from a price of about 56.50. It bottoms out at about 41.50 in mid-May.
Prices never drop below the left low on the way to the bottom. The reason for
this guideline is that you should use the two lowest minor lows on the price
chart. Do not try to select one low and then a nearby low just to satisfy the guide-
lines. The two points marked A and B in Figure 16.2 represent an incorrectly
selected double bottom because point A has lower lows to the left of it.
Bottom shape. Assign each double bottom pattern into its Adam or Eve
category. Adam bottoms are narrow and V shaped, perhaps with a one- or two-
day downward price spike. Eve bottoms are wide rounded turns. They may also
have price spikes, but they are usually shorter and more plentiful.
Rise between bottoms. The rise between the two bottoms should be at
least 10%, as measured from the lowest bottom low to the rise high.
Bottom low prices. The bottom to bottom price variation should be
small. The basic rule is that two bottoms should appear to be near one another
on the price scale. Figure 16.2 shows a price variation of about 1%.
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 261

Table 16.1
Downward price trend Prices trend downward to the pattern and should not drift
below the left bottom.
Bottom shape Eve bottoms are wide, rounded turns, not narrow price
spikes, and not V shaped.
between the two bottoms, but allow exceptions.
Bottom low prices Bottom to bottom price variation is small. Best
performance is between 0% and 6% variation.
performance is 2–7 weeks apart. Wider than 7 weeks and
performance deteriorates.
Price rise after right Price must close above the confirmation point without
bottom first falling below the right bottom low.
Bottom volume Usually higher on the left bottom than the right.
Confirmation price Confirmation is a close above the highest high between
the two bottoms. It confirms the twin bottom as a valid
double bottom. The confirmation price is also the
breakout price.
General Mills Inc. (Food Processing, NYSE, GIS)
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
Jan 95 Feb Mar
Confirmation Level
Eve
Eve
Throwback
A
B
Figure 16.2 Points A and B do not depict a double bottom because there are lower
lows to the immediate left of point A.
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 262

Bottom separation. The two bottoms should be at least a few weeks
apart but are often separated by many months, as shown in Figure 16.2. A
month is the minimum separation that many professionals view as leading to
powerful rallies. I set a lower standard to help verify that this is true. It turns
out that peaks close together perform better than those spaced farther apart.
Price rise after right bottom. Prices should rise up to the confirmation
price without first making a third bottom. On average, it takes between 1 and
2 months to complete the rise.
Bottom volume. The volume chart for double bottoms usually shows the
highest volume occurring on the left bottom. Diminished volume appears on the
right bottom, and the volume trend of the overall formation is downward. None
of these are absolute rules. Sometimes volume is highest on the right bottom in-
stead of the left. However, on average most of the formations obey the guidelines.
Confirmation price. The confirmation point is the highest high between
the two bottoms, and it is used to calculate the measure rule and to gauge the
breakout price (more about that later). Figure 16.2 shows a rise from the right
bottom of 15%, above the 10% threshold.
A double bottom is not a true double bottom until prices rise above the
the confirmation point. In tabulating the statistics, I only count those double bot-
tom in which prices rise above the confirmation point. Why? Because of the high
failure rate: 64%. In one study, there were 980 formations that looked like dou-
ble bottoms, but their price trends eventually moved below the second bottom.
An additional 525 formations performed as expected by rising to the confir-
mation point and continuing higher. If you buy a stock just after it touches the
second bottom, your chances of having a successful trade are one in three. In
other words, wait for prices to rise above the confirmation point.
Now that you know what a double bottom looks like, let us discuss how
to separate it into its proper Adam and Eve category. Figure 16.3 shows another
example of an EEDB but one harder to identify. Both bottoms have a one-day
downward spike. However, as you look up the bottom, prices widen. If you were
to shave off that one day’s growth, you would have a rounding turn on both
bottoms. Adam bottoms are narrower and usually longer.
A good example of an Adam bottom occurs in December when prices
plunge downward for three days. The bottom looks narrow and pointed, not
wide and rounded. Notice the different appearance between the Adam and Eve
bottoms. When trying to determine whether the double bottom has Adam or
Eve components, ask yourself if the two bottoms look similar (Adam & Adam
or Eve & Eve) or different (Adam & Eve or Eve & Adam). If they look the same,
are the bottoms wide or narrow, pointed or rounded?
Let us look at another example, Figure 16.4. The first Eve bottom is nar-
rower than the second one and it looks like a widely spaced horn (it has two
minor lows). The right bottom looks wide but it is V shaped. Are these Adam
bottoms?
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 263

Confirmation Line
Adam
Eve Eve
Applied Materials (Semiconductor Cap Equipment, NASDAQ, AMAT)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 16.3 These two Eve bottoms are wider and more rounded than the Adam
bottom in December, despite having one-day downward price spikes.
Eve Eve
Eve
Adam
Confirmation Line
Devon Energy Corp. (Natural Gas (Diversified), AMEX, DVN)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
96 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 97
Figure 16.4 Two minor lows compose the left Eve bottom and the right bottom
appears V shaped.
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 264

Sometimes the answer lies not in the bottoms themselves, but in the sur-
rounding landscape. I searched the stock for examples of Adam and Eve bot-
toms and they appear in the inset. Clearly, the differences between the two are
startling. Compare each inset with the alleged Eve & Eve bottom. Which inset
looks like the double bottom? I think the Eve inset matches each Eve bottom.
Focus on Failures
Figure 16.5 is a test. Is this an Eve & Eve bottom or an Eve & Adam? The
answer is, of course, who cares? The stock failed to climb after the breakout,
and I consider losing money more important than identification.
The left Eve bottom most would argue is a true Eve bottom. It appears
wide and rounded, not needle sharp like an Adam bottom. What about the right
bottom? No one- or two-day price spike appears. It does look V shaped, if you
consider the V as slanting to one side. Does it look like the Eve bottom at point
A or the Adam bottom at point B? I consider this double bottom to be an Eve
& Eve pattern.
Why did price not climb far after the breakout? I have shown two over-
head resistance zones. The top one looks strong enough to turn back most
advances. The lower one is a solid block in late June, but it extends back to
April.
B
A
Eve or Adam?
Eve
Confirmation Line
Overhead Resistance
Overhead Resistance
Flowserve Corp. (Machinery, NYSE, FLS)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Figure 16.5 Is this an Eve & Eve bottom or an Eve & Adam bottom, and why did
price fail to rise far?
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 265

Before the April to August price bump, prices were in a long-term decline.
There was a block of horizontal price movement at 17.50 that was 3 months long
(not shown) if you include some minor lows. Thus, the reason the Eve & Eve
pattern failed to rise was overhead resistance coupled with a deteriorating fun-
damental picture.
I like to know what is going on in the stocks I follow. I keep a database of
events and can match an event to the price action. The company released earn-
ings on both sides of the April/August price bump. The first release helped
power prices up and the second helped take them down. During creation of the
Eve bottom, news appeared that machine tool orders were soft (down 2%)
month-to-month and down 30% from the prior year. Coupled with increased
foreign competition and insider selling, the fundamentals were going south.
That information did not help the technical picture.
The bump in price from April to the August Eve bottom reminds me of
what sometimes happens to diamond tops. The price shoots up in a few days,
forms a diamond top, and then tumbles back to where it started. From there, the
stock flatlines as if it has lost its will to live. I would not consider trading this
double bottom because that scenario looks similar to this one.
Statistics
Table 16.2 shows general statistics for EEDBs.
Number of formations. I uncovered a bunch of EEDBs in the stocks I
looked at. Most patterns came from a bull market because it was longer than the
bear market. I used 500 stocks from mid-1991 to mid-1996 and another 500 sur-
rounding the 2000–2002 bear market.
Reversal or continuation. EEDBs act as reversals of the price trend, by
definition (that is, bottoms with upward breakouts).
Table 16.2
General Statistics
Rises over 45% 153 or 37% 16 or 22%
–30%a
a
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 266

Average rise. The average rise in a bull market is one of the better per-
formances I have seen for chart patterns. In a bear market, however, the 24%
rise is on par with other chart pattern types. Trade EEDBs in a bull market.
Rises over 45%. Over a third of the EEDBs (37%) in a bull market rise
more than 45% after the breakout. This is quite good. Even the 22% showing
in bear markets is promising.
Change after trend ends. When price reaches the ultimate high, what
happens? Price tumbles 31% in a bull market and even farther—34%—in a bear
market. Thus, if you can determine when prices have climbed as high as they are
going to, you should then short the stock. Remember, the numbers are aver-
ages so your results will vary.
Busted pattern performance. The busted pattern performance is close
to those that reach the end of the trend and reverse, despite different measure
rules. Few EEDBs bust, and you have to keep an eye out for a throwback, so
you will find it difficult trading a busted EEDB pattern.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The strong general market upswing
(16%) in a bull market helped the average rise (40%) beat the rise in a bear mar-
ket (24%).
Days to ultimate high. How long does it take price to top out? Answer:
nearly 6 months in a bull market and less than half that in a bear market (77
days). If you crunch the numbers that means the rise in a bear market is steeper
than in a bull market.
Table 16.3 shows failure rates for EEDBs. Let me give you some examples of
how you read this table. In a bull market, 4% of the patterns fail to rise at least 5%
after the breakout. Seven percent of the patterns in a bear market fail to rise 5%.
You can see that the bull market failure rate nearly quadruples (to 15%)
for rises of less than 10%. Half the patterns will stop climbing before reaching
30%. In a bear market, half the patterns will rise less than about 22%.
Statistics 267
Table 16.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 63 or 15% 13 or 18%
15 109 or 26% 24 or 32%
20 136 or 33% 30 or 41%
25 167 or 41% 44 or 59%
30 205 or 50% 49 or 66%
35 225 or 55% 56 or 76%
50 280 or 68% 60 or 81%
75 331 or 80% 68 or 92%
Over 75 412 or 100% 74 or 100%
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 267

Later I discuss the measure rule, but suppose it predicts a target that is
20% higher than the breakout price. How many EEDBs in a bear market will
make that kind of a rise? Answer: 59% (41% will fail to rise at least 20%). If a
41% failure rate sounds too high, then you should move the price target closer
to the breakout.
Formation end to breakout. Measured from the left bottom low to the
breakout, it took price between a month (39 days, bull market) and 2 months
(57 days, bear market) to travel that distance. It makes sense that in a bear mar-
ket it would take longer because price struggles to move higher. After the break-
out, though, prices in a bear market rise faster (see “Days to ultimate high” in
Table 16.2).
Yearly position. Nearly half the time in a bull market, the breakout
occurs in the middle of the yearly price range. In a bear market, the results
split almost evenly.
Yearly position, performance. Where are the best performing EEDBs
located? In both bull and bear markets, EEDBs breaking out within a third of
the yearly low perform best. The worst showing is from EEDBs in the middle
of the yearly range, and, guess what, that is where many EEDBs reside.
Throwbacks. Throwbacks only occur about half the time. They give
investors another opportunity to take a position in a stock or to add to an exist-
ing position. When price does throw back, it takes 11 days from the breakout to
return to the breakout price. That suggests prices peak in less than a week then
take a few more days to retrace their gains. Keep that in mind if you decide to
buy at the confirmation price and sell before a throwback begins.
Table 16.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month lookback L45%, C38%, L30%a
, C19%a
,
period H40% H26%a
Throwbacks 55% 46%
a
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 268

When a throwback occurs, performance suffers. In a bull market, for exam-
ple, the rise is 33% when a throwback occurs, and 48% without a throwback.
This finding suggests you should look for overhead resistance and avoid any
situations that might cause price to be repelled.
Gaps. Breakout day gaps marginally help performance in a bull market
but hurt it in a bear market. Notice that the gap size in a bear market is almost
four times the average size of gaps in a bull market. This finding suggests you
place a buy order slightly below the breakout price so that it, hopefully, will get
you in before the actual breakout.
Table 16.5 shows a frequency distribution of days to the ultimate high. Few
patterns fail (top out) in the first week, but look at the bear market row, columns
35 and 42 days. In those 2 weeks, 20% of the EEDBs in a bear market reach the
ultimate high. Thus, you should expect price to peak in just over a month after
the breakout. Bull markets show weakness in weeks 3 and 4 (days 21 and 28 in
the table). For some reason, this weakness occurs regularly in bear market chart
patterns (of all types).
Height. The bull market results surprise me because tall patterns usually
perform better than short ones. That is still true in a bear market, but the differ-
ence is minimal. In a bull market, patterns shorter than the median perform bet-
ter after the breakout, with gains averaging 41% versus 39%.
To use this result, measure the EEDB height from the highest high
between the two bottoms to the lowest low in the pattern and then divide by
the highest high (the breakout price). If the result is smaller than the median
listed in Table 16.6, then you have a short pattern.
Width. I measured the pattern width from lowest low in the left bottom
to the right bottom low. Those patterns narrower than the median performed
substantially better than wider ones.
Average formation length. The average formation length from left bot-
tom low to the right was between 2 and 3 months (73 to 80 days).
Height and width combinations. EEDBs that are both short and narrow
in a bull market or tall and narrow in a bear market tend to do best. The worst
performance comes from patterns that are both short and wide. All of the bear
market results use few samples, so the numbers may change.
Bottom price variation. Do EEDBs with small price variations in their
bottom lows perform better than do those with large variations? Yes and no.
Statistics 269
Table 16.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 8% 12% 9% 3% 12% 8% 3% 3% 5% 0% 36%
Bull market 14% 5% 6% 6% 4% 3% 2% 2% 4% 3% 51%
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 269

EEDBs with small variations work best in bull markets and large variations
work best in bear markets.
To get this result, I computed the price difference between the bottoms
of each EEDB then found the median. Those with bottom-to-bottom price
differences higher than the median were termed large; lower than the median
were termed small.
Lower bottom performance. When the right bottom low was below the
left bottom, performance improved marginally after the breakout.
Volume trend. A falling volume trend suggests strong postbreakout per-
formance, but only in a bull market. In a bear market, EEDBs with a rising vol-
ume trend do better.
Volume shapes. I looked at three volume shapes and those EEDBs with U-
shaped volume performed best in a bull market. Figure 16.3 shows an example of
U-shaped volume. Those with dome-shaped volume did well in a bear market, but
the samples were few. Avoid EEDBs with other (random) volume shapes.
Breakout volume. Many technical analysts will say that heavy breakout
volume suggests strong performance and weak breakout volume may spell dis-
aster. In either market, I found little statistical difference in performance.
Table 16.6
Size Statistics
Lower right bottom performance 41% 25%
a
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 270

EEDBs with heavy breakout volume did well in a bull market, but light break-
out volume (and few samples) did better in a bear market.
Bottom volume. Does volume heavier on the right bottom than the left
predict better performance? Yes. I did a simple comparison of volume using the
5 days surrounding each bottom. When the right bottom showed heavier vol-
ume, price climbed 43% after the breakout in a bull market. Heavy volume on
the left bottom accompanied rises of 39%. The bear market showed a similar
trend but the results were much closer.
Trading Tactics
Table 16.8 shows trading tactics for EEDBs. They are the same as for other
double bottoms.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to predict a target price. Having a
target to aim at may allow you to get out near the peak. If price nears the target,
evaluate the situation. Will price continue moving higher or is there a larger like-
lihood of a drop?
To find the price target, compute the height of the pattern by subtract-
ing the lowest low in the bottom from the highest high between the two bot-
toms. Add the result to the highest high to get the price target. For example,
Figure 16.6 shows an EEDB. The lowest low in the pattern is the left bottom
at 14.27. The highest high is 18.39 (the breakout or confirmation price). Add
the difference, 4.12, to the highest high to get a target of 22.51. In this exam-
ple, price rose to only 20 before dropping.
You can use Table 16.3 to check your target. In this example, a move of
4.12 from the launch point of 18.39 means a 22% rise. Since the EEDB occurs
Trading Tactics 271
Table 16.7
Volume Statistics
pattern performance
Heavy right bottom volume performance 43% 25%
a
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 271

in a bear market, that means about 47% (interpolated from Table 16.3) will fail
to rise at least 22%. This finding suggests the target is too far away.
Wait for breakout. Even in a bull market, trying to anticipate a bottom by
buying a stock simply because it seems “cheap” is not a good strategy. Tomorrow,
the price will be cheaper. By next week, the company could declare bankruptcy.
With double bottoms, waiting for price to close above the confirmation
point is a good way to trade. You can still lose money, but that is the way to bet.
Table 16.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the pattern height from the highest high
between the two bottoms to the lowest bottom low.
Add the difference to the highest high. The result is the
target price. Price hits the target 67% of the time in a
bull market, 54% in a bear market.
Wait for breakout Wait for a close above the confirmation point before buy-
ing. If you see a flat shelf on the right bottom, trade it.
Trade with market trend For best results, buy in a bull market.
Check others in the industry To avoid 5% failures, check other stocks in the same
industry and buy if they are showing bottoming patterns
or if their stock is rising.
Eve
A
B
Broker
Downgrade
Gap
Confirmation Line
Gateway Inc. (Computers & Peripherals, NYSE, GTW)
Eve
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
27
30
33
36
40
44
48
Figure 16.6 Price climbed just 9% after the breakout due to deteriorating fun-
damentals.
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 272

As shown in Table 16.3, EEDBs show small break-even failure rates, providing
you wait for confirmation.
The exception to this rule is if you see a flat shelf near the right bottom.
The shelf is a price congestion area and sometimes it may take the form of
another chart pattern. Figure 15.6 in the prior chapter shows an example of this
situation. Buy when price moves above the congestion and put a stop on the far
side of the support area (that is, below the shelf).
Trade with market trend. Let the smart money trade against the pre-
vailing trend. You should follow in their footsteps once they have cleared a
path through the landmines. In other words, trade with the general market
trend. Buy bullish chart patterns (like EEDBs) in a rising stock market. Avoid
them in a bear market.
Check others in the industry. If other stocks in the same industry are
doing well, then that bolsters the case that your EEDB will break out upward,
reversing the downward price trend. If other stocks in the industry are show-
ing bullish bottoming patterns or if their stock prices are rising, then trade the
EEDB. If prices in other stocks are breaking down, making lower lows, then look
elsewhere for a more promising situation. Double bottoms are plentiful. Keep
searching.
Sample Trade
Not all chart pattern trades work as expected, and Figure 16.6 shows an exam-
ple. To be sure we are dealing with a valid EEDB, let us run through the iden-
tification characteristics. Is the price trending downward to the pattern? Yes.
Although the figure shows a high in mid-January (B), the stock crested back in
mid-November 1999 (not shown).
Do both bottoms resemble an Eve bottom? The shape appears rounded
in both bottoms. The left bottom comprises two minor lows, but if you exclude
the first minor low (shown as point A), the Eve assessment does not change.
The rise between the bottoms is 29%, and the bottoms are 4% apart in
price and 18 days distant (measured from lowest low to lowest low). This is one
of the narrower Eve bottoms, but it is still in the 2 to 7–week optimum range.
Volume is higher on the right bottom than the left in a bear market. This obser-
vation suggests slightly better postbreakout performance, but does not guaran-
tee it. Price rises up to the confirmation price without first dropping below the
right bottom low. The pattern is a valid EEDB.
What happened after the breakout? Prices climbed enough to clear the
confirmation line then threw back and continued down. The stock reached a low
of 4.24, recovered, and then dropped more, bottoming at 2.02 in February 2003.
If you bought at the breakout price and sold at the highest high, you would have
made 9%, without deducting commissions or other trading costs. Average
traders would have lost money, perhaps a lot of it if they rode the stock down.
Sample Trade 273
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 273

What went wrong? Is this another case of overhead resistance? No. This
is a case where the fundamentals take center stage. See that large gap on the left
of the chart? Ten days before the gap, a brokerage downgraded the stock. The
stock dropped, sure, but it hardly noticed the downgrade.
On November 29, when the market was closed, the company announced
that it would not meet its previous sales projections. When the stock opened the
following day, price gapped lower, closing 36% below the prior close. In short,
the stock dead-cat bounced; the bounce phase was the rounding turn before the
EEDB (point B).
A brokerage firm rated the stock “outperform” on the day it gapped lower.
Such positive statements after a large down gap help drive the price higher in
the bounce phase. However, the dire situation eventually catches the hype and
the stock sinks . . . sometimes dramatically, like that shown here.
Thus, even though we had a valid EEDB, the fundamentals were scream-
ing sell. I do not recommend taking a position in a stock showing a dead-cat
bounce for at least 6 months, sometimes even up to a year. Many chart patterns
during that time look promising but fail to perform as expected. This is one
example.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select EEDBs that
information.
Table 16.1.
• Trade EEDBs in a bull market—Table 16.2.
• EEDBs show lower failure rates in bull markets than in bear ones—
Table 16.3.
• Select patterns with breakouts near the yearly low—Table 16.4.
• Throwbacks hurt performance. Avoid EEDBs showing nearby over-
head resistance—Table 16.4.
• Watch for the rise to stall 5 to 6 weeks after the breakout in a bear
market—Table 16.5.
• Choose narrow patterns—Table 16.6.
• Pick patterns with a lower right bottom—Table 16.6.
• Select patterns with volume heavier on the right bottom than the left—
Table 16.7.
4366_16.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 274

275
17
Double Tops,
Adam & Adam
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Two well-defined peaks, narrow, pointed, and
separated in time but near the same price.
Breakout is downward.
Pullbacks 61% 48%
Surprising findings Patterns in a bull market have lower break-even
failure rates than do those in a bear market. Pull-
backs hurt performance. Tall and narrow pat-
terns perform better than short and wide ones.
Patterns with a lower left top perform better.
Heavy breakout volume propels prices farther.
See also Double Tops, Adam & Eve; Double Tops, Eve
& Adam; Double Tops, Eve & Eve
A A
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 275

This is the first of four chapters covering the various combinations of Adam
and Eve double tops. An Adam & Adam double top (AADT) is a twin-peak chart
pattern, but not just any two peaks will do. Adam peaks are narrow, inverted
V’s, and sometimes have a long, one-day upward price spike. Volume is heav-
ier on the left top than the right—usually.
The Results Snapshot shows the performance results. Oddly, for a bearish
chart pattern, AADTs perform better in a bull market than in a bear market,
judging by the break-even failure rate. The average decline measures 19%
regardless of market condition, which is also odd. Pullbacks occur more often in
a bull market than a bear market, which makes sense when you think about it.
The “Percentage meeting price target” uses half the pattern height instead
of the full height for the measure rule computation. This approach gives bet-
ter results. In the Trading Tactics section of this chapter, I give an example of
how to use the rule.
Surprises are many, but they are self-explanatory, and I discuss them in
depth later.
Tour
Figure 17.1 shows an example of an Adam & Adam double top. Notice how the
twin peaks look similar both in height and width. Prices shoot up like rockets
276 Double Tops, Adam & Adam
Confirmation Line
Adam
Adam
Teva Pharmaceutical Industries (Drug, NASDAQ, TEVA)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
00 Jul Feb Mar Apr May
Figure 17.1 An Adam & Adam double top has twin peaks that look similar with
narrow spires.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 276

in a one- or two-day spike and then return to the launch pad. The width at the
base of the top is comparatively narrow. The top is not rounded looking like
you see in Eve tops. In a way, each top looks like a hypodermic needle.
The twin peak pattern becomes a true AADT when price closes below the
confirmation line. That qualification is important as an earlier study I did found
that price continues rising 65% of the time without confirming the twin-peak
pattern. Thus, always wait for confirmation unless you have valid reasons for
trading earlier.
In the example shown in Figure 17.1, volume has a U shape, the most com-
mon. Volume is usually higher on the left top than on the right. That charac-
teristic appears in the figure if you look carefully. Volume also trends downward
between the two peaks most of the time. In a bear market, a downward volume
trend occurs twice as often as a rising one, but in a bull market, the ratio is
narrower.
Some argue that the hardest part of trading chart patterns is finding them. Dou-
ble tops make it easy, but there are guidelines to help with the process. I discuss
them in a moment, but first, look at Figure 17.2.
Confirmation
Line
Eve
Adam
Adam
A B
Vulcan Materials (Cement & Aggregates, NYSE, VMC)
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
99 May
Feb Mar Apr Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Figure 17.2 An Adam & Adam double top confirms when price closes below the
confirmation line. The two peaks look similar and are narrow and pointed. Contrast
them to the Eve pattern in February.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 277

The twin Adam peaks look similar and that is key. If they look different,
such as one wide and the other narrow, then you have an Eve & Adam or an
Adam & Eve top. When they look the same, you have either an AADT or an
Eve & Eve double top. The difference between an Adam top and an Eve top is
their width and shape. See how the Adam tops are narrow, pointed, looking like
an inverted V? Look at the Eve top highlighted in February. See how it appears
rounded and wide?
The AADT confirms as a valid double top when price closes below the
confirmation line. The confirmation line is the lowest low between the two
peaks. Adam & Adam peaks A and B are not part of a double top because price
does not confirm the pattern. Instead, prices rise above the higher of the two
peaks, invalidating the double top pattern.
Figure 17.3 shows another example of an AADT and an Eve top. The Eve
top is wide and composed of several short spikes—minor highs—and the group
appears rounded. Adam tops are narrow, inverted V’s, usually composed of
one- or two-day price spikes. Prices climb into the pattern, form the tops, and
drop to the confirmation line, validating the AADT. In this example, volume
trends upward and that is unusual. Volume is also heavier on the right top if
you bracket the peak with 5 days of average volume (2 days to the left to 2 days
to the right). Volume is usually heavier on the left peak.
Table 17. 1 shows identification characteristics for AADTs. Consider Fig-
ure 17.4 as we go through the table.
Adam
Adam
Eve
Confirmation Line
Smith International (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NYSE, SII)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
32
34
36
38
01 Feb Mar Apr May
Figure 17.3 Another example of an Adam & Adam double top, but prices do not
decline far below the confirmation line.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 278

Table 17.1
Upward price trend Price trends upward leading to the pattern and should not
form a third peak, nor should the twin peaks be part of the
same consolidation pattern. Look for two distinct minor highs.
Top shape Adam tops are narrow price spikes, inverted V’s. Both should
appear similar.
Valley between tops Patterns with a large dip (a tall pattern) perform better than
small (short) ones.
Top high prices Top to top price variation is small. Best performance is
between 0% and 6% difference.
Top separation Tops should be at least a few weeks apart. Best performance
is 5–7 weeks apart. Wider than 8 weeks and performance
deteriorates.
Price decline after right Price must close below the confirmation point without
top first rising above the right top high.
Top volume Usually higher on the left top but volume trends downward
from peak to peak.
Confirmation price Confirmation is a close below the lowest low between the
two tops. It confirms the twin top as a valid double top. The
confirmation price is also the breakout price.
Confirmation Line
Eve
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Adam
Adam
A
B
Newport Corporation (Precision Instrument, NASDAQ, NEWP)
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
01 May Jun Jul
Feb Aug
Mar Apr
Oct Nov Dec Jan 02
Figure 17.4 An Adam & Adam double top within a complex head-and-
shoulders top. The double top acts as a dual head for the complex head-and-
shoulders formation.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 279

Upward price trend. Prices must trend upward leading to the pattern to
qualify it as a top, not a bottom. The upward price trend can be short, though.
Top shape. The Adam top should appear as an inverted V, narrow, and
many times made of a one- or two-day price spike. Eve tops appear wider and
more rounded as the November turn shows in Figure 17.4. Eve tops usually
have price spikes that are shorter and more congested.
Valley between tops. A dip should separate the two tops, making each
top stand out as its own minor high. Do not select patterns that are part of the
same congestion pattern. For this reason, the peaks marked A and B in Figure
17.4 are not part of a double top.
Top high prices. The price difference between the two peaks is usually
minimal, between 0% and 6%. The key is that they should appear to be at or
near the same price. The two tops shown in Figure 17.4, for example, have a 4%
price variation.
Top separation. How far apart should the peaks be? Some analysts argue
that a month is the minimum, but I put no such limitation on the patterns I
selected. However, be sure that the tops are distinct minor highs. The best per-
forming AADTs had tops 5 to 7 weeks apart. Those wider than 8 weeks showed
performance that deteriorated, but the sample size is small. Thus, do not let
widely spaced peaks sway your opinion.
Price decline after right top. Price must decline to the confirmation
price before you consider taking a position, unless the situation warrants a
quicker move. Sometimes, instead of confirming, the stock forms another peak,
forming a triple top. If that happens, treat the pattern as a triple top.
Top volume. Volume is usually higher on the left peak than on the right.
Linear regression on the volume from peak to peak says it trends lower.
Confirmation price. Wait for price to close below the confirmation line
before trading a stock showing a double top. The reason for this delay is that
65% of the time, price will not drop to the confirmation line before making a
new high. Only after price confirms the pattern does a twin-peak pattern become
a true double top.
Focus on Failures
Double tops have two types of failures. The first is one of identification. You
must wait for price to close below the confirmation line. Only then does the
twin-peak pattern become a true double top. You can try trading the pattern
before price drops to the confirmation line, but if you are shorting a stock, you
will probably take a loss when the price soars away from you. Do the smart thing
and wait for price to close below the low between the two peaks before trading.
The second type of failure is what I call a 5% failure. That means price con-
firms the pattern and then drops less than 5% below the breakout price before
rebounding. It does not happen often (8% in a bull market and 11% in a bear
market), but the chance is not zero. Be prepared and use a stop to limit the loss.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 280

Consider Figure 17.5, a double top that obeys the identification guide-
lines including closing below the confirmation level. The uphill run starts in
May 1992 and culminates in the top during March 1993, representing a rise of
over 60%. Prices retreat for a month before gathering steam and trying for a
new high. They succeed at the beginning of June, when prices crest the old
high by 0.63.
However, the celebration is short and prices tumble. They drop over
20% before meeting support at 26. The new low is below the valley low, the
so-called confirmation point, but prices quickly turn around. Prices move up at
a smart pace and do not stop until they touch 39. That is a 50% move from the
low. If you sold your shares once prices closed below the confirmation point,
you would walk away from a chunk of money.
This type of failure is called a 5% failure. Prices break out downward but
fail to descend by more than 5% before turning around. Fortunately, 5% failures
are relatively rare for double tops.
Statistics
Table 17.2 shows general statistics for AADTs.
Number of formations. I found 296 Adam & Adam double tops with a
significant number coming from the nearly 3-year bear market. That surprised
me. Still, the pattern is rare. I used 500 stocks from mid-1991 to mid-1996 and
another 500 bracketing the bear market.
Statistics 281
Phillips Van Heusen (Apparel, NYSE, PVH)
Confirmation Level
Pullback
First Top Second Top
Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
Figure 17.5 A double top formation that suffers a 5% failure. Prices fail to con-
tinue moving down by more than 5% before rebounding.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 281

Reversal or continuation. Since we are dealing with tops and the break-
out is downward, all patterns act as reversals of the upward price trend. The
trend need not be long, but it averages 113 days (4 months) in a bull market
and 70 days (2.5 months) in a bear market.
Average decline. The average decline measures 19% regardless of the
market condition. I consider that odd. I expected the bear market decline to be
larger than that shown in a bull market, especially with the general market tug-
ging it lower.
Declines over 45%. Five percent of the patterns decline a large amount
—over 45%. That is typical for bearish chart patterns.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate low, it soars
by climbing 54% in a bull market and 47% in a bear market. Thus, if you can
determine when the price trend changes from down to up, buy.
Busted pattern performance. Just 23 patterns (12 in a bull market and
11 in a bear market) busted. Even so, the numbers give you some indication of
what is in store once a busted pattern begins to rebound.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The S&P climbed 2% in a bull market
and dropped 11% in a bear market. As I mentioned, I am surprised that the bear
market did not help the average decline beat the 19% posted in a bull market.
Days to ultimate low. It takes 51 days to reach the ultimate low in a bull
market and just over a month in a bear market. Since both markets show a 19%
decline, the bear market decline must be steeper. That finding suggests you
trade this pattern in a bear market because you will have more trades annually.
Table 17.3 shows failure rates for AADTs. The bull market starts out with
a lower failure rate (breakeven) but it does not last long. In the important lower
price declines, bear markets win, suggesting better performance by trading
AADTs in a bear market.
Table 17.2
General Statistics
37%a
a
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 282

How do you read the table? Let me give you some examples. In a bull mar-
ket, 8% of the AADTs dropped less than 5% after the breakout. In a bear mar-
ket, the rate was 11%. Just over half (53%) will bottom after dropping less than
15% in a bull market. The halfway mark in a bear market is about 18%.
Notice how the failure rates climb for small changes in the maximum
price decline. The bull market failure rates change from 8% to 30% to 53%
for declines up to just 15%. That represents a huge increase in failures for
small declines.
What does all this mean? If you own a stock and see a support zone below
the confirmation price, can you tolerate a loss to that level? If you are shorting
a stock, will the down move be profitable enough to risk a trade? Do not bet on
a large down move with this pattern.
Formation end to breakout. It takes about a month for price to break out.
I measure this from the highest high in the right top to the breakout point (con-
firmation line). This is the time it takes prices to drop to the confirmation line.
Yearly position. Where in the yearly trading range does the breakout
occur? Most of the time, the breakout occurs in the middle of the range.
price range, we find that the best performing patterns have breakouts that occur
near the yearly high in a bull market and near the yearly low in a bear market.
The worst performance comes from patterns in the middle of the range—where
they occur most often.
Pullbacks. A pullback occurs more often in a bull market (61%) than in
a bear market (48%). This occurrence may be due to the upward pull on the
stock by the general market. In a bear market, everything is tumbling, making
it harder for the stock to swim against the tide during a pullback.
Statistics 283
Table 17.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
Decline (%) Bull Market Bear Market
10 57 or 30% 26 or 24%
15 100 or 53% 45 or 42%
20 118 or 63% 64 or 59%
25 136 or 72% 80 or 74%
30 152 or 81% 89 or 82%
35 167 or 89% 96 or 89%
50 183 or 97% 106 or 98%
75 188 or 100% 107 or 99%
Over 75 188 or 100% 108 or 100%
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 283

It does not take long for price to return to the breakout price—about 10
days on average. When a pullback does occur, it hurts performance, as Table
17.4 shows.
Gaps. In both markets, gaps improve performance when they occur, but
the performance difference may not be as wide as that shown in a bear mar-
ket. There, the sample count is small. Notice that the gap size is larger in a
bear market.
Table 17.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate low. For
example, a third of the AADTs in a bear market will reach bottom in the first
week. By week three (21 days), 51% will have bottomed (that is the sum of the
first three columns of numbers). Bull markets take longer to reach bottom. By
week three, 42% have bottomed.
Notice that 14% of the stocks bottom out in a bear market during the
week ending on day 28. I have seen this occurrence with other chart pattern
Table 17.4
Percentage rise/decline for each 12-month L19%, C18%, L21%, C18%,
Pullbacks 61% 48%
Average decline for patterns without 23% 20%
pullback
Performance with breakout day gap –20% –25%a
Performance without breakout
day gap –19% –18%
a
Table 17.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 33% 9% 9% 14% 5% 6% 3% 4% 4% 0% 14%
Bull market 24% 10% 8% 7% 4% 4% 6% 5% 4% 2% 26%
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 284

types, and it suggests strength in prices a month after the breakout. Keep that
in mind if you short a stock showing an AADT.
Table 17.6 shows AADT size-related statistics. Size is a good predictor of
performance after the breakout.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones, by 21% to 18%, in
both bull and bear markets. Stick to trading tall patterns.
Width. Narrow patterns perform better than do wide ones in a bull mar-
ket. A bear market shows no performance difference. I used the median length
as the separator between narrow and wide.
Average formation length. The average width varies from 36 days for
patterns in a bear market to 43 days in a bull market.
Height and width combinations. Table 17.6 shows the performance
results when combining the four traits. Patterns that are both tall and narrow
do best by declining the most. The table also shows that you should avoid dou-
ble tops that are both short and wide—they decline least after the breakout.
Top price variation. Does price variation between tops suggest better
performance after the breakout? Not really. In a bear market, a peak-to-peak
price difference less than the median difference means an average decline of
Statistics 285
Table 17.6
Size Statistics
Small top price variation performance –19% –20%
Large top price variation performance –19% –18%
Lower left top performance –20% –20%
Lower right top performance –18% –19%
a
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 285

20%. A larger price difference means an 18% decline. In a bull market, the per-
formance was the same.
Lower top performance. When the high at the left top was below the
right top’s high price, the AADT outperformed after the breakout in all mar-
ket conditions. Thus, look for patterns with a lower left top.
Volume trend. In a bull market, double tops with falling volume per-
formed better, but in a bear market, the results swapped—AADTs with a rising
volume trend performed better and by a larger spread.
Volume shapes. The volume pattern that occurs most often is U shaped.
In a bear market, AADTs with dome-shaped volume do better postbreakout.
In a bull market, patterns with a random (neither U- nor dome-shaped) volume
shape performed best.
Breakout volume. Many traders will swear that heavy breakout volume
adds to the reliability of a pattern. AADTs confirm that by outperforming.
Top volume. I checked the 5-day volume surrounding each peak and
found AADTs with heavy left top volume performed better in a bull market. In
a bear market, there was no performance difference.
Trading Tactics
Table 17.8 shows trading tactics for AADTs.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to predict a target price. With most
patterns, the rule uses the full pattern height, but not for AADTs. Price hits the
Table 17.7
Volume Statistics
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume pattern –21% –18%a
performance
Heavy left top volume performance –20% –19%
Heavy right top volume performance –18% –19%
a
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 286

target just 40% of the time in a bull market and 44% in a bear market when
using the full pattern height.
For best results, use half the height. Subtract the lowest low between the
two highs from the highest high and then divide by 2. For example, in Figure
17.6, the highest high is the left peak at 35. The lowest low is at 24.88. That
gives a height of 10.12. Dividing by 2 gives 5.06. Subtract this value from the
lowest low to get a target of 19.82. If the result is negative, then ignore it; price
cannot decline below zero. Using half the formation height increases the suc-
cess rate to 72% in a bull market and 68% in a bear market.
Consider changing the predicted decline into a percentage then looking
up the failure rate in Table 17.3. In this example, the 5.06 decline from a break-
out of 24.88 represents a loss of 20%. Table 17.3 shows that 63% of the patterns
in a bull market fail to drop at least 20%. Thus, the target price is probably too
far away, and you should choose a more conservative one.
Wait for breakout. Usually, it is best to wait for the breakout (when price
closes below the confirmation line) before trading this pattern. If you do not
wait, chances are prices will rise 65% of the time (in a bull market) without
dropping below the confirmation line. The Sample Trade shows an example of
how to ignore this rule and make more money.
Trade with market trend. Even though the average decline is the same
in bull and bear markets, the failure rate differs. Trade with the market trend.
Since this is a bearish pattern, you will have more success shorting a stock if the
general market is also trending down.
Check others in the industry. Other stocks in the same industry can
give a vital clue to performance of the stock you want to trade. If they are going
down or showing signs of topping out, then a short sale or selling a long hold-
ing might be the smart move.
Look for the stock that turns down first followed by the others. For exam-
ple, Lowes reports earnings, a few days before Home Depot. When Lowes
Trading Tactics 287
Table 17.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the pattern height from the lowest low between the two
tops to the highest peak and then divide in half. Subtract the
result from the lowest low. The result is the target price. Price hits
the target 72% of the time in a bull market, 68% in a bear market.
Wait for breakout Wait for a close below the confirmation point before selling—
usually.
Trade with For best results, short in a bear market.
market trend
Check others in To avoid 5% failures, check other stocks in the same industry and
the industry trade if they are showing topping patterns or if their stock is falling.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 287

reported soft earnings, that also hurt Home Depot stock. Home Depot dropped
even more when it reported the same problems (soft lumber prices) and weak
results. Look for which stock turns down first, and see what happened the last
time they all dipped (perhaps during the same month in prior years).
Sample Trade
Since I trade from the long side, let me give you an example of how to use a
double top defensively. Say you own the stock in Figure 17.6. How do you trade
this one? Do you hold on like an amateur investor or do you dump at the first
sign of weakness, like a swing trader?
The answer depends on several factors, such as taxes, industry, and market
outlook. Sometimes it may be wise to ride out the decline.
Say you bought the stock at the February low, 19.25. At the first Adam
top (35), you made 82%—nearly a double. Watching the stock drop to the
confirmation line must have been painful. That drop took price down to 24.88,
a decline that reduced your profit to just 29%.
Look what would have happened if you sold the stock the day after price
closed below the sell trend line: That would have gotten you out at 29.94 for a
profit of 56%.
I recently sold a utility stock because it shot up like the rise to point A in
Figure 17.6. Since a quick decline often follows a quick rise, I was willing to sell
Confirmation Line
Sell
Trend Line
Sell
Trend Line
Sold
A
B
Adam
Adam
Noble Energy Inc. (Petroleum (Producing), NYSE, NBL)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
37
99 May
Apr
Mar Jun Jul
Feb Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Figure 17.6 The two sell trendlines provide an opportunity to sell the stock at a
price higher than the confirmation line.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 288

my stock for a $7,000 profit plus over $1,300 in dividends because I did not
want to give back thousands. I will miss the 5.3% yield at a time when money
market funds are paying just 0.3%. The price has declined since I sold it.
Points A and B are called spikes or tails. Point A is especially good because
the price closes near the daily low. That is important. Look for a long price spike
with a close near the daily low. For the first Adam peak, if you sold the day after
the spike, you would have made 62%. If you sold at the close the day after points
B and A, you would have made 55% and 40%, respectively. Those are good
gains regardless of how you slice it.
Most amateur investors would have held onto the stock and rode it back
down. As it bottomed at the confirmation line, they may have sold (some did
as the slight rise in volume suggests). Others held on, vowing to sell if price
reached the old high. When price climbed and approached the old high, their
tune changed. Their desire to sell melted into greed. “Why sell if the stock is
going up?”
Good point. But you have to sell sometime. Price fluctuations may shake
amateurs out or they may turn stubborn and hold on, this time riding the stock
down to the confirmation point. That is when the twin peaks turn into a valid
double top. That is also the time to sell. Placing a stop-loss order at the con-
firmation line means your position sells without your having to worry about it.
In this example, a second sell trend line would work well when price closed
below it in September. If you sold at the close the following day, you would have
made 50%. That is much better than the 29% gain when selling at the confir-
mation line.
Am I advocating selling before confirmation? No. Every time I have done
that in a double top, the stock never confirmed, and I gave up profit because
price made new highs. Still, you can increase your profit by taking shortcuts to
selling as the example shows (using trend lines, for instance). You can always
buy back in if price does not sink to the confirmation point.
The choice is yours. If you are just days away from changing a short-term
gain into a long-term one, it may be wise to hold off selling. I did something
similar by waiting 3 days to push a trade into a new tax year, shifting income.
By delaying, I changed a 40% profit into a 27% one. Oops.
forming AADTs. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Trade AADTs in a bear market. The decline is steeper than in a bull
market for the same average decline—Table 17.2.
• Failure rates are generally lower for patterns in a bear market—
Table 17.3.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 289

• In bull markets, select patterns with breakouts near the yearly high. In
bear markets, use the yearly low—Table 17.4.
• Pullbacks hurt performance, so avoid one by looking for underlying
support—Table 17.4.
• A third of the patterns bottom in the first week in a bear market. Half
bottom within 3 weeks.—Table 17.5.
• In a bear market, look for prices to rebound a month into the trade—
Table 17.5.
• Patterns both tall and narrow in a bull market perform best. Avoid pat-
terns that are both short and wide in either market—Table 17.6.
• Patterns with a lower left top outperform—Table 17.6.
• Heavy breakout volume suggests good performance after the breakout—
Table 17.7.
4366_17.qxd 2/23/05 11:39 AM Page 290

291
18
Double Tops,
Adam & Eve
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Two well-defined peaks, the first narrow and
pointed, the second wide and rounded; both
separated in time but topping near the same
price. Breakout is downward.
Pullbacks 59% 58%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance. Tall patterns
a lower right top do well. Patterns with U-
shaped volume perform better.
See also Double Tops, Adam & Adam; Double Tops,
Eve & Adam; Double Tops, Eve & Eve
A E
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 291

Adam & Eve double bottoms (AEDTs) perform about average (bull market) or
slightly below (bear market) when compared to the average decline of other
bearish chart pattern types. The double-digit break-even failure rate in a bull
market is high, too. Thus, trade this one from the short side in a bear market for
the best performance. If you own the stock in a bull market and it double tops,
you might want to sell or not, depending on the circumstances. Sometimes it
may pay to weather a small decline after an AEDT, especially if the general
market and others in the industry are soaring.
AEDTs have a few surprises, and I discuss them in the Statistics section.
Tour
Along with the head-and-shoulders formation, double tops are perhaps the most
popular. Many novice investors see a dual peak on the stock chart and proclaim
it to be a double top. It probably is not. There are a number of characteristics
that compose a true double top and I discuss them in a moment, but, first, what
does a double top look like?
Consider Figure 18.1, a double top in ElkCorp. The first thing one notices
are the twin peaks. They should be near the same price level and widely spaced.
The price trend leading to the first peak is upward and prices fall away after the
second peak.
The intervening valley is just that: a valley that sees prices decline by 10%
to 20%, sometimes more. The valley floor forms the confirmation level or point.
A twin peak formation becomes a true double top once price closes below the
confirmation point, signaling a breakout.
Sometimes a pullback occurs such as that shown in Figure 18.1. A pullback
allows investors another opportunity to exit their position before the decline
resumes. For more aggressive traders, the pullback is a chance to make a short
sale in the hope that prices will continue falling.
Table 18.1 lists identification characteristics that Adam & Eve double tops share.
They are only guidelines—not rules—and exceptions are many.
Upward price trend. Figure 18.2 shows an AEDT that forms after a
short-term price rise beginning in November. The average rise leading to
AEDTs is 128 days, or about 4 months long.
Top shape. When searching for an Adam & Eve double top, remember
that the Adam peak should look different from Eve. Adam looks like an inverted
V, usually with a one- or two-day price spike poking out of the top. Eve is
rounder and wider. Adam peaks come first; Eve, second. The shape difference
is clear in the figures accompanying this chapter.
292 Double Tops, Adam & Eve
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 292

Confirmation Line
Eve
Adam
Pullback
ElkCorp (Buidling Materials, NYSE, ELK)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
00 May Jun
Mar
Feb Apr
Figure 18.1 A double top has twin peaks that are usually a few months apart but
quite near in price. Only when prices decline below the valley floor is a double top
confirmed as a valid formation.
Table 18.1
same consolidation pattern. Look for two distinct minor highs.
Top shape The first peak is an Adam top, usually with a narrow price
spike, inverted V shape. The Eve peak (second top) is wider
and more rounded, perhaps composed of several short
spikes. The two peaks should look different.
Valley between tops Patterns with a large dip (a tall pattern) perform better than
small (short) ones. The valley depth usually measures in the
10% to 20% range, but allow exceptions.
Top high prices Top to top price variation is small, usually 0% to 3%, but
allow higher differences.
Top separation Tops should be at least a few weeks apart with most falling
in the 2–7 week range.
Top volume Usually higher on the left top.
two tops. It confirms the twin top as a valid double top. The
confirmation price is also the breakout price.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 293

Valley between tops. I set no minimum price decline between the two
tops, just to see if smaller patterns performed worse than larger ones (they do).
Expect the decline to be in the 10% to 20% range, but allow variations.
Remember, the larger the decline, the better the performance. Figure 18.2
shows a 12% valley decline.
Top high prices. The price variation between the two tops is usually
small, and some limit it to 3%. I place no such limitations on the double tops
I selected for testing, but they looked as if they peaked near the same price.
Top separation. Some will tell you that tops must be at least a month
apart. Again, I placed no such restriction on the patterns I selected. However,
the median distance was about 6 weeks as measured between the highest high
on each peak. The AEDT in Figure 18.2 shows peaks 46 days apart.
Price decline after right top. This guideline separates double tops from
triple tops. A double top becomes a valid pattern when price closes below the
confirmation line—the lowest low between the two peaks. If a third peak forms
before confirmation, then ignore the double top and check if it is a triple top.
If it is a triple top, then do not trade it as a double top.
Top volume. Volume is usually higher on the left top than the right as
measured by the 5 days surrounding the peak (2 days before to 2 days after). If
the right peak has higher volume, do not worry. It happens. The AEDT in Fig-
ure 18.2 has higher volume on the left peak. The figure also shows dome-
shaped volume.
Confirmation
Line
Eve
Adam
ExxonMobil Corp. (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, XOM)
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
99 May Jun
Apr
Mar
Feb
Figure 18.2 An Adam & Eve pattern forms in December and sends prices back to
the November low.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 294

Confirmation price. A twin-peak pattern becomes a true double top
when price closes below the confirmation price. When that occurs, it is time to
sell a long holding or initiate a short sale. Selling before confirmation may mean
price continues rising after the sale (the AEDT does not confirm). That happens
65% of the time in a bull market.
Why do double tops form? Consider Figure 18.3, a well-shaped double top
that satisfies all the identification guidelines. The stock began rising in Octo-
ber 1992 at a price of 9.88. At the start, volume was unremarkable but did have
its moments. On spurts, like that shown during March and again in April, vol-
ume spiked upward and helped propel the stock higher.
Many unfortunate investors bought near the left top hoping prices would
continue rising—a momentum play. However, astute technical investors rec-
ognized the price pattern for what it really was: a measured move up. The first
up-leg occurred in just 3 days, followed by horizontal movement for several
weeks, and another swift rise to the first top.
Once the measured move completed, volume dried up and the upward
movement stalled. Price moved down and formed a base in early May that saw
a low of 15.75. The consolidation lasted almost 2 months on light turnover.
The price decline from peak to trough was not much in dollars, but it rep-
resented a 20% decline. Comparatively few investors took advantage of the price
lull to add to their position or place new trades. Those investors that bought at
the top swore they would sell just as soon as they got their money back. When
USF & G Corp. (Insurance (Prop./Casualty), NYSE, FG)
Adam Eve
Confirmation Level
Measured Move
Up Formation
Feb 93 Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
Figure 18.3 Prices do not push above this double top for over 3 years. A measured
move up pattern forms the rise to the left top.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 295

price started rising again, many of them pulled the trigger and sold their shares.
The volume pattern, which up to this point was flat, bumped up and took on a
more rugged appearance (during late June and into July). Other investors,
believing that the consolidation was over, bought for the first time.
As prices rounded over and formed the second peak during July some
investors correctly assumed that a double top was forming. They sold their
shares near the top, content with the profits they locked in. Other intrepid
traders sold short and hoped prices would fall. Prices did fall but stopped at the
top of the consolidation area formed between the peaks few months earlier.
After a prolonged attempt at creating a third peak in late August and into
September, prices gapped below the confirmation point at 15.75. A downward
breakout began. The smart money sold their shares immediately and licked their
wounds. Others hoped the selling was overdone while still others sold short.
The stock attempted a pullback in mid-October but gave up. For the next
several years, price failed to rise above the high established by the double top.
Figure 18.4 shows another example of an AEDT. The Adam peak does
not have a long, one-day price spike. Rather, the peak is narrow when compared
to the Eve counterpart. Look at the width of each peak near the confirmation
line, and you will see what I mean. If the top shape does not make it easy to iden-
tify the pattern, look at the base’s width—sometimes that helps.
Eve
Adam
Confirmation
Line
Giant Industries, Inc. (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, GI)
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
01 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug Sep Oct Nov
Figure 18.4 This Adam & Eve double top shows the difference between each
peak’s width.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 296

Focus on Failures
Figure 18.5 shows an AEDT. You might think that this is an Adam & Adam
double top because the Eve top has a long price spike leaving the top of the
pattern. If you look at the base of the pattern, you will see that the Adam top
remains narrow for most of its length. Eve starts slender at the price tail then
widens out as prices near the confirmation line. I conclude that it is an AEDT,
confirmed when price closed below the confirmation line (the breakout in
the figure).
Regardless of whether you consider the double top an AEDT or AADT,
the result is the same: price drops but not far. Why? An old saying goes, “Price
has to have something to reverse.” Here, price moves horizontally from Sep-
tember through January, leaving little upward move to reverse. Yes, the actual
decline from the breakout price to the August low measures 13%, but you get
my point.
Viewing Figure 18.5 on the weekly scale (not shown), we find massive sup-
port at 20, a portion of it appears as the August and October lows. Additional
support appears at the triangle apex, about 23.50, right where the trading range
centers. Of course, apex support has no effect on the AEDT because support
is above the breakout price.
Breakout
Eve
Adam
Symmetrical
Triangle
Ultimate
Low
Invacare Corp. (Medical Supplies, NYSE, IVC)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
98 May Jun
Feb Mar Apr
Figure 18.5 An Adam & Eve double top needs something to reverse. Here, the
meager rise leading to the chart pattern coupled with underlying support stopped
the downward move at the ultimate low.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 297

Would you have taken this trade? Hopefully, the answer is no because of
the 20 support zone. Why risk a trade to capture 13%—and you only get that
prize if you trade it perfectly?
Statistics
Table 18.2 shows general statistics for AEDTs.
Number of formations. I found 340 AEDTs in the stocks I looked at. The
102 patterns in a bear market put in a good showing because the bear market
is much shorter than the bull market. I looked at 500 stocks from 1991 to 1996
and another 500 from 1999 to 2003, bracketing the bear market.
Reversal or continuation. Since we are dealing with double tops and
downward breakouts, all patterns act as reversals.
Average decline. The average decline is higher in a bear market than in
a bull market, as you would expect. That suggests trading this pattern in a bear
market for the best results.
Declines over 45%. Twice as many patterns in a bear market decline
over 45% than do those in a bull market. That is not saying much because just
8% of the patterns make such a large drop.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate low, it
rebounds strongly in a bull market (soaring 50%) and 43% in a bear market.
This is an average, so your results may vary.
Busted pattern performance. Busted patterns are rare and probably not
worth searching for. Why? Because you may think a double top is about to bust
but it turns into a pullback and prices resume the downward trend after the pull-
back completes.
Table 18.2
General Statistics
35%a
a
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 298

Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The index was flat in a bull market and
down 13% in a bear market. By comparing the S&P change to the average
decline, you can see the effect of market influence.
Days to ultimate low. It takes about 7 weeks from the breakout to reach
the ultimate low, on average. A bear market gets there quicker and falls farther,
so the decline is steeper. This finding reinforces the belief that you should
trade double tops in a bear market, not a bull market.
Table 18.3 lists failure rates for AEDTs in bull and bear markets. The table
shows that double tops perform best in a bear market because the failure rates
are lower. For example, in a bear market, 7% of the patterns I looked at failed
to drop at least 5%. A total of 25% failed to decline at least 10%. That is a sig-
nificant increase, but patterns in a bull market failed 33% of the time. Half the
patterns in a bear market will fail to drop more than 20%.
Keep that in mind if you decide to short a stock. The decline may be less
than you think. If you own a stock, check Table 18.3 for the likely decline. Is
it worth holding onto the stock and weathering the decline? Only you can
answer that.
Formation end to breakout. How long does it take price to drop from the
right top high to the confirmation point? Answer: just over a month. This is an
average, but it suggests that if you are late spotting a double top, you still have
time before it becomes valid (when price closes below the confirmation price).
Yearly position. In both market conditions (bull/bear), the breakout
appears most often in the middle of the yearly price range.
Yearly position, performance. The center of the yearly price range also
provides the best performance in a bull market. The bear market numbers are
Statistics 299
Table 18.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 78 or 33% 25 or 25%
15 123 or 52% 39 or 38%
20 151 or 63% 53 or 52%
25 180 or 76% 65 or 64%
30 199 or 84% 80 or 78%
35 214 or 90% 85 or 83%
50 232 or 97% 96 or 94%
75 238 or 100% 102 or 100%
Over 75 238 or 100% 102 or 100%
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 299

suspect because of the low sample count, and the performance difference is
insignificant anyway.
Pullbacks. Pullbacks occur over half the time. When they do occur, prices
take 10 or 11 days to complete the journey back to the breakout price. However,
a pullback hurts performance. For example, in a bear market, those AEDTs with
pullbacks declined 18%. Without pullbacks, prices declined 28%. This finding
suggests you should search for underlying support before investing. If you are
considering shorting the stock and the decline stops in the support zone, would
that warrant the risk of a trade?
Gaps. Gaps help performance only in a bear market, but the sample size
(19) is small, meaning that the results may change. Look at the gap size. In a bear
market, it is triple the size of the bull market number. This finding suggests you
short a stock in a bear market before the breakout by placing an order slightly
above the confirmation price. Hopefully, that will get you in before the break-
out without unduly increasing your risk.
Table 18.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate low. A
third of the AEDTs in a bear market will hit bottom in the first week.
Bear markets show a definite upward move around 14 to 21 days after the
breakout (meaning the decline falters). Bull markets show a slight uptick a month
after the breakout (day 28 and again at day 56). The numbers suggest that you
should watch your trade carefully as the 1-month holding period nears. If prices
begin climbing then cover your short immediately.
Table 18.4
Percentage decline for each 12-month L18%, C19%, L22%, C22%,
Pullbacks 59% 58%
Performance without breakout day gap –18% –20%
a
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 300

Table 18.6 shows various size-related statistics for AEDTs.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones after the breakout.
The widest difference comes from patterns in a bear market: tall patterns drop
25% and short ones fall 20%.
Width. Width shows mixed performance results. In a bull market, narrow
patterns perform better than wide ones. In a bear market, the results reverse,
with wide patterns doing better after the breakout. I used the median length to
separate narrow from wide patterns.
Average formation length. The time between the highest high in each
top averages slightly less than 2 months.
Statistics 301
Table 18.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 33% 8% 10% 9% 9% 5% 3% 2% 1% 2% 19%
Bull market 29% 9% 6% 7% 5% 5% 3% 6% 3% 4% 23%
Table 18.6
Size Statistics
a
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 301

Height and width combinations. I looked at the combination of height
and width to find the best performance. Patterns that are both tall and narrow
perform better than most other combinations.
Top price variation. Does the price difference between the highest
high in each top indicate better performance after the breakout? Yes, but only
in a bear market. AEDTs with a large price variation did better than those
with a small one.
Lower top performance. This is one of the more surprising findings:
AEDTs with a right top below the left show superior performance. In a bear
market, AEDTs with lower right tops decline 25% after the breakout compared
to 19% for lower left tops. Thus, select AEDTs with a lower right top.
Table 18.7 shows volume statistics for AEDTs.
Volume trend. For AEDTs, the volume trend is meaningless. In a bear
market, the samples are too few to make definite conclusions. In a bull market,
there is no performance difference.
Volume shapes. Double tops with U-shaped volume perform better than
the other two shapes. The worst performance comes from AEDTs with a ran-
dom volume trend, but the sample size is small.
Breakout volume. Most traders will tell you that heavy breakout volume
results in a more reliable pattern (whatever that means). AEDTs show mixed
results, depending on the market condition. In a bull market, patterns with
breakout volume below the 30-day average outperformed their heavy breakout
volume counterparts. In a bear market, the heavy breakout volume patterns do
better, but the sample size is small.
Table 18.7
Volume Statistics
Rising volume trend performance –18% –23%a
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume –15%a
–18%a
pattern performance
Light breakout volume performance –21% –18%a
Heavy right top volume performance –16% –24%a
a
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 302

Top volume. Again, the results are mixed. Double tops with volume heav-
ier on the left top in a bull market perform better than do those with heavy right
top volume. In a bear market, the results flip, but the sample size is small.
Trading Tactics
Table 18.8 shows trading tactics for AEDTs. They are the same as for other
double tops. Double tops serve two purposes. One is to get you out of a long
holding. The second is to trigger a short sale. Before we get into a sample
trade, let us review the basics.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to help predict how far price will
decline. Find half the formation height and project it downward from the
breakout price. The result is the target, the minimum price move expected.
Unfortunately, this method only works 69% of the time, far short of the 80%
I like to see.
For example, look at Figure 18.6. The highest high in the Adam & Eve
double top is at 28.72, on the Eve top, and the lowest low (the confirmation line)
is at 25.78. Divide the difference (2.94) by 2 (1.47) and subtract the result from
the lowest low to get a target of 24.31. Price reached the target at point A.
Wait for breakout. As a trading signal, you will want to wait for the break-
out before exiting a long position or opening a short one. The breakout price
is the lowest low between the two tops, shown in Figure 18.6 as the confirma-
tion line. If you sell your shares before confirmation, there is a 65% chance that
price will not decline to the confirmation line but will instead move higher.
Once price closes below the breakout price, sell your shares or consider short-
ing the stock.
Trading Tactics 303
Table 18.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the pattern height from the lowest low between the
two tops to the highest peak then divide by 2. Subtract the result
from the lowest low. The result is the target price. Price hits the
target 69% of the time.
usually.
market trend
the industry go short if they are showing topping patterns or if their stock is
falling.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 303

Trade with market trend. If you own shares in a bull market, look for
underlying support and see if you can tolerate a loss to that level. With the bull
market powering price upward, the downturn may be short. In a bear market,
that is the time to short a stock showing an AEDT. Trade with the market
trend for the best results.
showing weakness (moving down or forming bearish chart patterns), then con-
sider selling your stock. You might even want to sell before the breakout, but in
a bull market, that may leave profits on the table when the price recovers before
confirmation. In a bear market, it is a safer bet. Remember, you never go broke
taking a profit.
Sample Trade
Figure 18.6 shows a sample trade in an Adam & Eve double top and serves as
a tutorial for using progressive stops to protect profits.
The Adam & Eve top is a good example of an AEDT. The Adam top is
narrow and composed of a one-day price spike. Eve is wider and more rounded
looking. When price closes below the confirmation line, the twin peaks become
a valid AEDT. How will this pattern perform?
A
B
C
D
E
G
F
H
J
K
Adam Eve
Pullback
Short
Covered
Neckline
Support Line
Confirmation
Line
Ascending
Triangle
Volume Day
After Breakout
Jones Apparel Group (Apparel, NYSE, JNY)
I
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
97
May Mar Apr
Jun Jul Feb
Figure 18.6 To use the measure rule, compute the height of the double top then
divide by 2 and subtract the result from the confirmation line. Price hits the target
at point A in this example.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 304

The first thing to notice is that this double top occurs in a bull market. That
suggests a smaller decline than if it were in a bear market. The S&P 500 index
had just reached a new high on October 7, but was easing lower on the break-
out day (October 16). The five stocks in the apparel industry that I follow all
made highs in October 1997 and by the confirmation date, were trending down-
ward. That was a good indication that the stock should be sold.
The Eve peak sets the yearly high, and Table 18.4 says that the worst per-
formance comes from breakouts within a third of the yearly high. That obser-
vation sounds a note of caution.
The support line set up by the ascending triangle in June suggested that
price would have a difficult time piercing it. Thus, expect a pullback. Table
18.4 shows that a pullback hurts performance, but the difference in a bull mar-
ket is small.
Is the pattern a tall one? The height as a percentage of the breakout price
measures 11.4%. This is less than the median, so the pattern is short, suggest-
ing substantial underperformance.
Is the pattern narrow? Yes. The pattern is 16 days wide (as measured
between the highest high in each top). Narrow patterns marginally outperform
in a bull market.
Which peak is lower? The Adam peak is lower than Eve, and Table 18.6
says that in a bull market, AEDTs with lower left tops underperform, but the
difference is not significant.
What about volume? Figure 18.6 shows U-shaped volume between the
peaks and that is good news according to Table 18.7. Patterns with U-shaped
volume perform significantly better that those with other shapes. Is the break-
out volume heavy or light? I highlight the breakout volume the day after the
breakout, just so you can find the breakout day easily. The preceding day, the
breakout day, volume is light. Table 18.7 loves light breakout volume as pat-
terns with that condition perform substantially better. Finally, which top has
heavier volume? According to my spreadsheet, it is the right top. I used 5 days
of volume surrounding each peak and compared the two. Table 18.7 says to
expect underperformance with the heavy right top volume scenario.
Thus, this analysis showed mixed technical evidence. If you owned the
stock, you could sell on the breakout. Waiting for a pullback before selling is
dangerous because they occur just 59% of the time, but with underlying support
by the ascending triangle, a pullback was a good bet.
If you wanted to short this stock, the timing is the same. Short at the break-
out and add to your position when price turns downward after the pullback
completes, or just short when price drops again after the pullback.
Say you short the stock at the breakout. Price pulls back then drops to
point A. Since that is a new minor low, place the stop a dime or so above the
top of the pullback, the closest minor high. Price climbs to B then drops to C.
C is lower than A, so it is a new minor low. Lower the stop to B. Price climbs
to D then drops to E. Move the stop to D. Since the drop from D to E is far, you
Sample Trade 305
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 305

might want to compute the volatility of the stock and move the stop to no closer
than 1.5 times the volatility.
What do I mean? Since the breakout happens on October 16, take the dif-
ference between the high and low over the prior month and find the average
difference. In this case, it is 0.71. That represents the average price swing each
day from mid-September to mid-October. Multiply it by 1.5, giving a result of
1.07. Place the stop no closer (lower) than 1.07 above the current close. With the
close at E being 21.94, place the stop no closer than 23. If you used this approach
on the B to C leg, the stop would have taken you out at 24.14, but that is 6%
below the breakout price.
Keep moving the stop lower as prices drop. A new low on the way to H
means the stop is lowered to F. That is 17% away from the low at H (measured
from high to low), but with this volatile stock, I would tighten the stop using the
volatility rule and because the price is going nearly vertical.
How do you sell? If the stock rises, the stop will take you out automatically.
Another way is to see the head-and-shoulders bottom forming at GHK. A neck-
line drawn from F to J and extended to the right marks the breakout price. Cover
your short at the open the day after price closes above the neckline.
If you traded this stock, you would have made about 16%. That is close
to the average decline of 18% in a bull market (see Table 18.2), but the aver-
age uses the ultimate low at H for a 27% drop. Notice that the climb from C (day
27) to D occurs 1 month after the breakout, just as the discussion of Table 18.5
warned.
forming AEDTs. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• This pattern performs best in a bear market or when the general mar-
ket is declining—Table 18.2.
• Patterns in a bear market have lower failure rates—Table 18.3.
• Avoid pullbacks because performance suffers. Look for nearby under-
lying support before trading—Table 18.4.
• In bull markets, watch for a rise a month after the breakout. In a bear
market, look for a rise around days 14 to 21—Table 18.5.
• Tall patterns perform better than short ones—Table 18.6.
• Select patterns that are both tall and narrow—Table 18.6.
• Patterns with a lower right top outperform—Table 18.6.
• Select patterns with U-shaped volume—Table 18.7.
4366_18.qxd 2/23/05 11:41 AM Page 306

307
19
Double Tops,
Eve & Adam
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Twin peaks at about the same price. The left
peak looks wide and rounded but the right
peak is narrow and sharp, an inverted V
shape.
Pullbacks 64% 54%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance. Tall or narrow
patterns perform better than short or wide
ones. Tops with a large price variation do well.
Patterns with light breakout volume do best.
Adam & Eve; Double Tops, Eve & Eve
A
A
E
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 307

The Results Snapshot shows the important statistics for the Eve & Adam dou-
ble top (EADT). This bearish chart pattern shows a bear market failure rate
almost a third of what it is in a bull market. The average decline is weak to aver-
age, though, in bull/bear markets, respectively. After price reaches the ultimate
low, it goes on to make a large gain—over 50%. Busted patterns do even better,
but they are rare.
The volume trend is unusual because most trend upward, unlike other
double tops. Pullbacks in a bull market occur more frequently than they do in
a bear market, as you might expect (because a rising market will tend to push
prices back up).
Surprises are the usual lot, and I explain them in the Statistics section.
Tour
Figure 19.1 shows what an EADT looks like. The Eve top is wide and rounded
looking compared to the Adam top, which appears narrow, like an inverted V,
usually with a long, one- or two-day price spike. The pattern forms after an
upward price trend and does not become a true double top until price closes
below the confirmation line. Only then should a trader take a position in the
stock or sell an existing holding.
308 Double Tops, Eve & Adam
Eve
Adam
Breakaway
Breakaway
Confirmation
Line
Continuation
Exhaustion
Exhaustion
CNF Inc. (Trucking/Transportation Leasing, NYSE, CNF)
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
01 Apr May Jun Jul Feb
Figure 19.1 This is a good example of an Eve & Adam double top, except for the
volume trend. Volume is usually heavier on the right top than the left. Gaps set off
an island chart pattern in September and December.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 308

This figure also shows good examples of gaps: breakaway, continuation,
and exhaustion. The first trio appears just before confirmation and leads to the
ultimate low in September. Another pair begins in December with a breakaway
gap overlapping the earlier continuation gap and creating a price island from
September to December. An exhaustion gap signals the end of the fast, uphill
run. After that, prices still climb, but at a more sedate pace.
How do you identify an EADT from any ordinary twin-peak formation? Look
at Figure 19.2 and Table 19.1 for the answer. The figure shows two Eve &
Adam double tops with contrasting volume shapes. The February chart pattern
has U-shaped volume and the May pattern shows a dome shape. Patterns with
dome-shaped volume perform better.
Upward price trend. To create a top, price must be trending upward,
even if the trend is short. For reference, the average price trend leading to the
double top in the stocks I looked at was 84 days, or about 3 months long.
Top shape. Look for two peaks; the left one, Eve, should be wider and
more rounded looking than the right one, Adam. Adam is narrow, usually an
inverted V shape, and many times with a one- or two-day price spike. Above all
else, the two tops should look different from each other.
Confirmation
Line
Confirmation
Line
Eve
Eve
Adam
Adam
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
33
35
37
May Jun Jul
Feb Aug Sep Oct Nov
Mar Apr
Jan 01
Figure 19.2 Two twin peaks confirm as Eve & Adam double tops when price closes
below the confirmation line. The February pattern has U-shaped volume and the
other has dome shaped.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 309

In Figure 19.2, the differences between the two peaks in each case are
clear. To help gauge the width, look farther down the top, toward the base of
the formation. Adam peaks usually remain narrow but Eve broadens out. For
example, the May EADT at a price of 29 shows Adam as a one-day price spike,
but Eve looks wider.
Valley between tops. Look for a price dip between the two tops of 10%
to 25% or more. The dip separates the two tops so they are not part of the same
consolidation region.
Top high prices. The highest high on the left peak should be 0% to 3%
or so away from the highest high on the right peak. The tops of the two peaks
should look close in price to each other, but allow exceptions. When the peaks
differ in price, they tend to perform better after the breakout.
Top separation. The average top separation was 51 to 55 days, measured
from the highest high in each peak. What you want to see is two minor highs,
well separated and defined. Most will fall 2 to 6 weeks apart, but do not worry
if they are a year apart. It still may be a valid EADT. However, performance
suffers for widely spaced peaks. The thinking here is that it is easier for traders
to see twin peaks a month apart than a year apart. If traders miss the pattern, that
means less buying or selling enthusiasm—less pressure driving prices.
Table 19.1
same consolidation pattern. Look for two minor highs.
Top shape The left peak is an Eve top, wider and more rounded than
Adam, perhaps composed of several short spikes. The right
peak, Adam, usually has a narrow price spike, inverted V
shape. The two peaks should look different.
Valley between tops Patterns with a large dip (a tall pattern) perform better
than small (short) ones. The valley depth usually measures
in the 10% to 25% range, but allow exceptions.
allow larger differences. A large price variation (above the
median in Table 19.6) suggests better performance.
Top separation Tops should be at least a few weeks apart with most falling
in the 2–6 week range. Tops wider than 5 weeks tend to
underperform, but exceptions occur.
Top volume Usually higher on the right top.
two tops. It confirms the twin top as a valid double top.
Also called the breakout price.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 310

Price decline after right top. Price must close below the confirmation
price without first forming a third peak. If a third peak appears before confirma-
tion, then trade the pattern as a triple top.
Top volume. Of the four types of Adam and Eve double tops, this is the
only one to have volume heavier on the right top. However, do not be surprised
if the left shows higher volume. That happens 48% of the time.
Confirmation price. Price must close below the lowest low between the
two patterns before the EADT becomes a valid double top. Without confirma-
tion, you just have squiggles on the screen.
Focus on Failures
Why do EADTs fail? There are many reasons including a general market that
reverses trend. Since a rising tide lifts all boats, your stock may climb with the
bull market or falter in the decline. If other stocks in the industry are doing well,
that activity will tend to support the stock. Fundamental factors, such as good
retail sales, an exceptionally good quarter, insider buying, a stock buyback pro-
gram, or positive comments made by management will all help boost the stock
price. However, the one key element I find time after time is an impenetrable
support zone below the chart pattern. Figure 19.3 shows an example.
B
A
C
Eve
Adam
Confirmation
Line
Support
Global Industries, Ltd. (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NASDAQ, GLBL)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
00 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug
Oct Nov Dec Jan 01
Figure 19.3 Support at point B and the many peaks in October through Novem-
ber stop the price decline at A. The support zone also caused congestion at C.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 311

A support zone forms as far back as January 1997 at about 12.50. I show
the top of the zone as the support line. Peaks in October through November
and congestion at B add to the massive support. The support was enough to
turn back price at A and stall it at C. As I write this in February 2004, the stock
is still below the support zone, but I would expect price to stall there on the
way up, too.
Statistics
Table 19.2 shows general statistics for EADTs.
Number of formations. I found 317 patterns in 500 stocks using about
9 years of daily price data, ending in early 2004.
Reversal or continuation. Since we are looking at topping patterns, ones
with downward breakouts, all EADTs act as reversals of the upward price trend,
by definition.
Average decline. The average decline varies as shown in the table. The
results suggest that you should only trade EADTs in a bear market for the best
performance. If you own stock in a bull market and it forms an EADT, then
you have a choice to make. Price will go down—take that as a given. Look for
underlying support. Is the industry or market trending down too? If so, then it
may be wise to sell when the pattern confirms. Otherwise, consider hanging on
and riding out the average 15% decline, especially if there is nearby support
and the market or industry are wildly bullish.
Declines over 45%. Bearish patterns do not perform well in this cate-
gory, so the results are in line with expectations.
Change after trend ends. Once price drops to the ultimate low, it soars
by over 50%, on average. Thus, if you can tell when the price has hit bottom,
then buy and hold on.
Table 19.2
General Statistics
55%a
a
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 312

Busted pattern performance. An easier way to trade this pattern is to
look for busted patterns. Price declines less than 5% after the breakout and
then soars. Buy into the stock when the new trend is established.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. In a bull market, the S&P index climbed
1% helping retard the decline after the EADT, but the 16% drop in a bear mar-
ket helped prices drop.
Days to ultimate low. It takes just over a month for price to reach the
ultimate low, but look at this: It takes less time in a bear market to reach the
ultimate low and yet prices fall farther. Thus, the decline must be steeper.
To maximize the number of trades each year, short this chart pattern in a
bear market.
Table 19.3 shows failure rates for EADTs. The bear market rates are sub-
stantially lower than the bull market ones, suggesting you stick to short sales to
trade this pattern.
How do you read this table? Let me give you a few examples. Suppose your
total cost of trading is 5%. How many patterns will fail to drop at least that far?
Answer: 13% in a bull market and 5% in a bear market. If you want to make an
additional 10% above your cost (a total of 15%), how many EADTs will fail to
drop 15%? Answer: over half (56%) in a bull market and 32% in a bear market.
In the Trading Tactics section, we look at the measure rule. Suppose it pro-
jects a decline from 10 to 8, or 20%. How many EADTs will decline at least that
far in a bull market? Answer: 32% (68% will fail to decline at least 20%). Thus,
the target of 8 seems like a dream, so make the target more conservative by pick-
ing a target closer to 10.
Formation end to breakout. It takes time—about a month—for prices
to drop from the right peak high to the confirmation price.
Statistics 313
Table 19.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 75 or 35% 21 or 20%
15 118 or 56% 34 or 32%
20 145 or 68% 48 or 46%
25 171 or 81% 60 or 57%
30 190 or 90% 70 or 67%
35 197 or 93% 84 or 80%
50 206 or 97% 102 or 97%
75 211 or 100% 105 or 100%
Over 75 212 or 100% 105 or 100%
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 313

Yearly position. The pattern breaks out most often in the center of the
yearly trading range.
Yearly position, performance. What position in the yearly trading range
performs best? The answer is unclear because the numbers are too close or have
low sample counts. However, many bearish patterns do best when the breakout
is near the yearly low.
Pullbacks. EADTs in a bull market have one of the higher pullback rates.
Almost two out of three pull back and take between 10 and 11 days for prices
to return to the confirmation line (the breakout). When prices do pull back, the
upward retrace breaks downward momentum and performance suffers.
Before trading, look for underlying support. If a support zone is nearby,
then bet on a pullback. If you anticipate a pullback and are a swing trader, short
the stock on the breakout and close out your position in a few days or a week
when prices bottom before the pullback begins. Enter another trade when the
pullback completes and prices start dropping again.
Gaps. Gaps hurt performance, as Table 19.4 shows. The largest difference
is in a bear market, but that may be due to the low sample count (24 samples).
Table 19.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate low. In
the first week, over a quarter of the EADTs will reach the ultimate low. Notice
that 35 days after the breakout, 10% of the patterns in a bear market hit bottom.
After that, price rises, at least for 2 weeks, on average (this information is not
gleamed from Table 19.5, but from my spreadsheet). Thus, be ready to close
out your short position about a month into the trade. The same trend appears
Table 19.4
Pullbacks 64% 54%
pullback
Performance with breakout day gap –15%a
–20%a
a
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 314

in a bull market, but the rise seems to last for about 3 weeks. In all cases, the sam-
ple size is small.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. I measured height
from the higher of the two peaks to the confirmation price then divided by
the confirmation (breakout) price. Results higher than the median, shown in the
table, mean that the pattern was tall.
Width. In a similar manner. I looked at pattern width, measuring between
the highest high in each peak and comparing that to the median length. Nar-
row patterns outperformed wide ones.
Statistics 315
Table 19.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 26% 13% 6% 7% 10% 9% 4% 5% 2% 1% 18%
Bull market 29% 9% 10% 8% 5% 4% 4% 5% 5% 2% 18%
Table 19.6
Size Statistics
Tall and wide performance –19% –29%a
a
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 315

Average formation length. The average time between the highest high
in each peak is just over 50 days or slightly less than 2 months apart.
Height and width combinations. Ignoring the low sample count, tall
patterns perform best, regardless of whether or not they are paired to wide or
narrow patterns. The worst performance comes from EADTs that are both
short and wide.
Top price variation. I looked at the price variation between the highest
high in each peak. When the difference was larger than the median, EADTs
tended to outperform after the breakout. The widest difference occurs in a
bear market.
Lower top performance. Do patterns with a lower right peak perform
better? Yes and no. In a bull market, lower right tops works best, but in a bear
market, patterns with a lower left top do better.
Volume trend. Patterns in a bull market with a falling volume trend per-
formed better. In a bear market, the results flipped. Patterns with a rising vol-
ume trend declined an average of 26% versus 22%.
Volume shapes. Does the volume shape give a clue to performance? In
a bull market, those patterns with dome-shaped volume performed best, but
the results were close to the nonperformers. In a bear market, the sample count
was smaller, but a random shape did best (followed by the dome shape).
Breakout volume. EADTs are one of the exceptions to the belief that
heavy breakout volume results in better performance. I found that EADTs with
breakout volume below the 30-day average perform better than do those with
Table 19.7
Volume Statistics
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume –15% –27%a
pattern performance
a
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 316

heavy breakout volume, but the low sample count and close numbers suggests
additional samples may change the results.
Top volume. Patterns with volume heavier on the left top in a bear mar-
ket performed well; but in a bear market, volume heavier on the right top led
to better performance.
Trading Tactics
Table 19.8 shows trading tactics for EADTs. They are the same as for other
double tops.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to help predict a target price to which
your stock may descend after the breakout. For example, in Figure 19.4, the
Adam peak is the higher of the two, and it tops out at 34.90. The confirmation
price is the lowest low between the two peaks, and it is at 31.70. The difference
is 3.20. Cut that in half (1.60) and subtract it from the confirmation price. The
result, 30.10, is the target. Price reaches that level a day after the breakout.
Although this works in the stock shown in Figure 19.4, it only works
between 72% and 79% of the time. That is shy of the 80% I like to see.
Wait for breakout. Most of the time, you will want to wait for price to
confirm the pattern by closing below the confirmation price. If you do not
wait, there is a 65% chance that price will climb instead of confirming. There
are exceptions. If you see an especially dire situation developing in a stock you
own, then protect your profits and sell early. If the market or industry is drop-
ping and there was a quick rise leading to the pattern, then consider selling
early (a quick decline often follows a quick rise). Other technical indicators may
suggest a sale, so check those, too.
Trading Tactics 317
Table 19.8
Trading Tactics
two tops to the highest peak then divide in half. Subtract the
result from the lowest low. The result is the target price. Price hits
the target 72% of the time in a bull market, 79% in a bear
market.
usually.
market trend
the industry trade if they are showing topping patterns or if their stock price is
falling.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 317

Trade with market trend. Since this pattern performs best in a bear
market, avoid shorting a stock in a raging bull market unless the situation war-
rants. In a bull market, it may make sense to hold onto a stock and weather the
downturn. Look for underlying support that would stop a decline. Usually,
when the bull market is pushing price upward, it is a mistake to sell when see-
ing a double top. Chances are that in a few weeks or months the stock’s price
will be higher. Swing traders, however, will want to sell as soon as the pat-
tern confirms.
Check others in the industry. Look at how the general market and
other stocks in the same industry are behaving. That activity is often key to
how your stock will perform. If others in the industry are falling or showing signs
of topping out, chances are, your stock will decline too. If so, it is best to sell a
long holding or consider shorting the stock.
Sample Trade
Figure 19.4 shows a sample trade for EADTs. As you look at the figure, it may
strike you that the double top takes place in a downward price trend, beginning
A B
C
D
Eve
Adam
Confirmation Line
Home Depot, Inc. (Retail Building Supply, NYSE, HD)
15
16
17
18
19
21
20
22
23
24
25
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
02 May Jun Jul Feb
Figure 19.4 This Eve & Adam pattern had a quick rise followed by a quick decline.
The decline stalled near the trend-line support.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 318

with the high on the left side of the chart and sliding to the low at the right. It
reminds me of a measured move down chart pattern.
Does the pattern obey the guidelines listed in Table 19.1? The brief rise
shown by line A satisfies the upward price trend leading to the EADT. The twin-
peak pattern shows a rounded Eve top paired with a pointed Adam top. The
valley between the tops measures 9%—a bit on the short side. The two tops have
prices that vary by just 1% and are 25 days apart. Price drops to the confirma-
tion line without making a third peak. Volume is heavier on the left peak than
the right, which is unusual. Thus, the pattern meets the identification guidelines:
it is an Eve & Adam double top.
What is so special about this EADT? Two things. First, the U-shaped vol-
ume pattern is exquisite. Second, notice the quick rise leading to the pattern,
highlighted by line A. Price rockets upward for a week then moves sideways in
the pattern. Nearly as steep is the decline out of the pattern, shown by line
B. If I were trading this double top, I would place an order to sell shares at
the confirmation line. That way, I would get in at a good price as the pattern
confirmed.
I would expect a pullback because of the July congestion. Worst case, I
would put a stop at the Adam top, just in case things got out of control. For the
downward target, the measure rule predicts a decline to 30.10, as I discussed in
the “Measure rule” in Table 19.8. Since I know that a quick decline often fol-
lows a quick rise, I would set the target lower, at the beginning of the quick
rise, or about 27.78. Since that is below the round number 28, I would proba-
bly target 28.07 or some oddball number. Everyone is going to try buying at 28,
and I want to get my price before the others drive it back up.
In fact, you can see that price stalled at 28 for 3 days before resuming the
tumble (point D in Figure 19.4). If, by some magic, I stayed in the trade, I would
expect a further decline to the down-sloping trend line. A rising volume trend
as price declined is a good sign of a strong down move.
The quick rise after C suggests you need to be on top of this stock, follow-
ing it closely to time the exit if you do not use a stop order. Delays are costly.
forming EADTs. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Trade this pattern in a bear market—Table 19.2.
• If you can tell when price has reached the ultimate low or if the patterns
busts, buy—Table 19.2.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 319

• Failure rates are lowest in bear markets—Table 19.3.
• Pullbacks hurt performance, so select patterns without underlying
• Expect price to rise about a month after the breakout in a bear market—
Table 19.5.
• Pick patterns with a large price variation between peaks—Table 19.6.
• Patterns with below average breakout volume outperform—Table 19.7.
4366_19.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 320

321
20
Double Tops,
Eve & Eve
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Two peaks at about the same price level.
Both peaks have wide, rounded looking tops.
Pullbacks 59% 51%
Surprising findings The rise in a bull market after reaching the
ultimate low is unusually large. Pullbacks
hurt performance. Tall or narrow patterns
perform better than short or wide ones. Tops
with volume heavier on the left peak do well.
Adam & Eve; Double Tops, Eve & Adam.
E
E
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 321

When traders say, “double top,” they are referring to an Eve & Eve double top
(EEDT). This is the classic pattern for a reason: It performs well. In a bear
market, the break-even failure rate is just 2% and prices decline 25% after the
breakout, on average. That is superb performance. Even in a bull market, the
pattern shows its stuff. After reaching the ultimate low, price soars 63%, on
average. Busted patterns in a bull market do even better: a 70% rise.
The pattern has many surprises we have heard before plus a new one.
When volume is heavier on the left top than on the right, the pattern tends to
outperform. I discuss these surprises in the Statistics section.
Tour
Figure 20.1 shows what an Eve & Eve double top looks like. It reminds me of a
person with large eyebrows, the confirmation line is the nose, and the mouth
is the U-shaped volume trend. The double top forms after an upward price
trend and has a rounding turn between the two highs. The rounding turn is not
a prerequisite, and I have not studied the performance of double top shapes in
that regard.
The twin peaks look similar in that both have wide bases and a gentle price
turn at each top. Contrast the two Eve peaks with the two Adam peaks in March
322 Double Tops, Eve & Eve
Eve Eve
Adam
Confirmation
Line
Adam
Delta Air Lines, Inc. (Air Tranport, NYSE, DAL)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
02 May
Mar Apr
Feb
Figure 20.1 The twin-peak Eve tops become a valid Eve & Eve double top when
price closes below the confirmation line.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 322

and April. Those peaks are narrow and a one-day price spike soars above the
surrounding landscape. The price spikes in many Eve tops are shorter and more
numerous (although not in Figure 20.1).
The most common volume is U-shaped, ahead of dome and random
shapes, respectively. Volume is usually heavier on the left top than on the right,
which the figure shows surrounding the highest high in each top.
What should a trader look for to select reliable (low failure rate and high
price performance) EEDTs?
Table 20.1 shows the identification guidelines for EEDTs. Refer to Figure 20.2
for an example.
Upward price trend. Since we are dealing with tops, price must trend
upward leading to the pattern and leave trending downward. Although that
description may sound simple, a study of twin-peak patterns found that 65%
climbed away from the pattern instead of dropping down to the confirmation
line. The upward price trend leading to the double top need not be long. Figure
20.2 shows a 48-day uptrend from the late June low.
Table 20.1
Upward price trend Prices trend upward leading to the pattern and should
not form a third peak, nor should the twin peaks be part
of the same consolidation pattern. Look for two distinct
minor highs.
Top shape Both Eve peaks should appear rounded and wide, not
made of a single, narrow price spike. The two peaks
should look the same.
Valley between tops Patterns with a large dip (a tall pattern) perform better
than small (short) ones. The valley depth usually measures
in the 10% to 20% range, but allow exceptions.
allow higher differences.
Top separation Tops should be at least a few weeks apart with most
falling in the 2–6 week range.
Top volume Usually heavier on the left top than the right.
two tops. It confirms the twin top as a valid double top.
The confirmation price is also the breakout price.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 323

Top shape. The two tops should look similar to each other. That is, the
wide and rounded September peak should not look like the narrow price spike
of the Adam peak in April (see Figure 20.2). Although the August Eve peak has
a twin spike, the top is wide enough to mirror the September peak, so I classify
it as an Eve top, too. Adam tops look more like the peak that “Pullback” points
to in the figure. The width does not widen much as you scan down the pattern.
Both Eve peaks are considerably wider than the Adam “Pullback” one.
Valley between tops. The valley between the tops varies in depth but is
usually 10% to 20% deep. Figure 20.2 shows a dip of 14%, measured from the
highest high to the lowest low in the pattern. This characteristic is just a guide-
line, not a rule, so allow variations.
Top high prices. The peaks should top out near the same high price.
The usual price difference between the two peaks is in the 0% to 3% range. The
peaks should not look like stair steps, but like two tops hitting overhead resis-
tance near the same price. Figure 20.2 shows tops with almost no (0.29%) price
difference.
Top separation. Look for two well-separated peaks, not twin bumps that
are part of the same congestion pattern. The EEDT in Figure 20.2, for exam-
ple, shows peaks 33 days apart. Most peaks will be 2 to 6 weeks apart, but allow
exceptions.
Price decline after right top. Price must close below the confirmation
line to validate the EEDT pattern. As I mentioned before, 65% of the twin-peak
Eve Eve
Adam
Confirmation
Line
Pullback
Diamond Offshore (Oilfield Svcs/Equipment, NYSE, DO)
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Figure 20.2 Two peaks, similar in appearance, stand atop the price trend and act
as a reversal.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 324

patterns I looked at did not dip to the confirmation line but instead climbed
above the right peak. Those twin-peak patterns were not EEDTs.
If an EEDT forms a third peak before price closes below the confirmation
line, then consider it a triple top and trade it as such.
Top volume. Volume varies but is usually heavier on the left top than on
the right about 60% of the time, regardless of market conditions (bull/bear).
However, do not exclude a potential EEDT just because volume is heavier on
the right peak than the left.
Confirmation price. Price must close below the lowest low between the
two peaks. When that occurs, it confirms the pattern as a true EEDT. Investing
without waiting for confirmation is usually an amateur’s game, one that ends in
a loss or missed profits.
Figure 20.3 shows another example of an EEDT. The right peak looks like
two Adam tops, but the peak separation is not wide enough. One could argue
that this pattern is really a triple top, but I disagree.
Running through the identification guidelines, we see that prices trend
upward to the first top. The two tops look rounded and the valley between them
separates the peaks into two individual highs. The price variation between the
two tops is considered large for statistical purposes, measuring 3%, but the
tops look like they stop near the same price. Volume is heavier on the right top
than the left (using 2 days before to 2 days after the highest high in each peak),
Eve
Eve
Pullback
Confirmation Line
DoubleClick, Inc. (Internet, NASDAQ, DCLK)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
01 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug
Oct Nov Dec Jan 02
Figure 20.3 An Eve & Eve double top reverses the upward price trend. The pattern
confirms as a valid double top when price closes below the confirmation line.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 325

which is unusual. Price confirms the pattern in April when it closes below the
confirmation line. Within a month, prices pull back to the confirmation line
before resuming the downtrend.
Focus on Failures
What does an Eve & Eve double top failure look like and can anything be
learned from it? Consider Figure 20.4, a common failure of a double top. The
twin peaks satisfy all the identification guidelines outlined in Table 20.1 with
two exceptions. First, the volume pattern is suspect. Volume on formation of the
left top is high but lasts only 1 day. The right top volume is dense, high, and
remains high for about a week as the top forms. However, in defense of the for-
mation, the volume pattern often varies from the norm and offers little clue to
the eventual outcome.
The second guideline violated is the more important of the two: Prices fail
to close below the confirmation point. When considering all twin peak chart
patterns in this study, two out of three (65%) perform as the one shown in Fig-
ure 20.4. In other words, prices move higher.
Expect top reversals (such as the double top) to perform poorly in a bull
market, whereas bottom reversals should excel. That appears to be the case with
many of the formations covered in this book.
Fairchild Corporation A (Industrial Services, NYSE, FA)
Confirmation Line
Eve Eve
Sep 95 Oct Nov Dec
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
– 3
– 2
Figure 20.4 A common double top failure. Prices decline after the second peak
then rise before reaching the confirmation point.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 326

Statistics
Table 20.2 shows general statistics for EEDTs.
Number of formations. I uncovered 460 EEDTs in the stocks I looked
at. That is a high enough sample count to make most of the statistics rock solid.
Reversal or continuation. By definition, double tops act as reversals of the
prevailing price trend: Prices rise into the pattern and leave heading back down.
Average decline. In a bear market, the pattern shines as prices decline
25%, on average. That is considerably better than the 18% decline in a bull mar-
ket and it lends credence to “a rising tide lifts all boats” theory, or, in this case,
a receding tide lowers all boats. Shorting an EEDT in a bull market is like swim-
ming against the current. Chances are you will tire before reaching your des-
tination (that is, the decline may not be as large as hoped).
Declines over 45%. EEDTs have few large declines but that is common
for bearish chart patterns. Double tops in a bear market do well, with 9% declin-
ing more than 45% after the breakout.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate low, it climbs
a massive 63% in a bull market. Even if you wait for the 20% trend change (from
down to up), that still leaves a mouth-watering rise of 43 percentage points.
Busted pattern performance. Busted patterns do even better with a 70%
average rise from 23 busted double tops in a bull market. The 29% rise in a bear
market stems from just three samples, so ignore it.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The index declined in both markets,
which is unusual, although the bear market decline of 15% far outweighs the 2%
decline in a bull market. The large bear market decline helped the EEDT aver-
age decline.
Days to ultimate low. It took about 6 weeks for prices to reach the ulti-
mate low after the breakout. Since a bear market gets there quicker and the
Statistics 327
Table 20.2
General Statistics
29%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change –2% –15%
a
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 327

decline is larger, it must mean that the descent is steeper. This finding further
emphasizes that you should trade this pattern in a bear market.
Table 20.3 shows failure rates for EEDTs. The bear market numbers are
quite good, beginning at 2% and rising to 11% and then 25%. That is half the
bull market rate: 50% of the double tops in a bull market will fail to decline at
least 15%. The bear market reaches the 50% failure rate around declines of
22%, meaning that half the patterns in a bear market will drop less than 22%.
Table 20.3 shows two lessons: Short in a bear market, and do not even
think of shorting with a buy-and-hold mentality. Look for a short, sharp decline
and then cover.
Formation end to breakout. It takes just over a month for prices to drop
to the confirmation price (the lowest low between the twin peaks). I measure
that from the date of the highest high at the right peak to the date price closes
below the confirmation line.
Yearly position. Most of the patterns have breakouts in the middle of the
yearly price range.
Yearly position, performance. A bull market shows the only meaning-
ful result here. Patterns with breakouts within a third of the yearly high perform
best after the breakout.
Pullbacks. A pullback occurs more often in a bull market than in a bear
market, as one might guess (because bull markets tend to support prices and
bear markets tend to suck them down the drain). It takes 11 days for prices to
return to the breakout price during a pullback. When a pullback happens, per-
formance suffers, as Table 20.4 shows. Look for underlying support and avoid
EEDTs with support close enough to cause a pullback.
Table 20.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 81 or 31% 22 or 11%
15 131 or 50% 49 or 25%
20 171 or 67% 87 or 44%
25 203 or 77% 115 or 59%
30 221 or 84% 135 or 69%
35 233 or 88% 153 or 78%
50 258 or 98% 183 or 93%
75 264 or 100% 195 or 99%
Over 75 264 or 100% 196 or 100%
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 328

Gaps. Gaps are only significant in a bear market because that is where
they hurt performance. Notice that the gap size is about triple the bull market
size. Try placing an order to short the stock just above the breakout price. That
way, you may get in before confirmation but without substantially increasing
your risk.
Table 20.5 shows the time to the ultimate low. Many of the chart patterns
(25% or 29%) reach the ultimate low in the first week after the breakout. In a
bear market, 57% reach bottom in less than a month.
Notice that prices bottom more often around day 35 (bear market) and day
28 (bull market). If you short an EEDT, look for a trend change about a month
after the breakout. You may need to close out your position then.
Height. EEDTs continue a trend for many chart patterns, with tall pat-
terns performing better than short ones. Measure the height from the highest
high to the confirmation line and divide by the breakout price (the value of the
confirmation line). If the result is higher than the median shown in Table 20.6,
Statistics 329
Table 20.4
lookback period H19% H25%
Pullbacks 62% 51%
pullback
Performance with breakout day gap –18% –22%
Table 20.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 25% 13% 13% 6% 8% 6% 4% 3% 2% 1% 20%
Bull market 29% 9% 5% 10% 3% 6% 6% 2% 3% 2% 24%
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 329

then you have a tall pattern. Trade only tall patterns for the best average per-
formance.
Width. Narrow patterns perform better than wide ones. The performance
is widest in a bull market. Narrow patterns decline 20% after the breakout and
wide patterns decline 16%, on average. I used the median length between the
highest high in each top as the separator between narrow and wide.
Average formation length. From peak to peak (the highest high in each),
the separation averaged about 2 months.
Height and width combinations. I looked at the height and width com-
binations and found that the best performing patterns were tall and narrow in
both markets. The worst performance came from EEDTs that were short and
wide. Avoid those by comparing the EEDT you plan to trade with the median
length shown in Table 20.6.
Top price variation. Patterns in bull markets show better performance
when the price variation between the highest high in each top is small (less than
the 1.12% median). Small variations result in declines of 26%, but large vari-
ations have postbreakout declines averaging 20%. The results in a bear market
show no difference.
Table 20.6
Size Statistics
Tall and narrow performance –20% –28%
a
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 330

Lower top performance. In a bull market, patterns with a lower left top
perform better, but in a bear market, patterns with a lower right top perform
slightly better.
Volume trend. A falling volume trend is important to EEDT patterns in
a bear market but makes no statistical difference in a bull market.
Volume shapes. Patterns with U-shaped volume win the performance
derby. In a bear market, the decline averages 26% when the pattern has U-shaped
volume but just 22% when the volume shape is neither U shaped nor domed.
Breakout volume. The performance difference is slight. I looked at the
breakout day volume compared to the prior 30 days and found that EEDTs
with heavy breakout volume in a bull market resulted in marginally better per-
formance after the breakout. Bear markets showed no performance difference.
Top volume. In both bull and bear markets, EEDTs with heavy volume
during formation of the left peak perform better postbreakout than do those
with volume heavier on the right top.
Trading Tactics
Table 20.8 shows trading tactics for EEDTs. They are the same as for other
double tops.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to help gauge how far price will
decline after the breakout. Take the difference between the highest high in the
pattern (the higher of the two peaks) and the valley low (between the two
Trading Tactics 331
Table 20.7
Volume Statistics
pattern performance
a
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 331

peaks). Divide the result by 2 and subtract it from the confirmation price to get
the target.
For example, the EEDT shown in Figure 20. 5 has the highest high on the
left peak at 32.45. The lowest low is at the breakout, 28. Divide the difference,
4.45, in half (2.23) and subtract the result from the lowest low to find the target
of 25.77. Price reaches that target at point B. This method works 73% of the
time in a bull market and 76% of the time in a bear market.
Wait for breakout. Since 65% of the twin-peak patterns never confirm
(price trends higher), you should wait for the breakout before selling a long
holding or shorting a stock. The exception to this rule is if you have a com-
pelling situation that demands a quick exit. For example, if price just completed
the turn at the second top and the company issues an earnings warning, send-
ing the stock tumbling, then consider selling immediately. Chances are that the
next quarter will also be bad (but this depends on why earnings are soft, some
problems are easily fixed while others are not).
Trade with market trend. Eve & Eve double tops are bearish chart pat-
terns, so it makes sense to trade them in a bear market, not a bull market. If you
own stock in a bull market and it double tops, can you weather the downturn? If
the general market is soft when your stock double tops, maybe it is time to sell.
tumbling along with yours, then sell your stock or consider shorting. This advice
is especially useful if the general market is tumbling, too.
Wait for trend change. With such a large price rise after the ultimate
low (or from a busted pattern), consider buying then. The Sample Trade gives
an example.
Table 20.8
Trading Tactics
two tops to the highest peak then divide in half. Subtract the
result from the lowest low. The result is the target price. Prices hit
the target 73% of the time in a bull market, 76% in a bear
market.
usually.
market trend
Check others To avoid 5% failures, check other stocks in the same industry and
in the industry trade if they are showing topping patterns or if their stock is
falling.
Wait for trend If you can determine when the stock bottoms or if the pattern
change busts, then buy.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 332

Sample Trade
Figure 20.5 shows the sample trade for EEDTs. In a bull market, after a dou-
ble top, price soars 63% after reaching the ultimate low. Even if you are late
calling the turn, you can still make a profit. Consider the Eve & Eve double top
shown in the figure.
Before you trade this stock, ask yourself if it is an EEDT. Running through
the identification guidelines shown in Table 20.1, we find that the price rise
leading to the pattern begins at A (far left, bottom). Both peaks look similar in
that they are wide and made of several short spikes—all characteristic of Eve
tops. The left peak is more pointed but wider than the right one.
The valley dips 14% and the peaks top out at about the same price. The
peak-to-peak separation measures 55 days or almost 2 months. Volume is heav-
ier on the right peak than the left. Finally, the decline to the confirmation line
is a straight-line run; price does not form a third peak. In short, this is a valid
EEDT when price closes below the confirmation line.
How do you trade it? For this trade, imagine that you do not own the
stock nor do you want to sell it short. The S&P 500 index reached a low in
October 2002 and bounced, forming a higher low in early March, right when
price was bottoming at B. Other stocks in the retail store industry were bot-
toming at the same time or were completing a bottom retest (a higher low).
Sample Trade 333
Eve Eve
B
A
Confirmation Line
New High
Buy
Down Trend Line
Ultimate
Low
Family Dollar (Retail Store, NYSE, FDO)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
02 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug
Nov Dec Jan 03
Figure 20.5 Consider buying the stock once the decline completes. Sometimes,
the resulting rise can be quite profitable.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 333

What was clear after the March bottom is that everything started moving up in
tandem. The industry started recovering, as did the general market (a new bull
run). A buy signal occurred when price closed above the down-sloping trend
line. The high volume at B (a common bottom phenomenon) also suggested a
bottom—panic selling.
Additional evidence of a major turn comes from points A and B. Point A
marks a major turning point for the stock; B, being a higher low, is a retest of
that low. Since it did not drop below A, it is a bullish signal.
If you missed the trend-line signal and higher low at B, then a close above
the double top would be another buy signal. With a 63% average rise, you have
plenty of time to buy. If you bought at the B low, you would have made 73%.
Buying at the EEDT high would have made a profit of 36%. The stock topped
out at 44.13, by the way, before tumbling back to 32, near the double top high.
Not all trades will work out as well as this one. A major bull run began
after the October low and the industry responded with large gains. Both helped
propel the stock higher. A combination of bullish factors is often what sepa-
rates a winning trade from a losing one.
forming EEDTs. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Select patterns in a bear market for the best average decline—Table
20.2.
• Trade an EEDT after it reaches the ultimate low in a bull market or if
it busts—Table 20.2.
• Patterns in a bear market have the lowest failure rates—Table 20.3.
• Pullbacks hurt performance, so check for underlying support—Table
20.4.
• Expect prices to turn a month after the breakout—Table 20.5.
• Tall and narrow patterns perform best—Table 20.6.
• Trade patterns that show heavy volume on the left top—Table 20.7.
4366_20.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 334

335
21
Flags
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance A short sloping rectangle bounded by two
parallel trend lines. Breakout is upward.
Performance rank Not applicable Not applicable
Throwbacks 43% 53%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall and
wide flags perform better than short and
narrow ones. Patterns with a falling volume
trend or light breakout volume perform
better.
See also Flags, High and Tight; Pennants; Rectangle
Bottoms; Rectangle Tops
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 335

Downward Breakouts
Performance rank Not applicable Not applicable
Pullbacks 46% 44%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance. Tall flags
perform better than short ones.
Small flags appear like road kill along the price highway. You find them in a
fast moving price trend, one that zips several points in a just a few days. Price
pauses at the flag and then continues in the same direction as before encoun-
tering the flag. That behavior is not always the case, of course, as price rever-
sals abound, so you should wait for the breakout to be sure.
The Results Snapshot shows the performance statistics. The break-even
failure rates are small but grow considerably for larger moves; I explain that in
the Statistics section. I expected flags to perform better by hitting their price
targets more often. However, they fall well short of the 80% that I like to see.
On average, flags act as half-staff patterns (the price/time run after the flag is
about as long as the one preceding it). Flags are not ranked for performance
because the statistics are not comparable to other chart pattern types.
Tour
Figure 21.1 shows a good example of a flag. It is bounded by two parallel trend
lines and usually is less than 3 weeks long (often as short as a few days). You see
these formations appearing in strong uptrends or downtrends (such as that
shown in Figure 21.1), usually near the halfway point in the move. This par-
ticular flag goes against the grain in the sense that prices rise in a downtrend.
This is the most common behavior—a retrace in a downtrend—but it is not
unusual for flags to appear horizontal (as short rectangles) or slope downward
(following the trend). Since flags can also appear in an uptrend, they usually
slope downward, but can be horizontal or slope upward too.
336 Flags
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 336

Figure 21.2 shows two flags, the first one in a downward price trend and the
second after price turns at the bottom. The quick price move starts at point A
and finishes at B. In these two examples, the move after the flag is longer than
the one before the flag, but that is not always the case. The move after the flag
completes is a key trait of this pattern. By using the length of the trend leading
to the pattern, you can gauge how far prices will move after the breakout.
Table 21.1 outlines the identification characteristics for flags.
Prices bounded by two trend lines. Two parallel trend lines bound the
price action for flags as shown in Figure 21.3.
Three-week maximum. Flags are short compared with many other chart
patterns in this book. In the case of Figure 21.3, the formation is 12 trading days
long. Many times when a formation is very short, such as 3 or 4 days, it appears
as a horizontal rectangle—a dark blob in the middle of a fast price trend. The
formations usually are shorter than 3 weeks but this is an arbitrary limit.
Steep, quick price trend. Reliable flags appear during steep, quick price
trends. The trends might be up or down, but prices rise or fall quickly, moving
several points in just a few days to a few weeks. In Figure 21.3, for example, the
downtrend begins on January 18 and the flag begins on February 1. In that
short time, prices tumble from a high of 40.75 to a low of 30.13.
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
Figure 21.1 A flag bounded by two parallel trend lines usually has a receding
volume pattern.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 337

In Figure 21.3, the price trend in the flag slopes upward. This behavior is
typical for the prevailing price trend (that is, flags typically move against the
trend). Flags usually appear near the midpoint of the move. As such, they are
often termed half-staff formations.
Downward volume trend. The volume trend nearly always recedes
over the course of the formation. However, this is not an inviolate rule, but
usually is the case.
When selecting a flag to trade, the most important guideline is the rapid,
steep price trend. If prices are meandering up or down and form a flag, then
338 Flags
B
B
A
A
Flag
Flag
Hughes Supply, Inc. (Retail Building Supply, NYSE, HUG)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
02 May
Jul Feb Mar Apr
Figure 21.2 Two flags in different price trends help gauge the move from A to B.
Table 21.1
Prices bounded by two Price action bounded by two parallel trend lines. Prices
trend lines usually go against the prevailing trend: They rise in a down-
trend and fall in an uptrend, but exceptions are common.
Three-week maximum Flags are short, from a few days to 3 weeks. Formations
longer than 3 weeks are better classified as symmetrical
triangles, rectangles, or wedges (rising or falling).
Steep, quick price trend These formations usually form near the midpoint of a steep,
quick price trend. If you do not have a strong advance or
decline leading to the chart pattern, ignore the flag.
Downward volume trend Volume usually trends downward throughout the formation.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 338

look elsewhere. The flag must be a place where the stock can take a breather
from its rapid pace. Prices move against the short-term trend for several days
before continuing on.
Focus on Failures
Like all formations, flags are not immune to failure. Figure 21.4 shows a flag fail-
ure. The flag, while obeying the confines of the two down-sloping trend lines,
has a good volume trend. Prices should continue higher after the flag completes
but do not. Why? One explanation is that the formation is just too long at 26
days. Sometimes an excessively long formation suggests an impending failure or
a weak price move (after the breakout). Trade flags more than 3 weeks long care-
fully or pass them up entirely. In this example, the flag is not proportional to the
up move preceding it, suggesting the need for caution trading it.
Figure 21.5 shows a more common failure, one of performance. The
decline in the February flag begins at A, 43, and ends at B, 38.90, for a run of
4.10. The decline from C to D measures 3.06. If flags were true half-staff pat-
terns, the two runs would be about equal. Since this is but one example, the
Results Snapshot shows that more than half the flags hit their price targets.
In this example, the flag has to chew through trend-line support just beneath
the flag. The dip is brief, as sometimes happens in trend-line pierces, and price
recovers only to surge upward, eventually making a new high. Also, the slide from
A to B could be more robust (longer), like the down move to the November flag.
Georgia Gulf (Chemical (Basic), NYSE, GGC)
Jan 95 Feb Mar
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
Figure 21.3 This flag appears about midway in a downtrend.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 339

340 Flags
Analog Devices Inc. (Semiconductor, NYSE, ADI)
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
Figure 21.4 The failure of prices to continue rising is probably due to two factors:
The price rise leading to the formation is short and the flag is longer than normal.
B
A
C
D
Trend Line
Support
Dome-Shaped
Volume
U-Shaped
Volume
Vulcan Materials (Cement & Aggregates, NYSE, VMC)
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
99 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug
Oct Nov Dec Jan 00
Figure 21.5 The A–B run is longer than C–D, meaning that the measure rule fails
in this example. Support beneath the flag stops the decline.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 340

Statistics
Table 21.2 shows the general statistics for flags. The performance statistics do
not use the usual ultimate high or low method (waiting for a 20% trend
change). Instead, I looked at the beginning and ending of the price trend (usu-
ally the nearest minor high or low mirrored across the pattern). Thus, com-
paring this pattern to any other pattern except pennants (which use the same
method) is unfair.
Number of formations. I uncovered 523 flags without making an inten-
sive search. Many were just a few days long and they are a colossal pain to cat-
alog because they are so small and so plentiful.
Reversal or continuation. I only looked at continuations of the prevail-
ing price trend, not reversals. Why? If I were going to buy a stock showing a
flag in an uptrend but the flag broke out downward (a reversal), I would look
elsewhere for another trade. Reversals are a good reason to wait for the break-
out before trading.
Average rise or decline. Performance after a downward breakout in a
bear market is quite good. The numbers suggest you trade this pattern with the
prevailing market trend: Go long in bull markets (flags in an upward price
trend) and short in bear markets (flags in a downward price trend).
Rises or declines over 45%. The results shown in Table 21.2 are unre-
markable except that downward breakouts in a bear market have more large
declines than do upward breakouts with large rises in a bull market. Usually,
upward breakouts do better.
Statistics 341
Table 21.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Market, Market Market Market
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 149 C 133 C 103 C 138 C
N/A –7%a
–19%a
Days to trend high or low 17 17 17 17
a
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 341

Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the trend high or low,
price reverses course. The decline after the trend ends measures 22% to 25%
and the rise measures 40%. The low results are due to the measurement
method I used for flags—measuring from the prior minor high/low to the
high/low after the flag to capture the trend move, instead of looking for a 20%
trend change.
Busted pattern performance. The sample size is fewer than four so the
results are suspect. Ignore them.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Compare the general market rise or
decline by the rise or decline after the flag breakout. The largest moves in flags
associate with large moves in the S&P. This is evidence that the saying, “Trade
with the trend,” is true.
Days to trend high or low. It takes 17 days to reach the trend high or
low, on average. I double-checked the spreadsheet to make sure this observa-
tion was correct since all four values are the same.
Table 21.3 shows failure rates for flags. They start small, 4% or less, but
shoot upward from 10% to 24% for moves of just 10%. What does that mean?
For example, 20% of the flags in a bull market with upward breakouts climb
less than 10%. In a bear market, 21% fail to climb more than 10%.
The best performing are flags in a bear market with downward breakouts.
They show the lowest failure rates in all rows. Second are flags in a bull mar-
ket with up breakouts. After the first row, they hold up well. The results sug-
gest you do not want to trade against the prevailing trend (as in the case of a
bear market, up breakout or bull market, down breakout).
342 Flags
Table 21.3
Failure Rates
10 30 or 20% 28 or 21% 25 or 24% 14 or 10%
15 53 or 36% 63 or 47% 50 or 49% 35 or 25%
20 82 or 55% 86 or 65% 74 or 72% 58 or 42%
25 98 or 66% 101 or 76% 81 or 79% 77 or 56%
30 120 or 81% 113 or 85% 91 or 88% 97 or 70%
35 127 or 85% 124 or 93% 96 or 93% 106 or 77%
50 138 or 93% 131 or 98% 103 or 100% 124 or 90%
75 146 or 98% 133 or 100% 103 or 100% 138 or 100%
Over 75 149 or 100% 133 or 100% 103 or 100% 138 or 100%
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 342

343
Table
21.4
Breakout
and
Post-Breakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
2
days
2
days
2
days
2
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L17%,
C22%,
H62%
L28%,
C45%,
H27%
L45%,
C39%,
H15%
L54%,
C29%,
H17%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L17%
a
,
C19%,
H26%
L17%,
C16%,
H17%
L18%,
C15%,
H13%
a
L27%,
C28%,
H15%
a
43%
53%
46%
44%
Average
time
to
throwback/
pullback
ends
14
days
12
days
15
days
12
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
13%
14%
–13%
–19%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
31%
20%
–18%
–30%
Performance
with
breakout
gap
20%
a
15%
a
–13%
a
–24%
a
Performance
without
breakout
gap
23%
17%
–16%
–25%
Average
gap
size
$0.28
$0.29
$0.15
$0.41
Note:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 343

Formation end to breakout. It takes just 2 days for price to reach the
breakout after the flag ends. A breakout occurs when price closes outside the
flag trend line.
Yearly position. Where do flags occur most often? The answer varies
across market conditions and breakout directions. For example, flags with
downward breakouts have the breakout near the yearly low, but flags in bull
markets with up breakouts have breakouts that appear near the yearly high.
Yearly position, performance. Flags show no consistent performance
trend as far as position in the yearly price range. For example, flags in a bull
market with upward breakouts do best when the breakout is within a third of
the yearly high. Downward breakouts do best near the yearly low (bull market)
or middle (bear market).
Throwbacks and pullbacks. Throwbacks (up breakouts) and pullbacks
(down breakouts) occur less than half the time. During a throwback or pull-
back, it takes price between 12 and 15 days to return to the breakout price.
When a throwback or pullback happens, performance suffers. For example,
flags having throwbacks in a bull market rise 13% after the breakout. When a
throwback does not happen, the rise averages 31%.
To avoid a throwback or pullback, look for nearby overhead resistance or
underlying support. Choose flags with resistance or support farther away or
nonexistent.
Gaps. I found only 86 gaps, split evenly between up and down gaps. In all
cases, when a gap does not occur, performance improves, but that may be due
to the low sample count for those patterns with gaps. Thus, I reserve judgment.
The average gap size varies from 15 to 41 cents.
Table 21.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the trend high or low.
As you can see, most patterns reach the end of the trend quickly. In 2 weeks’
time, between 56% and 58% will have ended their run. Within a month,
between 80% and 88% of the flags will have reached the trend high or low.
Thus, be prepared to take profits quickly. If you enter a flag trade and
expect to buy and hold, that might work just fine; just do not depend on the
344 Flags
Table 21.5
Frequency Distribution of Days to Trend High or Low
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 32% 24% 14% 12% 9% 2% 2% 2% 2% 0% 2%
Bull market,
up breakout 26% 32% 13% 9% 7% 1% 0% 1% 1% 1% 1%
Bear market,
down
breakout 36% 21% 16% 12% 1% 7% 2% 2% 1% 1% 1%
Bull market,
down
breakout 32% 25% 12% 16% 5% 4% 4% 2% 1% 0% 0%
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 344

flag giving you a large price move. It will not. Flags are for swing traders, ones
who want to ride the quick price move and sell when price turns.
Table 21.6 shows size-related statistics for flags.
Height. Across the table, tall patterns perform better than short ones.
The difference is widest for flags in a bull market with upward breakouts. Tall
patterns rise 35% after the breakout, but short ones climb just 13%.
Width. Wide patterns perform better than narrow ones, except for flags
in a bull market with a downward breakout.
Average formation length. The average flag length ranges between 9
and 11 days.
Height and width combinations. Flags that are both tall and wide out-
perform the other combinations except for bear market, down breakout, which
has few samples for tall and narrow.
Trend length and price move. I measured the time from the trend start
to the start of the flag and from the flag end to the trend end. You can see that
it takes longer to move from the flag end to the trend end than it does to reach
the flag from the trend start, on average.
Statistics 345
Table 21.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
of breakout price
14%a
–11%a
–21%a
–17%a
–35%a
Prior trend length 15 days 12 days 16 days 17 days
Post trend length 19 days 19 days 19 days 18 days
Price move before flag 22% 22% –17% –26%
Price move after flag 23% 17% –16% –25%
a
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 345

To gauge the price move, for upward breakouts, I used the trend start low
to the flag high (price move before flag) and from the breakout day low price
to the trend end high (price move after flag). For downward breakouts, I mea-
sured from the trend start high to the flag low (price move before flag) and
from the breakout day high to the trend low (price move after flag).
The prior price move is longer than the post price move in all cases except
bull market, up breakout. Set price targets conservatively since the price move
after the breakout will usually be shorter than the price move leading to the flag.
Table 21.7 shows volume related statistics.
Volume trend. In all cases but bear markets, down breakouts, flags show
better performance when volume trends lower over the course of the pattern.
For example, flags with a rising volume trend in a bull market with an upward
breakout climbed 20%. Those with a falling volume trend climbed 24% after
the breakout.
Volume shapes. Most flags had dome-shaped volume. Up breakouts
performed well with that shape (if you ignore the 34% rise from the random
shape due to a low sample count). Flags with downward breakouts did better
with U-shaped volume. Figure 21.5 shows examples of the volume shapes.
346 Flags
Table 21.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Rising volume trend
performance 20% 15% 15%a
28%
performance 24% 17% 16% 24%
15%a
16%a
26%a
performance
a
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 346

Breakout volume. Flags performed better postbreakout when the break-
out volume was light—below the 30-day average (the rounded-off 16% tie for
bull markets, down breakouts actually gives the performance edge to light vol-
ume). Patterns in bear markets with downward breakouts did better with
breakout volume heavier than the average.
Trading Tactics
Table 21.8 shows trading tactics for flags. Consult Figure 21.6 as I review the
tactics listed in Table 21.8.
Measure rule. The measure rule gauges the minimum price move. First,
determine where the trend begins, which is usually the minor high (for down-
trends) or low (for uptrends) preceding the formation. Figure 21.6 shows the
trend beginning at point A. Subtract the low at the formation start (point B at
42.75) from point A (47.50), giving a difference of 4.75. Subtract the difference
from the high at the formation end (point C at 43) to give the target price of
38.25. Prices reach the target 13 trading days after they move below the for-
mation trend line.
When trading flags, you must first be sure you have a valid formation.
Use the identification guidelines outlined in Table 21.1 to ensure that you
have correctly identified a flag.
Use the measure rule to gauge the amount of profit likely from the trade
and weigh the amount of profit against the possible risk of failure. Look for
support and resistance levels where price trends were repulsed in the past.
Many times prices will pause or turn around at these junctions. These values
become the risk points for a trade. You can compare the risk with the reward
by computing the current price with the measure rule target and the first or
second level of support or resistance.
For the stock shown in Figure 21.6, the potential reward is 4.75 (that is,
43–38.25). The first resistance level is at 44 and there is another at 45 (assum-
ing the trade goes against you and prices rise). The risk is one or two, that
is, 44–43 or 45–43. The ratio, at 4.75 to 1, suggests this formation is worth
Trading Tactics 347
Table 21.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Calculate the price difference between the start of the trend and
the formation. Prices should move at least this amount above (for
uptrends) or below (for downtrends) the end of the formation.
Wait for breakout Once prices move outside the trend-line boundaries, place the
trade.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 347

trading, providing you limit your losses. A stop placed at 44.13 or so, slightly
above the first resistance level, works well.
Wait for breakout. Take a position in the stock after a breakout, once
prices move outside the formation boundary. Once prices near the target price,
as predicted by the measure rule, consider closing out the trade. Since the sta-
tistics regarding the success of meeting the predicted price target are poor, be
ready to close out the trade sooner than expected. If you wait for prices to
reach the target, you might turn a profitable trade into a losing one.
Sample Trade
For example, let us say you are considering shorting the stock shown in Figure
21.6. Since the price trend is downward in a bull market, the statistics suggest
that 47% of the formations will meet their price targets, on average. That is a
poor showing and deserves caution.
As the chart pattern forms, you monitor the price closely by not only
charting the end-of-day price but also checking it midday. When you dial into
your broker for a lunchtime price quote and discover that prices have moved
outside the bottom trend line, you decide to pull the trigger. You sell short and
receive a fill at 42, just above the closing price of 41.50.
348 Flags
Murphy Oil Corp. (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, MUR)
Jan 94 Feb
Sep 93 Oct Nov Dec
First
Resistance
Level
Prior Support
Target Price
C
B
A
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
Figure 21.6 Use the measure rule to gauge the decline in this stock. Take the dif-
ference between the prior minor high (point A) to the formation low at the start
(point B). Subtract the value from the high at the formation end (point C) and the
result is the expected minimum price move.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 348

You follow the stock closely as price declines. Looking back through the
prior year’s trading history, you discover two support levels at about 40 and 39.
You believe that the stock will fall through the first support level but the sec-
ond one may be more difficult. It is, after all, closer to the 38.25 target price
and more robust than the first level.
When the stock moves sideways at the first support level, you check your
work and reexamine the fundamentals and technical indicators. Everything
seems good so you remain in the trade.
Eventually the stock pierces the first support level and declines to the sec-
ond one, where it gets stuck. It closes at 39 but the next day moves up. So the
following day you decide to close out your position, believing that the risk of a
price rise far exceeds the possible gain. Your short sale covers at 39 and you
receive almost $3 a share. That is not a bad profit for a hold time of just 2
weeks. On an annualized basis, the return is . . . wonderful!
forming flags. Refer to the associated table for more information.
• Trade with the prevailing market trend: up breakouts in bull markets
and down breakouts in bear markets—Table 21.2.
• Flags in a bear market with downward breakouts have the lowest fail-
ure rates—Table 21.3.
• Flags with upward breakouts do well near the yearly high. Downward
breakouts do well near the yearly low—Table 21.4.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance. Look for nearby support
or resistance—Table 21.4.
• Flags without breakout day gaps perform better—Table 21.4.
• Over half the flags will reach the trend high or low within 2 weeks—
Table 21.5.
• Select most flags that are both tall and wide—Table 21.6.
• The postflag move (time) is slightly longer than the pre-flag move.
The price move after the flag is slightly shorter than the move before
it—Table 21.6.
• Pick most flags with a falling volume trend or light breakout volume—
Table 21.7.
4366_21.qxd 2/23/05 11:42 AM Page 349

350
22
Flags, High and Tight
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance A consolidation region of several days to
several weeks long after a stock doubles in
price
Throwbacks 54% 65%
Surprising findings The pattern sports a huge average rise with
small failures. Throwbacks hurt
performance. Short or narrow patterns
perform better than tall or wide ones. The
price trend after the flag is about half as far
as the trend leading to the flag. Patterns with
a falling volume trend perform well.
See also Flags; Pennants
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 350

I am in love. Maybe not with my ex-girlfriend, but with flags—the latest ver-
sion being high and tight flags (HTFs). You have to love the statistics because
they shine like gold coins. The average rise in a bull market is 69% and pat-
terns in both bull and bear markets have 0% break-even failure rates. Yes, they
do fail, but just 5 out of 307 failed to climb at least 10%, and none failed to
climb at least 5%. That is an excellent start for any chart pattern.
The percentage meeting the price target, called the measure rule, works
nearly all the time but is based on half the move from the trend start to the flag,
projected upward. The Trading Tactics section discusses this topic further.
Surprises are many but ones we have seen before. HTFs are not half-staff
patterns; that is, they usually do not mark the midway point of a move. On the
time line, the trend leading to the flag is longer by 6 days. On a percentage
basis, the move before the flag is about double the move after the flag. Keep
that in mind when setting a price target.
Tour
Figure 22.1 is a classic example of a high, tight flag. The quick rise from the
low point at 14 to the flag high at 30.75 takes less than 2 months. The volume
trend is downward throughout the formation. After the slight pause, the stock
continues rising. In another 2 months, it reaches a peak of 120.
The high, tight flag is a play on momentum. When a stock doubles in a
short time, it usually takes a breather and consolidates. When it does, it gives
Tour 351
Jun
Diana Corp. (Telecom. Services, NYSE, DNA)
L
High,
Tight Flag
– 120
– 114
– 108
– 102
– 96
– 90
– 84
– 78
– 72
– 66
– 60
– 54
– 48
– 42
– 36
– 30
– 24
– 18
– 12
– 6
– 0
Figure 22.1 A high, tight flag that sees prices rise from about 30 to 120 in 2
months.
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 351

the trader the opportunity to buy the stock before the rise resumes. How do
you correctly identify a high, tight flag?
The phrase, high, tight flag, is a misnomer as the formation usually does not
resemble a flag formation at all. Sometimes prices move up slightly as the flag
progresses, such as shown in Figure 22.1, but more often prices spike down
briefly (a day or two), then return and move downward or horizontally before
breaking out and heading up.
The formation was popularized by William J. O’Neil in his book, How to
Make Money in Stocks (McGraw-Hill, 1988). In his introduction to the forma-
tion, he identifies many characteristics that high, tight flags share.
Briefly, O’Neil looked for a doubling of the stock price in less than 2
months, a sideways move of 3 to 5 weeks during creation of the flag with price
drifting down no more than 20% in the flag. The guidelines eliminated many
patterns so that fewer than 10% qualified. I followed none of them. I pro-
grammed my computer to identify all stocks that had a minimum price rise of
100% in 2 months or less. Then I manually went through each stock and looked
for a nearby consolidation region. If the region was close to the 100% price
gain, then I accepted it as a high, tight flag.
For example, Figure 22.1 passes all the O’Neil guidelines, whereas Figure
22.2 does not (if you apply them strictly). The stock in Figure 22.2 reaches a
352 Flags, High and Tight
Jul
Jun 94
Amdahl Corp. (Computers & Peripherals, ASE, AMH)
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
– 3
High, Tight
Flag
L
Figure 22.2 If interpreted strictly, this high, tight flag misses all but one of the
O’Neil guidelines. It sports a rise of 95% in less than 2 months (measured from the
low marked “L”) leading to the flag. The flag descends 22% in 38 days before
breaking out and rising 33% above the highest high in early September.
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 352

low of 5.25 in early July then starts moving up. In early September, it reaches
a price of 10.25, just shy of doubling. Admittedly, the 95% price gain is less
than a strict interpretation of the O’Neil guidelines, but it comes close. The
high, tight flag slopes downward for 38 days, 3 more days than the maximum,
and declines by 22%, 2% over the threshold. You could argue that the num-
bers are close enough to the O’Neil guidelines to qualify as a high, tight flag. I
accept it as a flag.
Table 22.1 shows the guidelines I used in selecting and evaluating high,
tight flags.
Substantial rise. First, there must be a short, quick rise. By that, I mean a
rise in which price nearly doubles in 2 months or less. It can move up more than
that, and the rise need not take place from a flat base (horizontal price move-
ment). In the HTFs I found, I visually looked for a doubling of the price in 2
months and then let my computer determine when the trend started (see
“Trend Start” in Glossary and Methodology for details).
Final consolidation. Once the stocks are selected on a price-rise basis,
then look for the nearest consolidation area. In my selections, I did not care
how long the stock consolidated nor how far the flag descended before turning
upward. All that mattered was that the consolidation area was plainly visible to
the casual observer. The consolidation area should be about double the price
of the prior 2-month low.
Receding volume trend. The final identification guideline is not really
for identification as much as it is for performance. Flags with a receding vol-
ume trend outperform those without. However, I would not ignore a high,
tight flag simply because volume is rising. Rather, I would recognize that its
performance may suffer.
Focus on Failures
Investing in a stock showing a high, tight flag is not without risk. Figure 22.3
shows a flag that suffers from a small rise. Since one would expect a stock to
move up substantially after the breakout, I consider this behavior a failure of
the stock to perform as expected.
Table 22.1
Substantial rise A rise lasting less than 2 months carries prices upward at
least 90% (shoot for a doubling of the stock price).
Find consolidation Locate a consolidation area, where prices pause in the
prevailing uptrend near where price doubles from the trend
start.
Receding volume trend The volume trend in the flag should be receding for best
performance.
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 353

Figure 22.3 shows a quick, nearly vertical rise, leading to formation of the
flag. As the rise falters, high volume tapers off. When prices head lower in the flag
portion of the formation (marked in this case by two down-sloping trend lines),
volume recedes. The flag drifts lower for almost a month before breaking out of
the trend and heading up. After rising for just over a week to a new high, the stock
curls around and meanders lower. It throws back to near the base of the forma-
tion, then moves horizontally for several months before dropping lower again.
Statistics
Table 22.2 shows general statistics for HTFs.
Number of formations. With a bull market powering Internet and other
technology stocks higher, I found a substantial number of HTFs. As one might
guess, HTFs almost vanished in a bear market.
Reversal or continuation. Since I was looking for an upward breakout
(only) after a sharp price rise, each HTF acted as a continuation of the pre-
vailing price trend.
Average rise. The average rise from the breakout point (when price
closed outside the trend-line boundary or the formation high, whichever was
lower) to the ultimate high measured 69% in a bull market and 42% in a bear
market. Both are exceptionally high.
Rises over 45%. Over half the patterns in a bull market showed gains
over 45% and even those in a bear market did well.
Aug
Jun
Tesoro Petroleum (Petroleum (Integrated), NYSE, TSO)
Throwback
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
– 3
Figure 22.3 A failure of a high, tight flag. Prices fail to continue moving up very
far before heading down in failure.
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 354

Change after trend ends. Once price reached the ultimate high, it tum-
bled 35%. Thus, if you can tell when the trend ends, short the stock and ride
prices down. The results shown in Table 22.2 are averages, so be careful that
nearby support does not stop the decline.
Busted pattern performance. I did not find any busted patterns because
all moved up by more than 5%.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The S&P was flat or climbed from the
day of the HTF breakout to the ultimate high. Notice that a strong market
uptrend tends to push prices higher (the average rise is higher in a bull market
than a bear market).
Days to ultimate high. HTFs are rockets, reaching the ultimate high in
about a month, more or less. If you see an HTF forming, you might want to
put in a stop order to buy the stock as it soars above the formation top or
pierces a trend-line boundary. That way, you own the stock before it zooms
away from you.
Table 22.3 shows failure rates for HTFs, and I am impressed. Never
before have I seen lower failure rates. Just 10% of the patterns in a bull market
fail to rise more than 20%. Half the HTFs will rise over 50%.
Bear markets show the first failure after rises of 25%, but this was due to
the low sample count (54 total). With additional samples, I am sure the failure
rates would mimic those in a bull market (but be slightly worse).
The reason for the low failure rates was that I now use a close above the
HTF’s trend-line boundary to signal a breakout instead of a close above the
pattern high (which was used for the first edition of this book). For example,
the HTF shown in Figure 22.3 represents a rise of just 4% above the forma-
tion high but a 21% climb above the trend-line pierce.
Table 22.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics for HTFs.
Formation end to breakout. It takes 2 days from the end of the pattern
before price closes outside the trend-line boundary or climbs above the high-
Statistics 355
Table 22.2
General Statistics
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 253 C 54 C
Rises over 45% 148 or 58% 22 or 41%
Busted pattern performance N/A N/A
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 355

est high in the flag (when the HTF has an irregular shape and trend lines can-
not be drawn).
Yearly position. In a bull market, the breakout from an HTF appears
most often near the yearly high. In a bear market, the breakout covers the three
ranges almost evenly.
Yearly position, performance. Where in the yearly price range do the
best performing HTFs reside? The bull market numbers have a good sample
count and they show that the best performing HTFs have breakouts in the
middle of the yearly trading range. Bear markets do best when the breakout is
near the yearly low.
Throwbacks. Throwbacks occur up to 65% of the time and take between
11 and 15 days to return to the breakout price. When a throwback occurs, perfor-
mance suffers. For example, those HTFs in a bull market with throwbacks show
Table 22.3
Failure Rates
Maximum
Price Rise (%) Bull Market Bear Market
10 5 or 2% 0 or 0%
15 14 or 6% 0 or 0%
20 25 or 10% 0 or 0%
25 42 or 17% 9 or 17%
30 59 or 23% 16 or 30%
35 83 or 33% 23 or 43%
50 117 or 46% 34 or 63%
75 170 or 67% 44 or 81%
Over 75 253 or 100% 54 or 100%
Table 22.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month L65%, C73%, L51%a
, C46%a
,
Throwbacks 54% 65%
Average rise for patterns without throwback 100% 53%a
a
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 356

rises averaging 49%. When a throwback is absent, the rise is an astounding 100%.
Throwbacks in bear markets show a similar trend, but the results are closer.
This table surprises me because I thought it would take longer to reach the
ultimate high. Few HTFs take longer than 70 days to top out. Half of those in
a bear market reach the ultimate high in fewer than 2 weeks. It takes 3 weeks
in a bull market for half the patterns to top out.
The numbers suggest that a quick entry is key to making money with this
pattern. For less aggressive investors, a buy stop with a price at the HTF’s high
will get you in at a good price. For aggressive investors, use the HTF trend-
line boundary (if it has one, because the shape is usually irregular) as the buy
stop price.
Once you place a trade, monitor it closely because it may not take long for
the uphill sprint to tire. Then prices may drop, sometimes precipitously.
Statistics 357
Table 22.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 24% 26% 11% 11% 15% 2% 0% 0% 0% 2% 9%
Bull market 26% 14% 10% 8% 9% 4% 4% 4% 5% 3% 14%
Table 22.6
Size Statistics
Tall pattern performance 68% 40%a
Short pattern performance 69% 45%a
Narrow pattern performance 71% 46%a
Wide pattern performance 65% 38%a
Prior trend length (days) 47 32
Post trend length (days) 41 26
Price move before flag 124% 98%
Price move after flag 69% 42%
a
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 357

Height. HTF patterns shorter than the median perform better than tall
ones. The results are close and, in the case of a bear market, samples are few,
so the numbers might change. In many other chart patterns, tall ones perform
better than short ones, but not with HTFs.
Width. In both markets, narrow patterns do better than wide ones. I used
Average formation length. The average HTF length is just over 2 weeks.
Height and width combinations. I looked at the combinations of height
and width and found that HTFs that are both tall and narrow perform better
than the other combinations in a bull market. In a bear market, short and nar-
row patterns do well, if you disregard the small sample size.
Trend length and price move. I measured the elapsed time from the
trend start to the flag start and from the flag end to the ultimate high. Both the
trend start and ultimate high rely on a 20% price change.
The length of the trend leading to the pattern averages between 32 and
47 days. After the breakout, the trend lasts 26 to 41 days, respectively. Thus,
the trend after the flag is 6 days shorter than the prior trend.
The price rise after the flag is about half the rise leading to the pattern.
For example, in a bear market, the pre-formation rise averages 98%. After the
flag, the rise is 42%. To use this, see the measure rules in the following Trad-
ing Tactics section.
Table 22.7 shows volume-related statistics for HTFs.
Volume trend. Patterns with a falling volume trend outperform those
with a rising volume trend. Unfortunately, the sample size is small for HTFs
with rising volume, but that also suggests your HTF is likely to have a falling
volume trend. Be happy. That is good news.
Volume shapes. I looked at the volume shape and found that HTFs with
a random volume shape in a bull market performed better than the other com-
Table 22.7
Volume Statistics
Rising volume trend performance 52%a
41%a
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume 81%a
30%a
pattern performance
a
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 358

binations. For bear markets, HTFs with U-shaped volume did well, but the
sample size is small.
Breakout volume. HTFs with light breakout volume outperformed
those with heavy breakout volume in a bull market. In a bear market, there was
no performance difference.
Trading Tactics
Table 22.8 shows trading tactics for HTFs.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to predict a target price. To calculate
the price target, find where the trend starts and measure the price change from
the low at the start to the HTF high (the highest high in the pattern). Divide the
result in half and add it to the HTF’s low price. The result is the target that
price reaches 90% of the time. Look for price to stall once it nears the target.
To find the trend start, see the Glossary and Methodology for details.
Buy after breakout. Since the price rise in the first week is the largest
one-week change you are likely to see, place a stop order to buy the stock just
above the HTF trend-line boundary. If the HTF has an irregular shape, use
the top of the pattern as the buy point and place the buy stop there.
If price closes below the flag pattern, sell your position immediately
because price is going down. Reversals do happen, so be on guard for one.
Once you have a position in the stock, raise your stop to just below the prior
minor low when price makes a new high. Keep raising the stop as prices rise.
Eventually, this method will take you out when the trend changes or during a
severe retrace.
Sample Trade
When John spotted the high, tight flag shown in Figure 22.4, he wasted no
time in taking a position, buying when price pierced the upper trend line at
point A. He placed a stop 0.13 below the formation low at 5.63. Two days later,
he was stopped out.
Sample Trade 359
Table 22.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Measure the rise leading to the flag and project half of it
upward, using the flag low price.
Buy after breakout If prices break out of the flag portion, buy the stock. If you
cannot tell if a breakout has occurred, wait for price to rise
above the highest high in the flag.
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 359

“A billion here, a billion there, and pretty soon you’re talking real
money!” he said.
He backed off for a few days and waited for the stock to climb above the
high (6.50). When it did, he bit and piled into the stock again at 6.50. He con-
sidered the bottom of the flag a support area, so that is the price he used as his
stop loss. This time, however, he used a mental stop, one that is not placed with
a broker but kept in his head. There is really no problem with a mental stop
providing an investor is willing to pull the trigger when prices hit the stop.
Now and again, John looked at the price chart just to see how the trade
was doing. The stock climbed to a support zone at 8 and went horizontal for 3
months. Toward the end of that time, he raised his mental stop to 7.75.
Then, the stock climbed again. It ignored the double top formed by peaks
in early January and late February, and so did John. By April the stock posted
a new high, quietly disclosing that the double top turned out to be false. As the
stock passed 13 in mid-April, John started to pay attention. He saw it reach
13.25 and back off for a bit, sinking to a low of 11.13. Then it spurted up again.
John drew a trend line upward following the latest move and when price
pierced the line, he called his broker. He sold at 13.63, not close to the high of
15.88, but “close enough for government work.” After commissions, he made
108% in slightly less than 8 months.
A
Potential Breakout Day
Actual Breakout
Bought
Top 1 Top 2
Double Top
Confirmation Line
Selling
Trend Line
Sold
Fairchild Corporation A (Industrial Services, NYSE, FA)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
95 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr
Figure 22.4 A high, tight flag with prices stair-stepping higher. How do you
trade this high, tight flag?
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 360

The following list includes tips and observations to help select HTFs that per-
form better after the breakout. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Review the identification characteristics for correct selection—Table
22.1.
• Select patterns in a bull market; they show the highest average rise—
Table 22.2.
• Patterns in a bear market have lower failure rates for small moves, but
the small sample size may be a factor—Table 22.3.
• Bull market HTFs do well when the breakout is in the middle of the
yearly price range—Table 22.4.
• Throwbacks hurt performance. Look for overhead resistance before
• The ultimate high comes quickly so buy in early. Half top out in 2 or
3 weeks—Table 22.5.
• Short or narrow patterns do better than tall or wide ones—Table 22.6.
• The move leading to the flag is longer in time and price than the move
after the flag. Look for a move half the rise leading to the pattern—
Table 22.6.
• Select patterns with a falling volume trend and U shape—Table 22.7.
4366_22.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 361

362
23
Gaps
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance A price gap appears when the current low is
higher than the prior high.
Performance rank Not applicable
Close Within a Week Bull Market Bear Market
Area gap 89% 93%
Breakaway 2% 9%
Continuation 4% 20%
Exhaustion 61% 78%
Surprising findings The largest gaps occur in bear markets. Bull
market gaps do well when they appear near
the yearly high. Large gaps perform better
than small ones.
Downward Breakouts
Appearance A price gap appears when the current high is
below the prior low.
Performance rank Not applicable
G
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 362

Close Within a Week Bull Market Bear Market
Area gap 92% 89%
Breakaway 1% 1%
Continuation 9% 13%
Exhaustion 64% 63%
Surprising findings Same as for upward breakouts
There are five types of gaps, four of which I review in this chapter. The remain-
ing gap, the ex-dividend gap, is not considered because it rarely happens and has
no investment significance. The ex-dividend gap usually occurs in utility stocks
or stocks with high-paying dividends. On the day of dividend distribution, the
price sometimes moves downward leaving a gap in the price chart. Even though
the price of the stock after distribution reduces by the dividend amount, the
day’s trading range often fills the gap so no actual gap appears on the chart.
I define closing the gap to be when prices return and span the gap completely.
The area gap closes quickest, with nearly 90% of those gaps closing within a week.
Listed in the Results Snapshot table is the average time it takes price to
close the gap. Sometimes gaps close quickly (such as exhaustion gaps) because
they are found near the ends of trends where price reverses and fills the gap.
Other gaps take much longer since they mark the start of a strong trend (break-
away gap). The continuation gap is a combination of the two because it com-
monly appears in the middle of trends.
Gaps had a few surprises. I found that larger gaps appear in bear markets
for some reason. Performance improves for gaps in bull markets when they
appear near the yearly high. Finally, large gaps perform better than small ones.
Tour
A gap appears in an uptrend price series when yesterday’s daily high is below
today’s low price. A downtrend gap is similar, being created when yesterday’s
low is above today’s high. In both cases, some type of exuberance is driving the
stock to create a gap. It sometimes is nothing more than the stock being worth
less simply because of a dividend distribution. At other times, the repercussions
are more severe. An earnings surprise, either positive or negative, often causes
a gap and the stock to rise by 10% or 15% or to decline by 30% or more,
depending on the severity of the news.
Figure 23.1 shows a plethora of different gap types. Area gaps occur in
congestion zones, usually when prices are moving sideways. Price gaps up or
down and the gaps close quickly. Of all the gap types, area gaps are common,
appearing all over the place. Breakaway gaps appear at the start of trends. They,
too, are quite numerous and accompany high volume. Usually there is some
fundamental event driving the stock, creating a breakaway gap. Continuation
Tour 363
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 363

gaps are relatively rare because they appear in the middle of strong trends.
Those trends themselves do not occur very often and even less often do they
contain a gap. Exhaustion gaps signal the end of trends. They are the last jump
up or down before the trend either reverses or moves sideways.
Table 23.1 lists identification guidelines for gaps.
Area gaps. Area, common, or pattern gaps are all names for the same type
of gap. The gap forms inside or just after a consolidation region. It is easy to
spot as prices seem to hook around and close the gap in less than a week (many
times in the next trading session). Figure 23.2 shows many examples of this
hook feature: For example, you can see in late March that prices gap down and
the next day the high closes the area gap. A quick hook such as that is charac-
teristic of area gaps. Usually, few or no new highs (for uptrends) or lows (when
price gaps lower) occur immediately after the gap.
Volume may be high on the day price gaps but usually settles down
quickly. You can see this behavior in late January. Volume spikes on the gap
day then returns to normal the next day.
Breakaway gap. Breakaway gaps highlight the start of a new trend. Volume
rises substantially above the prior day and price gaps upward and continues rising
(or falling in the case of a descending price gap) forming new highs (or lows).
Consider the breakaway gap in early January shown in Figure 23.2. You
can see prices moving up for 3 days, surroundings the gap, accompanied by a
364 Gaps
Jun
Acuson Corp. (Medical Supplies, NYSE, ACN)
Area
Gap
Area
Gap
Breakaway
Exhaustion
Continuation
Uptrend
Continuation
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
Figure 23.1 Plenty of gaps appear in a daily price chart. The most numerous are
the area gaps.
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 364

Table 23.1
Gap Type Discussion
Area, common, Occurs in areas of congestion (trendless markets) and closes rapidly.
or pattern Volume on the day of the gap may be high but returns to normal
in a day or two. No new highs (uptrends) or lows (in down-
trends) occur after the gap. A distinctive curl as the gap closes is
a key indication of this gap type.
Breakaway Identifies the start of a new trend and usually occurs after break-
out from a consolidation region. Is accompanied by high volume
on the day of the gap, which continues for several days. The
trend continues long enough for several new highs (for uptrends)
or new lows (downtrends) to occur after the gap.
Continuation Happens in the midst of a straight-line advance or decline. Prices
measuring, or continue making new highs or lows without filling the gap.
runaway Volume is usually high, propelling prices in the direction of the
trend.
Ex-dividend Is triggered by a dividend distribution. Prices move down by the
amount of the dividend and a gap appears if the day’s trading
range does not close it.
Exhaustion Occurs at the end of a trend on high volume. The gap is not
followed by new highs or lows and the gap itself may be
unusually wide. After the gap, prices enter a consolidation region
or reverse. Commonly occurs after a continuation gap. The gap
closes quickly, usually within a week.
Aug Sep Oct
Jun
Area
Area
Breakaway
Breakaway
Breakaway Breakaway
Breakaway
Exhaustion
Exhaustion
Continuation
Area
Area
Area
Area
Island
Reversal
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
Figure 23.2 Various gap types with area gaps illustrating the hook feature. Vol-
ume pattern and position within the trend are the main keys to identify correctly
the different gap types.
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 365

rising volume trend. Then prices level out and move horizontally for several
weeks before gapping down in an area gap. Two days later, another breakaway
gap (not labeled on the chart) appears and prices reach new daily highs for 3
days in a row before settling back.
The large breakaway gap in mid-April, accompanied by a high volume
spike, is not an exhaustion gap because price continues rising. The June break-
away gap begins after a minor congestion area but the gap could be a continu-
ation (gap) of the downward price move of a week earlier. Volume spikes
upward as price makes a large gap. Usually large gaps are associated with
exhaustion gaps, but prices continue moving lower after just a few days.
Continuation gaps. Continuation gaps occur in the middle of price
trends. They do not happen often since it takes a sharp rise followed by a gap
and a continued rise in the stock (the reverse for downtrends, too). In Figure
23.2, you can see two continuation gaps in August when prices zoom from a
low of 23.50 to 32.63 in about 2 weeks. The gaps appear in the quick, sharp
price rise on high, but not unusually high, volume. The quick rise forms new
highs and the gap remains open (compare these continuation gaps with how
quickly the area gap closes). Of course, in a downtrend, prices gap downward
and form new lows.
Ex-dividend gaps. An ex-dividend gap appears on the price chart when a
dividend-paying stock distributes the dividend. Usually, however, the normal
trading range will cover the gap.
Exhaustion gaps. Exhaustion gaps commonly follow continuation gaps.
The highest gap in the August uptrend is an exhaustion gap. At first I thought
it was another continuation gap, but the gap is slightly larger than normal and
prices pause for 2 days before making new highs. Those are some key factors
associated with exhaustion gaps. Excessively wide gaps are most likely exhaus-
tion gaps when they appear near the end of a trend. Two exhaustion gaps appear
on the chart, one in August and one in September. The September gap closes
quickly, which is typical for exhaustion gaps.
Most exhaustion gaps occur on high volume; it is like the last gasp before
prices end the trend. You can see in Figure 23.2 that both exhaustion gaps have
high volume, but the September one takes the cake. Volume spikes upward
even as prices descend, then volume recedes but remains high for several days
after the gap. The high volume highlights the struggle of investors who want
to purchase the stock at a good price with those who are trying to get out of the
situation at the best offer.
Statistics: Area Gaps
Table 23.2 shows general statistics for area gaps.
Number of formations. I found 484 area gaps in 97 stocks from mid-
1991 to early 2004, but I did not cover all years in between. Since I was look-
ing for the time to close the gap, I found little need for additional samples.
366 Gaps
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 366

Average time to close the gap. On average, it takes just 3 days for price
to cover the gap, regardless of market condition or breakout direction.
Percentage closed. The table shows the closure rates. Nearly all of the
area gaps close in the first week, and those in a bull market with an upward
breakout hold out the longest by closing within 3 weeks.
Average gap size. In all four gap types, the largest average gap size
occurs in a bear market. Why this is the case is a mystery to me. The smallest
gaps occur in a bull market, usually with an upward breakout, but not with area
gaps (which has the smallest average gap associated with downward breakouts).
Statistics: Breakaway Gaps
Table 23.3 shows general statistics for breakaway gaps.
Number of formations. I used 132 stocks to find 737 breakaway gaps.
That high number of gaps in a small sample set shows how often these forma-
tions occur.
Average time to close the gap. The average time for the gap to close
varies from about 2 months (61 days, bear market, up breakout) to nearly 6
months (168 days, bull market, down breakout).
Percentage closed. Breakaway gaps do not close quickly, as Table 23.3
shows. Even after a year, some gaps remain open.
Average gap size. The average gap size varied across market conditions and
breakout directions, with bear market gaps being larger than bull market ones,
and gaps in a bear market with a downward breakout being the largest of all.
Yearly position. Since breakaway gaps are important to traders, I
checked their position over the yearly trading range. Bull markets showed the
most gaps within a third of the yearly high. Bear markets had more gaps in the
middle of the yearly trading range.
Statistics: Breakaway Gaps 367
Table 23.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Average time to close the gap 3 days 3 days 3 days 3 days
Closed in 1 week 89% 93% 92% 89%
Closed in 2 weeks 99% 100% 100% 100%
Closed in 3 weeks 100% 100% 100% 100%
Average gap size $0.31 $0.55 $0.28 $0.59
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 367

Yearly position, performance. Gaps in bull markets performed best
when the gap was near the yearly high. Gaps in bear markets did well near the
yearly low, but the sample size in a down market obscured the results.
Gap size. Do large gaps perform better than small ones? Yes. I found
the median gap size and compared all gaps to the median. Those larger than
the median performed as well or better than did those smaller than the
median. If you want to trade a breakaway gap, check to see if it is larger or
smaller than the median listed in Table 23.3. That may be an indication of
performance.
368 Gaps
Table 23.3
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Closed in 1 week 2% 9% 1% 1%
Closed in 2 weeks 9% 22% 6% 15%
Closed in 3 weeks 18% 38% 11% 35%
Closed in 1 month 23% 45% 17% 38%
Closed in 2 months 39% 62% 38% 53%
Closed in 1 year 66% 95% 75% 70%
Average gap size $0.43 $0.85 $0.68 $1.38
Percentage of breakouts L24%, L33%, L24%, L35%,
occurring near the C25%, C41%, C30%, C41%,
12-month low (L), H51% H26% H46% H24%
center (C), or high (H)
Percentage rise/decline for each L38%, L36%, L19%, L29%a
,
12-month lookback period C35%, C30%, C18%, C29%,
H41% H29%a
H20% H29%a
Small gap size performance 35% 27% –19% –25%
Large gap size performance 41% 35% –19% –32%
Median gap size $0.27 $0.59 $0.38 $0.62
a
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 368

Statistics: Continuation Gaps
Table 23.4 shows general statistics for continuation gaps.
Number of formations. I used 173 stocks to find 495 continuation gaps
from mid-1991 to early 2004, but I did not search the entire period. I split the
period from 1991 to 1996 and 1999 to 2004, the latter period to encompass a
bear market.
Average time to close the gap. Compared to breakaway gaps, continu-
ation gaps close quicker, as one might guess (because breakaway gaps appear
near the trend start but continuation gaps appear in the middle). The longest
(bull market, up breakout) takes just over 3 months to close, on average.
Percentage closed. Continuation gaps in a bear market with an upward
breakout close quickest as do downward breakouts in a bear market.
Average gap size. Gaps in a bear market with downward breakouts show
the largest size. If the general market helps the gap size grow, then I would
expect gaps in a bull market with an upward breakout to show a large size. That
is not the case. Bear market gaps are bigger than bull market ones.
Statistics: Continuation Gaps 369
Table 23.4
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Closed in 1 week 4% 20% 9% 13%
Closed in 2 weeks 20% 39% 23% 27%
Closed in 3 weeks 29% 57% 39% 36%
Closed in 1 month 35% 58% 52% 47%
Closed in 1 year 80% 95% 93% 81%
Average gap size $0.47 $0.86 $0.48 $1.24
Position of gap in time trend
(trend start to gap start) 50% 55% 69% 72%
Position of gap in price trend
(trend start to gap center) 43% 48% 57% 52%
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 369

Gap position. The position of the gap in the time trend varies with
breakout direction. Those gaps with upward breakouts seem to appear near the
middle of the trend (50% or 55% of the way to trend end). Those with down-
ward breakouts happen almost three-quarters of the distance to the end.
On a price basis, gaps appear near the midway point. Those with upward
breakouts are slightly short of the midway point (meaning the rise is higher
after the gap). Those in a bear market are slightly longer—the decline is
shorter after the gap.
Statistics: Exhaustion Gaps
Table 23.5 shows general statistics for exhaustion gaps.
Number of formations. I used 173 stocks to find 471 exhaustion gaps.
That finding suggests exhaustion gaps are plentiful.
Average time to close the gap. Exhaustion gaps close quickly, usually
between 1 and 2 weeks, on average.
Percentage closed. The table shows how quickly exhaustion gaps close.
In one week, about two-thirds of the exhaustion gaps close. In two weeks,
almost all of them are closed except for downward breakouts in a bull market,
which have 22% still open.
Average gap size. The average gap size varies, with the largest appear-
ing in a bear market with a downward breakout. The 94-cent wide gap is
almost twice the size of the bull market, up breakout gap.
370 Gaps
Table 23.5
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Closed in 1 week 61% 78% 64% 63%
Closed in 2 weeks 91% 90% 78% 85%
Closed in 3 weeks 93% 94% 87% 92%
Closed in 1 month 98% 95% 90% 95%
Closed in 3 months 100% 100% 97% 96%
Closed in 6 months 100% 100% 98% 99%
Closed in 1 year 100% 100% 100% 99%
Average gap size $0.49 $0.79 $0.63 $0.94
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 370

Trading Tactics and Sample Trade
Table 23.6 lists trading tactics for gaps. To successfully trade gaps you have to
be quick, making sure to use stops, and you have to be ready to close out a trade
at a moment’s notice. Still, they can be profitable. Consider what Gina did with
the situation shown in Figure 23.3.
As a seasoned investor, Gina knew all about gaps and practiced trading
them on paper until she was successful most of the time. The practice honed
her skills and pulling the trigger seemed rote. With a focus on limiting her
losses, she was growing confident that her trading style was one that would
allow her to succeed in the markets, so she took the leap and decided to trade
her system for real.
She followed the stock for a long time and was both familiar and com-
fortable with the fundamentals of the company. When she noticed the break-
away gap occur on May 10, she quickly checked the identification guidelines.
Volume was above average (although it may not be clear from the chart) and a
new upward price trend seemed to be forming. She called her broker and
bought 1,000 shares receiving a fill at 58 that day.
She placed a stop-loss order at 57, 0.13 below the lower gap rim just to
be safe. If this turned out to be an area gap, she would probably be stopped out
for a small loss. During her paper trading days, she discovered that most gaps
provide near-term support or resistance, so she was confident that her stop
would hold.
Trading Tactics and Sample Trade 371
Table 23.6
Trading Tactics
Area gaps These gaps are too short-lived to be traded profitably, consistently.
Breakaway gaps If high volume is present at the start of a trend, then trade with
the trend. Verify gap type by reviewing the identification
guidelines before trading.
Continuation gaps Continuation gaps usually mark the halfway point so you can
gauge the eventual price move. Measure from the trend start to
the gap center and project the difference from the gap center to
the predicted high or low.
Exhaustion gaps If an abnormally wide gap occurs or a gap occurs at the end of a
trend, then close out your position when the trend reverses. After
a trend reversal, consider trading the new trend (shorting the
stock if the prior trend was up). Violent reversals often follow
exhaustion gaps. Close out the trade the day after new highs (for
uptrends) or new lows (downtrends) fail to occur.
Stop loss The lower rim (for uptrends) or the higher rim (for downtrends) of
a gap is a good place to put a stop (0.15 or so away from the rim).
Gaps provide near-term support or resistance, so this strategy
works well with those gaps that do not close quickly.
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 371

She watched the stock closely. Two days later the stock gapped again. It
could either be a continuation gap or an exhaustion gap, she decided. Volume
was heavy, about twice the 25-day moving average, so that offered no clue. The
following day, when prices gapped again, she knew that the prior pattern was
a continuation gap.
Gina checked the price chart and using the center of the continuation gap
as a midpoint, she measured from the trend low (point A in the figure) to the
center of the gap. The difference was 5.50 (that is, 60.25–54.75). Adding the
difference to the middle of the continuation gap predicted that prices would
top out at 65.75, so she placed a stop at 65.50 and moments later, the stock was
sold. That day, the stock climbed to a high of 66, slightly above the predicted
price, and closed the day at 63.25.
Not including commission charges, she made $7,500 in just 3 days. But
she was not done. The large daily price range on high volume when she sold
reminded her of a one-day reversal, but she was unsure. She decided to keep
her options open and look for an opportunity to sell short. She followed the
stock daily and when it closed below the support level at 61 she decided to sell
the stock short and received a fill at 59.
The next day she was surprised to discover that a large exhaustion gap had
formed, dropping the stock down to 49, a $10,000 gain overnight. Knowing
that the gap was in reality a dead-cat bounce, she changed tactics and did not
immediately close out her position. Instead, she watched the stock bounce
372 Gaps
Apr 96 May Jul
Jun
Alco Standard Corp. (Office Equipment & Supplies, NYSE, ASN)
B
A
C E
Possible One-Day
Reversal
Breakaway (B)
Continuation (C)
Exhaustion (E)
Exhaustion
Support
– 66
– 65
– 64
– 63
– 62
– 61
– 60
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
Figure 23.3 Gina bought the stock on the breakaway gap and sold it a few days
later for a $7,500 profit. Then she shorted the stock as the exhaustion gap turned
into a dead-cat bounce.
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 372

upward for a few days then continue lower (as the formation predicts). Instead
of getting greedy, she decided to close out her position and received a fill at 45,
for an easy $14,000 profit in less than 2 weeks.
If you think Gina was lucky, netting over $21,000 in 2 weeks, you are
right. But her ability to correctly size up an investment opportunity and act on
it quickly while taking steps to minimize losses goes a long way to explaining
her luck. Some call it skill.
Gina is a serious investor who leaves nothing to chance. She did not just
jump in and start trading gaps after reading about it in some book. Instead she
researched the formation, followed the stock closely, and developed a success-
ful trading style that incorporates gaps. It worked for her, but it might not
work for you.
The following list includes tips and observations to improve your selection of
gaps that outperform. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Review the identification guidelines for correct selection—Table 23.1.
• The largest area gaps occur in a bear market with a downward break-
out—Table 23.2.
• Select breakaway gaps in a bull market near the yearly high. In a bear
market, select gaps near the yearly low—Table 23.3.
• Large breakaway gaps outperform small ones—Table 23.3.
• Continuation gaps appear near the middle of the price trend—Table
23.4.
• Continuation gaps appear near the middle of the time trend in upward
breakouts, but about two-thirds of the way to trend end in downward
breakouts—Table 23.4.
• Review for specific trading tactics—Table 23.6.
4366_23.qxd 2/23/05 11:51 AM Page 373

374
24
Head-and-Shoulders
Bottoms
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Three-valley formation with center valley
lower than the others
Throwbacks 45% 51%
Surprising findings Breakout day gaps help performance. Tall
and narrow patterns perform better than
short and wide ones. Patterns with falling
volume or U-shaped volume perform well.
See also Head-and-Shoulders Bottoms, Complex
LS
H
RS
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 374

I find it easier to pick out tops than bottoms. Perhaps this is because I spend so
much time worrying about when to sell. Placing a trade is easy; getting out is
the tough part. In my quest to sell at the appropriate time, I have often over-
looked the buy side: bottom reversals. Head-and-shoulders bottoms are just
such a formation. They are quite easy to spot and can be very profitable.
The Results Snapshot highlights statistics for this bullish reversal. Like
the top version of the formation, the bottom sports an exceedingly low failure
rate. Only a few formations climb by less than 5%. Those in a bull market rise
by 38% in a bull market and 30% in a bear market.
HSBs have a few surprises in store for traders, including breakout day
gaps that help power the stock upward. Tall and narrow patterns perform bet-
ter than do their short and wide counterparts. HSBs with falling volume trends
or U-shaped volume perform better.
Tour
What does the formation look like? Figure 24.1 shows a good example of a
head-and-shoulders bottom. The stock peaks during February, where the fig-
ure begins. From that point, the stock moves downward and makes a lower low
in late March before moving up. The turn marks the left shoulder. The stock
declines again and reaches a new low during late April, forming the head. The
right shoulder appears as the stock recovers and then continues moving down
Tour 375
Aug
Jun
Arrow Electronics Inc. (Electronics, NYSE, ARW)
Head
Neckline
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
Figure 24.1 A head-and-shoulders bottom. Two shoulder troughs surround a
lower head.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 375

along the trend line (shown in Figure 24.1 as the neckline). By mid-August
1995(not shown), the stock is trading just below 60.
According to new statistics, the head-and-shoulders bottom shown in
Figure 24.1 has a typical volume pattern. Volume is usually highest on the
head, then the left shoulder, and even lower on the right shoulder. The rise
from the head to the right shoulder accompanies a rise in volume as does the
actual breakout.
In contrast, the formation shows little increase in volume during the rise
from the head to the right shoulder. Volume on the breakout is unexciting and
that helps explain why the stock stalls. Upward momentum fails to carry price
much higher; the stock rounds over and heads back down.
Figure 24.2 shows a head-and-shoulders formation on a weekly time
scale. I chose this chart to show you the typical trend of head-and-shoulders
bottom reversals. They usually form after an extended downtrend in prices. As
a reversal, once they complete, prices rise.
Why do HSBs form? The chart pattern represents a struggle to find the
bottom, the lowest price that represents the best value. As the stock descends
during February 1994, investors nibble at the stock in increasing numbers.
Volume climbs even as the stock descends until it spikes upward for 1 week
during formation of the left shoulder. Buying demand puts a crimp on the
downward slide and prices move up but only for a week. The following week,
prices move lower. Again, volume spikes as the stock makes a new low and this
becomes the head. The smart money is accumulating the stock in anticipation
376 Heads-and-Shoulders Bottoms
Allen Telecom Inc. (Telecom. Equipment, NYSE, ALN)
Head
Left Shoulder Right Shoulder
– 39
– 37
– 35
– 33
– 31
– 29
– 27
– 25
– 23
– 21
– 19
– 17
– 15
– 13
– 11
– 9
– 7
– 5
– 3
A S O N D 94
93 F M A M J J A S O N D 95 F M A M J J A S
Figure 24.2 Head-and-shoulders bottom formation on a weekly time scale. It
takes several months before this head-and-shoulders bottom stages an upward
breakout.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 376

of an eventual rise or a change in the fundamentals. The stock moves up on
receding volume then retreats and forms the right shoulder.
Volume on the three troughs is diminishing. The left shoulder has very
high volume, the head exhibits somewhat less volume, and the right shoulder
records the lowest volume up to that point. Only after prices start moving up
from the right shoulder does volume spike upward.
Breakout volume, depending on where you determine the breakout
occurs, is unconvincing. In late August, prices move decidedly above the neck-
line and stage a definitive breakout. Even so, it is not until 2 weeks later that
volume advances noticeably.
Table 24.1 encapsulates the identification guidelines for HSBs. Consider Figure
24.3, a head-and-shoulders bottom. The formation does not appear at the end of
a long-term downtrend but at a short-term one (up to 3 months). The uptrend
begins the prior June with another head-and-shoulders bottom. The formation
reverses the slight short-term downtrend but continues the long-term uptrend.
Shape. Overall, the formation sports the three telltale troughs: left shoul-
der, head, and right shoulder. The left shoulder is at about the same price level
as the right one and appears to be about the same width. Such symmetry is
common in head-and-shoulders formations (tops, bottoms, and the complex
variety). If the left shoulder is sharp or pointed, the right shoulder will be too.
The head is below both shoulders by a reasonable amount. By this char-
acteristic I mean the formation is not a triple bottom—three troughs at about
the same price level.
Table 24.1
Shape A three-trough formation with the center trough below the other
two. It looks like a head-and-shoulders bust flipped upside down.
The three troughs and two minor rises should appear well defined.
Symmetry The left and right shoulders should be opposite one another about
the head, somewhat equidistant in both time and price. There are
wide variations, but the formation is noticeably symmetrical about
the head.
Volume Usually highest on the left shoulder or head and diminished on the
right shoulder.
Neckline A line that connects the rise between the two shoulders. A neckline
pierce signals an upward breakout. For up-sloping necklines, use
the highest high in the pattern as the breakout price.
Upward breakout The breakout is upward, usually on high volume that powers
prices upward. A low volume breakout is not an indicator of an
impending failure.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 377

In Figure 24.3, the left shoulder suddenly declines for 3 days, then
reverses and climbs to a minor high. Similarly, the rise between the head and
right shoulder climbs almost to the height of the rise between the left shoulder
and head then descends to the right shoulder. All five features, the three
troughs and two minor rises, appear well defined and distinct. The features are
important as you scan your charts looking for head-and-shoulders bottoms.
Symmetry. Symmetry is another important key to selecting a valid head-
and-shoulders bottom. The right side of the formation usually mimics the left
side. The right shoulder declines to about the price level of the left shoulder
and the distances of both from the head are similar. Of course, there are many
variations, but symmetry should make a head-and-shoulders bottom stand out
from a sequence of any three depressions.
Volume. Volume represents another clue to the validity of a bottom.
The left shoulder or head has the highest volume, with diminished volume on
the right shoulder.
Breakout volume is usually high as it pushes prices above the neckline.
However, in a quarter of the formations in a bull market, breakout volume is
well below the 30-day average. As a rule, volume will rise on the day of the
breakout, but it need not.
Neckline. The neckline is an imaginary line connecting the two rises
between the shoulders and the head. It can slope downward or upward. In
well-formed formations, the slope of the line is not very steep, but a steep
neckline should not be a disqualifier of a head-and-shoulders bottom (see Fig-
ure 24.1—it has a rather steep neckline).
Aug
Jun
3 Com Corp. (Computers & Peripherals, NASDAQ, COMS)
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
Head
Figure 24.3 A rare head-and-shoulders consolidation of the primary uptrend.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 378

Upward breakout. When price closes above a down-sloping trend line
or above the highest high in the pattern, that occurrence marks a breakout. Use
the formation high as the breakout point instead of an up-sloping neckline
because you will get a by signal sooner. You may never get a signal in an HSB
with a steep up-sloping neckline.
Focus on Failures
Like most formations, there are two types of failures. The first type, shown in
Figure 24.4, is a failure of the head-and-shoulders bottom to pierce the neckline
and move higher. As you would expect, the formation appears after a downtrend
in prices. The highest price peak is partly visible in the upper left corner of Fig-
ure 24.4. From the high of 38.75, prices fall to the low at the head, 21.25, a
decline of 45%. When the bottom forms, it should signal a trend reversal.
An interesting thing about the formation in Figure 24.4 is that the left shoul-
der is almost the same shape as the right. Only a dollar separates the two shoul-
der lows and the head is well below both shoulder troughs. The right shoulder is
somewhat farther away from the head than the left. This characteristic is typical.
Volume is suspiciously low throughout the formation. The left shoulder
and head register about the same level of volume. The right shoulder volume,
however, is higher than the other two. Of course, an irregular volume pattern
is no reason to discard a formation—but it serves as a warning.
After the right shoulder forms and price begins rising, volume tapers off
rapidly, and the attempt to pierce the neckline fails. The rally attempt does not
even come close to the neckline.
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Mar 94 Apr May Jul
Jun
ASA Holdings (Air Transport, NASDAQ, ASAI)
Head
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
– 38
– 36
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
– 18
– 16
– 14
– 12
– 10
– 8
Figure 24.4 Failure of a head-and-shoulders bottom to stage an upside breakout.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 379

Looking at the overall formation, there is no one item that signals an
impending failure. There is some suspicious activity, principally the abnormal
volume pattern, but nothing to deter an investor.
Figure 24.5 shows a slightly different type of failure. This is what I call a 5%
failure. The two shoulders and head appear well formed and distinct. The left
shoulder looks different from the right, but the twin rises between the shoulders
are similar. The price level of the two shoulders is not suspiciously out of line.
Volume is unusual. The only heavy volume appears near the head as
prices rise away from it toward the right shoulder. The right shoulder volume
looks like something you would want to tackle with your shaver: annoying but
not high enough to be alarming.
Price advances smartly after the right shoulder forms. Once price rises
above the stair-step incline, it zooms upward for 3 days and then stops. The
stock moves sideways for 2 weeks before starting back down.
Although this formation does have an upward breakout, price fails to rise
by more than 5% above the neckline. Price should reach 39.38 to meet the 5%
threshold, but does not. The result is a failure of the 5% rule: Prices must rise
by more than 5% after a breakout or the formation is a dud.
Statistics
Table 24.2 shows general statistics for HSBs.
Aug
Jun
Airborne Freight (Air Transport, NYSE, ABF)
Head
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
Figure 24.5 A 5% failure in a head-and-shoulders bottom. Prices must rise by at
least 5% before the formation is a success. A 5% rise should take prices to 39.38
but it does not happen.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 380

Number of formations. I found 672 HSBs, most of them coming from
a bull market. I looked at 500 stocks in each market, but HSBs seem to hide in
a bear market, and the bear market was substantially shorter, too.
Reversal or continuation. By definition, HSBs act as reversals of the
prevailing price trend. Why? Because we are talking about bottom patterns
with upward breakouts—they reverse the downward price trend.
Average rise. In a bull market, the average rise is a respectable 38%. In
a bear market; the rise averages 30%. This finding suggests that you should
trade with the market trend. Go long in a bull market; short in a bear market.
Do not short an HSB. Instead, find a bearish chart pattern to short.
Rises over 45%. A quarter to a third of the patterns climb more than
45%. That is a good showing.
Change after trend ends. After price reached the ultimate high, it tum-
bled by over 30%. That behavior is a good reason for selling a buy-and-hold
position. If your stock is going to have a 30%-off sale, why not sell now and
save your money instead of holding on and riding the stock back down?
Busted pattern performance. Busted patterns might be worth a look,
depending on when you trade them. A true busted pattern, one in which prices
climb 5% after the breakout, is rare. Trying to differentiate a throwback from
a new downtrend makes busted patterns difficult to trade.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Notice the average rise difference
between bull and bear markets and the S&P change between markets. The
general market seems to push prices higher in a bull market and holds down
performance in a bear market. For the best performance, go long when the
market is rising.
Days to ultimate high. Prices climb faster in a bear market. That is an
interesting finding if you happen to be in a bear market. Although the average rise
will not be as large, you will top out sooner, allowing you to trade more often.
Statistics 381
Table 24.2
General Statistics
Rises over 45% 187 or 34% 28 or 24%
–31%a
a
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 381

Table 24.3 lists failure rates for HSBs. They start out small, 3% or 4%,
but climb rapidly. By the time price climbs 35%, well over half will have failed
to climb that far.
How do you use the table? Imagine that your cost of trading is 5%. That
should include commission, SEC fee, and any other expenses. If you want to
have a 10% profit margin (15% total), how many HSBs fail to rise by at least
15%? In a bull market, 21% will fail to climb that far. In a bear market, 25%
will fail to make the grade. Thus, if you trade the HSB perfectly, you have a
good chance of making your 15% margin. You might want to add a bit extra
to accommodate “nonperfect” trades. For a minimum 20% rise, about a third
of the patterns will fail to rise that far.
Formation end to breakout. It takes just over 2 weeks for price to climb
from the right shoulder low and close above the neckline (down-sloping neck-
lines) or above the formation high (up-sloping necklines).
Yearly position. Where in the yearly trading range does the breakout reside
most often? The middle third of the yearly price range shows the most HSBs.
Yearly position, performance. HSBs in bull markets do best when the
breakout is near the yearly high—they rise an average of 42%. In a bear mar-
ket, those near the yearly low do best with rises averaging 43%.
Throwbacks. Throwbacks occur nearly half the time and when they do
happen, it takes about 10 or 11 days for price to return to the breakout price.
If a throwback occurs in a bull market, performance suffers. In a bear market,
there is no performance difference (which is unusual as patterns without
throwbacks typically do better).
Gaps. Does a gap on the breakout day indicate better performance? Yes.
HSBs with a breakout gap perform better than do those without a gap. This
Table 24.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 58 or 10% 19 or 16%
15 119 or 21% 30 or 25%
20 169 or 31% 43 or 36%
25 216 or 38% 54 or 46%
30 264 or 48% 69 or 58%
35 305 or 55% 74 or 63%
50 392 or 71% 93 or 79%
75 464 or 84% 107 or 91%
Over 75 554 or 100% 118 or 100%
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 382

behavior is most pronounced in a bull market when the rise averages 43%
after a gap and 37% without a gap.
Table 24.5 shows a frequency distribution of days to the ultimate high.
Few patterns flame out in the first week. Many patterns take longer than 70
days (about 2.5 months) to reach the ultimate high. Between that time, look for
the price trend to weaken about a month after the breakout in a bear market.
That is when the numbers show a slight rise. Bull markets show blips at days
42 and 56 (6 and 8 weeks after the breakout).
Table 24.6 shows size statistics for the HSB pattern.
Height. Most chart patterns perform best when the pattern is taller than
the median, and HSBs are no exception. In a bear market, for example, tall pat-
terns have an average rise of 34%, but short ones rise just 27%. I measured
height from the highest high to the lowest low in the pattern then divided by
the breakout price so I was comparing apples to apples.
Width. Narrow patterns perform better than wide ones, which may sur-
prise you. Many experienced technical analysts will tell you that “large” pat-
terns perform better than small ones, but I found the results unconvincing.
Statistics 383
Table 24.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month lookback L37%, C37%, L43%, C26%,
period H42% H27%a
Throwbacks 45% 51%
Performance with breakout day gap 43% 34%
a
Table 24.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 14% 9% 4% 8% 8% 6% 4% 3% 3% 1% 39%
Bull market 10% 5% 5% 5% 3% 4% 2% 4% 2% 2% 57%
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 383

Some wide patterns do well and some narrow ones do well. I used the median
length to separate narrow from wide HSBs.
Average formation length. HSBs average about 2 months long.
Height and width combinations. I looked at the combinations of height
and width, then gauged performance. The best performing HSBs are those that
are both tall and narrow, as one might expect from their individual performance.
The worst performers are short and wide, so you will want to avoid those.
Table 24.7 shows volume statistics for HSBs.
Table 24.6
Size Statistics
a
Table 24.7
Volume Statistics
pattern performance
Performance when volume highest on left shoulder 38% 33%
Performance when volume highest on head 39% 30%
Performance when volume highest on right shoulder 36% 23%a
a
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 384

Volume trend. In both markets, HSBs with a falling volume trend per-
formed better after the breakout than did those with a rising volume trend.
Volume shapes. The most prevalent volume shape was a dome appear-
ance, with volume highest on the head and tapering off toward the shoulders.
However, this shape was not the best performing. Patterns with U-shaped vol-
ume performed best in both bull and bear markets.
Breakout volume. Does high breakout volume guarantee better perfor-
mance? No. In a bull market, patterns with light breakout volume performed
best. In a bear market, those with heavy breakout volume did slightly better
than did those with light volume.
Shoulder volume and performance. I separated HSBs into those with
volume highest on the left shoulder, head, and right shoulder. In a bull market,
when the head showed the highest volume (5 days surrounding each valley) of
the three, prices climbed 39%. In a bear market, HSBs with volume highest on
the left shoulder performed best by rising 33%.
Table 24.8 shows miscellaneous statistics for HSBs.
Neckline slope. HSBs with down-sloping necklines in a bull market
performed substantially better than the other combinations, 42% versus 34%.
In a bear market, necklines that were flat performed well, but that was with a
small sample size.
Shoulder lows. “Higher left shoulder lows.” I am comparing the lowest
price in each shoulder. When the left shoulder has a higher low price, the
average rise after the breakout was 39%, the best of the bull market numbers.
For bear markets, the best performance came from shoulders at the same price,
but that observation used only two samples.
Trading Tactics
Table 24.9 discusses trading tactics for head-and-shoulders bottoms.
Trading Tactics 385
Table 24.8
Miscellaneous Statistics
Up-sloping necklines, performance 34% 24%
Horizontal necklines, performance 34% 38%a
Down-sloping neckline, performance 42% 35%
Higher left shoulder lows, performance 39% 35%
Higher right shoulder lows, performance 37% 25%
Even shoulder lows, performance 37% 63%a
a
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 385

Measure rule. Use the measure rule to predict the minimum price move
once prices break above the neckline. In Figure 24.6, the head marks the low-
est price in the formation. Subtract its price from the value of the neckline at
that point. In this example, the head has a daily low price of 13.13 and the
neckline, measured vertically, is at 17.50. Add the difference, 4.38, to the price
where the stock closes above the neckline. This occurs on March 28. I use its
daily low price of 15.50 on that day to get a target price of 19.88. Prices reach
the target in mid-July.
Wait for confirmation. If you can determine that a head-and-shoulders
bottom is forming, then there is no need to wait for confirmation (that is, for
prices to close above the neckline) before placing a trade. With a low failure
rate, your guess will get you in at a lower level and yield higher profits. How-
ever, this result hinges on the validity of a head-and-shoulders bottom. If you
guess wrong, you could see your profits rapidly turn into a loss. If you are
unsure whether the price series is indeed a head-and-shoulders bottom, wait
for prices to move above the neckline or right neckline high (highest high in
the pattern) before investing. That is always the safe play.
The two shoulders are common support areas. Figure 24.6 shows an
example of this characteristic. The lower of the two shoulders, in this case the
right shoulder, supports the stock in late October.
Stop loss. After placing a trade, consider setting a stop-loss point 0.15 or
so below the lower of the two shoulders. Should prices decline, they often turn
Table 24.9
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height by subtracting the value of the
lowest low reached in the head from the neckline, measured
vertically. Add the difference to the point where prices pierce
the neckline. The result is the target price to which prices will
rise, at a minimum. For up-sloping necklines, substitute the
rise between the head and right shoulder (that is, the highest
price in the rise) for the neckline breakout price.
Wait for confirmation If you can determine that a head-and-shoulders formation is
completing, consider buying the stock. This formation rarely
disappoints and the rise is worth betting on. However, you
must be sure that a head-and-shoulders bottom is present.
Otherwise, wait for price to close above the neckline or
highest high.
Stop loss Place a stop-loss order below the lower of the two shoulders.
Often, prices drop to the shoulder lows before meeting
support. Raise the stop as prices climb.
Watch for throwback If you miss the upward breakout, wait. Half the time, the
stock will throw back to the neckline. Once it does, buy the
stock or add to your position.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 386

back before declining below the shoulder lows. If this is too far away from the
purchase point, place your stop 0.15 below at the closest support zone. Raise
your stop as prices climb.
Watch for throwback. Since a throwback occurs about half the time, if
you miss the breakout, you may have another chance to invest. Buy once price
resumes its upward trend after the throwback.
Sample Trade
Some people might consider Bob unlucky, but he has an adoring wife and two
children. Employed as a blue collar worker in a nearby auto plant, he is happy
when he is working. Unfortunately, strikes by the union have taken their toll
on his savings and he has been looking for ways to supplement his income.
Ever since he was a boy, Wall Street has held his fascination. He has
wanted to play the market and when he saw the head-and-shoulders bottom
pictured in Figure 24.6, he decided to deploy some of his savings. He bought
at 16, the day after prices pushed through the neckline.
For over a week, the stock did fine. Prices slowly moved up and reached
a high of 16.63, then reversed. The stock threw back to the neckline and
Sample Trade 387
Aug
Sep 94 Oct Nov Sep Oct Nov
Dec Jan 95 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Alaska Air Group Inc. (Air Transport, NYSE, ALK)
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
Breakout
Throwback
Broadening
Top
Head
Neckline
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Target Price
Common Support Level
Figure 24.6 A head-and-shoulders bottom. Compute the measure rule by sub-
tracting the lowest low from the neckline vertically to find the formation height.
Add the difference to the point where price closes above the neckline. The result is
the target price to which the stock will climb, at a minimum. A broadening top
appears in July, near the target.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 387

continued lower. Suddenly, he was losing money. Should he sell and take a loss
or hang on because he knew it was going higher?
He decided to tough it out. The stock bottomed at 14.50 and quickly
recovered. It reached a higher high, then moved sideways for over a month,
drifting slightly lower. Bob was not worried because he was making money. It
was not a lot, but with patience, he knew he would do okay.
During the summer, things heated up for the airline and the stock took
off. Almost on a daily basis, it flew higher, making new highs. A bearish broad-
ening top appeared but Bob did not know about such things. He felt giddy in
the thin atmosphere in which the stock was flying. The stock entered the
clouds at 21.38.
When the airline stock hit turbulence in mid-September and headed for
the ground, Bob could not believe it. The stock was plummeting and all he
could do was watch his profits spin lower like the stock’s altimeter. He talked
it over with his wife and they decided to hold on. “It’ll come back to its old
high and when it does, I’ll sell it.”
The stock continued down. Soon, his profits gone, he was posting losses.
He maintained his firm stance that he would not sell until the price climbed
back to the old level.
During October, things changed. The stock pulled up just before nosing
into the ground, at 13.63, and not only leveled out, but started climbing again.
In a month he was at breakeven.
At the start of the new year, a descending broadening wedge took prices
lower as it widened but turned out to be a bullish omen. In mid-January, on
unremarkable volume, the stock turned the corner. Volume climbed, helping
prices reach a higher altitude.
As the stock closed in on his target of 21.38, Bob called his broker and
placed an order to sell at that price. In late February, the stock began a straight-
line run. It soared through 21.38, hitting his sell order but kept climbing. In
just over a month it reached 30.
Bob no longer invests in stocks. Would you have traded it differently?
What lessons can you learn from his mistakes?
The following list includes tips and observations for selecting HSBs that per-
form well. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Use the identification guidelines to help select the pattern—Table
24.1.
• Trade this pattern in a bull market for the highest average rise—Table
24.2.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 388

• Patterns in a bull market show the lowest failure rates—Table 24.3.
• In a bull market, buy HSBs near the yearly high. In a bear market, pat-
terns near the yearly low do best—Table 24.4.
• Throwbacks hurt performance in a bull market—Table 24.4.
• Select patterns with breakout day gaps—Table 24.4.
• Expect the price trend to weaken a month after the breakout in a bear
market, 6 to 8 weeks in a bull market—Table 24.5.
• Tall or narrow patterns perform better than short or wide ones. Pat-
terns that are both tall and narrow do best—Table 24.6.
• Select HSBs with a falling volume trend—Table 24.7.
• Patterns with U-shaped volume do well—Table 24.7.
• Select patterns with light breakout volume in a bull market and heavy
breakout volume in a bear market—Table 24.7.
• Patterns with higher left shoulder lows tend to outperform—Table
24.8.
4366_24.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 389

390
25
Head-and-Shoulders
Bottoms, Complex
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance An inverted head-and-shoulders formation
with multiple heads, shoulders, or both
Throwbacks 63% 66%
Surprising findings The rise in a bear market is steeper than the
rise in a bull market. Throwbacks hurt
performance but gaps help it. Patterns with a
rising volume trend, random volume shape,
and heavy breakout volume outperform.
Patterns with down-sloping necklines do well.
See also Cup with Handle; Double Bottoms (all
varieties); Head-and-Shoulders Bottoms;
Horn Bottoms; Rounding Bottoms
H
S
S S S
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 390

I find that a complex head-and-shoulders bottom is more difficult to recognize
than a normal head-and-shoulders bottom but not alarmingly so. After all, if
you can locate a normal head-and-shoulders bottom, then there is a decent
chance that you are also looking at a complex one. If you look to the left and
right of the two shoulders, you might see additional shoulders. Multiple shoul-
ders are one indication of a complex formation. But before I delve too far into
pattern recognition, let me briefly review the important snapshot statistics.
The complex head-and-shoulders bottom (CHSB) is a strong performer
with a low break-even failure rate and a very good average gain after the break-
out. The volume trend slopes downward, and about two-thirds throw back to the
breakout price. However, when a throwback occurs, performance suffers. Thus,
you should look for nearby overhead resistance and avoid patterns showing it.
To improve postbreakout performance, look for patterns with a rising
volume trend, random volume shape, or heavy breakout volume, or having a
down-sloping neckline. CHSBs with those qualities tend to perform better
than do CHSBs without those traits.
Tour
There are two types of complex head-and-shoulders bottoms: those with mul-
tiple shoulders and those with multiple heads. Consider the chart in Figure
25.1, a complex head-and-shoulders bottom. The chart pattern has two left
Tour 391
Unocal Corp (Petroleum (Producing), NYSE, UCL)
Head
Neckline
Left
Shoulder
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Throwback
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
Figure 25.1 A dual-shoulder complex head-and-shoulders bottom. Notice the
horizontal neckline and throwback to it. The formation is part of a rounding bot-
tom chart pattern.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 391

shoulders, a single head, and two right shoulders. If you were scanning your
charts for normal head-and-shoulders bottoms, this one would probably pop
up. The left and right shoulders are well defined and the head is below them.
As you widen your view, you see an additional pair of shoulders; the left shoul-
der is about the same distance from the head as the right one. The two outer-
most shoulders are near the same price level too.
Looking at all the shoulders and the head together, the chart is a good
example of a complex head-and-shoulders bottom. However, the volume pat-
tern is unusual as it is heavier on the right than on the left. Most of the time,
the left shoulders show higher volume than the right pair, but the head has the
highest volume about half the time.
If you ignore the various labels, you can see a rounding bottom. Although
the volume pattern is not a characteristic bowl-shaped pattern, the gentle turn
of prices (if you connect the minor lows) supports a bottom formation. How-
ever you choose to classify this pattern, the bullish reversal is clear.
Shown in Figure 25.1 is a throwback to the neckline, a common occur-
rence for the head-and-shoulders family, especially the complex variety.
Although it takes a week or two before prices really begin moving up, the stock
climbs to a high of 32.63 before retracing its gains.
Compare Figure 25.1 with Figure 25.2, a complex bottom with two
heads. Overall, the formation is quite symmetrical. There are two shoulders
and two heads. A neckline connects the highs in the formation and projects for-
ward in time until prices close above it. The penetration of the neckline is the
breakout point.
392 Head-and-Shoulders Bottoms, Complex
Charming Shoppes (Retail (Special Lines), NASDAQ, CHRS)
Jul 91
Head Head
Neckline
Throwback
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
Figure 25.2 A dual-head reversal. Volume on the left side of the formation is
higher than on the right.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 392

In Figure 25.2, the breakout in mid-November quickly throws back to the
neckline and moves lower for a week or two. The stock rises but throws back
again before finally breaking away and heading higher. By late March the stock
reaches a high of 16.63, well above the head low of 9.19.
Volume on the left side of the formation is heavier than on the right. In
this regard, the formation is more typical than that shown in Figure 25.1.
Are there certain characteristics that make head-and-shoulders bottoms easy to
identify? Yes, and they are outlined in Table 25.1.
Shape. As discussed before, there are two general types of complex head-
and-shoulder bottoms: those with multiple shoulders and those with multiple
heads (rarely do you have both). Figure 25.3 shows a complex bottom with
multiple shoulders. The head is distinctly below the shoulders, far enough
below to distinguish the chart pattern from a triple bottom.
Symmetry. In this case, there is a normal head-and-shoulders bottom
flanked by an additional pair of shoulders. The overall formation appears sym-
metrical. The two left shoulders match the two on the right in distance. Fig-
ure 25.3 shows a far right shoulder that is higher than its corresponding left
one. However, the basic symmetrical pattern is typical for nearly all complex
head-and-shoulders bottoms.
Volume. Figure 25.3 also shows the usual volume pattern: The two left
shoulders show higher volume than the two right ones. Overall, the volume
trend is a receding one.
Near horizontal neckline. The neckline connects the highest peak on
the left with the highest peak on the right. Most of the time the line is nearly
horizontal. Although this is subjective, a scan of all the formations indicates
that 74% obey this guideline. Many of the formations shown in this chapter
have near horizontal necklines.
Upward breakout. For those with up-sloping necklines, use the highest
high in the formation as the breakout price. Using a steep up-sloping neck-
line to gauge the breakout point is risky. Prices may never close above the
neckline.
Once price closes above the neckline, a breakout occurs. Quite often,
prices throw back to the neckline and perhaps move lower before ultimately
continuing higher. Figure 25.2 shows an example of this behavior during late
December when prices plunged from a high of 11.50 to 9.44, a decline of
almost 20% in just 2 days! When the decline ended, prices recovered quickly.
The formation shown in Figure 25.3 is unusual because it acts as a con-
solidation of the uptrend. Prices from November through January climb
steadily and then resume moving up after the breakout. The formation is a
consolidation region, where prices move horizontally for a spell.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 393

Echlin, Inc. (Auto Parts (Replacement), NYSE, ECH)
Nov 92 Dec Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Head
Neckline
Left
Shoulder
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
Figure 25.3 A complex head-and-shoulders consolidation. The trend resumes
moving up once the formation completes.
Table 25.1
Shape A head-and-shoulders bottom with multiple shoulders, multiple
heads, or (rarely) both. The head is lower than the shoulders but
generally not by very much.
Symmetry The tendency for the shoulders to mirror themselves about the
head is strong. The price level of the shoulders and time distance
from the shoulder to head is about the same on either side of the
head. The shoulders also appear to be the same shape: Narrow or
wide shoulders on the left mirror the right.
Volume Usually higher on the left side than the corresponding shoulders
on the right. Overall, the volume trend recedes. Many times,
volume is highest on the head.
Near horizontal Connects the highest rise on the left and right of the formation
neckline center. Many, but not all, formations have near horizontal necklines.
Upward breakout A breakout occurs when price closes above the down-sloping
neckline. For those cases with an up-sloping neckline, use the
highest price between the head and rightmost shoulder as the
breakout price.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 394

Focus on Failures
If making money in the stock market is important to you, it pays to study your
failures. The lessons you learn will serve you for many years. When you look
at your failures as a group, you may begin to see trends. Such is the case with
chart formations.
Figure 25.4 shows a typical failure of a complex formation to reverse the
downtrend. After the head-and-shoulders formation completes, prices do
climb, but only to 57.13. Prices squeeze above the neckline and close there for
just a handful of days before sliding below the neckline in early March. Ulti-
mately, the stock reaches 40.63 in August.
The left shoulder shows tremendous volume. Volume diminishes at the
dual heads, and the right shoulder shows even less volume. Breakout volume is
anemic and may explain why the formation fails.
I count any formation with prices that fail to rise by more than 5% as a
failure. Figure 25.4, for example, falls under the 5% rule. The breakout is
upward, but prices fail to climb very far before reversing direction. Once prices
decline below the head, I know that there is no hope and mark the formation
a failure.
I found no reliable clues that indicate an eventual failure of a complex
head-and-shoulders bottom. This should not be alarming since failures repre-
sent only 4% of the formations, but always use a stop to protect yourself.
IBM (Computers & Peripherals, NYSE, IBM)
Dual Heads
Neckline
Left Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
– 89
– 87
– 85
– 83
– 81
– 79
– 77
– 75
– 73
– 71
– 69
– 67
– 65
– 63
– 61
– 59
– 57
– 55
– 53
– 51
– 49
– 47
– 45
– 43
– 41
– 39
– 37
– 35
– 33
Figure 25.4 A failure of the complex head-and-shoulders formation to climb more
than 5% after an upward breakout. Just 4% of the formations fail in this manner.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 395

Statistics
Table 25.2 shows general statistics for CHSBs.
Number of formations. I thought this chart pattern would be easy to
find and plentiful. I searched 500 stocks from 1991 to 1996 and another 500
bracketing the bear market and found 366 patterns. Most were from the bull
market because it was longer.
Reversal or continuation. Since we are dealing with bottom patterns
with price dropping into the pattern and rising out of it, all patterns act as
reversals. That is the theory. In practice, the pattern sometimes forms as the
corrective phase of a measured move up chart pattern with prices pausing dur-
ing an upward price trend.
Average rise. The performance of a CHSB is very close to the perfor-
mance of a simple head-and-shoulders bottom, which surprises me. The aver-
age rise in a bull market is 39%, a good showing. In a bear market, when the
trade is like swimming against the tide, the rise averages 31%. Both numbers
are above the average of all chart pattern types.
Rises over 45%. Over a quarter of the patterns show rises larger than
45%. As expected, more CHSBs in a bull market do better than do those in a
bear market. For the best results, trade CHSBs in a bull market.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate high, it tum-
bles about 30%, giving back nearly all of the gains on the journey up. Thus, sell-
ing as close to the top as possible is much better than a buy-and-hold strategy.
Busted pattern performance. Busted patterns perform as you would
expect from a bearish price turn. If you decide to trade a busted pattern, limit
your selection to those in a bear market.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The S&P climbed an astounding 20%
from the CHSB’s date of breakout to the ultimate high in a bull market. In a
bear market, the general market declined 2%. With such a strong market, I
Table 25.2
General Statistics
Rises over 45% 90 or 34% 26 or 27%
–30%a
a
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 396

would expect the average rise to be much higher than the one posted (because
the “average rise” in a bear market is nearly as good despite the market tide
moving against the uptrend).
Days to ultimate high. It took over twice as long to reach the ultimate
high in a bull market than in a bear market. That finding means the rise in a
bear market was steeper than that in a bull market.
Table 25.3 shows failure rates for the CHSB pattern. As far as failures go,
CHSBs hold up well. Between 3% and 4% of the patterns I looked at failed to
rise at least 5% (the breakeven rate). Half the patterns fail to rise more than
about 30% after the breakout, but that is still a very good showing.
As you scan down the columns, notice how quickly the failure rate climbs
as the maximum price rise increases. At the 10% maximum price rise, the fail-
ure rate is 12%—triple the prior reading (bull market). For the 15% price rise
level, the failure rate almost doubles to 22%. Bear markets show a similar trend
of enormous failure rate increases for small price rises.
What does this information mean? Invest wisely and keep track of your
trade. Recognize that the higher price climbs, the closer the stock is to com-
pleting its journey to the summit.
Formation end to breakout. It takes about 2 to 3 weeks for prices to rise
from the right shoulder low (the end of the pattern for statistical purposes) to
the breakout point.
Yearly position. Most CHSBs have breakouts that reside in the middle
of the yearly trading range. Since the breakout is at the top of the pattern and
since the pattern is usually large, the result makes sense.
Yearly position, performance. The best performing CHSBs have break-
outs in the middle of the yearly price range for bull markets and anywhere
Statistics 397
Table 25.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 32 or 12% 13 or 13%
15 59 or 22% 25 or 26%
20 82 or 31% 32 or 33%
25 101 or 38% 44 or 45%
30 125 or 47% 52 or 53%
35 149 or 56% 62 or 63%
50 190 or 71% 77 or 79%
75 228 or 85% 88 or 90%
Over 75 268 or 100% 98 or 100%
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 397

except the middle for bear markets. Additional bear market samples might
change the result.
Throwbacks. A throwback occurs in about two-thirds of the CHSBs I
looked at. When they occur, it takes a bit less than 2 weeks for prices to curl
around and return to the breakout price or neckline. When a throwback does
occur, performance suffers. That may surprise you, but it is common for chart
patterns. My thinking is that a throwback robs upward momentum. The key is
to search for overhead resistance before trading, and to avoid it when possible.
Gaps. A gap that occurs during the breakout tends to push price higher
in both markets. Gaps in a bear market are slightly larger than are those in a
bull market, but samples are few.
Do patterns with large gaps perform better than small ones? I compared
the gap size with the median gap size and found that patterns with large gaps
in a bull market soared 56%, but patterns with small gaps climbed just 35%. In
a bear market, the results flipped with small gaps outperforming large ones,
33% to 24%. In bear markets, the sample count was 19 (49 in a bull market),
so do not place too much emphasis on the results.
Comparatively few patterns flame out in the first few weeks. After a month,
34% in a bear market and just 16% in a bull market have reached their ultimate
highs. Many take well over 2 months before topping out, as the table shows.
The table has no real surprises except at a month after the breakout. A few
more patterns tend to peak then. I have seen this result in other chart patterns,
so keep that in mind when you trade.
Table 25.6 shows size statistics for CHSBs.
Table 25.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month L32%, C46%, L33%, C29%,
Throwbacks 63% 66%
a
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 398

Height. In many other chart pattern types, tall patterns perform better
than short ones, but that is only true in bear markets for CHSBs. Tall patterns
climb 34% after the breakout, and those shorter than the median climb 28%.
Width. In a bull market, look for wide patterns because they perform bet-
ter than narrow ones. In a bear market, the results flip: Narrow patterns per-
form better. I used the median in all width comparisons, not the average.
Average formation length. CHSBs are long patterns, measuring 3 to 3.5
months long.
Height and width combinations. Looking at the various combinations
of height and width, we find that in a bull market, CHSBs that are both short
and wide perform best after the breakout. Notice how the combined perfor-
mance (47%) is higher than the individual results for short patterns (39%) and
wide patterns (42%). The combination removes poor performers.
For bear markets, the best performers come from tall and narrow pat-
terns. They climb 41% after the breakout, but the sample size is small.
Table 25.7 shows volume statistics for CHSBs.
Volume trend. The best performance separation comes from the bear
market, with CHSBs having a rising volume trend climbing 35% after the
breakout, compared to a rise of 29% for those with falling volume. In a bull
Statistics 399
Table 25.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 12% 11% 5% 6% 6% 3% 3% 1% 1% 6% 45%
Bull market 5% 4% 3% 4% 3% 3% 2% 3% 3% 2% 67%
Table 25.6
Size Statistics
a
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 399

market, the difference is smaller, 40% to 38%, respectively. When selecting
patterns to trade, look for a rising volume trend.
Volume shapes. Does the shape of volume from the far left shoulder to
the far right one predict performance? Maybe. When the shape is random, that
is, neither U nor dome shaped, the rise after the breakout is equal to or better
than the other shapes.
Breakout volume. Both bull and bear markets show better performance
when the breakout occurs on heavy volume (above the 30-day average).
Shoulder volume and performance. I compared the far left shoulder,
lowest head, and far right shoulder for volume (using a 5-day average sur-
rounding each) and found that those CHSBs with volume highest on the far
left shoulder performed best by climbing 44% after the breakout in a bull mar-
ket. CHSBs in a bear market showed no performance difference.
Table 25.8 shows miscellaneous statistics for CHSBs.
Neckline slope. The best performance comes from patterns with down-
sloping necklines. A neckline is a line drawn along the highs between the
shoulders. When the neckline slopes downward, a close above it signals a
breakout and a valid CHSB pattern. It allows you to buy into a CHSB at a
lower price than waiting for price to climb above the highest high. When the
neckline tilts upward, the buy signal occurs when price closes above the high-
est high in the pattern. I use this signal to avoid waiting for a buy signal during
steep up-sloping necklines (the signal may never occur). Table 25.8 shows the
performance results. The 8% rise in a bear market for horizontal necklines is
due to one sample, so ignore it.
Shoulder lows. I am sure you noticed the 111% rise in a bear market for
the shoulder lows that have the same price. Ignore the result because I found
Table 25.7
Volume Statistics
pattern performance
Performance when volume highest on left shoulder 44% 31%
Performance when volume highest on head 36% 31%
Performance when volume highest on right shoulder 36% 31%a
a
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 400

only two samples. I compared the lowest lows in the far left shoulder to the far
right shoulder. When the right shoulder low was higher than the left, price
climbed farther after the breakout, 40% and 32% for bull and bear markets,
respectively. The 24 samples in a bull market for shoulder lows at the same
price had postbreakout rises averaging 47%.
Trading Tactics
Trading tactics are outlined in Table 25.9.
Measure rule. The measure rule predicts the expected minimum price
move and is best explained by an example. Figure 25.5 shows a complex head-
and-shoulders bottom on a weekly time scale with the head reaching a low of
13.50. Directly above that point, the neckline has a value of 18.63. The differ-
ence, 5.13, is the formation height. Add the difference to the breakout point
(17) to get the minimum price move (22.13).
Trading Tactics 401
Table 25.8
Up-sloping necklines, performance 35% 27%
Horizontal necklines, performance 33%a
8%a
Down-sloping neckline, performance 43% 34%
Higher left shoulder lows, performance 35% 30%
Higher right shoulder lows, performance 40% 32%
Even shoulder lows, performance 47%a
111%a
a
Table 25.9
Trading Tactics
reached in the head(s) from the neckline, measured vertically. Add
the result to the breakout price where prices pierce the neckline.
The value is the minimum target price.
Trade inner head Trade the inner HSB. That approach will allow you to get in at a
and shoulders good price. See Chapter 24 on head-and-shoulders bottoms for
specific trading hints.
Stop loss Stocks sometimes decline to the lowest of the right shoulders then
turn around. Look for support areas near the shoulders. Place a
stop-loss order 0.15 below the lowest shoulder or head.
Watch for Buy or add to the position during a throwback. Wait for prices to
throwback finish falling before placing the trade as prices sometimes throw
back and continue moving down.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 401

The chart in Figure 25.5 shows a complex head-and-shoulders bottom
that forms after nearly a 2-year run-up in prices. The formation marks a rever-
sal of the 6-month retrace.
It took just 2 weeks after the breakout to reach the target, but the stock
was not done climbing. It moved sideways for almost a year before continuing
higher. The stock reached a high of 39.38, nearly triple the head low of 13.50
and more than double the breakout price.
Trade inner head and shoulders. Since a head-and-shoulders chart pat-
tern is part of the larger CHSB, then trade the inner pattern. Buy when price
pierces a down-sloping neckline or use the inner right shoulder high as the
breakout price. Usually, this approach will get you in sooner and the signal is
just as strong.
With dual heads, the pattern is somewhat different. The dual-head for-
mation usually has head lows that are less than a month apart. Two heads that
are close together distinguish the formation from a classic double bottom.
Shoulder symmetry and a near horizontal neckline should put the finishing
touches on formation identification.
Stop loss. Once you take a position in the stock, set your stop-loss point.
Many times the various shoulder troughs will act as support levels. If your
head-and-shoulders formation is near the yearly low, then there is a very good
chance that prices will either turn around at the head or decline slightly below
it (by 10% or so) before bottoming out. From that point, prices climb higher.
Allen Telecom Inc. (Telecom. Equipment, NYSE, ALN)
92 A S O N D 93 F M A M J 94 F M A M J J A S O N D 95 F M A M J F M
Head
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Target Price
Support Level
– 39
– 37
– 35
– 33
– 31
– 29
– 27
– 25
– 23
– 21
– 19
– 17
– 15
– 13
– 11
– 9
– 7
A
J S O N D A
J S ON D 96
Figure 25.5 Complex head-and-shoulders bottom on a weekly time scale. The
figure shows the target price found using the measure rule. Compute the forma-
tion height from the head low to the neckline and add the difference to the break-
out price. The right shoulders often offer support during future declines.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 402

If your formation is not within the lowest third of the yearly price range,
then sell the stock once prices drop below the head. Prices falling below the
head signal a formation failure, and it is best to cut your losses instead of pray-
ing that they will turn around. They will not.
Watch for throwback. After an upward breakout, over 60% of the time,
the stock throws back to the neckline. Consider adding to your position or
placing a long trade once prices stop declining. You should wait for prices to
rebound on a throwback or else you could find yourself in a situation similar to
that shown in Figure 25.2. Prices throw back to the neckline and then continue
down for over a week. Depending on when you bought the stock, you could
have seen a near 10% price improvement if you had waited a few days.
Sample Trade
When the weather is nice, I like to take my bicycle out for a spin and give the
automobile drivers something to aim for. On one of my bike trips I met
Melody. After I told her what I did for a living, she confessed that she was a
nightclub dancer and made oodles in tips. I was unsure whether I bought her
story, but she looked pretty enough (wearing a bike helmet and sun glasses,
who can tell?).
Anyway, she told me about a trade she had made in the stock pictured in
Figure 25.5. The stock intrigued her because a trend line drawn from the high-
est high in early October to just after the head marked a turning point. That is
where prices moved up enough to pierce the trend line.
Melody knew that prices usually retest the low before beginning an
extended move upward, so she followed the stock and watched it loop around
and dip to 14. Then she glanced sideways and noticed the other dip at 14.38.
That is when she uncovered the (inner) head-and-shoulders bottom.
A neckline connecting the rises between the two shoulders was impossibly
steep; there was no way she could apply the traditional measure rule to deter-
mine a target price (because price had not closed above the neckline), so she
decided to buy into the stock when prices closed above the right shoulder high.
This event occurred in late May and she received a fill at 17.50. Taking a
closer look at the graph, she saw two more shoulders, one during early Febru-
ary and the mirror image in mid-May, both at 16. Her simple head-and-shoul-
ders bottom changed into the complex variety.
The realization did not affect her investment plans at all, but it made the
situation more interesting. She wondered if another pair of shoulders would
appear. Her suspicions were fulfilled during late July when another shoulder
developed. This one at 15.75 mirrored the shoulder in mid-December 1993.
Soon, prices began moving up. They climbed above the break-even point in
mid-August and staged an upward breakout. Now she was able to apply the
measure rule for the complex bottom and found the target was 22.13.
Sample Trade 403
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 403

Since she did not need the money immediately, she held onto the shares
as prices rose. She thought the stock had enough upward momentum to reach
the old high at about 29.25, and she set her sights on that. As long as prices did
not drop below the purchase price, she would stay in the trade.
She saw the stock building a base between 21 and 26 and wondered what
to make of it. A downward breakout was a real possibility, so she raised her stop
to 21—the height of the plateau in October—and at a price just below where
the base seemed to be building.
In mid-June, just over a year after she placed the trade, prices zoomed up
and reached her sell point. The stock sold at 29. The stock continued climb-
ing, but she needed the money for a down payment on a house.
I was so engrossed with her story and the way she told it that I did not real-
ize she had dismounted from her bicycle. She spoke of coming back to her place
and making some new chart patterns, then playfully thrust her hips into mine.
I fell off my bicycle.
The following list includes tips and observations for selecting CHSBs that per-
• Use the identification guidelines to help select the pattern—Table 25.1.
• Choose patterns in a bull market because they rise the farthest—Table
25.2.
• Patterns in a bull market have the lowest failure rates—Table 25.3.
• Throwbacks hurt performance, so look for overhead resistance before
• Breakout day gaps improve performance—Table 25.4.
• Be patient trading these patterns as it takes a long time to reach the
ultimate high. Expect price weakness a month after the breakout—
Table 25.5.
• Select bull market patterns that are both shorter and wider than the
median. In a bear market, patterns that are tall and narrow do best—
Table 25.6.
• Pick patterns with a rising volume trend—Table 25.7.
• Select patterns with a random volume shape (neither U nor dome
shaped)—Table 25.7.
• Patterns with heavy breakout volume outperform—Table 25.7.
• Patterns with down-sloping necklines do best—Table 25.8.
• Trade patterns with higher far right shoulder lows—Table 25.8.
4366_25.qxd 2/23/05 12:01 PM Page 404

405
26
Head-and-Shoulders Tops
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Three-peak formation with center peak taller
than the others.
Pullbacks 50% 64%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance. Tall or narrow
patterns perform better than short or wide
ones. Patterns with a rising volume trend, U
shape, and heavy breakout volume
outperform. When volume is highest on the
head, the pattern performs well. Patterns
with a horizontal neckline or higher left
shoulder tend to outperform.
See also Head-and-Shoulders Tops, Complex
H
LS RS
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 405

Of all the chart patterns in this book, the head-and-shoulders top (HST) is per-
haps the most popular. This stems from its reliability, performance, and easy
identification. In a bear market, the performance shines with just 1% of the
patterns failing to drop more than 5% after the breakout, and the average
decline measures a large 29%. Traders not versed in chart patterns can guess
what a head-and-shoulders top looks like and get it right.
Surprises for HSTs are many but all are self-explanatory. If not, I discuss
them later in the chapter anyway.
Tour
Figure 26.1 shows a good example of a head-and-shoulders top. The three
bumps are clearly visible, with the center bump being the highest of the three.
The left shoulder usually appears after an extended uphill run. The entire for-
mation seems to stand alone when viewed in the context of a year’s worth of
daily price data. This stand-alone characteristic makes the head-and-shoulders
top easily identified in a price series.
Figure 26.1 shows the highest volume occurring during the head. More
often the left shoulder has the highest volume, followed by the head, with
greatly diminished volume during formation of the right shoulder. The iden-
tification guidelines are flexible because volume characteristics vary from for-
mation to formation.
406 Heads-and-Shoulders Tops
Great Atlantic and Pacific (Grocery, NYSE, GAP)
Aug Sep Oct
Mar 93 Apr May Jul
Jun
Head
Neckline
Pullback
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Head
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
Figure 26.1 A head-and-shoulders top formation where the center peak towers
above the other two. A pullback to the neckline occurs frequently.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 406

A trend line drawn along the bottoms of the two troughs between the
three peaks forms the neckline. The line may slope in any direction but slopes
upward about 52% of the time and downward 45% of the time with the
remainder being horizontal. The direction of neckline slope is a predictor of
the severity of the price decline.
Why do these chart patterns form? Pretend for a moment that you are a
big spender and represent what is commonly called the smart money. You are
searching for a stock to buy and believe that Toll Brothers (Figure 26.2) rep-
resents an intriguing situation. You review the fundamentals and everything
looks good, so you start buying the stock in mid-July as prices descend. Your
buying turns the situation around: The stock begins rising.
Soon you have acquired all the stock you want and sit back and wait. As
you expected, the company issues good news and the stock begins making its
move. Other investors jump into the game and buy the stock, sending the price
higher. As the stock rises above 10, you decide it is time to sell. After all, you
have made 20% in about 2 weeks. Your selling causes the stock to pause then
begin a retrace of the prior action.
Sensing weakness in the stock, you stop selling and monitor the situation
closely. Other momentum and buy-the-dip players, believing that this is a
chance to get in on the ground floor of a further advance, buy the stock on the
retrace. The decline halts and the stock begins rising again.
As it rises, additional momentum players make a bid for the stock or
buy it outright. Once the stock gets above 10, you begin selling it again, not
Tour 407
Toll Brothers (Homebuilding, NYSE, TOL)
Aug Sep Oct
Jul
Jun 92
Head
Head
Neckline
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Left
Shoulder Right
Shoulder
Support Level
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
Figure 26.2 Volume pattern of this head-and-shoulders top obeys the general
characteristics: highest on formation of the left shoulder and weakest on the right
shoulder. The down-sloping neckline suggests an especially weak situation.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 407

heavily at first because you have a large number of shares to dump. Still, the
market players notice your selling and the stock climbs just above 11 before
heading back down.
You dump your remaining shares as the stock begins tumbling. Volume
rises as other players sell their shares to unsuspecting buyers. The stock con-
tinues moving down and slides back below 10. Believing the stock oversold,
demand picks up and sends the price moving up again for the last time.
You watch the action from the sidelines, content with the profit you have
made. The stock climbs to 10.75 on the right shoulder. Lacking support, the
rise falters on weak volume and the stock turns down. Investors versed in tech-
nical analysis see the head-and-shoulders top for what it is: a reversal. They
quietly take their profits and sell the stock. Others initiate short sales by sell-
ing high and hoping the price falls.
Prices move down to the support level where prices declined the last time.
The stock pauses there for a week and makes a feeble effort to rise again.
When the attempt falters, the stock moves down and pierces the neckline. Vol-
ume picks up and the stock tumbles. Eventually, prices decline back to where
they began, just under 8.
Are there certain guidelines that make identifying a head-and-shoulders top
easy? Yes, and Table 26.1 lists them. But remember, the identification guide-
lines are just that, guidelines.
Table 26.1
Shape After an upward price trend, the formation appears as three
bumps, the center one is the tallest, resembling a bust.
Symmetry The two shoulders appear at about the same price level.
Distance from the shoulders to the head is approximately the
same. There can be wide variation in the formation’s
appearance, but symmetry is usually a good clue to the
veracity of the formation.
Volume Highest on the left shoulder, followed by the head. The right
shoulder shows the lowest volume of the three peaks.
Neckline Connects the lows of the two troughs between the three
peaks. The line can slope up or down. Often used as a trigger
point (to buy or sell) once price pierces the line.
Downward breakout Once price pierces the neckline, it may pull back briefly, then
continue moving down.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 408

Shape. The head-and-shoulders top formation can appear in a wide vari-
ety of shapes. Consider Figure 26.3. Shown is a head-and-shoulders top for-
mation, but there are four shoulders and only one head. When a formation
appears with more than the standard two shoulders and one head, it is called a
complex head-and-shoulders pattern. Complex head-and-shoulders patterns
for both tops and bottoms have their own chapters, but many appear in this
chapter’s statistics. They are, after all, head-and-shoulder tops, too.
The head-and-shoulders top usually appears at the end of a long uptrend.
Sometimes, when the prior uptrend is of short duration, the reversal takes
prices down to where they started the climb (see Figure 26.2). At other times,
the decline is usually short (up to 3 months) or intermediate (3 to 6 months),
or can signal a change in the primary bullish trend. The actual length of the
decline cannot be predicted.
Symmetry. Even though the formation shown in Figure 26.3 is some-
what odd, it does have a symmetrical appearance. The two left shoulders are at
about the same price level as the corresponding two right shoulders. Each of
the shoulders is approximately the same distance from the other and from its
mirror opposite. In the chart pattern, the head is centrally located. The sym-
metrical appearance of a head-and-shoulders top is one of its key identification
characteristics and helps separate any three bumps from a valid head-and-
shoulders chart pattern.
Volume. Volume obeys the following general characteristic: It is higher
on the left shoulder than on the head and higher on the head than on the right
Toys R Us (Retail (Special Lines), NYSE, TOY)
Aug Sep Oct
Jul
Jun 92
Head
Head
Left Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Pullback
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
Figure 26.3 A complex head-and-shoulders top pattern. The chart shows the
wide variation that a head-and-shoulders formation can take.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 409

shoulder. If you consider just the three inner peaks in Figure 26.3, the volume
pattern changes somewhat since the left shoulder has volume diminished from
that shown during the head. Even so, the volume on the left shoulder is still
above the right shoulder.
Neckline. The neckline, as shown in Figure 26.3, connects the two
troughs between the three inner peaks. It slopes upward but need not do so
(contrast with Figure 26.2). The neckline serves as a confirmation point. Once
prices pierce the neckline, and assuming they do not pull back, prices continue
moving down in earnest.
Downward breakout. A pullback to the neckline occurs frequently. It
usually takes less than 2 weeks to complete a pullback, but do not be fooled.
The trend will resume downward shortly. However, a pullback does allow you
one more opportunity to exit a long position or institute a short trade. Take
advantage of it.
Focus on Failures
Failures of head-and-shoulders formations are rare, but they do occur. Figure
26.4 shows an example of a failure. The well-formed formation has a head cen-
trally located between two shoulders. The left and right shoulders are at the
same price level, 29.13. Volume is highest on the left shoulder and lowest on
the right, as expected.
Hughes Supply Inc. (Retail Building Supply, NYSE, HUG)
Nov 95 Dec Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr May
Head
A
Head
Left
Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Right Shoulder
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
Figure 26.4 A rare head-and-shoulders consolidation. The formation fails to con-
tinue down after reaching point A. Symmetry and volume patterns offer no clue to
the eventual failure.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 410

Why do prices fail to pierce the neckline at point A and head down? The
answer is not clear. The formation is perfect except that it fails to descend. It
acts as a consolidation or continuation of the upward trend. Not shown in the
figure, the prior two formations were descending triangles. These formations
usually break out downward but these did not. Both had upward breakouts and
both signaled a bullish uptrend. The two formations were clues to the strength
of the rise, but one could also argue that the appearance of a head-and-shoul-
ders formation would probably signal an end to the extended rise. It did not.
Statistics
Table 26.2 shows general statistics for HSTs.
Number of formations. I found so many HSTs in the stocks I looked at
that I quit looking for bull market ones and concentrated on the bear market.
Together, I found 814 patterns using 500 stocks from 1991 to 1996 and 200
stocks from 1996 to 2004.
Reversal or continuation. A head-and-shoulders top is a reversal, by
definition. Price enters the pattern from the bottom and breaks out downward.
Thus, price reverses the prevailing trend.
Average decline. In a bear market, this pattern does exceptionally well,
with declines averaging 29%, well above the 24% decline for bearish chart pat-
terns of all types.
Declines over 45%. Bearish chart patterns never show large declines on
a continual basis. Even so, having 13% drop more than 45% in a bear market
is a respectable showing.
Change after trend ends. After price reaches the ultimate low, it soars,
climbing 51% in a bull market and 45% in a bear market. If you can determine
Statistics 411
Table 26.2
General Statistics
21%a
a
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 411

when the trend changes (that is, if you can find the ultimate low), then buy the
stock and hold on.
Busted pattern performance. I expected better from busted HSTs.
First, few fail to drop less than 5% (the bear market has just one sample) before
rebounding, and when they recover, the climb is less than enthusiastic. Other
chart pattern types show recoveries of 60%.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The large decline in the general mar-
ket (13%) compared to the 1% rise in a bull market helps explain the excellent
showing of bear market HSTs. This finding should also serve as a warning to
trade with the market trend. Avoid shorting a stock showing an HST in a bull
market or when the market is trending strongly upward.
Days to ultimate low. It takes about 2 months for price to reach the ulti-
mate low. Notice that the decline is farther (price) and shorter (time) in a bear
market than in a bull market. Thus, the decline must be steeper in a bear mar-
ket. This fact suggests shorting a stock showing an HST in a bear market for
the best performance and to maximize the number of trades annually.
Table 26.3 shows failure rates for HSTs. The best performance is from
HSTs in a bear market as they have the lowest failure rates. For example, 1%
of the patterns fails to drop more than 5%. Another example: nearly half (49%)
fail to drop more than 25% in a bear market. That performance is even worse
in a bull market as 68% fail to drop more than 25%.
Notice how the failure rate climbs for small changes in the maximum
price decline. The rate triples and then doubles as the decline moves from 5%
to 15% (bull markets). The numbers should serve as a warning that as reliable
as HSTs are, not all patterns perform equally well. Monitor your trade and use
stops to limit your losses. Raise the stop to just above the prior minor high as
price makes a new low.
Table 26.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 98 or 15% 9 or 5%
15 226 or 35% 29 or 17%
20 347 or 54% 58 or 33%
25 432 or 68% 85 or 49%
30 501 or 78% 109 or 63%
35 553 or 86% 124 or 71%
50 623 or 97% 161 or 93%
75 639 or 100% 174 or 100%
Over 75 640 or 100% 174 or 100%
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 412

Another way to use Table 26.3 is with price prediction. Suppose the mea-
sure rule (see Trading Tactics) suggests a decline to 8 from the breakout of 10.
That is a 20% decline. How many HSTs in a bull market will fail to drop at
least 20%? Answer: 54%. This finding suggests the measure rule prediction is
unlikely to be met. Set a price target that is not so far away.
Formation end to breakout. It takes about 2 weeks for price to drop
from the right shoulder peak to the breakout point, on average.
Yearly position. Most HSTs reside in the middle or upper third of the
yearly price range. That makes sense as HSTs are tops acting as price reversals.
Avoid patterns that do not have anything to reverse, meaning that the price rise
leading to the pattern is small.
Yearly position, performance. The best performing HSTs occur when
the breakout is in the middle of the yearly trading range.
Pullbacks. Pullbacks occur between half (bull markets) and two-thirds
(bear market) of the time. It takes less than 2 weeks after the breakout for
prices to make the return trip back to the breakout price or neckline. When a
pullback does occur, performance suffers. For example, in a bull market, HSTs
with pullbacks drop 20% after the breakout. Without pullbacks, the drop mea-
sures 24%.
Gaps. Performance improves with a breakout day gap only in a bear mar-
ket, but the samples are few. The average gap size is unusually large, 50 cents
to $1.23 wide, depending on the market conditions. Why the gap size is more
Statistics 413
Table 26.4
Percentage decline for each 12-month lookback L23%, C24%, L25%, C30%,
period H21% H28%
Pullbacks 50% 64%
a
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 413

than twice as large in a bear market is a mystery, but gaps are nearly always
larger in a bear market.
Table 26.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate low.
After 1 month, 53% of the bear market patterns and 42% of the bull market
patterns will have reached the ultimate low.
Notice the slight uptick ending 28 and 56 days after the breakout (bull
and bear markets, respectively). If your trade lasts that long, look for price to
bottom out then. It may not, but it always pays to be prepared.
Table 26.6 shows statistics related to pattern size.
Height. Do tall patterns perform better than short ones? Yes. The widest
difference is in a bear market where price drops 31% for tall patterns but just
26% for short ones. I measured height from the highest high to the lowest low
in the pattern (starting from the left shoulder peak to the right shoulder peak)
and then divided by the breakout price.
Width. Width is less of a reliable performance indicator than height. In
both markets, performance improves slightly if the pattern is narrower than the
median length.
Table 26.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 22% 14% 9% 8% 6% 3% 5% 10% 2% 2% 20%
Bull market 15% 8% 9% 10% 6% 5% 6% 5% 4% 3% 28%
Table 26.6
Size Statistics
a
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 414

Average formation length. The average length of an HST appears in
the table. Most patterns are about 2 months long as measured between the left
and right shoulder peaks.
Height and width combinations. Looking at the combinations of
height and width, we find that the best performing patterns are tall and narrow,
but tall and wide HSTs also perform well in a bear market. Avoid short and
wide patterns.
Table 26.7 shows volume statistics for HSTs.
Volume trend. HSTs with a rising volume trend work well in both
markets. For example, HSTs with a rising volume trend in a bull market tum-
bled 24% after the breakout, on average. Those with a falling volume trend
dropped just 21%.
Volume shapes. Of the five volume shapes I looked at, I show the three
most popular ones in Table 26.7. The best performing HSTs have U-shaped
volume. The random shape in a bear market includes only eight samples, so I
discount the 34% decline.
Breakout volume. Many analysts say that heavy breakout volume tends
to push prices lower, but I have found mixed results for many chart pattern
types. For HSTs, the influence of heavy breakout volume helps in both mar-
kets, but only marginally.
Shoulder volume and performance. I looked at the volume for the 5
days surrounding the two shoulders and head. When volume was highest on
the head, the chart pattern tended to perform better than when volume was
highest on the other two shoulders.
Statistics 415
Table 26.7
Volume Statistics
pattern performance
Performance when volume highest on left shoulder –22% –27%
Performance when volume highest on head –23% –30%
Performance when volume highest on right shoulder –20% –29%a
a
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 415

Table 26.8 shows miscellaneous statistics for HSTs.
Neckline slope. The best performance comes from HSTs with horizon-
tal necklines, but the 33% decline in a bear market uses only two samples. Sec-
ond to that was HSTs with up-sloping necklines. Common sense says that a
down-sloping neckline would suggest an especially bearish omen because price
is already showing weakness. Why HSTs with up-sloping necklines perform
better is a mystery.
Shoulder highs. Does a lower right shoulder predict a more bearish sit-
uation? Yes. HSTs with a higher left shoulder peak (and lower right shoulder)
drop 25% after the breakout in a bull market and 30% in a bear market. When
the right shoulder is higher than the left, the decline is 20% in a bull market
and 27% in a bear market. HSTs with even shoulder highs perform worst.
Trading Tactics
Shown in Table 26.9 are trading tactics, and Figure 26.5 shows an example of
the measure rule as it applies to a head-and-shoulders top. If you ignore the
backward volume pattern, the formation looks fine. Each of the three bumps
appears rounded and the overall formation is symmetrical.
Measure rule. The measure rule uses the formation height as a basis for
computing the target price. In the head, measure vertically down from the
highest daily high until you intersect the neckline. Subtract the value of the
neckline from the highest high. The result gives the formation height. In the
figure, the stock reaches a high price of 51 on September 13. Directly below
that point is the neckline price at about 47.38. The difference of 3.62 is the
formation height.
Once price pierces the neckline, subtract the formation height from the
daily high at the breakout point. In Figure 26.5, the high at the breakout is
48.50, leaving a target price of 44.88. Prices surpass the target when they
Table 26.8
Up-sloping necklines, performance –23% –29%
Horizontal necklines, performance –24% –33%a
Down-sloping neckline, performance –21% –28%
Higher left shoulder highs, performance –25% –30%
Higher right shoulder highs, performance –20% –27%
Even shoulder highs, performance –19% –23%a
a
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 416

Trading Tactics 417
Table 26.9
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height by subtracting the value of the
neckline from the highest high reached in the head, measured
vertically. Subtract the result from the breakout price where prices
pierce the up-sloping neckline, or, if the neckline slopes
downward, closes below the right shoulder low. The result is the
minimum target price to which prices descend. Alternatively,
compute the formation height from the highest high to the daily
low price in the higher of the two troughs. Subtract the result
from the daily high price in the higher of the two troughs to get
the target price. This method boosts the success rate and does not
rely on the neckline or breakout point (useful for steep necklines).
Wait for Play it safe: Wait for price to confirm the pattern by closing below
confirmation the neckline or right shoulder low.
Short stop For short sales, place a stop just above the lower of the two
troughs or just above the neckline, whichever is higher.
Watch for pullback Initiate a short sale or add to your position during a pullback. Wait
for prices to begin falling again before placing the trade as prices
sometimes pull back and continue moving up.
Arco Chemical Co. (Chemical Basic), NYSE, RCM)
Oct Nov Dec Jan 95 Feb Mar
Aug Sep
Jul 94
Head
Neckline
Neckline Price
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Target Price
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
Figure 26.5 The measure rule as it applies to a head-and-shoulders top. Calculate
the formation height by subtracting the neckline price from the highest high, mea-
sured vertically. Subtract the result from the high at the breakout. The result is the
minimum target price to which prices decline.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 417

decline below the value in late November. Since the target serves as a mini-
mum price move, prices often continue moving down, as in Figure 26.5.
The measure rule, as just described, is the conventional way to compute
a target price. However, it does have a flaw. Consider Figure 26.6. Prices dur-
ing the right trough recession decline to 27.75, well below the higher trough
at 31.25. A neckline joining the two is too steep. Prices never plunge through
the neckline, and it is impossible to compute a target price using the conven-
tional method. Instead, compute the formation height by taking the difference
between the highest high in the head and the lowest low in the highest trough
(point A on the chart). After finding the formation height, subtract the value
from point A to get the target price. In this example, the highest high is at
33.63 and the lowest low at the highest trough is 31.25, giving a height of 2.38.
Subtract the result from 31.25 to get a target of 28.87. Figure 26.6 shows this
value, and prices reach the target during mid-April.
The alternative method has two advantages. First, it can always be calcu-
lated and is somewhat easier to use since it does not rely on the value of the
neckline. Second, it is more accurate, achieving a success rate of 62%, mean-
ing that more formations exceed the price target using this alternative method
rather than the conventional one.
Wait for confirmation. Returning to Table 26.9, since anything can
happen, it is always a good idea to wait for confirmation before selling an exist-
Brinker International (Restaurant, NYSE, EAT)
Jun
Head
A
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Target Price
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
Figure 26.6 Head-and-shoulders top with steep neckline. There is no target price
using the conventional measure rule because of the steep neckline. Alternatively,
compute the formation height by subtracting the higher trough low (point A)
from the highest high. Subtract the result from point A to get the target price.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 418

ing holding or shorting a new position. In a bull market, there is a good chance
price will not close below the breakout price before making a new high.
Short stop. If you sell short, place your stop-loss order either just above
the neckline or above the lower of the two troughs, whichever is higher. Select-
ing a nearby resistance point usually works well.
Watch for pullback. If prices pull back to the neckline, consider adding
to your short position. However, be sure to wait for prices to begin falling after
a pullback. Occasionally, prices will pull back and continue rising.
Sample Trade
Kelly is not just a housewife; she is much more that. When her husband brings
home the bacon, she not only fries it but cleans up the mess afterward. She bal-
ances the books and keeps tabs on their newborn.
She started investing years ago for fun. Now, it has become part of her
daily life. In the spare moments between chores, she is often staring at the
computer screen, reviewing the statistics of a prospective acquisition and let-
ting her daughter bang on the keyboard.
Over the years she has been able to parlay their meager savings into a six-
figure retirement portfolio. It was not always easy and the mistakes were
painful, but she viewed each failure as a learning experience.
The stock pictured in Figure 26.6 posed an interesting situation for her.
She was not keen on shorting a stock because her paper trades rarely worked.
Still, she kept her eyes open and searched for good investment candidates.
This one piqued her interest.
The stock began its uphill run just before May 1993. It followed a gently
sloping trend line upward until late January when it stumbled. The stock
moved down to 26.50 before recovering, a drop of less than three points, but a
sign of weakness. Kelly followed the stock closely and when the head appeared,
she made a note on her program that it might turn into a head-and-shoulders
top. “It just had that certain feel.” She was correct.
The right shoulder plunge took prices lower than she expected but
quickly recovered to near the left shoulder high. She drew a neckline below the
two valleys and thought the line was too steep to serve as an anchor for the
measure rule, so she used the alternate measure rule and computed a target
price of just 28.88. This did not seem right either, so she used the right shoul-
der low to compute another target. This one turned out to be 21.88, or the
height from the head to the right shoulder valley projected downward from the
valley low. That target would take prices back to the July 1993 level and it
seemed reasonable to her.
Still, something bothered her about the stock and she decided not to
trade it. When the doorbell rang, she left her daughter alone briefly to answer
it. Moments later, the phone rang. It was her broker confirming that the stock
Sample Trade 419
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 419

sold short. Kelly ran to the computer to see her daughter standing on the
chair, beating on the keyboard with a wide but guilty grin on her face. Kelly
hoped it was only gas, but, no, she had indeed sold the stock short at 31.
After spending some anxious moments reviewing the trade, Kelly decided
to maintain the position. The number of shorted shares was just 100, an
amount she could live with. Prices quickly retreated to the neckline where they
found support. The stock bounced and when it moved above the right shoul-
der low, she got concerned. After a few days, the stock leveled out and moved
sideways. In case this turned out to be the beginning of a measured move up,
she placed an order to cover her trade at 29. That would leave her with a small
profit but still allow her to participate if the stock declined.
Two weeks later, she had an answer. The stock tumbled for 5 days in a
row, then just as quickly recovered, only this time it formed a lower high. The
volatility was wearing her down so she placed an order with her broker to
cover her position when prices reached the old low. She was taken out when
prices descended to 22.75 on their way down to 20. After expenses, she made
about 25% on the trade. Her daughter got a big kiss for her help.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select HSTs that perform
better after the breakout. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Select patterns in a bear market as they decline farthest—Table 26.2.
• HSTs in a bear market have lower failure rates—Table 26.3.
• Choose patterns with breakouts in the middle of the yearly price
range—Table 26.4.
• Pullbacks hurt performance, so avoid trades with nearby underlying
• Look for price to bottom in week 4 (bull market) and week 8 (bear
market) after the breakout—Table 26.5.
• Tall or narrow patterns perform better than short or wide ones. Avoid
patterns that are both short and wide—Table 26.6.
• Select patterns with a rising volume trend and heavy breakout vol-
ume—Table 26.7.
• Patterns with U-shaped volume do best—Table 26.7.
• Pick patterns with volume highest during formation of the head—
Table 26.7.
• Choose patterns with horizontal or up-sloping necklines—Table 26.8.
• Patterns with higher left shoulder peaks perform best—Table 26.8.
4366_26.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 420

421
27
Head-and-Shoulders
Tops, Complex
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance A head-and-shoulders formation with
multiple heads, shoulders, or both
Pullbacks 67% 60%
a rising volume trend and ones with heavy
breakout volume do well.
See also Double Tops (all combinations of Adam and
Eve); Head-and-Shoulders Tops; Horn
Tops; Rounding Tops; Triple Tops
H H
S S
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 421

Except for appearance, there is not much difference between a normal head-and-
shoulders top and a complex one. Add a dual head or a few extra shoulders to a
regular formation and you have a complex head-and-shoulders top. Both forma-
tions have a volume trend that generally slopes downward between the shoulders.
The left shoulders often have higher volume than the corresponding right ones.
The complex pattern has a few surprises, beginning with pullbacks. When
they occur, performance suffers. This behavior is typical for many chart patterns,
but I find it interesting nonetheless. Other surprises include tall patterns per-
forming better than short ones and CHSTs with a rising volume trend and heavy
breakout volume showing improved performance. I discuss these later.
Tour
There are two basic varieties of complex head-and-shoulder tops, as illustrated in
Figures 27.1 and 27.2. In Figure 27.1, the formation appears after an extended
bull run that begins in November 1992 and then melts back by mid-October,
forming a base for the head and shoulders. The stock rebounds, creating the
left shoulder. It pauses at the 31–32 level by moving sideways, then spikes
422 Heads-and-Shoulders Tops, Complex
Aug 95 Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr
Alcan Aluminium (Aluminum, NYSE, AL)
Head
Head
Head
Neckline
Left
Shoulder Right
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
Extended
Pullback
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
Left
Shoulder
Figure 27.1 Complex head-and-shoulders top with dual heads. The stair-step
pattern of a measured move up forms the left shoulder and head. The twin peaks
take on the appearance of a horn top, and the resulting move down resembles
another measured move, albeit stuttered. A simple head-and-shoulders appears in
August.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 422

upward again in a sort of measured move thrust. The measured move up fin-
ishes shy of its target price by just over a dollar before the stock begins retrac-
ing its gain. The peak serves as the first head.
After moving down a bit, the stock pushes upward and tags the old high,
then drops. Another head appears. Once prices slip from the head, they find
traction at the first shoulder trough and rebound. The right shoulder takes
shape. After declining through the neckline, formed by a line joining the two
shoulder troughs, prices quickly pull back and move higher. They turn away at
the 32 resistance level and continue down in a straight-line run to 28.38.
Computing a line using linear regression of the daily volume over the for-
mation (outermost shoulder to shoulder) indicates volume recedes. Although it
is difficult to tell from the chart in Figure 27.1, about two out of every three
complex head-and-shoulders tops show a receding volume trend.
Figure 27.2 shows a different type of complex head-and-shoulders top.
Multiple shoulders with only one head is the more common of the two vari-
eties. Pictured is the type of technical pattern that rips the heart out of novice
investors. Imagine someone buying this stock in October, just before the rise
begins. Prices quickly move from a low of about 13 to a high of 27.88, a dou-
bling of the stock price in a little over 3 months. On the way up, our novice
investor is thinking that picking stocks is an easy game; his selections are turn-
ing to gold.
Tour 423
Oct 92 Nov Dec Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
Thor Industries Inc. (Manuf. Housing/Rec. Veh., NYSE, THO)
Head
Neckline
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
Figure 27.2 Typical complex head-and-shoulders reversal. Multiple shoulders
with a single head in a rather flat formation round out the pattern. The volume pat-
tern emphasizes that volume is usually higher on the left side of the formation than
the right.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 423

The first shoulder forms as prices touch 27.88, then retreat to a low of 22.
The decline undoubtedly upset our investor pal. He probably told himself that
he would sell the stock once it returned to its old high.
In early January, prices zoom upward and make a smaller peak at 27.50.
Since the rise is so steep, our intrepid investor thinks, why sell the stock when it
is going to go higher? He is right. Price retraces a bit then moves higher and
forms the head at a price of 28.63. Once the head completes, things start to go
wrong for our buddy. He is swayed by glowing predictions on the Internet of
the stock moving up to 35 or 40 within a year.
At the top, prices round over and start down. They stop midway between
the troughs of the two left shoulders before making one final attempt at a new
high. Up to this point, there are several opportunities to sell the stock at a good
price. Did our novice investor take them? Probably not. Always optimistic that
prices will ultimately break out and reach higher ground, he does not see the
budding complex head-and-shoulders formation for what it is: a warning.
When prices drop below the neckline, our novice investor has just 2 days
before things really get going. On the third day the stock closes at 23, near the
low for the day. Prices quickly unravel and ultimately reach a low of 15, just a
few dollars above the purchase price. That is when our investor throws in the
towel and sells the stock. Of course, this is near the low and the stock ulti-
mately climbs to 30 a year later.
How can our novice investor recognize the bearish reversal? Table 27.1 out-
lines some identification tips of a complex head-and-shoulders top.
Shape. Consider Figure 27.3, another example of a multiple shoulder chart
pattern. After a decline from a head-and-shoulders formation just off the left side
of the chart (only the right shoulder appears in the figure), prices decline until
reaching bottom at the start of July. Then they rise up, haltingly, and form a new
head-and-shoulders formation: a complex top. If you ignore the labels for a
moment, the inner price action looks like a rounding top. This smooth price
rollover is common for complex head-and-shoulder formations. Of course, the
flat head shape for a multiple shoulder pattern (Figure 27.2) is also typical.
Symmetry. You can divide Figure 27.3 into a pure head-and-shoulders
formation by ignoring the outer shoulders. For single-head formations, this is
the easiest way to correctly identify a complex head-and-shoulders top. First
locate a regular head-and-shoulders pattern and then expand your view to
include additional shoulders. In this example, the head rises above the sur-
rounding shoulders. The two shoulders are usually equidistant, or nearly so,
from the head. The price level of the left and right shoulders is very nearly the
same. Thus, the symmetry of a complex head-and-shoulders top is more pro-
nounced than that of a regular head-and-shoulders formation.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 424

Table 27.1
Shape A head-and-shoulders top with multiple shoulders or, more rarely,
two heads. The head is higher than the shoulders but generally
not by very much.
Symmetry The tendency for the shoulders to mirror themselves about the
head is strong. The price level of the shoulders and time from the
shoulder to head is about the same on either side of the head. The
shoulders also appear to be the same shape: Narrow or wide
shoulders on the left mirror those on the right.
Volume Usually higher on the left side than on the right and usually seen
when comparing the shoulders on the left with corresponding
ones on the right. Overall, the volume trend recedes.
Neckline Connects the lowest left shoulder trough with the lowest right
shoulder trough. When the line extends and intersects prices, that
signals a breakout.
Downward When price closes below the neckline, a breakout occurs. For those
breakout cases with a steep, down-sloping neckline, use the lowest trough
price as the breakout point.
Brinker International (Restaurant, NYSE, EAT)
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
Apr 94 May Jul
Jun
Head
Neckline
Outer Neckline
Left Shoulder 1
Left Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder 1
Right Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Right Shoulder
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
Figure 27.3 A more rounded appearing complex head-and-shoulders top. Left
shoulder 1 and right shoulder 1 could be considered part of a large head-and-
shoulders top. The inner head-and-shoulders looks like a rounding top formation.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 425

In a regular head-and-shoulders formation, one shoulder may be higher
in price than the other or one shoulder will be much further away from the
head—a rather extended shoulder. That is usually not the case with the com-
plex variety. Symmetry is paramount and a key identification element.
Moving to the outer shoulders, they also are equidistant from the head and
are very nearly at the same price level as well. Continuing the symmetry exam-
ple, the two peaks labeled left shoulder 1 and right shoulder 1 appear to be
shoulders of the same formation, although further away than the inner grouping.
If you consider the inner quad of shoulders as part of the head, then what
remains is a large, regular head-and-shoulders formation. This formation is
denoted by left shoulder 1, right shoulder 1, and the large, rounded head (com-
posed of five minor highs). Even the outer neckline supports this example as
prices touch the line several times before dropping through it in a 1-day
decline of about four points.
Volume. If you could zoom in on the volume pattern, you would see it is
marginally heavier on the left side of the formation than on the right, at least
for the formation bounded by the inner (higher) neckline. High volume on the
left side of the formation as compared to the right is typical for complex head-
and-shoulders formations and occurs about two-thirds of the time.
Neckline and breakout. The neckline joins the lows of the lowest
trough and is interpreted the same way as a normal head-and-shoulders top.
Once price pierces the neckline, a downward breakout occurs and prices move
lower. Volume typically rises on a breakout and can remain high for several
days, depending on the severity of the decline.
Focus on Failures
Complex head-and-shoulders patterns suffer two types of failures. Both are
rare. Figure 27.4 shows the first type. I define a downward breakout as a close
below the neckline, or in the case of steep necklines, a close below the lowest
shoulder trough. Figure 27.4 shows price declining below the neckline only
once on May 8 but closing above it. From that point, prices rise and move
above the highest head and an upward breakout occurs.
The formation itself is well formed. It has two heads at about the same
level and two shoulders also near the same price level. Symmetry throughout
the formation looks good, too, as the shoulders are equidistant from the head.
Volume appears heavier on the left shoulder than on the right, as you would
expect. Only during the decline from the right head to the right shoulder does
volume rise. In short, there is no real indication that price will fail to continue
moving down, but it does.
Figure 27.5 shows a slightly different situation. The stock suffers a 1-day
drop of $2 at the breakout, but then rises in an ascending broadening wedge
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 426

UAL Corp. (Air Transport, NYSE, UAL)
Jun
Head Head
Neckline
Downward Breakout but
Price Closes Above
Neckline
Left
Shoulder
Right
Shoulder
– 60
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
Figure 27.4 A complex head-and-shoulders failure to reverse. Prices fail to close
below the neckline before moving above the formation top and staging an upward
breakout.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing (Chemical (Diversified), NYSE, MMM)
Aug Sep Oct Dec
Nov Jan 95 Feb
May 94 Jul
Jun
Head
Left Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Ascending
Broadening
Wedge
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
Figure 27.5 Another failure of a complex head-and-shoulders top. This one fails
to decline more than 5% below the breakout point. An ascending broadening
wedge takes shape in late November and December.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 427

pattern. The wedge is a bearish pattern that breaks out downward, but it too fails
to descend very far. Within a few months, the stock is again making new highs.
I regard the formation as a failure because prices fail to move down by
more than 5% after the breakout.
Are there any clues to the failure of this formation? The volume pattern
is flat. It shows no tendency to diminish over time. A receding volume pattern
is not a hard-and-fast rule, so I do not consider this pattern to be that unusual.
To answer the question, a closer examination of the fundamentals on the com-
pany may provide some clues. Usually in cases like this, underlying support
stops a down trend. The May–June broadening top represents a consolidation
region that supported prices in December.
Statistics
Table 27.2 shows general statistics for CHSTs.
Number of formations. CHSTs did a remarkable job of hiding. I found
only 288 despite searching 500 stocks over a decade of daily price data.
Reversal or continuation. Since these patterns form at the top of an
upward price trend with a downward breakout, they act as reversals.
Average decline. The decline from a CHST is quite good when compared
to other bearish chart patterns. In a bear market, the decline averages 27%.
Declines over 45%. As with most bearish patterns, CHSTs do not make
large declines, those over 45%. Less than 10% actually decline that far.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the ultimate low, what
happens? It rebounds 48% in a bull market and 42% in a bear market. That
may sound like a lot, but other chart patterns rebound in the 50% to 60%
range. Still, a 40% return is nothing to sneeze at.
Table 27.2
General Statistics
35%a
a
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 428

Busted pattern performance. This measure suffers from few CHSTs
declining less than 5%. In short, ignore the results.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Table 27.2 shows the influence of the
general market on the average decline. Notice that in a bear market, the S&P
declined 13% and the average decline was 27%. In a bull market, the S&P
climbed 1% but CHSTs declined 23% (less than the bear market decline).
These observations suggest you should trade with the market trend. If the gen-
eral market is declining, find a bearish chart pattern. In a rising market, trade
only bullish chart patterns for the highest rewards.
Days to ultimate low. It takes about 2 months or less for price to reach
the ultimate low. Notice how the 39-day decline in a bear market is less than
the 60-day bull market number, yet price drops four percentage points more.
The bear market decline must be steeper to drop farther in a shorter time.
Table 27.3 lists failure rates. See the Glossary and Methodology chapter
for more information on how they are calculated. CHSTs have low failure
rates when compared to other chart patterns. In a bear market, just 1% fail to
drop more than 5% after the breakout. Half fail to drop more than 25%.
Bull markets have higher failure rates. Four percent fail to drop at least 5%.
Half the patterns fail to drop more than 22%. That failure rate may sound high,
but it is quite respectable when you compare it to other chart pattern types.
Since the bear market numbers show lower failure rates, short CHSTs in
a bear market, not a bull market.
Table 27.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics for CHSTs.
Formation end to breakout. From the right shoulder peak, it takes
about 2 weeks for price to descend to the breakout, on average. I used a close
below the up-sloping neckline as the breakout price and a close below the low-
est right shoulder when the neckline sloped downward. The shoulder is used
to avoid steep down-sloping necklines, which may never trigger a trade.
Statistics 429
Table 27.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 29 or 14% 6 or 8%
15 65 or 31% 10 or 13%
20 101 or 48% 24 or 31%
25 129 or 61% 38 or 49%
30 156 or 74% 53 or 68%
35 171 or 81% 59 or 76%
50 204 or 97% 72 or 92%
75 210 or 100% 78 or 100%
Over 75 210 or 100% 78 or 100%
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 429

Yearly position. Most of the CHSTs have breakouts in the middle of the
yearly price range. Since the breakout is at the bottom of the pattern and we
are dealing with tops, the results should not be surprising.
Yearly position, performance. The best performing CHSTs have
breakouts in the center or high of the yearly price range.
Pullbacks. Pullbacks occur between 60% and 67% of the time, depend-
ing on market conditions (bear or bull). It makes sense that the bull market
would show more pullbacks because the breakout is dropping against the ris-
ing market tide.
It takes less than 2 weeks for price to return to the breakout price. When
a pullback occurs, the postbreakout decline is less than when a pullback does
not occur. Thus, for the best performance, look for underlying support and
avoid trading a stock when support is nearby.
Gaps. In a bull market, CHSTs without a breakout day gap do slightly
better than do those with a gap. In a bear market, breakout day gaps help per-
formance. Also, the average gap size is more than double the size of gaps in a
bull market. It may be like swimming with the current: You can travel farther
with fewer strokes. Thus, a breakout with a gap tends to send prices down far-
ther in a bear market than a bull one.
the first week, nearly a quarter of the patterns bottom out. In the first month,
61% of the bear market patterns will have reached the ultimate low. For bull
markets, 46% will have hit bottom and started a recovery. I found these num-
Table 27.4
Percentage decline for each 12-month L20%a
, C24%, L23%a
, C27%,
Pullback 67% 60%
a
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 430

bers by summing the individual columns, so you can estimate how likely it is
that your trade will hit bottom for a given period.
Notice that 10% in a bull market reach the ultimate low at day 28 and in
a bear market 8% bottom during day 49. Thus, look for price strength between
a month to 7 weeks after the breakout.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. In a bull market, the
decline averages 25% for patterns taller than the median but just 21% for those
shorter. In a bear market, the trend is similar with tall patterns outperforming.
Width. Narrow patterns do slightly better in a bull market, but wide pat-
terns do better in a bear market. I used the median length (not the average) to
determine width.
Average formation length. The average CHST was between 2 months
(bear market) and 3 months (bull market) long.
Height and width combinations. The combination of height and width
yields different results. CHSTs that are both tall and narrow perform best in a
bull market, with declines averaging 26%. For bear markets, tall and wide pat-
terns perform better than the other combinations.
Statistics 431
Table 27.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 23% 18% 15% 5% 5% 3% 8% 4% 0% 1% 18%
Bull market 20% 7% 9% 10% 3% 4% 2% 5% 5% 4% 30%
Table 27.6
Size Statistics
Short and narrow performance –22% –26%a
Short and wide performance –18%a
–25%a
Tall and wide performance –25% –29%a
Tall and narrow performance –26%a
–28%a
a
Fewer Less than 30 samples.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 431

Table 27.7 shows volume statistics for CHSTs.
Volume trend. CHSTs do better after the breakout when volume rose
from the far left shoulder to the far right shoulder (peak to peak). The largest
difference occurs in a bear market when price declines 29% for those patterns
with a rising volume trend but just 26% for those with a falling volume trend.
Volume shapes. Patterns in a bull market with U-shaped volume drop
26%, beating the other volume shapes. A random volume pattern (neither U
nor dome shaped) works well in a bear market, but the small sample count
means the numbers could be unreliable.
Breakout volume. CHSTs with heavy breakout volume show good per-
formance after the breakout. This behavior goes along with a rising volume
trend, and it suggests a more powerful downward move after the breakout.
Shoulder volume and performance. Does shoulder volume suggest a
strong down move? Maybe. In a bull market, when volume is highest on the head
(the 5 days surrounding the highest high), compared to the far left and far right
shoulders, the average postbreakout decline measured 24%. That figure beats
the other shoulder volume combinations. In a bear market, high volume on the
far right shoulder leads to a 30% average decline, but the sample size is small.
Table 27.8 shows miscellaneous statistics for CHSTs.
Neckline slope. The numbers for horizontal necklines are not robust,
meaning that there are eight samples from a bull market and just one from a
bear market. If you exclude the horizontals, then the best performance goes to
downward sloping necklines. The widest difference is in a bear market, 30%
versus 24%.
Table 27.7
Volume Statistics
U-shaped volume pattern performance –26% –26%a
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume –18%a
–29%a
pattern performance
Performance when volume highest on left shoulder –22% –26%
Performance when volume highest on head –24% –27%a
Performance when volume highest on right shoulder –22% –30%a
a
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 432

Shoulder highs. Again, the sample count is small for even shoulder
highs, with 13 samples from a bull market and 1 sample from a bear market.
Ignoring them, in a bull market the best performance comes from higher left
shoulder highs, but the difference is minimal: 23% versus 21%. In a bear mar-
ket, those patterns with higher right shoulder highs drop by 30% versus 24%
for those with higher left shoulders. Each comparison used the far left or far
right shoulder and the highest high price in those shoulders.
Trading Tactics
Table 27.9 presents the trading tactics for complex head-and-shoulders tops.
Trading Tactics 433
Table 27.8
Up-sloping necklines, performance –22% –24%
Horizontal necklines, performance –24%a
–11%a
Down-sloping neckline, performance –23% –30%
Higher left shoulder highs, performance –23% –24%
Higher right shoulder highs, performance –21% –30%
Even shoulder highs, performance –24%a
–21%a
a
Table 27.9
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height by subtracting the neckline value
from the highest high reached in the head, measured vertically.
Subtract the result from the breakout price where price pierces
the neckline. The result is the minimum target price. If the
formation looks like a mountain suddenly appearing out of a flat
base, prices may return to the base. See Figures 27.2 and 27.5.
Wait for If a simple head-and-shoulders pattern confirms, consider
confirmation trading it without waiting for the CHST to confirm. Place a short
trade or sell any long commitments. This formation rarely
disappoints and the decline is above average.
Short stop Look for resistance areas about the neckline troughs. Place a stop
just above the higher shoulder trough. The shoulder tops and
head also represent good locations for stop-loss orders.
Watch for pullback Place a short sale or add to the position during a pullback. Wait
for prices to begin falling again before placing the trade as prices
sometimes pull back and continue moving up.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 433

Measure rule. The measure rule predicts the minimum expected
decline. Look at Figure 27.6 as an example of the measure rule outlined in
Table 27.9. Compute the formation height by subtracting the difference
between the highest high (31.63) from the value of the neckline directly below
the highest high (27). Subtract the result (4.63) from the breakout price
(25.75), which is where declining prices pierce the neckline. Prices drop below
the target price of 21.12 in early March.
This is the conventional measuring rule and it is successful between 45%
and 53% of the time. That is below the 80% success rate I like to see for mea-
sure rules. The conventional method also has a flaw when the neckline slopes
steeply. Under such circumstances, prices may never pierce the neckline and
yet the stock is tumbling. Fortunately, the neckline rarely slopes steeply in
complex formations. However, if you do run across a formation with a plung-
ing neckline, use the lowest of the shoulder troughs as the breakout price.
Compute the formation height in the normal manner, but subtract the height
from the trough value to get a target price.
A slightly more conservative measure rule computes the formation height
from the highest high to the higher of the neckline troughs. Then subtract the
result from the higher of the neckline troughs and the result is the target price.
This method works between 51% (bear markets) and 62% (bull markets) of
the time.
Standard Microsystems Corp. (Computers & Peripherals, NASDAQ, SMSC)
Head
Left Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Right Shoulder
Target Price
Long-Term
Trend Line
Dead-Cat bounce
A Zoom Out of the
Broadening Top
from December
to February
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
A
B
Figure 27.6 A complex head-and-shoulders top formation. For the measure rule,
compute the difference between the highest high and the neckline, measured ver-
tically, and subtract the result from the breakout price. A broadening top appears
from December through February and a dead-cat bounce follows.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 434

Using the chart pattern shown in Figure 27.6 as an example, the highest
high is at 31.63 and the higher of the two neckline troughs is at point A, 27.50
(using the daily low price). This gives a formation height of 4.13 (31.63 –
27.50) and a target price of 23.38 (or 27.50 – 4.12). Prices reach the target dur-
ing the large 1-day decline on March 2.
If the head-and-shoulders formation does not occur after an extended
upward trend—the situation shown in Figure 27.1—then prices will probably
drop back to the low where the formation began. In Figure 27.1, the low just
before prices start rising to the formation is about 28. That is the level to
which prices return after the breakout.
At other times, the formation will suddenly shoot up from a base, then
just as quickly return to the base. Figures 27.2 and 27.5 show examples of this
situation.
Wait for confirmation. Since a simple head-and-shoulders pattern
makes up a CHST, trade the inner head-and-shoulders. That strategy may
allow you to place a trade sooner than waiting for price to close below the
neckline or shoulder low. For conservative investors, wait for the CHST to
confirm (when price closes below the neckline or shoulder low). If you own the
stock, sell it after confirmation because price is going down. Count on it!
Short stop. For short positions, look for areas of strength—resistance
levels—and place a stop-loss order just above that level. Common resistance
levels are the shoulder troughs, shoulder tops, and head top. Should the price
rise above the highest high in the CHST, cover the short, as price is likely to
continue climbing.
Watch for pullback. Sometimes price breaks out downward then
regroups and rises above the neckline before plunging down again (see Figure
27.1 and 27.3). These extended pullbacks and regular pullbacks are good places
to initiate a short sale or add to a short position.
Sample Trade
Henry runs a small hedge fund. He considered buying into the stock shown in
Figure 27.6, but needed more bullish evidence. In August 1994, indicators he
uses on a daily basis confirmed a buy signal, so he bought shares for his fund at
an average price of about 17.25.
In January 1995, Henry suspected the end was near, so he began taking a
closer look at the fundamentals. He was so engrossed with his research on the
company that he failed to notice a pattern forming. Over drinks with his fund
manager friends, he shared with them what he had dug up about the company.
The news was not good.
“So that’s why it’s making a broadening top!” one remarked. Henry fur-
rowed his brow and pictured the price action in his mind and there it was, a
broadening top, just like his friend had said.
Sample Trade 435
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 435

The next day Henry pulled up the chart and looked at it more closely. He
saw higher highs and lower lows (see the zoom out in Figure 27.6), character-
istic of a broadening pattern. Coupled with his fundamental research on the
company, he knew it was nearing time to sell, but not yet. He wanted to sell at
the top, when prices tagged the top trend line.
In early February, when prices attempted to reach the previous high, they
fell short, dipped down for a few days, and tried again (the two right shoulders).
The second rise was even shorter than the prior one, signaling weakness, so
Henry started selling immediately.
The failure to sail across the formation and touch the top of the broad-
ening formation meant it was a partial rise. A partial rise in a broadening top
usually means one thing: A downward breakout will follow.
By the time the stock pulled back up to the base of the two right shoul-
ders (point B), Henry had sold his holdings. As he was getting ready to leave
his office for home, something on his computer screen caught his eye. The
broadening pattern had changed into a complex head-and-shoulders top.
There were the two left shoulders balancing the two right ones with a head
perched in the center.
Henry discussed the new situation with his mentor and his fund manager
buddies, then decided to short the stock. By the time prices reached the long-
term up trend line, he had a tidy sum sold short.
Two days later, prices tumbled. They dropped 20% or $5 a share in 1 day
and continued down. In less than a week, they were at 16 before finding some
support, a plummet of 36%.
Henry had studied the behavior of dead-cat bounces, and he pulled out
his notes and brushed up. He knew the stock would bounce upward, usually
within a week, then trend lower.
True to form, prices moved up a bit (to 18.13), but it was not the smooth,
rounded bounce he expected. In the coming days, prices moved lower, so
Henry quit complaining, but he watched the situation closely.
The stock bottomed out at about 16 and trended horizontally. To him, it
looked as if the stock were building a base and preparing for an upward move,
so he covered half his short position. In late April, when prices jumped up to
18.50, he immediately covered the remainder of his position.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select CHSTs that per-
• Trade this pattern in a bear market—Table 27.2.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 436

• CHSTs fail less often in a bear market—Table 27.3.
• In a bull market, select CHSTs with breakouts near the middle of the
yearly trading range. In a bear market, CHSTs near the yearly high
work best—Table 27.4.
• Pullbacks hurt performance—Table 27.4.
• A month after the breakout, 61% of the patterns in a bear market and
46% in a bull market will have reached the ultimate low—Table 27.5.
• Choose patterns with a rising volume trend—Table 27.7.
• Heavy breakout day volume pushes price down farther—Table 27.7.
• Select patterns with down-sloping necklines—Table 27.8.
4366_27.qxd 2/23/05 12:02 PM Page 437

438
28
Horn Bottoms
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance Two downward price spikes separated by a
week on the weekly chart
Throwbacks 29% 58%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall horns
perform better than short ones. Horns with
heavy breakout volume and ones with a large
price difference between lows outperform.
Performance improves when the right horn
is inside the trading range of the left horn.
See also Double Bottoms (all varieties of Adam and
Eve); Pipe Bottoms
H H
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 438

I first discovered the horn bottom formation while pondering a result from my
study of double bottoms. Double bottom formations with bottoms closer
together perform better than those spaced widely apart. What would happen
if you considered formations that have bottoms only a week or so apart? I
tested the idea and discovered that the formation performs well.
Horns have low break-even failure rates, as the Results Snapshot shows,
and the average rise is above that of other bullish chart patterns. You can
improve performance by selecting your patterns carefully. The surprising find-
ings describe some of what to look for. For example, if there is overhead resis-
tance to the upward breakout nearby, then the horn pattern is more likely to
throw back. When a throwback occurs, performance suffers. I discuss this and
other surprises in the coming pages.
Tour
Figure 28.1 shows what a horn bottom looks like. After peaking in late Decem-
ber 1993, prices plummet from a high of 50.75 to the horn low at a base of
30.75. On the left side of the horn, prices have a large weekly price range of
about $7. High volume makes the week appear like a one-week reversal (with
the same attributes as a one-day reversal but over the course of a week), sig-
naling a possible trend change.
The following week, prices close lower but nowhere near the left horn low.
Then, 1 week later, prices spike lower again but close near the high of the week
Tour 439
Tandy Corporation (Retail (Special Lines), NYSE, TAN)
Horn Bottom
– 64
– 62
– 60
– 58
– 56
– 54
– 52
– 50
– 48
– 46
– 44
– 42
– 40
– 38
– 36
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
93 94 95
D F F
M M M
M
A A A
A S S
O O
N N
D
J J J
J
Figure 28.1 A good example of a horn bottom. Two downward price spikes, sep-
arated by a week, look like a steer’s horn flipped upside down.
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 439

and just 0.13 below the prior close. The horn bottom is complete: A double price
spike separated by 1 week marks the turning point. From that point, prices move
up and more than double from the horn low in about a year and a half.
How do you correctly identify horn bottoms? Table 28.1 shows identification
characteristics.
Weekly chart, downward spikes. Horns are visible on weekly charts.
Although they appear on daily charts, weekly charts make selection easier. For
the formation on the left in Figure 28.2, the chart shows two long, downward
price spikes separated by a week. The low of the center week stays well above
either of the spike lows, emphasizing the inverted horn shape of the formation.
Looking back over the months, you can see that there are no downward
spikes that come near the length of the horn spikes (as measured from the low-
est low to the lower of the two adjacent weeks). The twin horns mark an
unusual event, one that an investor should pay attention to.
Clear visibility. For the left formation in Figure 28.2, the horn appears
after a downward price trend, allowing clear visibility to the left of the forma-
tion, as no downward trends or price outliers obscure the view. This visibility
is important in that the formation should stand alone and not be part of a con-
gestion region. It should mark the turning point of a downward price trend.
The formation shown on the right of the chart in Figure 28.2 is what a
horn bottom looks like in an uptrend. There is a small price retrace, of 3 weeks’
duration, just as the horn bottoms out. These few weeks separate the formation
from the surrounding price action and allow easy recognition.
The two spikes share the same low price, 14.50, and have good price
overlap (as the right spike almost completely overlaps the left one). You can
440 Horn Bottoms
Table 28.1
Weekly chart, Use the weekly chart and locate two downward price spikes
downward spikes separated by a week. The two spikes should be longer than similar
spikes over the prior year and be well below the low of the center
week. The formation should look like an inverted horn.
Abnormally long spikes result in better performance.
Clear visibility In a downtrend, the horn lows should be well below the
surrounding lows, especially to the left of the formation for several
weeks (or months). Usually, horns appear near the end of declines
but also happen on retraces in uptrends (where visibility is less
clear to the left).
Confirmation The pattern becomes a valid horn bottom when price closes above
the highest high in the 3-week pattern.
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 440

argue that the separation of the horn low from the surrounding weeks is not
exceptional when compared with the pipe formations in early December and
late June. That is certainly true, but most of the prices show remarkably even
bottoms, not a jagged coastline.
Confirmation. The twin bottom pattern confirms as a valid horn bottom
when price closes above the highest high in the 3-week pattern. Without con-
firmation, you have no horn.
Focus on Failures
Even though horn bottoms sport a low failure rate, they still fail. Consider Fig-
ure 28.3, a 5% failure or a horn bottom. A 5% failure is when prices start out
in the correct direction but falter (rising by no more than 5%), turn around,
and head back down. The twin, downward price spikes look good in that they
are long and with good overlap. They form as part of a retrace from the high,
and prices usually return to form a second high (a double top), or perhaps
move even higher. If you believe that this stock will form a second top, then
this formation is probably not worth betting on as the price appreciation
potential is just not exciting.
If you look at this formation differently, you might suspect that it will
form a head-and-shoulders top. The left shoulder is already visible in late May
1994 and another shoulder could form as part of a mirror image, probably in
April or May of 1995. If that is the case, then you should also pass this one up
as the right shoulder might top out at about 16. This theory assumes prices
Tenet Healthcare Corp. (Medical Services, NYSE, THC)
Pipe
Pipe
Horn Bottom
Horn Bottom
in Uptrend
Left
Horn
Right
Horn
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
– 4
– 3
– 2
93 94
F F
M M M
M
A A A A
S S
O O
N N
D D
J 95 F M M
A J
J J
J
Figure 28.2 Two examples of horns, one in a downward trend and one in an
uptrend. Notice that the second pipe formation calls the turn exactly.
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 441

continue moving lower and probably stop dropping in the 10 to 12 range
(forming the neckline) before moving up to the right shoulder. Since prices
should drop, why buy now?
Another clue to this formation failure is the spikes themselves. If you look
over the prior prices, you see several downward price spikes that rival the
length of the horn. These are warning signs that this horn might not be any-
thing special.
The visibility is poor because earlier prices block the view. Usually, a
downtrend has lower lows (like that shown in the February to April 1995
decline). A horn appearing in a sharp decline should have good visibility to the
left of the formation. What this obscured view tells us is that prices seem to
form a base while their tops are declining. In other words, a descending trian-
gle is forming and the investor should be wary.
Taken together, there seems to be ample evidence that this horn might
not work out as expected. But, statistically, how often do horn bottoms fail?
Statistics
Table 28.2 shows general statistics for horns.
Number of formations. I found 404 horns in the 500 stocks I looked at,
covering a span of about a decade.
442 Horn Bottoms
Acuson Corp. (Medical Supplies, NYSE, ACN)
L L
L
L
L
L
L
Horn
Bottom
Crude Descending Triangle
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
93 94 95
D F F
M M M
M
A A A
A S S
O O
N N D
D
J J J
J
Figure 28.3 A horn bottom failure. Among other clues, similar length price spikes
(marked L) suggest this formation might be suspect. The descending triangle sug-
gests lower prices.
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 442

Reversal or continuation. All of the horns I studied were reversals of the
downward price trend. In other words, they were bottoms not tops. Some
appeared in a rising price trend with just a week or two drop leading into the
horn, but most appeared near the end of a downward trend.
Average rise. The average rise is 35% in a bull market and 27% in a
bear market, about average or slightly above when compared to all bullish
chart patterns.
Rises over 45%. In a bull market, the pattern shines with almost a third
(31%) rising more than 45%. In a bear market, just 19% climb at least 45%
after the breakout, but that is still a very good showing.
Change after trend ends. After the breakout, once price reaches the
ultimate high it tumbles between 32% and 37%, giving back all of the rise and
then some. This behavior suggests that you do not buy and hold the stock. A
timely sale will fatten your wallet.
Busted pattern performance. Horns in which price climbs by 5% and
then drops, tumble between 23% and 41%, on average. The large drop in a
bear market is because only eight samples were involved. Expect worse perfor-
mance (a smaller negative number).
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. The S&P climbed 14% in a bull mar-
ket and 5% in a bear market, as measured from the day of the horn breakout
to the ultimate high. The rise in a bear market is somewhat unusual.
Days to ultimate high. It took nearly 6 months for price to reach the
ultimate high in a bull market, but about 3 months in a bear market. Even
though the bear market climbed 27%, on average, the climb is steeper than in
a bull market.
Table 28.3 shows failure rates for horn bottoms. Notice that the failure
rates start smaller in a bear market, but by a maximum price rise of 15%, the
bull market failure rates are lower.
Statistics 443
Table 28.2
General Statistics
Rises over 45% 89 or 31% 23 or 19%
–41%a
a
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 443

How do you read the table? Let me give you some examples. In a bull
market, about a third (31%) fail to rise more than 15%. Half do not rise more
than 25%. In a bear market, 35% fail to rise at least 15%.
If you want to make a 15% profit above a 5% commission and fees (20%
total), 41% of the horns in a bull market and 48% in a bear market will fail to
meet your profit objectives.
Table 28.4 shows breakout and postbreakout-related statistics.
Formation end to breakout. It takes price just over 2 weeks to climb from
the right horn to the breakout price, which is the highest high in the pattern.
444 Horn Bottoms
Table 28.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 57 or 20% 20 or 17%
15 90 or 31% 41 or 35%
20 118 or 41% 57 or 48%
25 142 or 50% 67 or 57%
30 158 or 55% 77 or 65%
35 175 or 61% 83 or 70%
50 206 or 72% 98 or 83%
75 237 or 83% 109 or 92%
Over 75 286 or 100% 118 or 100%
Table 28.4
Percentage rise for each 12-month lookback L33%, C38%, L32%, 24%,
period H32% H27%a
Throwbacks 29% 58%
a
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 444

Yearly position. Most of the horns have breakouts near the middle of the
yearly trading range (37% in a bull market and 44% in a bear market, the high-
est of the three ranges).
Yearly position, performance. The best performing horns have break-
outs in the middle of the yearly trading range in a bull market and within a
third of the yearly low in a bear market.
Throwbacks. A throwback on the weekly scale is comparatively rare.
The throwback must have occurred within a month (four bars). I excluded any
throwback taking longer than that. About a quarter of the horns in a bull mar-
ket and half the ones in a bear market threw back to the breakout price. It took
17 days, on average, for price to make the journey. When prices did throw
back, performance suffered. For example, in a bull market, horns with throw-
backs showed rises averaging 26%. When a throwback did not occur, the rise
averaged 39%—a substantial difference.
Table 28.5 shows a frequency distribution of time to the ultimate high. In
a bear market, 24% of the horns reached the ultimate high in the first week,
but just 17% topped out in a bull market. After 70 days, a third (32%) of the
bear market patterns and over half (56%) of the bullish ones were still search-
ing for the ultimate high.
Notice the blip in a bear market during day 28 (10%) and 35 (7%). I have
seen this weakness in other chart patterns. Expect the price rise to falter a
month into the trade and be prepared to close out your position then.
Table 28.6 shows size statistics for the horn pattern.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones, as the table shows.
Tall means the difference between the highest high and lowest low in the
Statistics 445
Table 28.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 24% 8% 4% 10% 7% 3% 3% 3% 4% 3% 32%
Bull market 17% 6% 3% 3% 3% 3% 2% 2% 3% 1% 56%
Table 28.6
Size Statistics
Above average spike size performance 37% 26%
Below average spike size performance 30% 30%
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 445

three-bar pattern (weekly scale), divided by the highest high (the breakout
price). Horns taller than the median climbed substantially more than did those
shorter than the median.
Spike size. I measured the average size of price spikes over the prior year
and compared each horn to the average. The horn spike size was the difference
between the highest horn low and the three surrounding weekly lows (that is,
the week before the pattern, the middle week, and the week after).
When the spike length was above the average for the stock, price tended
to move up more in a bull market (37% versus 30%). In a bear market, horns
with shorter spikes performed better.
Table 28.7 shows volume statistics for horns.
Volume trend. I used linear regression to find the slope of the volume
trend from the left horn to the right. Those horns in a bull market showed
marginally better performance when the volume rose in the pattern. In a bear
market, a falling volume trend showed better postbreakout performance, but
the sample size was small.
Breakout volume. I computed the 1-month average volume and com-
pared it to the breakout for each stock. Patterns with heavy breakout volume
performed substantially better than did those with light breakout volume.
Volume and spikes. I looked at the various combinations of spike vol-
ume and the resulting postbreakout performance. In a bull market, when the
left spike was above the 1-month average volume and the right spike was below
the 1-month average, the stock soared 41% after the breakout. In a bear mar-
ket, light volume on both spikes resulted in the best performance, but the sam-
ple size was small (14 samples).
Table 28.8 shows miscellaneous statistics for horns.
Price difference. I computed the difference between the two horn bot-
toms as a percentage of the breakout price. When the difference was larger
446 Horn Bottoms
Table 28.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear
Heavy volume on left spike, light on right, performance 41% 24%
Heavy volume on left spike, high on right, performance 32% 30%
Light volume on left spike, high on right, performance 37% 22%a
Light volume on left spike, light on right, performance 27% 40%a
a
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 446

than the median, the horn tended to perform better after the breakout. In
other words, look for horns with uneven bottoms for the best performance.
Lower spike. I looked at performance as it relates to the lower of the two
spikes. When the left spike was lower than the right, price after the breakout
in a bear market climbed 29%. When the right spike was lower, the rise mea-
sured 23%. Spikes with equal lows used only four samples, so ignore the result.
Horns in a bull market showed only a minor performance difference.
Inside and outside weeks. An inside week for horns is when the right
spike is within the trading range of the left spike (the right has a lower high and
a higher low). An outside week is just the reverse with the right spike having a
wider trading range, engulfing the left spike. I did not allow price ties, and I
ignored the center week of the 3-week pattern.
Horns with the right horn as an inside week performed substantially bet-
ter than outside weeks. That discovery is the exact opposite of what I found in
the first edition of this book. The difference is due to the way the ultimate high
is measured, additional samples, and splitting the results into bull and bear
markets with a longer study period.
Trading Tactics
Table 28.9 lists trading tactics for horn bottoms.
Measure rule. Compute the formation height by subtracting the lowest
low from the highest high. Add the difference to the highest high to get the
target price. In a bull market, price exceeds the target 76% of the time, and in
a bear market, the method works 61% of the time.
Identify. Perhaps the most important key to horn bottoms is that they
should continue to look like horns (see “Clear visibility” in Table 28.1). Prices
Trading Tactics 447
Table 28.8
Bull Bear
Large price difference between horns, performance 40% 29%
Small price difference between horns, performance 31% 25%
Median difference as a percentage of breakout price 0.97% 1.44%
Lower left spike, performance 36% 29%
Lower right spike, performance 35% 23%
Equal spike, performance 30% 30%a
Right horn inside week, performance 40% 34%
Right horn outside week, performance 27% 21%a
a
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 447

should climb after the twin horn spikes. If you need to wait an extra week or
two to prove this occurs, then do so.
Uptrends. Separate the price trend leading to the formation into either
an uptrend or downtrend. Horns that appear late in uptrends may mark the
end of the upward price move. Prices continue moving higher (perhaps by
10% or so), then stop. Of course, if your horn appears at the start of an
uptrend, then prices might well be on their way to a large gain.
Downtrends. Horns in downtrends are common. On the one hand, if the
downtrend is just a retrace of the prevailing uptrend, then refer to the uptrend
guideline. In such a case, if the horn appears after an extensive advance, then
the uptrend may be nearly over. Invest cautiously or look elsewhere.
On the other hand, if the stock has been trending downward for a long
time (for months anyway), then the end might be in sight. The horn probably
will not mark the low exactly, but it should be close. Usually, horns appear a
month or so before or after the actual turning point.
If prices are trending down and you see a horn forming, you might wait
before buying the stock, just to be sure prices have really turned around. For
uptrends, consider buying into the situation immediately since prices will only
climb away from you.
Stops. Place a stop loss up to $1 or so below the lowest low. For low-
priced stocks, this may mean taking a significant loss. In such a case, perhaps it
is best to skip the trade and look elsewhere. The reason for placing the stop
well below the lowest horn low is to allow prices time to turn around. Prices
sometimes curl around and retest the low (moving $1 or so below the horn
low) before recovering and trending upward.
448 Horn Bottoms
Table 28.9
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Subtract the highest high from the lowest low in the horn pattern
and add it to the highest high. The result is the target price.
Identify Use the characteristics outlined in Table 28.1 to correctly identify a
horn bottom. The week after the right horn is key. Prices should
climb smartly and the weekly low should not be anywhere near the
horn low (in other words, the horn should still look like a horn and
not be encroached on by the succeeding price action).
Uptrends Some horns appear near the end of uptrends, so watch for the
trend to change.
Downtrends Horns will usually not mark the end of the downtrend, but they
will be close. Prices might continue to drift down for $1 or so
(below the lowest horn low) and then head upward.
Stops If you can afford the loss, place a stop $1 below the lowest horn to
reduce the chance that a retest of the low will stop you out.
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 448

Sample Trade
Mary saw the horn bottom forming in the stock pictured in Figure 28.4. To
her the chart suggested prices would continue moving up. Prices certainly
climbed above the right horn low (at 31) smartly, leaving the horn clearly vis-
ible on the weekly chart.
Looking back at the entire price chart, she saw prices begin climbing in
early October 1992 at a low of 8.63. From that point, they soared to the cur-
rent price in several waves. Waves pushing prices higher took between 4 and 5
months, whereas those moving lower took 3 months.
When the horn formed, the 5-month up pattern was in progress; that is
what she hoped anyway. She bought the stock the week after the horn com-
pleted at 35. She hoped the horn marked an end to the short retrace and prices
would resume their upward trend. She was wrong. When prices curled around,
she placed a stop at 30.88—0.12 below the lowest horn low. She suspected that
this might not be low enough, but a 12% loss was all she was willing to tolerate.
In early December, her worst fears were confirmed. She was stopped out
as prices plummeted from 33 to 29. Three weeks later the stock hit bottom at
28.50 and turned around. From high to low, the decline lasted just over 3
months, as she predicted, and measured 19%. Prices moved swiftly upward and
topped out at 57, exactly double the low.
Did Mary sell too soon and pass up her chance to nearly double her
money, or did she use prudent money management to limit her losses? Those
Sample Trade 449
Watkins Johnson Co. (Semiconductor Cap Equip., NYSE, WJ)
5 Months
Up
5 Months
Up
3 Months
Down
3 Months
Down
Stock Bought
Here
Retest of Horn
Low
Horn
– 57
– 55
– 53
– 51
– 49
– 47
– 45
– 43
– 41
– 39
– 37
– 35
– 33
– 31
– 29
– 27
– 25
– 23
– 21
– 19
– 17
– 15
– 13
– 11
– 9
– 7
– 5
– 3
– 1
92 93 94
D
N F F
M M M
M
A A A
A S S
O O
N N D
D
J J J
J 95 F M M
A A S
J
J
Figure 28.4 Horn bottom on weekly chart. As described in the Sample Trade,
Mary was stopped out during the throwback just before prices doubled.
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 449

questions are ones we all face as traders and investors. Do you know the
answer? In my opinion, Mary traded this situation properly. After all, price
could have continued down.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select horns that per-
• Use the identification guidelines to help select the pattern—Table
28.1.
• Horns have above average rises with bear markets showing a steeper,
shorter climb—Table 28.2.
• For small gains, horns in bear markets have a lower failure rate. For
larger gains (over 10%), bull markets outperform—Table 28.3.
• Throwbacks hurt performance. Look for nearby overhead resistance
before trading—Table 28.4.
• Expect price weakness a month after the breakout in a bear market—
Table 28.5.
• Choose patterns with heavy breakout volume—Table 28.7.
• Horns with a large price difference (unequal low prices) or a lower left
spike do well—Table 28.8.
• Inside week horns perform best (ignore the center week)—Table 28.8.
450 Horn Bottoms
4366_28.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 450

451
29
Horn Tops
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Downward Breakouts
Appearance Two upward price spikes separated by a week
on the weekly chart
Performace rank 4 out of 21 10 out of 21
Pullbacks 33% 44%
and patterns with short spikes do best. When
the pattern is an outside week, performance
improves.
See also Double Tops (all varieties of Adam and Eve);
Pipe Tops
Horn tops are a rare pattern, especially in a bear market. I find that discovery
surprising for a bearish chart pattern, but that is what the numbers tell me. The
H H
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 451

pattern has a low failure rate with a decent decline. After the downward price
trend ends, the rebound is unexciting, especially in a bear market—which has
a 47% recovery. That figure may sound like a lot, but other chart patterns do
much better (like 60%).
Surprises are many of the same that we see in other chart patterns. An
unusual one is when the right spike is outside the trading range of the left, the
pattern tends to outperform after the breakout. More about these surprises later.
Tour
With many formations, there is usually a mirror image; with double bottoms,
for example, there are double tops. So it is with this formation. Chapter 28 dis-
cusses horn bottoms and this chapter talks about horn tops. Having discovered
the bottoms, I wondered if the tops would work out as well. First, though, what
do horn tops look like?
Figure 29.1 shows an example of a timely horn top. If you read Chapter
28 on their bottom siblings, then horn tops should come as no surprise. A
horn top is an inverted version of the weekly horn bottom. A horn top sports
twin peaks separated by a week and is commonly found near the end of an
uptrend. Volume is usually heavy at both peaks but not by a huge margin above
452 Horn Tops
Horn
Double Top
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
– 18
– 16
– 14
– 12
– 10
– 8
– 6
– 4
– 2
– 0
92 94
93 D F
F M
M M
A A
A S S
O O
N N
D
J J
J
Figure 29.1 Horn top showing twin peaks. The stock drops almost in half after
the horn top. Note the weekly time scale. The two peaks in April and August rep-
resent a double top.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 452

the 25-day moving average. After the right price spike, prices drop lower and
continue moving down, sometimes substantially.
In Figure 29.1 the stock begins its rise to the horn in mid-June 1993 at a
price of 20.38. At the peak, prices reach a high of 32.63, a gain of 60% in 2
months. With such a sharp gain in so little time, a consolidation or congestion
region is likely. Instead, the horn top marks a change in trend. Combined with
the earlier top, the double top is a bearish signal.
After the twin peaks of the horn appear, prices drop to 26, then pull back
to the formation base, generally following an up-sloping trend line. Then
prices head down again. In the beginning of January, prices reach bottom at
16.75 for a decline of almost 50%.
Table 29.1 shows identification characteristics that make horn tops easy to
recognize. Consider the horn shown in Figure 29.2.
Weekly chart, upward spikes. Use the weekly chart to facilitate identi-
fication. Look for twin price spikes that are separated by a week.
Clear visibility. The two spikes should be well above the surrounding
prices (clear visibility) and a good distance from the high in the center week. If
you look back over the price history for the year, the two spikes should stand
out and be larger than most other spikes. In Figure 29.2, you can see that the
price spike in late September is the only real competition (for the period
shown, anyway).
The high-to-high price variation between the two spikes is usually small,
but need not be.
Confirmation. Confirmation occurs when price closes below the lowest
low in the chart pattern. Only when that happens does the 3-week pattern
become a valid horn top. Do not trade a horn top without confirmation as price
is likely to continue rising.
Table 29.1
Weekly chart, Use the weekly chart and locate two upward price spikes separated
upward spikes by a week. The two spikes should be longer than similar spikes
over the prior year and tower above the high of the center week. It
should look like a horn.
Clear visibility The horn highs should be well above the surrounding highs and
the best performing reversals appear at the end of a long uptrend.
Confirmation The pattern becomes a valid horn top when price closes below the
lowest low in the pattern. Do not trade without confirmation.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 453

Focus on Failures
There are a variety of reasons why a particular formation fails. Some break out
upward and never look back, whereas others begin moving down, falter, and
then recover and climb significantly. The latter case, the so-called 5% failures,
are predominant with horn tops. Prices fail to continue down by more than 5%
before recovering and heading higher. However, 5% failures are rare.
What can be learned from examining the failures? Most horns warn about
a coming decline by forming less than 2 months ahead of schedule. That find-
ing is worth knowing. If a horn fails to call the turn in a stock you own, be alert
to a possible trend change coming soon.
You can improve your investment performance if you consider the over-
all environment for the stock. Look at the horn top pictured in Figure 29.3.
After trending down for a year, the stock pierced the down-sloping trend line,
signaling a trend change, and moved higher. Then the horn top formed.
In situations like this, after a long downtrend, a stock usually bounces up,
curls around, and retests the low (but not always). So when the horn formed, it
probably signaled the price top before the retest. Although not shown in Fig-
ure 29.3, the stock did move lower, but it first bobbled up for a few months (to
63.50). Ultimately, the stock dipped to 49.13 before recovering.
Before you invest in this formation, you have to place emphasis on the
piercing of the down trend line. It suggests that prices will rise (a piercing is
one indicator of a trend change). With a price rise imminent, why would you
454 Horn Tops
Homestake Mining (Gold/Silver Mining, NYSE, HM)
Horn
Prior Price
Spike
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
93 95
94 D F
F M
M M
A A S
O O
N N
D J
J
Figure 29.2 Horn tops with unusually tall price spikes. This horn exceeds the
clearance of an earlier spike.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 454

consider shorting the stock? Even though the horn reversal suggests prices will
decline (and they do, in the short term, but only by a dollar or so), does it merit
a trade?
When there is serious conflict or doubt about a situation, then look else-
where for a more promising trade. Sure, you might miss making a killing now
and again, but you do not want to end up on death row after your trading cap-
ital runs out from all the losses you have been taking.
Statistics
Table 29.2 shows general statistics for horn tops.
Number of formations. I found considerably more patterns in a bull
market than in a bear market. Yes, the bull market was longer and both used
about 500 stocks. Still the bear market seems to be shy of patterns.
Reversal or continuation. As a top, the pattern acts as a reversal of the
prevailing price trend, by definition.
Average decline. The average decline is, well, average for bearish chart
patterns. Note that the decline is higher in a bear market but not by as much
as you might expect.
Declines over 45%. As with most bearish chart patterns, large declines
are rare. Still 16% of the horn tops I looked at managed to drop more than
45% in a bear market (after the breakout).
Statistics 455
Bandag Inc. (Tire & Rubber, NYSE, BDG)
Trend Lline
Pipe Bottom
Horn Top
– 72
– 70
– 68
– 66
– 64
– 62
– 60
– 58
– 56
– 54
– 52
– 50
– 48
– 46
– 44
– 42
– 40
– 38
92 94
95 D F
F M
M M
A A
A S S
O O
N N
D J
J
Figure 29.3 Horn top appearing after an extended downtrend. It is probably best
to ignore such horn tops. A pipe bottom marks the turning point.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 455

Change after trend ends. Once prices reach the ultimate low, they
rebound and climb more than they declined. In a bull market, the rise measures
51%, and in a bear market, the rise is 47%. This finding suggests that if you
short a stock and prices hit bottom then start rebounding, cover the short. That
may sound obvious, but if you hold onto the position longer than necessary, you
could suffer a huge loss. Remember, you never go broke taking a profit.
Busted pattern performance. Only one pattern was available in a bear
market and it was too recent to have valid price data. In a bull market, busted
patterns rise by 35%, a weak showing.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Both the bull and bear markets showed
losses from the day of the horn breakout to the day of the ultimate low. That
is unusual for a bull market, but it happens.
Days to ultimate low. After the breakout, it takes just over 2 months, on
average, to reach the ultimate low. Since that is an average, your results will vary,
but it suggests you need patience to reach the full potential of this chart pattern.
Table 29.3 shows failure rates for horn tops with the bear market rates
being smaller than the bull market ones. That finding should not come as a
surprise because horn tops are bearish chart patterns. Notice how the bear
market rate jumps from 2% to 25%. I suspect the reason for this jump is the
low sample count, but all chart patterns show failures that triple and then dou-
ble for moves from 5% to 10% and on to 15%.
How do you read the table? Let me give you a few examples. In a bull mar-
ket, 26% of the patterns fail to drop more than 10%. Just over half (51%) of the
horns in a bear market and 54% in a bull market fail to drop more than 20%.
Formation end to breakout. After the right horn spike, price takes
about 3 weeks to close below the formation low and signal a valid horn top and
456 Horn Tops
Table 29.2
General Statistics
N/A
Standard & Poor’s 500 change –1% –9%
Note: Minus sign means decline. N/A means no samples available.
a
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 456

a downward breakout. That period is only three bars on the weekly chart, but
it might seem like an eternity for a trader itchy to play the market.
Yearly position. In a bull market, the breakout appears most often within
a third of the yearly high. That finding suggests horns appear near a price peak
before tumbling. In a bear market, horns have breakouts most often in the
middle of the yearly trading range. Thus, you may see them appear in a down-
trend, after a brief rise, before the decline resumes.
Yearly position, performance. The best performing horn tops in a bear
market are those with breakouts near the yearly low. Additional samples may
change the result. In a bull market, the range splits between the yearly high
and low. In other words, avoid selecting horn tops in the middle of the yearly
price range.
Statistics 457
Table 29.3
Failure Rates
Maximum Price
10 68 or 26% 14 or 25%
15 114 or 43% 25 or 44%
20 144 or 54% 29 or 51%
25 177 or 67% 32 or 56%
30 208 or 78% 40 or 70%
35 224 or 84% 42 or 74%
50 258 or 97% 53 or 93%
75 266 or 100% 57 or 100%
Over 75 266 or 100% 57 or 100%
Table 29.4
12 month low (L), center (C), or high (H) H42% H30%
Percentage decline for each 12-month L23%, C19%, L26%a
, C23%a
,
Pullbacks 33% 44%
a
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 457

Pullbacks. Pullbacks are rare for horns. When they do occur, it takes just
over 2 weeks for price to return to the breakout price. When pullbacks occur,
postbreakout performance suffers. For example, in a bear market when a pull-
back happens, the postbreakout decline averages 18%. When a pullback is
absent, the decline is significantly larger—25%.
a bear market, for example, 26% of the horn tops reach the ultimate low in the
first week. In a bull market, 24% bottom during week one. At the other end of
the scale, about a third of the horns are still searching for the bottom well over
2 months after the breakout.
Notice how 14% of the bear market patterns bottom after the first month.
I have seen this behavior in other chart patterns. Why the 1-month mark is sig-
nificant is beyond me, but expect strength a month after the breakout.
Height. Since horns have a defined 3-week width, only height is impor-
tant. I compared horns to the median height as a percentage of the breakout
price and found that patterns taller than the median performed better after the
breakout than short ones. In a bull market, the results were the most striking,
with tall patterns showing drops of 26% and short patterns descending 18%.
Spike size. I compared the size of the horn spike (see the Glossary and
Methodology for the definition) with the average size over the prior year for
each stock. When the spike length was below average, performance improved.
For example, in a bull market, horns with a spike length above the average
dropped 19% after the breakout. Those with shorter spikes dropped 24%.
458 Horn Tops
Table 29.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market 26% 7% 9% 14% 2% 4% 4% 2% 2% 0% 32%
Bull market 24% 6% 7% 7% 4% 6% 3% 3% 3% 2% 36%
Table 29.6
Size Statistics
Above average spike size performance –19% –20%
Below average spike size performance –24% –25%a
a
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 458

Table 29.7 shows volume statistics for horns.
Volume trend. In a bear market, horns with a falling volume trend out-
performed those with a rising trend, but the sample count is low. In a bull mar-
ket, there was no performance difference.
Breakout volume. Heavy breakout volume seems to assist performance
in a bear market only.
Volume and spikes. I mapped performance for horns, sorted by the vol-
ume on each spike. Performance improved when volume was lighter than the
30-day average on the right spike. Performance deteriorated when right spike
volume was above average.
Table 29.8 shows miscellaneous statistics for horn tops.
Statistics 459
Table 29.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear
Rising volume trend performance –21% –19%a
Heavy volume on left spike, light on right, performance –22% –27%a
Heavy volume on left spike, high on right, performance –20% –19%a
Light volume on left spike, high on right, performance –20% –19%a
Light volume on left spike, light on right, performance –24% –24%a
a
Table 29.8
Bull Bear
Large price difference between horns, performance –22% –21%
Small price difference between horns, performance –20% –23%
Median difference as a percentage of breakout price 0.82% 0.90%
Lower left spike, performance –22% –21%a
Lower right spike, performance –20% –23%a
Equal spike, performance –21% –23%a
Right horn inside week, performance –18% –19%a
Right horn outside week, performance –22% –20%a
a
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 459

Price difference. I looked at the price difference between the two highs
in the horn top and compared it to the median. When there was a large price
variation in a bull market, the horn tended to perform better after the break-
out, by 22% to 20%. In a bear market, the results flipped, with small price vari-
ations showing better postbreakout performance, 23% to 21%.
Lower spike. In a bull market, the best performance came from horns
with a lower left spike; that is, the top of the left spike is below that of the right.
In a bear market, the best performance came from horns with the right spike
equal to or below the left spike top, but the sample count was small.
Inside and outside weeks. Horns did well when the right spike showed
a wider overlapping trading range than the left spike (an outside week, if you
ignore the center week). In other words, the right spike had a higher high and
lower low than the left spike. This finding compares to an inside week for the
right horn, meaning that the right spike was inside the trading range of the left
spike. In a bull market, horns that were outside weeks showed declines averag-
ing 22%. Horns that were inside weeks dropped only 18% after the breakout.
Trading Tactics
Table 29.9 shows trading tactics for horn tops.
Measure rule. Compute the horn height by subtracting the lowest low
from the highest high in the pattern. Subtract the result from the lowest low to
get the target price. In a bull market, price reaches the target 70% of the time.
In a bear market, price hits or exceeds the target 60% of the time.
460 Horn Tops
Table 29.9
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Subtract the lowest low from the highest high to get the pattern
height. Subtract the height from the lowest low to get the target
price.
Threat assessment Look for an uptrend spanning many months. Such uptrends
often show horns near the end of the trend. If the horn top
appears near the end of a long downtrend, then it is best to
avoid it. Watch out for horns appearing after a downward trend
when the trend changes and price starts moving higher. Prices
may decline but the decline is usually short-lived (as in the rise
between a double bottom).
Low volume The failure rate declines if below average volume appears on
both spikes, in a bull market.
Trend change A horn top usually signals an approaching trend change, usually
in less than 2 months.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 460

Threat assessment. After you have correctly identified the horn, look at
the surrounding price pattern. Is the stock trending higher and has it been
moving higher for months now? If so, then the horn may signal an approach-
ing top. Sometimes the horn calls the turn exactly while at other times it is off
by a few months (usually it precedes the turn but sometimes it lags).
If the horn appears on a downtrend, that is fine. The formation is simply
implying that the trend will continue moving down. However, should the horn
appear after an extended downtrend, then the possibility of further declines
may be in jeopardy. This behavior is especially true if the horn appears after a
long downtrend when prices are beginning to move up again (they are retrac-
ing some of their losses). Often the retrace signals a trend change. You will be
buying into a situation in which you believe prices will fall and retest the low,
but prices will dip slightly and then head higher.
Be cautious when selling short after a long downtrend, and be especially
cautious if the downtrend has ended and the horn seems to mark the end of an
upward retrace. Do not expect prices to fall far. They do occasionally but the
majority of the decline has already passed.
Low volume. Spikes with volume below the 1-month average show
lower failure rates while improving the average decline in a bull market. That
is worth considering before you place a trade.
Trend change. Even if a horn top fails and prices drop by less than 5%,
there is a chance that the horn is a premature signal of a bearish trend change.
Therefore, whenever you see a horn top, be aware that the end of an uptrend
may be just a few months away.
Sample Trade
You might be saying, “Those bromides are all fine and good, but how do I
really trade it?” Consider the situation in Figure 29.4 faced by Sandy. She
watched the complex head-and-shoulders formation take shape in a stock she
owned. Volume on the far left shoulder was higher than during the head, as
expected, and volume on the far right shoulder was further diminished. All in
all, it was setting up to be a dire situation. When she spotted the horn top
forming on the right shoulder, she knew the end was near.
Two weeks after the right horn spike appeared, she sold her holdings in
the stock for a tidy profit, but she was not finished. The following week, she
shorted the stock at 34.25. Her calculations using the measure rule for the
head-and-shoulder formation indicated a decline to 16. This was higher than
the 12 predicted by the measure rule because she used her sell point instead of
the breakout point (which was not reached yet so she had no idea what it was).
With the stock selling at 34, a drop to 16 seemed too optimistic. Still, she
watched with glee as the stock plummeted. In rapid order it fell to about 25
before meeting support. Sandy scanned the weekly chart looking for support
Sample Trade 461
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 461

levels and noticed one during October at about 24.50 and one during June at
around 23.75. Together, these two levels and the round number of 25 proba-
bly spelled a difficult time for the stock to continue lower.
When the stock headed back up in late May, she decided to close out her
position at 27. She pocketed about $7 a share in just over 4 months. When she
returned to the chart a year later, she saw that it did descend lower as the
head-and-shoulders formation predicted. During early November, it reached
a low of 20.13, still well above the calculated 16 target she used and the 12 pre-
dicted by the measure rule. The flip side of this story is that after she sold the
stock, it climbed to 30.75, just 10% below her sell point.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select horns that perform
better after the breakout. Consult the associated table for more information.
• This bearish chart pattern is rare in a bear market—Table 29.2.
• Horns in a bear market have lower failure rates—Table 29.3.
• Select patterns near the yearly low—Table 29.4.
• Pullbacks hurt performance—Table 29.4.
462 Horn Tops
Bassett Furniture Ind. (Furn./Home Furnishings, NASDAQ, BSET)
Head
Left Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Stock
Sold
Here
Right
Shoulder
Short
Covered
Support Level
Right
Shoulder
Horn Top
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
92 93
D F M
M M
A A A M
S O N
J
J J 94 F M A M J
J A S O N D
Figure 29.4 A horn top appears as part of the right shoulder of a complex head-
and-shoulders formation.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 462

• In a bear market, watch for a trend change about a month into the
trade—Table 29.5.
• Pick tall patterns—Table 29.6.
• Horns in a bear market with a falling volume trend perform better—
Table 29.7.
• Choose horns with volume on the right spike below the 1-month aver-
age—Table 29.7.
• Select horns with the right horn outside the trading range of the left
one—Table 29.8.
4366_29.qxd 2/23/05 12:03 PM Page 463

464
30
Island Reversals
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Tops (Downward Breakouts)
Appearance Prices gap up to the formation and then gap
down at the same price level, leaving an
island. Breakout is downward.
Pullbacks 65% 59%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance. Patterns both
tall and narrow do best.
See also Islands, Long
G G G G
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 464

Bottoms (Upward Breakouts)
Appearance Prices gap down to the formation and then
gap up at the same price level, leaving an
island. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 70% 75%
Surprising findings Throwbacks hurt performance.
See also Islands, Long
The performance of island reversals is perhaps surprising only for its medioc-
rity. Failure rates for both tops and bottoms are reasonable, holding below the
20% threshold that I view as the maximum allowable for reliable formations.
The average decline from an island top ranges between 17% and 23%,
depending on market conditions. The range is similar to many other bearish
chart patterns. However, the average rise from an island bottom is a disap-
pointing 21% to 23%, and that is well below the 35% to 40% I like to see for
bullish chart patterns.
With these mediocre performers, trading every island that you see is a
way to drown in losses. You can improve performance by selecting patterns
with the proper height and width characteristics for the market you are trad-
ing, as described later in this chapter.
Pullbacks and throwbacks are prevalent, suggesting that the gap after the
island completes closes quickly. Investors can make use of this behavior to
delay their investments until the pullback or throwback completes and prices
resume their breakout direction.
Tour
Figure 30.1 shows what island reversals look like. The first island, shown on
the far left, is a one-day reversal. In the study of islands, I did not tabulate such
narrow formations, but the figure shows an example of a small reversal. The
Tour 465
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 465

center formation is an island bottom. Prices gap downward in mid-September,
reach a new low in early October, and then gap upward later in the month. The
two gaps appear at about the same price level, 11.50. From that point, prices
climb quite rapidly and reach a high of 21.50, well above the 11.25 price posted
the day before the breakout. Notice that the breakout is on very high volume.
The last island highlighted on the chart is near the top. It is an island top and
prices move down from about 20 to less than 8. This formation is a traditional
island top because of its compact size. I did not count it in my tabulations
because the gap on the right is less than the 0.25 point I used to filter such for-
mations. Still it does emphasize a trend reversal with excellent timing. Not
highlighted is a very large island top. The island bottom shares the left gap
(point A) while the right gap is the large price decline in mid-June (point B).
The large island is almost 8 months long.
Island reversals are easy to identify and Table 30.1 shows the identification
characteristics.
Shape. Both types of reversals, tops and bottoms, are set off by gaps. The
gaps appear at or near the same price level but are typically not the same size.
The large gap marked as point B in Figure 30.1 (on the far right) makes this
clear. That gap has a size of almost 5 while the one on the left (point A) is only
0.38 wide.
466 Island Reversals
Island Bottom
Above,
Island
Top
Island Bottom
or One-Day
Reversal
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
B
C
A
Figure 30.1 A one-day reversal, island bottom, and island top. You can see the
price change that results after each reversal.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 466

As far as identification goes, the gap in mid-December 1991 (point C)
should not be paired with the gap in late October (point A) since they are not
at the same price level. Even though the price pattern looks like an island
because it is set off by gaps, it is not an island reversal by the traditional defin-
ition. The gaps must overlap prices or be quite close to one another. In this
study, all islands have price gaps within 0.13 of one another and are at least
0.25 or larger. In addition, I did not consider one-day reversals (islands com-
posed of 1 day) as part of this study. I believe that such islands are too difficult
on which to base an effective trading policy.
Price trends. Consider Figure 30.2, which shows several island reversals.
The first two islands happen as part of a retrace in a downtrend. The small
island tops last for about a week before prices resume their downward plunge.
The island bottom forms after an extensive decline that sees prices drop
from a high of 36.50 to 12 in less than 5 months. The exhaustion gap occurs on
very high volume and prices that day have a very large 3.50 trading range. The
gap remains open until prices gap upward in late January. Looking at the bot-
tom formation overall, it looks like a complex head-and-shoulders bottom.
Marked on the figure are the dual shoulders and duplicate heads. The volume
for the head-and-shoulders pattern is what you would expect: highest on the
left shoulder, diminished on the head, and quite low on the right shoulder.
Only after price gaps upward does volume spike higher for 2 days before recov-
ering and trending downward.
The island top on the right of the figure is somewhat difficult to spot
because of the large gap on the left that matches the small one on the right. It
only takes a few days for prices to reach their high before easing down. When
prices gap lower at the end of March, volume does not budge.
Table 30.1
Shape Gaps set off both island tops and bottoms and share all or part of
the same price level. Most times, prices move away from the gaps
leaving the island with a clear view of the opposing gap (the left
gap usually does not close quickly).
Rising trend Tops have prices that lead up to the left gap and fall away from
the right gap.
Falling trend Bottoms have prices that lead down to the left gap and rise away
from the right gap.
Volume Volume is usually high on the breakout day (the day prices make
a second gap and form the island) but need not be.
Time The island can be from one day (a one-day reversal) to several
months long. Some analysts have suggested that islands are quite
short, up to a week or two, with relatively flat price zones, but I
placed no such restrictions on them.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 467

Volume. Volume usually trends downward over the length of the pattern
from gap to gap, taking on a dome shape about 57% of the time and a U shape
34% of the time. The remainder is a random shape. Breakout day volume is
heavy 79% of the time when compared to the 30-day volume average.
What does all of this mean? Nothing. Volume may be dome shaped
and slope downward, obeying the normal characteristics or it may not. Any-
thing goes.
Time. The average length for an island is just over a month, but it can
vary from a single day to 6 months or a year. Islands too long may be difficult
to spot. If traders do not recognize a pattern, then they will not trade it. Stick
with obvious islands, usually of short duration (say, 3 months).
Focus on Failures
Failures come in all manners of depiction. Look at Figure 30.3, a chart of a
large island top. This failure is typical of many formations, especially those
with small declines. The island is unusual as it forms after a region of consoli-
dation. The first gap is a breakaway gap since it breaks away from the consoli-
dation region on high volume and prices move up. The second gap is an
exhaustion gap that closes quickly.
The figure shows a 5% failure. Prices head lower after the second gap on
the right, but decline by no more than 5% before recovering and moving sub-
Ann Taylor (Retail (Special Lines), NYSE, ANN)
Head Head
Shoulder
Shoulder
Shoulder
Shoulder
Island Top
Island Top
Island Top
Island Bottom
– 35
– 33
– 31
– 29
– 27
– 25
– 23
– 21
– 19
– 17
– 15
– 13
– 11
– 9
– 7
– 5
Figure 30.2 Several island reversals, some with short durations and some with
longer durations. The island bottom is also a complex head-and-shoulders bottom
that retests the neckline in April.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 468

stantially higher. Why? There is a common law, for lack of a better term, that
says a reversal will only travel as far as the prior rise. In other words, a reversal
has to have something to reverse. In Figure 30.3, you can see that prices con-
solidate for 2 months. When the island top appears, what is there to reverse?
The rise from December to mid-February, when prices rise from roughly 55
to 65, unwinds. Prices move steadily lower at first, then plunge, and end back
at 56. Beyond that, the prior year’s worth of support at that level is just too
extensive to allow any further decline. There has to be something to reverse.
Remember that before you take a position in a stock, especially something
such as an island reversal that is known to be light on performance.
Figure 30.4 shows another failure. The island bottom is clearly visible on
the chart. The two gaps separate the main body of the island from the main-
land with plenty of clear ocean. Over the course of the formation, the first gap
remains open. The second gap closes about a week after prices throw back to
the breakout point. Then prices continue lower.
How could you have known that this island bottom would rise less than
5% before sinking? For island bottoms, throwbacks occur 70–75% of the time,
on average. This high rate allows an investor the luxury of waiting before
investing. Once the stock throws back to the formation, wait for prices to
recover. Assuming they do, jump in and buy the stock.
In the situation shown in Figure 30.4, the stock did not recover; it con-
tinued down. Had the investor been paying attention, he would not have got-
ten himself into this money-losing situation in the first place.
Emerson Electric Co. (Electrical Equipment, NYSE, EMR)
Pullback
Island Top
Oct 93 Nov Dec
– 67
– 66
– 65
– 64
– 63
– 62
– 61
– 60
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
Figure 30.3 Long island top that fails because prices drop by less than 5%. A
reversal needs something to reverse.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 469

Is there another reason to suspect this island? Sure, and it is called a trend
line. If you draw a down-sloping trend line along the peaks, beginning with the
tallest one, you quickly discover that the minor peak after the island bottom
(point C) falls well short of the trend line. Trend lines are known for their abil-
ity to stop price movement. In this case the trend line acts as resistance to the
rising trend. It repels the advance and prices turn lower.
In other words, the investor should have waited for price to close above
the trend line before buying the stock. Even if he mistakenly connects points
A and B with a trend line and extends it downward through point C, it should
give him pause. Although prices pierce the trend line, they fail to close above
it. If they cannot close above it, how will prices rise?
Statistics
Table 30.2 is swimming with island statistics.
Number of formations. I found 917 islands without really trying. My
selections were limited to gaps at least $0.25 in size and no more than $0.13
away from each other in price (gap to gap). I used 500 stocks from mid-1991
to mid-1996 and bracketed another 500 around the 2000–2002 bear market.
Reversal or continuation. By definition, all patterns acted as reversals
of the preceding trend. That means tops broke out downward and bottoms
broke out upward, changing the trend from up to down (tops) and down to up
(bottoms).
McDermott International (Oilfield SVCS/Equipment, NYSE, MDR)
Throwback
Island
Bottom
Jan 94 Feb
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
B
C
A
Figure 30.4 An island bottom failure. Wait for price to close above the trend line
before investing in this island bottom. Since it does not (at point C), skip this trade.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 470

Average rise or decline. The best performance came from upward
breakouts in a bull market and downward breakouts in a bear market, so trade
this pattern with the prevailing market trend. Going against the market is like
trying to cross a six-lane highway on foot: It is possible but dangerous.
Since all islands have a gap on the breakout day, I used the intraday low
(upward breakouts) or intraday high (downward breakouts) the day after the
breakout as the breakout price. This delay assumes you bought at the best
price the day after the breakout. Using the formation high (upward breakout)
or low (downward breakout) favorably changes the average rise or decline, but
only by one or two percentage points.
Rises or declines over 45%. Large rises occur more frequently than
large losses for the island pattern. However, that behavior is standard for many
other bullish and bearish chart patterns.
Change after trend ends. Once the breakout trend ends, prices drop
between 28% and 37% from the ultimate high, or rise between 45% and 46%
from the ultimate low. The rise is well below the 50% to 60% performance of
Busted pattern performance. The results are disappointing. For upward
breakouts, a rise of 50% or 60% is typical. Since the performance numbers for
busted patterns are so low, I would look elsewhere for a more promising pattern.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. From the breakout of the island to the
ultimate high or low, the S&P ranged from an 8% climb to a 10% drop.
Notice how the numbers track the average rise or decline. I mean that the
largest rise associates with a large general market gain, and the largest decline
(bear market, down breakout) associates with a 10% decline in the S&P. This
connection suggests you should trade with the prevailing market trend. Go
long in a bull market and short in a bear market.
Statistics 471
Table 30.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Reversal (R), continuation (C) 345 R 118 R 289 R 165 R
Busted pattern performance 42% 23%a
–24% –26%a
Standard & Poor’s 500 change 8% 1% 0% –10%
a
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 471

Days to ultimate high or low. Patterns in a bull market with an upward
breakout took more than twice as long as the other combinations to reach the
ultimate high or low. Notice that islands in a bear market with a downward
breakout took 34 days compared to 128 in a bull market (up breakout). Since
both travel the same distance, 23%, the decline must be dramatically steeper
than the rise in a bull market. The implication here is that you should be in
cash instead of holding stock in a bear market.
Table 30.3 shows failure rates for islands. For example, 18% of islands in
a bull market with an upward breakout failed to rise more than 5%. Nearly
half, 47%, failed to rise more than 15%. For downward breakouts, read the
table the same way. In a bear market, 5% failed to drop more than 5% after the
breakout. This is the lowest failure rate of the bunch. Nearly half (47%) failed
to drop more than 20%.
Islands in a bear market with downward breakouts do well (have the low-
est failure rates) until the decline reaches 30%. After that, bull markets, upward
breakouts outperform by having the lowest failure rates.
Notice how the rates progress in each column. For example, in a bear
market with an upward breakout, the failure rate triples from 10% to 29% and
nearly doubles again to 47% for price moves of 5%, 10%, and 15%. This
tripling and doubling is common for chart patterns. It suggests that good per-
formers are hard to find, so you need every break you can get. That is why
things like trading with the market trend, using stops, and selling at a profit
when the stock, industry, and general market begin showing weakness can spell
the difference between a millionaire trader and a homeless investor.
Table 30.3
Failure Rates
10 125 or 36% 34 or 29% 119 or 41% 38 or 23%
15 163 or 47% 55 or 47% 160 or 55% 54 or 33%
20 196 or 57% 71 or 60% 199 or 69% 78 or 47%
25 218 or 63% 78 or 66% 218 or 75% 93 or 56%
30 234 or 68% 84 or 71% 239 or 83% 111 or 67%
35 248 or 72% 89 or 75% 255 or 88% 129 or 78%
50 285 or 83% 106 or 90% 281 or 97% 156 or 95%
75 317 or 92% 117 or 99% 289 or 100% 165 or 100%
Over 75 345 or 100% 118 or 100% 289 or 100% 165 or 100%
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 472

473
Table
30.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
1
day
1
day
2
days
2
days
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
L26%,
C32%,
H42%
L44%,
C38%,
H19%
L26%,
C41%,
H33%
L47%,
C38%,
H15%
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
L24%,
C24%,
H23%
L23%,
C22%,
H15%
a
L20%,
C16%,
H15%
L21%,
C24%,
H28%
a
12-month
lookback
period
70%
75%
65%
59%
Average
time
to
throwback/
pullback
ends
9
days
6
days
8
days
8
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
18%
19%
–14%
–19%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
38%
28%
a
–23%
–30%
Note:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
a
Fewer
than
30
samples.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 473

Formation end to breakout. The breakout occurs the day price makes
a second gap. Since this event may occur over a weekend or a holiday, the aver-
age time to the breakout from the island end is 1 or 2 days.
Yearly position. These numbers tell me that islands happen anywhere in
the yearly price range. For example, islands in bull markets with upward break-
outs happen most often when the breakout is near the yearly high. Islands in a
bear market with an upward breakout form near the yearly low, and bull mar-
ket, down breakout patterns appear most often in the middle of the yearly
trading range.
Yearly position, performance. Most of the numbers indicate that the
best performing islands have breakouts near the yearly low. This finding is true
for all market conditions and breakout directions except bear markets, down
breakouts. Those do best when the downward breakout is near the yearly high.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. Throwbacks and pullbacks occur often for
islands (between 59% and 75% of the time), suggesting that the second island
gap closes quickly. The time to complete the return to the breakout price
varies from 6 to 9 days, which is unusually fast (11 or 12 days is more typical).
When a throwback or pullback occurs, performance suffers. For example,
islands in a bull market with upward breakouts and a throwback climb 18%
after the breakout. When a throwback does not occur, the rise measures
38%—a substantial difference.
Before you trade islands, check for underlying support or overhead resis-
tance. If a stock has nearby support or resistance, then consider looking for a
more promising situation. After all, once a throwback or pullback occurs, the
price may continue moving in the adverse direction, setting you up for a loss.
low. As you can see, about a third of the patterns reach the ultimate high or low
in the first week. On the other end of the scale, you can see that few islands
continue moving in the breakout direction after 2 months. They are the ones
still searching for the ultimate high or low.
Table 30.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 32% 7% 8% 7% 4% 5% 2% 3% 3% 3% 25%
Bull market,
up breakout 30% 6% 6% 6% 4% 3% 3% 2% 2% 1% 38%
Bear market,
down
breakout 39% 11% 8% 5% 5% 4% 5% 4% 2% 2% 15%
Bull market,
down
breakout 33% 7% 6% 5% 6% 4% 3% 4% 1% 3% 27%
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 474

Bear markets typically show softness a month to 6 or 7 weeks after the
breakout. This characteristic shows in the numbers for upward breakouts (day
42 at 5%) and downward breakouts (day 49). Islands in bull markets with down-
ward breakouts also show a slight rise during day 35 (6% bottom out then).
Height. Tall patterns perform as well as or better than short ones most
of the time. For example, islands taller than the median in a bull market with a
downward breakout show declines of 20%. Short islands lose only 14% after
the breakout.
Width. The results for width follow market conditions. Wide islands
perform best in bull markets. Narrow islands do well in bear markets. I mea-
sured the width from gap to gap, as you might expect, and all comparisons are
against the median widths shown in Table 30.6.
Average formation length. The average island is about a month long,
except islands in a bear market with downward breakouts: They average 45
days long.
Height and width combinations. Looking at the combinations of
height and width, the best performance comes from patterns that are both tall
and narrow (except in a bear market with upward breakout). The worst per-
formance comes from islands that are both short and wide.
Statistics 475
Table 30.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
of breakout price
–12%a
–20%a
–22%a
–30%a
a
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 475

Volume trend. For bull markets, volume trend is not a good predictor of
performance, meaning that the results in each column are too close to one
another. However, islands in a bear market with a downward volume trend
perform substantially better.
Volume shapes. The results are all over the map. Islands with breakouts
in the direction of the bull (upward breakout) or bear (downward breakout)
market do well with U-shaped volume. The other combinations slip between a
random volume shape or dome.
Trading Tactics
Table 30.8 outlines trading tactics.
Measure rule. The first trading tactic is not really a tactic at all; it is the
measure rule, which assists investors in gauging whether a trade is worth risk-
ing. Consider the island bottom shown in Figure 30.5. The highest high in the
formation is 24.63 (which is just below the gap in early February, not the larger
gap in mid-February) while the low is 17.50. Add the difference of 7.13 to the
highest high to get the predicted price target. In this case, the target is 31.75,
a target not reached before the formation fails.
Wait for pullback or throwback. There are two ways to trade islands.
To reduce risk, you can buy immediately after the breakout and ride the price
move until it begins turning on the way back to the breakout price (during a
Table 30.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Rising volume trend
17% 17%
U-shaped volume
pattern performance 27% 19% 16% 25%
Dome-shaped volume
pattern performance 22% 22% 17% 24%
Neither U-shaped nor
dome-shaped volume 23%a
11%a
22%a
17%a
pattern performance
a
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 476

throwback or pullback). If prices reverse, it will be quick, usually in the first
week or two. Trading in this manner allows you to profit from the large first
week move.
To avoid a throwback or pullback and enjoy a larger average move, look
for underlying support or overhead resistance. With nearby support or resis-
tance, the stock is more likely to throw back or pull back.
Trading Tactics 477
Table 30.8
Trading Tactics
from the highest high in the formation. Add the difference to
the highest high for island bottoms, and subtract the difference
from the lowest low for island tops. The result is the target to
which prices should rise (for bottoms) or fall (for tops).
Wait for pullback Island reversals show a reluctance to continue moving in the
or throwback direction of the breakout. Prices usually reverse direction and
quickly fill the gap before recovering and resuming their
original trend. Wait for the pullback (tops) or throwback
(bottoms) to complete and prices to resume their original
direction before investing.
Watch trend lines Trend lines, when pierced, often signal a trend change. Should
an island reversal appear near a trend line, wait for prices to
close beyond the trend line before investing.
Cirrus Logic Inc. (Semiconductor, NASDAQ, CRUS)
– 62
– 60
– 58
– 56
– 54
– 52
– 50
– 48
– 46
– 44
– 42
– 40
– 38
– 36
– 34
– 32
– 30
– 28
– 26
– 24
– 22
– 20
– 18
– 16
– 14
– 12
– 10
– 8
Lowest Low
Island
Bottom
Predicted Price Target
Down Trend Line
Day of Highest High
in the Island
Sep 95 Oct Nov Dec
Figure 30.5 A failed island bottom. Sometimes the best trade you can make is
none at all.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 477

The second way to trade islands is wait for the pullback or throwback to
complete. Since pullbacks and throwbacks occur a majority of the time and
since island reversals have a low failure rate but poor performance, it is wise to
wait for the retrace. It usually occurs a week or two after the second gap. If a
pullback or throwback does not occur quickly (in less than a month), then
move on to the next trading situation.
When a pullback or throwback occurs, do not invest immediately. Wait
for the retrace to complete and for prices to turn around and resume their orig-
inal direction. Sometimes prices retrace to the formation, then continue mov-
ing in the adverse direction.
Watch trend lines. In the Focus on Failures section of this chapter I dis-
cuss the use of the trend line in detail, so there is not much added here. How-
ever, both up and down trend lines can show a trend change. Wait for prices
to close above a down trend line or below an up trend line before pulling the
trigger. Many times prices will near the trend line and be repulsed, so you want
to make sure that the piercing does, indeed, signal a change in trend.
Sample Trade
Consider the situation faced by Clarence as illustrated in Figure 30.5. He
watched the semiconductor company’s stock plummet. During November and
December, the stock formed a long island consolidation. He knew it was not a
reversal because the two gaps did not line up across from each other. Then
another island formed in January to early February.
Since prices gapped down to the second formation then gapped up away
from it, he knew he was dealing with an island bottom, a better investment
choice for performance than an island top. He used the measure rule to gauge
the likely price to which the stock would climb. The target represented nearly
a 30% rise in price, large enough to risk a trade.
Before he bought the stock, he made a few checks. He saw that the trend
was down, as the stock had fallen from a high of 61.13 to the island low of
17.50. Clarence drew the trend line from the highest high downward and saw
it go through the right island gap. This was a good sign as prices had moved
above the line and closed there. It signaled a possible trend change.
Still, something did not feel right about the stock. It had made a new low
and the semiconductor industry as a whole was soft. Did the island bottom
really mark a turning point or would the stock simply rise up, spin around, and
retest the low? He was unsure, so he decided to wait and see if prices threw
back to the formation. If they threw back then continued higher, he would buy
the stock. Three days after the upward breakout, the stock threw back and
closed the gap. Now, Clarence knew, all the stock had to do was move higher.
It did not. The stock continued moving down and in less than a week had
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 478

slipped below the trend line again. He decided to look elsewhere for a more
promising situation.
Looking back at the stock well over a year later, he saw that it reached a
low of 8 and never rose above 27.25, the high just after it pierced the trend line.
He realized that sometimes the best trade you can make is none at all.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select islands that per-
• Trade with the general market trend: upward breakouts in a bull mar-
ket, downward breakouts in a bear market—Table 30.2
• Prices in a bear market move up to four times as fast as in a bull mar-
ket—Table 30.2.
• Downward breakouts in a bear market have the lowest failure rates—
Table 30.3.
• Select patterns with breakouts near the yearly low except for downward
breakouts in a bear market—Table 30.4.
• Throwbacks and pullbacks hurt performance. Search for overhead
resistance or underlying support before trading—Table 30.4.
• A third of the patterns reach the ultimate high or low in the first
week—Table 30.5.
• Select tall or wide patterns in a bull market, narrow ones in a bear
market—Table 30.6.
• Choose islands with a falling volume trend in a bear market—Table
30.7.
4366_30.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 479

480
31
Islands, Long
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Upward Breakouts
Appearance A price island set off by gaps, usually at
unequal prices. Breakout is upward.
Throwbacks 67% 74%
(using half the formation height) 82% 72%
Surprising findings Breakouts near the yearly low perform
best. Throwbacks hurt performance. Tall
or narrow patterns perform better than
short or wide ones. Islands get shorter as
they near the end of the trend.
See also Island Reversals
G
G
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 480

Downward Breakouts
Pullbacks 54% 54%
(using half the formation height) 78% 76%
Surprising findings Pullbacks hurt performance. Islands with
large gaps drop farther. Tall patterns
perform better than short ones. Islands get
shorter as they near the end of the trend.
See also Same as for upward breakouts.
The long island is a new pattern, but one I am sure many of you have seen
before. When I first started looking for island reversals years ago, I thought
long islands qualified. They do not. The difference between a long island and
an island reversal is the gap alignment. With island reversals, the two gaps
must share the same price. With long islands, the gap price is usually different.
When I started searching for long islands, I found them everywhere, so I
raised the qualifications until I had a workable number. The Identification
Guidelines section discusses the qualifications I settled on.
Long islands are average performers. Most of the time, the break-even
failure rates are quite low and the average decline is good. The average rise is
shy of outstanding as it tops out at just 31% in a bull market.
Surprises are the usual lot and most need no explanation. The exception:
Islands tend to get shorter as they approach the end of the trend. That obser-
vation can help you avoid an unprofitable trade and help you predict a coming
trend change.
Tour
By now, you may be wondering what a long island looks like. Figure 31.1
shows two examples. The first island appears between gaps 1 and 2, and it
Tour 481
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 481

occurs during late May and into June. In this example, volume has a U shape.
Notice how the gaps do not share the same price and the island floats amidst
the longer mainland.
The second long island, between gaps 2 and 3, also has gaps that do not
align in price. This island is longer, lasting from June into July when it com-
pletes with an upward breakout. Again, the island tends to float away from the
mainland but the gaps are not this wide in a typical island.
Depending on how you define a long island, others appear between gaps
3 and 4, 4 and 5, 5 and 6, and 6 and 7. For the record, I used only the first two
as the others had gaps that were too narrow to qualify.
What are the qualifications for long islands? Before I answer that, let us look at
a few more examples. Figure 31.2 shows four more islands. The first appears
between gaps 1 and 2. The first gap is about $2.20 wide and the second is $1.35.
The island is just shy of 3 months long. The two gaps do not align, although I did
not exclude an island that had aligned gaps. Gaps that overlap qualify the island
as an island reversal. Eighteen percent of the long islands used in this study were
also island reversals. Think of island reversals as a special case of long islands.
Although it is not clear from Figure 31.2, the first long island marks a
continuation of a long-term uptrend that began in October 2001 at a price of
482 Islands, Long
1
2
Long Island
Long Island
3
4
5
6
7
Abbot Laboratories (Medical Supplies, NYSE, ABT)
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
02 May Jun Jul
Feb Mar Apr Aug Sep Oct Nov
Figure 31.1 A long island appears between gaps 1 and 2 and a second long
island appears between gaps 2 and 3.
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 482

5.51. Gaps 2 and 3 mark the next island, also an uptrend continuation. Gaps 3
and 4 show an island that forms the peak and marks a trend reversal.
Notice how the islands get shorter as they near the end of the trend. The
length of each island in the uptrend is, from left to right, 88 days, 77 days, and
12 days.
Table 31.1 shows identification guidelines for long islands. I created a
computer program to find these patterns. When I ran it, it found well over
2,000. So, I increased the gap size and shortened the island length. This chap-
ter shows the results of that study and Table 31.1 shows the parameters I used.
1
2
Long Island
Long Island
Long Island
Long Island
3 4
5
Amazon.com Inc. (Internet, NASDAQ, AMZN)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
53
56
59
Figure 31.2 Four long islands appear, all with gaps at least $1 wide and less than
4 months long.
Table 31.1
Unaligned gaps The two gaps do not share the same price, usually. Those that
do are also island reversals.
Wide gaps Look for both gaps to be at least $1 wide. This qualification sets
off the island from the surrounding price bars.
Short length Look for islands shorter than 4 months.
U-shaped volume Most of the islands will have volume spikes at each gap, forming
a U-shaped volume pattern.
Islands in sequence Islands get shorter as they appear in a trend.
Breakout The second gap marks the breakout day.
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 483

Unaligned gaps. Look for two gaps that do not share the same price. If
they do have prices in common, then you are looking at an island reversal. I did
not exclude island reversals in my study of islands, but they made up only 18%
of the samples. An island reversal is also a long island, but a long island is not
necessarily an island reversal.
Wide gaps. Small gaps occur frequently, so I looked for gaps at least $1
wide. This parameter cut the number of islands dramatically, but I still found
almost 1,000 in just over 200 stocks.
Short length. I chose islands that were less than 4 months long. This
time frame is longer than a fiscal quarter (3 months) and yet is not too long to
be invisible (think of a double bottom with bottoms a year apart . . . how many
traders will notice?).
U-shaped volume. When price gaps, volume usually explodes then
recedes. This behavior gives the typical long island a U-shaped volume pattern.
Do not exclude a long island simply because of the volume pattern, especially
since those with dome-shaped volume usually perform better.
Islands in sequence. When multiple islands appear in the same price
trend, they tend to get shorter in length. Figure 31.2 shows an example of this
behavior. The first island on the far left (gaps 1 and 2) is wider than the fol-
lowing one (gaps 2 and 3) and island 3–4 is the shortest of the lot. The 3–4
island marks the end of the uptrend.
Breakout. A breakout occurs on the second gap.
Using these identification guidelines, long islands are both plentiful and
highly visible on the daily chart.
Focus on Failures
Figure 31.3 shows what an island failure looks like. The figure is an example of
what happened to airline stocks when the tragic event of September 11, 2001,
occurred. The stock market closed for a week and when it reopened, airline
stocks gapped downward (gap 1). From then on, price continued lower for sev-
eral days, then bounced, and made a slightly lower low. Then the stock recov-
ered and formed a symmetrical triangle.
In mid-November, the stock gapped downward (gap 2) and other airline
stocks also showed weakness on that day, but I do not know why. I do know
that it was less than 2 weeks after the release of quarterly numbers. The down-
ward breakout was short-lived as price recovered the next day and continued
moving higher.
This is a good example of the need for a stop-loss order. A stop would
have limited losses if a trader shorted the stock after the downward breakout.
Without a stop, a trader would have seen the price climb from a low of 14.85
to a high of 35.25 less than 4 months later, a rise of 137%.
The good news is that losses of this nature, where price moves less than
5% in the breakout direction (a busted pattern), are rare except in a bull mar-
484 Islands, Long
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 484

ket with an upward breakout. In that case, the failure rate is 11%. That infor-
mation conveniently segues into statistics.
Statistics
Table 31.2 shows the general statistics for long islands.
Number of formations. I found the pattern in 220 stocks in two groups
from 1996 to 2001 and from 1999 to 2003. I actually used about 500 stocks to
locate the 220, with about half the stocks showing no long islands (many were
also not of full duration from 1996 to 2001). I located 920 long islands in the
stocks I looked at.
Reversal or continuation. The pattern acts as a continuation of the
trend more often than as a reversal—54% versus 46% of the time. You can see
in Table 31.2 that most of the continuations occur when the breakout direction
is in line with the market trend (bull market, up breakout and bear market,
down breakout). More reversals occur when trading against the market trend.
Reversals outperform continuations in a bear market when long islands have an
upward breakout.
Average rise or decline. The bear market performance is quite good,
but the bull market performance is below the average of other chart pattern
types. The numbers suggest you should trade with the market trend—upward
breakouts in a bull market and downward breakouts in a bear market.
Statistics 485
Long Island
Pullback
Symmetrical
Triangle
1
2
Continental Air, Inc. (Air Transport, NYSE, CAL)
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
35
38
41
44
47
51
01 Mar Apr
Jun Jul Feb
Figure 31.3 Price breaks out downward but recovers, resulting in a pattern failure.
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 485

Rises or declines over 45%. The bull market shows the largest price
moves with 28% and 17% of the islands rising more than 45%. Downward
breakouts never show such large moves on a consistent basis.
Change after trend ends. Once the trend ends (at the ultimate high or
low), prices drop about 36% in a bull market and soar about 47% in a bear
market. This finding suggests that trading a stock, as opposed to buying and
holding, is the way to larger profits. The numbers also serve as a warning that
holding on too long means you may give up all of your gains and more.
Busted pattern performance. Islands with breakouts that move less than
5% before shooting off in the direction opposite the breakout are few but they
perform well. The 58% rise in a bull market is especially good. With a rise that
far, even if you are late climbing aboard the new trend it can still be profitable.
Standard & Poor’s 500 change. Notice how the average rise or decline
follows the S&P. For example, islands in a bull market with upward breakouts
have the best performance. The S&P climbed the most (8%), too, during that
period. Large downward moves in the general market (7% decline during a
bear market for islands with downward breakouts) helped the bearish islands
perform by declining 26%.
Days to ultimate high or low. The time to the ultimate high or low
diminishes from the left column to the right. If you crunch the numbers, you
will find that the bear market performance (downward breakouts) is shorter
and steeper than the rise in a bull market (up breakouts). Trading the pattern
in a bear market (with downward breakouts) allows for more trades annually.
486 Islands, Long
Table 31.2
General Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
145 C 92 C 94 C 163 C
R/C performance 31% R, 27% R, 22% R, 26% R,
31% C 24% C 22% C 26% C
Average rise or decline 31% 25% 22% 26%
37%a
–28%a
–33%a
a
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 486

Table 31.3 shows failure rates for long islands. Let me explain this table
with a few examples. Twenty-seven, or 11%, of the islands in a bull market
with upward breakouts fail to rise at least 5%. This figure nearly triples to 28%
for rises less than 10%. In a bear market, downward breakouts do best with 2%
of the islands failing to decline at least 5%. This statistic zooms to 14% failing
to drop at least 10%.
If you know the cost of doing business (however you define this, such as
commissions, SEC fees, utilities, or even rent), you can use Table 31.3 to esti-
mate how often this pattern will fail. Suppose your cost of trading is 5% and
you want to make an average of 20%. How often will this pattern fail? Look at
the 25% row (5% cost plus 20% margin). The best performing islands happen
in a bear market with downward breakouts. Over half (56%) fail to drop at least
25%. Since half the patterns will fail, the winners will have to substantially out-
perform the losers to give you a 25% profit margin.
Table 31.4 shows breakout- and postbreakout-related statistics for long
islands.
Formation end to breakout. The average time from the end of the pat-
tern to the breakout is a single day except when it falls on a weekend or holi-
day. For that reason, the bull market, upward breakout averages 2 days.
Yearly position. Islands with downward breakouts occur most often near
the yearly low. Islands with upward breakouts happen frequently near the
yearly high (bull market) or middle (bear market) of the yearly price range.
Yearly position, performance. Where do the best performing islands
reside? Most of the time, look for islands near the yearly low. The exception is
for islands with downward breakouts in a bear market. They do best when the
Statistics 487
Table 31.3
Failure Rates
10 72 or 28% 48 or 23% 41 or 21% 38 or 14%
15 109 or 43% 81 or 39% 75 or 39% 75 or 28%
20 136 or 53% 106 or 51% 105 or 54% 115 or 43%
25 146 or 57% 129 or 63% 134 or 69% 150 or 56%
30 157 or 62% 145 or 70% 152 or 79% 180 or 68%
35 167 or 65% 153 or 74% 163 or 84% 200 or 75%
50 196 or 77% 177 or 86% 185 or 96% 250 or 94%
75 119 or 86% 196 or 95% 193 or 100% 266 or 100%
Over 75 255 or 100% 206 or 100% 193 or 100% 266 or 100%
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 487

488
Table
31.4
Breakout
and
Postbreakout
Statistics
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Bull
Market,
Bear
Market,
Description
Up
Breakout
Up
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Down
Breakout
Formation
end
to
breakout
2
1
1
1
Percentage
of
breakouts
occurring
near
the
12-month
low
(L),
center
(C),
or
high
(H)
L13%,
C20%,
H67%
L33%,
C38%,
H29%
L43%,
C26%,
H31%
L53%,
C33%,
H13%
Percentage
rise/decline
for
each
12-month
lookback
period
L34%,
C21%,
H33%
L27%,
C25%,
H24%
L27%,
C21%,
H20%
L25%,
C25%,
H30%
67%
74%
54%
54%
Average
time
to
throwback/pullback
ends
9
days
8
days
9
days
10
days
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
with
throwback/pullback
24%
19%
–18%
–20%
Average
rise/decline
for
patterns
without
throwback/pullback
54%
44%
–28%
–34%
Large
gaps,
performance
32%
32%
–27%
–32%
Small
gaps,
performance
45%
32%
–23%
–30%
Median
gap
size
$1.25
$1.29
$1.34
$1.26
Notes:
Minus
sign
means
decline.
Gaps
are
measured
from
the
closing
price
the
day
before
the
breakout
to
the
ultimate
high
or
low.
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 488

breakout is near the yearly high, but also note that the sample size is small—
just 13% of the patterns fall into that category.
Throwbacks and pullbacks. Upward breakouts have throwbacks more
often (67% and 74%) than downward breakouts have pullbacks (54% each).
The reason for this occurrence is that the downward moves tend to be steeper
and move farther, making a pullback less likely. For throwbacks, price can col-
lapse if no one is buying.
It takes between 8 and 10 days for the stock to return to the breakout
price. When a throwback or pullback occurs, performance suffers. For exam-
ple, islands with throwbacks and upward breakouts in a bull market rise 24%
after the breakout, on average. Without a throwback, the rise averages 54%.
Gaps. Do large price gaps mean better performance? Yes, but only dur-
ing a downward breakout. I used the closing price the day before the breakout
(so I could include the gaps) and checked performance against the median gap
size. When the gap was larger than the median, the island tended to perform
better. For the median gap size, I used the smaller of the two island gaps in the
computation.
low. You can see that well over a third of the islands flame out in the first week.
Islands with upward breakouts in bear markets lead the charge with 44%
reaching the ultimate low in week 1. At the other end of the spectrum, 24% of
the islands in a bull market with upward breakouts have not reached the ulti-
mate high in less than 70 days (over 2 months).
Consider that 65% of the islands in a bear market with downward break-
outs bottom within 3 weeks (the sum of the first three columns with numbers).
The stock may make a large downward move, but do not depend on it.
Notice that islands with upward breakouts show a minor rise starting 42
days after the breakout. I have seen this behavior with other chart patterns.
Price momentum weakens about a month after the breakout and some patterns
Statistics 489
Table 31.5
Days: 7 14 21 28 35 42 49 56 63 70 >70
Bear market,
up breakout 44% 11% 8% 5% 4% 6% 5% 4% 0% 1% 12%
Bull market,
up breakout 34% 10% 6% 5% 3% 5% 4% 2% 4% 2% 24%
Bear market,
down
breakout 43% 12% 10% 9% 5% 4% 3% 2% 2% 1% 8%
Bull market,
down
breakout 39% 11% 10% 9% 5% 4% 3% 4% 3% 2% 9%
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 489

reach the ultimate move near that time. Be especially cautious 5 to 7 weeks
after the breakout.
Height. Tall patterns perform better than short ones. For example, tall
islands in a bull market with upward breakouts have rises after the breakout
averaging 37%, but short islands have rises that average only 27%. For the best
performance, trade patterns taller than the median.
Width. With the exception of islands in a bear market with downward
breakouts, narrow patterns perform better than wide ones. I used the median
length as the separator between narrow and wide.
Average formation length. The average time between the two gaps
measured about 6 weeks. I limited islands to at least 2 days long (to avoid one-
day reversals) but no longer than 4 months.
Height and width combinations. Most of the time, islands that are both
tall and narrow outperform the other combinations. The exception is islands in
a bull market with upward breakouts. They perform best when the pattern is
both tall and wide.
Island sequence. Look back at Figure 31.2. See how the islands get
shorter as they near the end of the trend? To find this result, I cataloged each
island into its position in a trend (first, second, third, and so on). Then I did a
frequency distribution of the results and found the average width for each pat-
490 Islands, Long
Table 31.6
Size Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
of breakout price
–16% –25%
–28% –29%
a
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 490

tern in the first position, second position, and so forth. Here are the results, in
days: 53, 44, 42, 38, 46, 32, and 28. This analysis says islands tend to get shorter
as they near the end of the trend. Thus, before taking a position after an island
breakout, ask yourself if the island seems shorter than usual. You might check
the length of other islands in the same trend. Unusually short islands may
mark (or near) the end of the trend. However, this is not an absolute rule and
exceptions are numerous.
Table 31.7 shows statistics related to volume.
Volume trend. Islands in bull markets perform best with a falling volume
trend. Bear markets show little or no performance difference.
Volume shapes. Just over half the islands (51%) have U-shaped volume,
42% have a dome shape, and the rest have a random shape (usually horizontal).
The best performing islands in a bull market have dome-shaped volume. In a
bear market, islands with a random volume shape perform best, but the sam-
ple size is small.
Trading Tactics
Table 31.8 shows trading tactics for long islands.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to help predict how far price will
travel after the breakout. Consider the long island shown in Figure 31.4. For
the formation height, subtract point 3 (20), the lowest low, from point 4
(29.75), the highest high in the pattern then divide by 2. If the breakout is
downward, subtract the result (4.88) from the closing price the day before the
breakout (near point 5, at 25.99). This result gives a target of 21.11. If the
Trading Tactics 491
Table 31.7
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear Bull Bear
Up Up Down Down
Rising volume trend performance 27% 26% –19% –26%
Falling volume trend performance 32% 25% –23% –26%
performance 29% 25% –21% –27%
performance 35% 25% –23% –25%
Neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped
volume pattern performance 24%a
26%a
–19%a
–28%a
a
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 491

breakout is upward, add the height to the closing price for a target of 30.87.
The Results Snapshot shows how often this method works for the different
market conditions (see “Percentage meeting price target”), but it works
between 72% and 82% of the time.
Avoid short islands. When an island appears well into a price trend and
the island is unusually short, that may mean the end of the trend is near. Islands
at the start of a trend are almost twice as long as are those near or at the end of
the trend. Since this observation is an average, your results will vary, but it is
worth checking.
492 Islands, Long
Table 31.8
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Compute the formation height from highest high to lowest low.
Divide by 2. Apply the height to the closing price the day before
the second gap. The result is the target price.
Avoid short islands Islands that appear well into the trend and are unusually narrow
may signal a coming trend change.
Trade with market Trade in the direction of the general market and other stocks in
and industry the same industry.
Brief trades Be prepared to take profits quickly except for islands in a bull
market with upward breakouts.
1
2
3
4
5
Buy
Island Reversal
Long Island
Sell Line 1
Sell Line 2
Delta Air Lines, Inc. (Air Transport, NYSE, DAL)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
01 Mar Apr
Jun Jul Feb
Figure 31.4 A dead cat bounce chart pattern forms a long island (points 1 and 2).
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 492

Trade with market and industry. To improve your odds of a successful
trade, always trade in the direction of the general market and industry trends.
In other words, go long in a bull market and short in a bear market. If other
stocks in the same industry as the one you want to buy are having trouble,
chances are your stock will suffer, too. If others are doing well, then yours may
do well. Which stock is the leader? Which hits turning points first? If your
stock is following the leader by a few days or weeks, that may help you trade
your stock.
Brief trades. Over half the time, islands reach the ultimate high or low in
the first two weeks (from Table 31.5). Thus, be prepared to take profits
quickly. Also, since the move in the first week is usually a large one, be sure to
get in quickly then protect yourself with stops.
Sample Trade
Figure 31.4 shows the sample trade discussed in this section. I chose Delta
because of its similarity to Figure 31.3, Continental, just after September 11,
2001. Both have large, one-day bearish gaps on that day but recovered. The
bounce in Figure 31.4 carries prices from point 3 to 4 then slides to 2, com-
pleting the dead cat bounce chart pattern. At point 2, the long island forms
when price gaps downward.
As a position trader—one that holds stocks for days, months or even
years—I would not have shorted this stock. I build my database the day after
the market closes. Seeing the downward gap at point 2, I would have asked my
broker for a quote and found price moving higher (note the intraday low the
day after point 2 is well above the prior close). If the stock is moving up, why
risk a short sale?
This long island represents an opportunity to trade after the ultimate low
and participate in an average 48% recovery (see Table 31.2, “Change after
trend ends,” and note that this is not a busted pattern because prices drop 8%).
The stock reached bottom at point 3, bounced, and retested the low at 2. Note
that the retest stops above point 3. Comparing Figure 31.4 with Figure 31.3,
Continental also makes a higher low and starts recovering. In fact, all nine air-
line stocks I follow were making higher lows or just flying upward after 9/11.
Two days after the second island gap, price closed the gap by moving
above it, forming an island reversal (point 2 and the following day forms a 2-
day island reversal). That was the buy signal. Watching the other airline stocks
take the lead and move higher, it would be easy to hold onto this stock.
By January, you could draw a trend line (not shown in Figure 31.4) under-
neath the rising price trend (starting in late November). If price closed below
the trend line, that would be a sell signal. In February, weakness set in for sev-
eral of the other airlines (four out of nine). The other five stocks, like Delta,
continued soaring. Since the stock was making higher lows, that suggested
Sample Trade 493
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 493

patience, but the other airline stocks warned of turbulence ahead. By the end
of February, the other airline stocks rejoined the squadron and resumed the
upward move.
A trend line, shown as “Sell Line 2” in Figure 31.4, was the sell signal.
That trend line did not last long because prices climbed at a steeper slope. Sell
Line 1 connected the lows and was the new sell signal. When price closed
below the trend line, it was time to sell. All but one of the other airline stocks
peaked in late February or during March.
The general market, using the S&P 500 index as the proxy, also peaked in
early March, bumping up against a horizontal trend line set by peaks in
December and January. The peaks formed a right-angled, descending broad-
ening wedge. That mouthful means a pattern with a flat top and down-sloping
trend line along the bottoms. The index touched the horizontal trend line in
early March and again in mid-March, but seemed reluctant or unable to punch
through. The second touch was higher but by less than a point. The failure to
make a significant new high was another warning signal of a trend change.
Like a bump-and-run reversal top, a chart pattern that shows increasing
momentum by steeper sloping trend lines, the party had to end sometime. Price
cannot continue moving upward at such a rate. So, selling at one of the two
trend lines made sense especially since many of the other airline stocks were
making lower highs by April. Using the closing price on the buy and sell days
(assuming you sold after Sell Line 1), you would have made over 35%. In late
July, the stock reached a low of 13.20, well below the early March high of 38.69.
The following list includes tips and observations to improve your selection of
long islands for the best performance. Refer to the associated table for more
information.
• Trade with the trend: go long in a bull market (islands with an upward
breakout) and short a bear market (islands with a downward break-
out)—Table 31.2.
• Islands in a bear market with downward breakouts have the lowest fail-
ure rates for declines up to 30%. After that, islands in a bull market
with upward breakouts have lower failures—Table 31.3.
• Most islands perform best when the breakout is near the yearly low—
Table 31.4.
• Avoid throwbacks and pullbacks because performance suffers when
they occur—Table 31.4.
494 Islands, Long
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 494

• Most islands with large gaps and downward breakouts perform bet-
ter—Table 31.4.
• Look for price weakness a month to 7 weeks after the upward break-
out—Table 31.5.
• Patterns narrower than the median usually outperform—Table 31.6.
• Very narrow islands may mark the end of the trend—Table 31.6.
• Islands in a bull market with falling volume outperform—Table 31.7.
4366_31.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 495

496
32
Measured Move Down
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Appearance Prices move down, retrace, and then move
down again.
Reversal or continuation Intermediate-term bearish reversal
Performance rank Not Applicable Not applicable
Average first leg decline 27% in 61 days 36% in 45 days
Average corrective phase retrace 48% in 30 days 44% in 22 days
Average last leg decline 25% in 62 days 36% in 46 days
Percentage meeting time target 53% 49%
Surprising findings The larger the corrective phase retrace, the
better the chance of meeting the price target.
The decline is steeper and farther in a bear
market. Patterns with U-shaped volume
reach their price targets more often.
Synonym Swing measurements; simple ABC correction
The measured move down (MMD), or swing measurement as it is sometimes
called, is an exciting formation because it vividly tells how far down price is
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 496

going. Unlike other chart patterns, I classify MMDs as bearish reversals over
the intermediate term. With other patterns, I gauge the term by the time to the
ultimate low, but with MMDs, I am using the pattern length instead.
I do not show the average decline or the failure rate. The average decline
measures the move from the breakout to the ultimate low, and neither applies
to this pattern. The failure rate is a measure of how far price moves after the
breakout. That also does not apply.
The Results Snapshot is self-explanatory with a few exceptions. The
“Average corrective phase retrace” is how far prices move back up the first leg.
In both markets, prices retrace nearly half the first leg move.
The second leg is longer than the first one between 35% and 39% of the
time on a dollar, not a percentage, basis. On the time scale, about half (53% in
a bull market and 49% in a bear market) of the second legs are longer than the
first ones.
What does this information mean? If you measure the first leg price
decline and project it downward from the top of the corrective phase, you will
hit your target between 35% and 39% of the time. If you take half of the first
leg move and project downward, you will hit your target between 83% and
93% of the time. On a percentage basis, however, the first and second leg
declines are about equal.
A surprising finding that helps with gauging performance is the retrace
amount of the corrective phase. Large retraces, over 62%, are more likely to be
followed by a second leg decline that matches or exceeds the first leg decline.
Small retraces (less than 38% of the first leg move) show a larger likelihood of
the second leg being shorter than the first. Also, the decline is steeper and price
travels farther in a bear market than in a bull market. That should not be a sur-
prise because MMDs are a bearish chart pattern. Finally, MMDs with U-
shaped volume tend to have second legs that are as long as or longer than the
first leg decline.
Tour
Figure 32.1 shows what a typical measured move down looks like. The decline
from the high (point A) to the start of the retrace (point C) is called the first leg.
The retrace is commonly referred to as the corrective phase and the remaining
decline to the low is called the second leg. The first and second legs are nearly
the same size, but their behavior is described in more detail later in the Statis-
tics section.
The corrective phase is simply an upward retrace of the downtrend. It is
a place for the stock to catch its breath and for novice investors to buy into the
situation. They purchase the stock and push it up, believing the decline is at an
end. Do not be fooled; the decline is only half over. That is the beauty of this
formation. Before you buy a stock after a long decline, consider that it might
Tour 497
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 497

be making a measured move down and that the decline is not over. Paying
attention might save you some big bucks.
Returning to Figure 32.1, you can see the two legs following a trend line
that has nearly the same slope. This is not always the case, but a surprising
number of formations obey this dictum. Further, a channel—two parallel lines
that follow prices down—can encompass the two legs. Although the example in
Figure 32.1 is weak on the first leg, you can see how the second leg follows a
top trend line, connecting points D and E and extending down.
Lastly, the three points marked A, B, and C mark another measured move
down. This one is more compact and it is not uncommon to find nested for-
mations like this. Sometimes, you get one measured move right after another.
Table 32.1 highlights identification characteristics for the measured move
down chart pattern.
First leg. The first leg occurs as prices reach a new high and a trend
change begins. Prices decline, leaving a price peak on the chart. From there,
prices continue moving lower, usually in a straight-line run. Most times you
can draw two parallel lines, one connecting the minor highs and one joining
the minor lows, forming a down-sloping trend channel.
Corrective phase. The corrective phase stops the decline. Prices can
move horizontally but usually retrace a significant portion of their losses, usu-
ally between 38% and 62%.
498 Measured Move Down
First Leg
Second Leg
Corrective
Phase
Mar 92 Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
A
B
C
D
E
Figure 32.1 A typical measured move down. The slope of the trend line is simi-
lar for both legs. Points A, B, and C mark a nested measured move.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 498

Second leg. When the second leg begins, the downturn resumes. Prices
usually follow the slope set by the first leg but this varies from formation to for-
mation. Of course, the two legs will not share the same trend line since the cor-
rective phase offsets them. Even so, the second leg usually fits inside its own
trend channel as prices decline in a straight-line fashion. The second leg
decline approximates the price decline set by the first leg and the time it took
to accomplish it.
Avoid. There are several guidelines that you should follow when search-
ing for the measured move down. Avoid formations that show a rounded first
leg, where prices move lower but curve around in a sort of rounding turn, scal-
lop, or saucer. The trend should be a straight-line decline.
During the corrective phase, prices should not rebound (or come close) to
the high set by the first leg. If prices near or rise above the first leg high, then
avoid the formation.
Watch for consecutive measured moves in a declining price trend. The
downtrend eventually will end, so it is best to trade on the first or second mea-
sured move and avoid the rest.
Occasionally, the prevailing price trend will be horizontal. Prices rise up
and reach a high then begin down in the first leg. When prices return to the
base, they bounce. This bounce, wrongly interpreted as the corrective phase of
a measured move down, is really a minor high in a consolidation trend. Prices
return to the base and may bounce several more times before beginning a sus-
tained move upward. The overall picture looks like a horizontal saw-tooth for-
mation. Avoid measured moves that spring from a horizontal trend.
The last caveat is to consider the measure rule. I discuss the measure rule
in the Trading Tactics section of this chapter, but the measure rule says the
Table 32.1
First leg Usually begins from a new high. Prices decline rapidly in a straight-
line fashion. Avoid declines that curve (they are rounding turns,
scallops, or saucers).
Corrective phase Prices can move horizontally but usually rise and recover from 38%
to 62% of the prior decline before resuming the downtrend. If the
corrective phase nears or rises above the first leg high, look
elsewhere.
Second leg The slope of the first leg down trend line often carries onto this leg.
Both legs usually fit inside their own trend channels.
Avoid For cascading measured moves, use the first retrace and not later
ones as they get progressively closer to the end of the trend. Avoid
horizontal, saw-tooth consolidation regions and measured moves
that rise from a flat base. Make sure the measure rule does not
predict prices will fall below zero.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 499

second leg will approximate the price move of the first leg. If the first leg has a
large decline, you may find that the predicted price is very close to zero or per-
haps even negative. Obviously, the stock is not going to go negative and prob-
ably will remain far above zero, so you might look elsewhere for a more
promising trade. Examples of these idiosyncrasies follow in the Focus on Fail-
ures section.
Figure 32.2 shows two examples of the measured move down formation.
The first one, marked by points A, B, C, and D, begins after a long price rise. The
stock moves up from 43.13 in late November 1994, to 59.63 in early July.
Then, prices decline following a down trend line and stay within the trend
channel until mid-August, when they reach a low of 51.50. The corrective
phase begins on volume that is high but not unusually so. Prices move up and
retrace 68% of the decline before tumbling again. In the second leg, prices
move below the low (point B) and continue lower to point D. Then it is over.
The second leg is steeper than the first leg and covers the ground in about
half the time (36 days versus 19 days). In addition, the second leg is slightly
shorter than the first one (the first leg declines by 8.13, whereas the second one
falls 7.25).
Another measured move occurs in mid-November and ends at about the
same level as the first formation in late January (see points E, F, G, and H). If
you look closely at Figure 32.2, you can see another measured move that forms
in the first leg from point E to point F. Points E1 and E2 mark the corrective
phase.
Air Products and Chemicals Inc. (Chemical (Diversified), NYSE, APD)
Jan 96 Feb Mar
– 61
– 60
– 59
– 58
– 57
– 56
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
A
B
C
D
E
E1
E2
F
G
H
Figure 32.2 Two measured moves. Notice how they fit neatly inside a trend
channel. With measured moves, the price decline from C to D nearly matches the
decline from A to B.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 500

Focus on Failures
There are a number of identification mistakes that I want to point out. Figure
32.3 shows the first one. The semiconductor maker’s stock reaches a high,
along with a host of other chip makers’ stocks, in the summer and fall of 1995.
The stock forms a head-and-shoulders top in August and September before
burning out. In a near straight-line run, the stock tumbles from a high of 33.50
to a low of 9.13.
If this decline marks the first leg of a measured move down, how far will
prices fall in the second leg? That depends on how far up the corrective phase
brings prices. The corrective phase rises to a high of 15.25. I discuss the mea-
sure rule later, but it says the second leg approximates the price decline of the
first leg. If we run through the computations, we discover that the predicted
decline is minus 9.13. Even if the company were to declare bankruptcy, its
stock price would never go negative.
Another key to this failure is the size of the corrective phase. Usually,
prices recover 38% to 62% of the first leg decline, but this one does not come
close (about a 25% retrace). With larger price declines, the corrective phase is
proportionally larger too. However, the formation in Figure 32.3 does not
show such behavior.
Integrated Device Technology (Semiconductor, NASDAQ, IDTI)
Second Leg
First Leg
Right Shoulder
Left Shoulder
Neckline and Pullback
Corrective
Phase
Head
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
Figure 32.3 A head-and-shoulders top leading to a measured move down. The
head-and-shoulders top forms the basis for the large decline. The corrective phase
is small in comparison to the large first leg decline. The measure rule for the mea-
sured move formation predicts prices will go negative.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 501

Figure 32.4 shows another situation: the flat base problem. Prices are
essentially flat from the start of February. By that I mean the minor lows all
share the same value—about 40. When prices move up in August and reach a
minor high in September, it is nothing unusual. Although the prior minor
highs do not ascend to this height, there is no reason to suspect that a measured
move will follow.
When prices decline to the base at 40 and bounce, a naive investor might
think a measured move down is forming. The corrective phase in late October
and early November sees prices rebound far up the first leg before curling over
and heading down. If the investor sells short at this point, it will be a costly mis-
take. Prices quickly skyrocket to 60 by May from the second leg low of 44.88.
Why does this formation fail? The strong support level at 40 curtails any mean-
ingful decline below that point. In other words, there is nothing to reverse.
Figure 32.5 shows the last failure, a case of mistaken identity. After a
long, extended rise, a retrace can be expected, maybe even a trend change that
takes prices drastically lower. When prices turn down in early January, a
decline is long overdue. If you connect the minor lows in the uptrend, you dis-
cover that prices pierce the up trend line in mid-December. This piercing sup-
ports the theory that the trend is changing. It is not conclusive, but it does tilt
the scales in that direction. Throughout the month of December prices essen-
tially move horizontally before perking up and making a new high just before
prices plummet. The failure to continue moving higher is another clue to a
trend change. The final clue is when price drops below the prior minor high
Anadarko Petroleum Corp. (Petroleum (Producing), NYSE, APC)
First
Leg
Support Line
Second
Leg
Corrective
Phase
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
Figure 32.4 A measured move from a horizontal base. These formations rarely
work out as anticipated.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 502

reached in late October. The stock even tumbles below the support level at
12.63 before recovering.
The corrective phase of the measured move down sees prices retrace
85%. That is well above normal and should flag a potential problem. With
such a large retrace, prices will probably decline to the prior low and stall
(because the second leg is slightly smaller than the first one). The stock did not
even go that far. Prices declined to the prior minor high at 13.50 and held
steady for a week before moving higher.
Why did this formation fail? The choice of a measured move down for
this situation is poor because of the extent of the corrective phase. If we look
at the larger picture, we discover that the first down leg is nothing more than
the corrective phase of a measured move up!
Statistics
The tables in this section differ from those given in other chapters because of
the uniqueness of this chart pattern. Many of the statistics provided elsewhere
do not apply because there is no breakout and no ultimate low. Table 32.2
shows general statistics for MMDs.
Number of formations. I found 911 MMDs using 5 years of daily price
data beginning from mid-1991 on 500 stocks. Another 220 or so stocks created
additional bull/bear market data, starting from January 2000 to 2003.
Statistics 503
Champion Enterprises (Manuf. Housing/Rec. Veh., NYSE, CHB)
First Leg
Up Trend Line
Corrective
Phase
Start of Second Leg
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
– 9
– 8
– 7
– 6
– 5
Figure 32.5 This measured move down is really the corrective phase of a mea-
sured move up.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 503

Reversal or continuation. About 87% of the time in a bull market and
81% of the time in a bear market, MMDs act as reversals of the price trend. A
reversal happens in two ways. First, the MMD can form at the end of a rising
price trend or, second, it could start a new trend after the MMD completes. I
consider both movements as being valid price reversals.
For continuations, the MMD forms in an established declining price
trend. The size of the corrective phase, being proportional to the MMD legs,
helps determine the starting and ending points of the pattern. Since price is
declining into the pattern and it continues declining after the pattern, the
MMD acts as a continuation of the falling price trend.
Change after trend ends. After the end of the second leg, price rises
between 46% (bull market) and 49% (bear market), as measured using a 20%
price change (as in the search for the ultimate high). These percentages are less
than the usual 50% to 60% rise posted by other chart patterns. However, they
do suggest a good recovery after the pattern ends. If the stock is in a bull mar-
ket, consider taking a long position after the MMD completes.
Corrective phase retrace. I did a frequency distribution of the percent-
age price retrace of the first leg move. In both bull and bear markets, prices
retrace most often between 40% and 60% of the first leg move. The larger the
retrace, the more likely it is that the second leg will be as long as or longer than
the first leg. For example, when the retrace is less than 38%, just 22% of the
MMDs have longer second legs. When the retrace is between 38% and 62%
(Fibonacci numbers), 31% have longer second legs. When the retrace is above
62%, 58% have longer second legs.
Average length. From the start of the first leg to the end of the second,
MMDs in a bull market were about 5 months long (153 days), and in a bear
market, 4 months long (113 days).
Average leg price decline. I measured the price move of the three parts
of an MMD: the first leg, corrective phase retrace, and second leg. The first leg
Table 32.2
General Statistics
Most frequent corrective phase retrace 40% to 60% 40% to 60%
Average MMD length 153 days 113 days
Average first leg price decline 27% in 61 days 36% in 45 days
Average last leg price decline 25% in 62 days 36% in 46 days
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 504

nearly equals the decline of the second leg in both time and price. For exam-
ple, in a bull market, the first leg declines an average of 27% in 61 days. The
second leg declines 25% in 62 days. In between the two, the corrective phase
retraces 48% of the first leg’s decline.
Notice that MMDs in a bear market fall farther (36%) in a shorter period
(45 days) than in a bull market, on average. I measured the leg decline as a per-
centage from the top of the respective leg and the corrective phase retrace as
the ratio of the corrective phase length to the first leg length.
On a dollar basis in a bull market, the second leg decline is longer than
the first leg 35% of the time. The second leg is 19% shorter than the first. In
a bear market, 39% of the second legs are longer than the first. On average, the
second leg is 20% shorter than the first.
Table 32.3 shows volume statistics.
Volume trend. I do not show performance statistics in the table, but
show instead the proportion of MMDs with a rising or falling volume trend.
MMDs usually have a receding volume trend from the top of the first leg to the
end of the second leg.
I looked at the volume trend and checked to see if MMDs with the asso-
ciated trend had second legs equal to or longer than the first leg. The second
leg was longer than the first most often in a bear market. Bear market MMDs
with a rising volume trend performed particularly well, with 72% having sec-
ond legs longer than the first. In a bull market, the second leg was shorter than
the first most of the time.
Statistics 505
Table 32.3
Volume Statistics
Bull Bear
Number with rising volume trend 26% 27%
Number with falling volume trend 74% 73%
Rising volume trend, second leg longer than first leg 43% 72%
Falling volume trend, second leg longer than first leg 49% 56%
Number with U-shaped volume 33% 41%
Number with dome-shaped volume 61% 53%
Number with neither U-shaped nor dome-shaped volume 6% 6%
U-shaped volume, number of times second leg longer than
first leg 57% 73%
Dome-shaped volume, number of times second leg longer
than first leg 43% 51%
Random volume shape, number of times second leg longer
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 505

Volume shapes. Again, I do not show performance but show instead the
number of patterns with the associated volume shape. Most of the time, a
dome-shaped volume pattern prevails.
Volume shape versus leg length. Does volume shape give a clue to per-
formance? Yes. When U-shaped volume prevailed, the second leg was longer
than the first 57% of the time in a bull market and 73% of the time in a bear
market. Those numbers were larger than the other volume shapes. Thus, when
projecting the price trend downward, look at the volume shape. If it looks U-
shaped, then there is a better chance that the second leg will be at least as long
as the first leg decline.
Table 32.4 shows where price stops climbing after the MMD ends. In
Figure 32.2, for example, I am talking about the move from D to E after the
ABCD measured move down.
Why is this information important? If you hold onto a security too long,
price will retrace its downward move, ending higher. In a bull market, price
will stop within the corrective phase about a third of the time, on average. Only
16% of the time will price not make it to the corrective phase.
In a bear market, the corrective phase shows more stopping power. Just
over half the time, price stops rising within the corrective phase. Over a quar-
ter of the time (20% + 8%), price climbs higher than the corrective phase.
To put the numbers in perspective, after the MMD ends, price climbs
and reaches or exceeds the start of the corrective phase between 80% (bear
market) and 84% (bull market) of the time. Those figures should serve as a
warning that you need to use stops to protect your short position from adverse
moves.
Trading Tactics
Table 32.5 outlines trading tactics for MMDs.
Measure rule. Use the measure rule to help predict how far prices will
decline. Refer to Figure 32.6 during the discussion of its computation. In the
figure, four points outline the measured move: A through D. First, tabulate the
height of the first leg (shown by points A and B) by subtracting the lowest low
Table 32.4
After Pattern Ends
Price stops below corrective phase 16% 20%
Price stops within corrective phase 35% 52%
Price stops above corrective phase but
below MMD high 31% 20%
Price stops above MMD high 18% 8%
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 506

Trading Tactics 507
Table 32.5
Trading Tactics
Measure rule The second leg averages 19% shorter than the first leg, so
expect the actual price to fall short of the target.
Compute the length of the first leg from the highest high
to the lowest low (at the start of the corrective phase).
Subtract the result from the highest high reached in the
corrective phase to get the target price. For a more
conservative target, use half of the first leg height. This
shortened height means that prices hit the target 83%
(bull market) to 93% (bear market) of the time.
Short during second leg, Short the stock as soon as it becomes clear that a
stop loss measured move is in progress. If prices rise above the
corrective phase high, then close out your position. Prices
occasionally will rise up to the corrective phase high a
second time before ultimately declining, so put your stop
about 0.15 above the high.
Close out Cover your short when the price drops to a support area
and meets resistance to a further decline, especially if
prices near the measure rule target.
Support/resistance The corrective phase shows future support or resistance.
3 Com Corp. (Computers & Peripherals, NASDAQ, COMS)
Most Recent Up Trend Line
Stock
Shorted
Resistance
Support,
Resistance
Level
Target Price,
Position Closed
Out
Jan 96 Feb Mar
Oct 95 Nov Dec
– 55
– 54
– 53
– 52
– 51
– 50
– 49
– 48
– 47
– 46
– 45
– 44
– 43
– 42
– 41
– 40
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
A
B
C
D
Figure 32.6 Measured move down followed by corrective phase. Eddy made $5
per share trading this (points A–D) measured move down.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 507

(42) from the highest high (52.88). This computation gives a difference of
10.88. Subtract the difference from the highest high in the corrective phase
(point C at 47.75). The result is a target price of 36.87. Prices meet the target
on December 7.
Sell short. Once you suspect that a measured move down is forming,
probably just after the corrective phase completes and prices start down, short
the stock. Use the measure rule to predict the price target, but expect prices to
come up short. Place a stop-loss order 0.15 above the corrective phase high
(the corrective phase is a source of support and resistance). For a more conser-
vative target, follow the measure rule using one-half of the first leg height.
Prices reach the new target 83% of the time. For example, one-half of the first
leg height in Figure 32.6 is 5.44. Subtracting this value from the corrective
phase high gives a closer target of 42.31.
Close out. Cover your short if prices rebound off a support zone or
approach the measure rule target.
Support/resistance. After a measured move down completes, the cor-
rective phase often spells a resistance zone for future moves. Prices pause on
the approach to the corrective phase low and at the high. Figure 32.6 has these
zones labeled. If you are nimble, you can anticipate this rise and trade long
once the measured move down completes. Sell if prices run into trouble dur-
ing the corrective phase and begin heading lower. In a bull market you can
generally expect prices to eventually push through the corrective phase resis-
tance and move up to the old high, but that could take months or years.
Sample Trade
People are nasty; just ask Eddy. He is an airline reservation agent. Between the
company monitoring his phone calls to be sure he peddles a car and hotel
when appropriate and the people screaming at him from the other end of the
phone, it is a tough living. There is nothing he can do about equipment prob-
lems or the weather, but people do not seem to care. Even the full moon gets
into the act as that is when the crazies call.
What he would really like to do is invest in the stock market. He does it
now but to a limited extent because of a cash-flow problem. Fortunately, with
a few clicks of his computer mouse he can flip to the Internet and monitor his
latest stock pick when he is not busy.
That is how he uncovered the situation shown in Figure 32.6. He
watched the stock climb from a low of about 10 in June 1994 to a high of 53.63
in October 1995. Every so often, he would draw trend lines along the bottoms
of the minor lows and notice how the upward trend seemed to be accelerating
(the trend lines grew steeper over time).
Since he knew this could not last, he was ready for a trend change, which
occurred on November 14 when prices pierced the trend line, moving down.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 508

Instead of shorting the stock immediately, he decided to wait for a pullback.
Much to his surprise it never came. Prices moved steadily lower until they
reached a support level at 42. From that point on, prices rose higher for the
next week and a half. Then, they dropped sharply, tumbling $3 in one session.
When prices fell, they pierced a small up trend line, drawn along the bot-
toms of the climb from points B to C. Eddy recognized what was happening
when he drew the trend line on his chart. The chart pattern was making a mea-
sured move down, so he shorted the stock that day and received a fill at 42.
He used the measure rule to compute the predicted price move and
placed an order with his broker to cover the short at the predicted price
(36.88). Just 3 days after he placed the trade, the short was covered. He made
about $5 a share or 12%.
If you look at Figure 32.6, you can see that prices rose to the level of the
corrective phase bottom (point B), then retreated 2 days after Eddy completed
his trade. Later on you can see that prices also stopped rising at the top of the
corrective phase. The corrective phase is a zone of support and resistance.
The following list includes tips and observations to help select MMDs that
outperform. Consult the associated table for more information.
• Trade MMDs in a bear market; the decline is shorter but steeper—
Table 32.2.
• The second leg is about 20% shorter than the first leg, on a dollar
basis—Table 32.3.
• Select patterns with a falling volume trend and U-shaped volume pat-
tern—Table 32.3.
• After the pattern ends, price rises to the corrective phase at least 80%
of the time—Table 32.4.
4366_32.qxd 2/23/05 12:05 PM Page 509

510
33
Measured Move Up
RESULTS SNAPSHOT
Appearance Prices move up, retrace, and then move up
again.
Reversal or continuation Long-term bullish reversal
Performance rank Not Applicable Not applicable
Average first leg rise 46% in 87 days 39% in 30 days
Average last leg rise 32% in 60 days 35% in 33 days
Percentage meeting time target 38% 56%
Surprising findings The first leg price change is a poor tool for
target prediction. After the pattern
completes, prices drop to the corrective
phase between 35% and 40% of the time.
Synonym Swing measurement
The measured move up (MMU) is the reverse of the measured move down but
with worse performance. In a perfect world, the first and last legs would be the
same length. With MMUs, the percentage rise in the first leg during a bull
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 510

market is often about 50% longer than the second leg (a rise of 46% versus
32%, respectively). Even on a calendar basis, the first leg is about 50% longer
(87 days versus 60 days). In a bear market, the numbers are closer and the
results are mixed. On a percentage basis, the first leg is slightly longer than the
second but on the time scale, the second leg is longer.
Using the first leg height, in dollars, projected upward from the bottom
of the corrective phase to get a target price only works 45% to 56% of the
time. I like to see values above 80%, so this falls short. Using time as the basis
for projection fares even worse with as few as 38% hitting their targets. What
all this information means is that when predicting a price target, be conserva-
tive. The best approach is to use half the first leg move projected upward.
MMUs have two surprises. The first is the poor price prediction that I
mentioned. The second is that once the MMU completes, prices drop and stop
within the corrective phase between 35% and 40% of the time. Thus, the zone
sometimes acts as a support area.
Tour
Figure 33.1 shows a measured move up formation with the various compo-
nents labeled. The first leg has a rise in price that follows a trend line. Many
times a trend line drawn on either side of the minor highs and lows constructs
a channel.
Tour 511
Allegheny Ludlum Corp. (Steel (General), NYSE, ALS)
Nov 92 Dec Jan 93 Feb Mar Apr May Jul
Jun
First Leg
Corrective
Phase
Second
Leg
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
Figure 33.1 A measured move up. The second leg gain nearly matches the gain
posted by the first leg.
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 511

The corrective phase retraces a substantial portion of the rise, usually
40% to 60%, before prices resume rising. In Figure 33.1, the corrective phase
begins in late January and extends through most of February. Prices retrace
55% of the first leg price move. Once the correction completes, prices climb
even more rapidly during the second leg. You can see that prices bow upward
instead of touching the trend line in a sort of rounding-over maneuver before
topping out in June. The rise constitutes what is commonly called the second
leg. It is the rise from the corrective phase to the end of the formation.
Once the formation completes, prices sometimes drop back to the level of
the corrective phase or lower. In this example, you can see that prices dropped
to just below the top of the corrective phase (in July) before recovering.
Table 33.1 lists the identification characteristics for this formation.
Downward trend. The chart pattern usually, but not always, begins
when prices bottom out after a downtrend. The declining price trend can
range all over the scale. In Figure 33.1, for example, prices reach the Novem-
ber lows after shooting up in a bull run that starts in December 1991 and ends
2 months later. Then prices meander—essentially moving horizontally with a
slight downward bend. Six months later, they decline from a high of about
18.25 to a low of 14.75.
512 Measured Move Up
Table 33.1
Downward trend A downward price trend that lasts from a few weeks to over a year
usually precedes the start of the formation. The formation begins
a trend change that usually starts from near the yearly low.
First leg Most times prices follow a trend channel upward before entering
the corrective phase.
Corrective phase Prices decline, usually between 40% to 60% of the first leg move,
before heading upward again. The retrace is usually proportional
to the first leg rise: Large retraces follow large rises. Sometimes the
corrective phase resembles a saw-tooth pattern (a few sharp rises
and declines in a row) before prices break away and zoom
upward. This saw-tooth pattern usually associates with a long
price climb leading to the formation.
Second leg Prices rise, loosely following the slope of the trend line set by the
first leg. Prices commonly fit inside a channel as they rise, but this
behavior is not a prerequisite.
Avoid Avoid formations where the retrace travels too far down the first
leg. Anything beyond an 80% retrace is too far and too risky to
invest in.
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 512

First and second leg. Consider Figure 33.2 where the price decline is
short—barely a month long. The figure shows that the first leg has a slight bow
to it in the early part of the rise. However, you can extend the up trend line and
draw a parallel one connecting the minor highs and see that the first leg fits
inside a trend channel. The second leg does even better. The bottom trend line
touches several places and a parallel top trend line (not shown for clarity) also
intersects the minor highs nicely.
Corrective phase. In this case, a falling wedge composes the corrective
phase. This formation makes trading the measured move easy since it predicts
a price rise. Once prices break out from the wedge, buy into the stock and ride
the upward move. If you bought the stock following this procedure, you would
make somewhere between 15% and 20%, depending on when you traded the
stock. That is not a bad return for a hold time of about 6 weeks. Also note the
very distinctive down-sloping volume trend for the falling wedge.
The slope of the two trend lines, along the minor lows of the legs, are
nearly the same. It is somewhat surprising how often this observation holds
true. However, just because there is a wide variation in the trend slope is no
reason to eliminate a formation from consideration.
In this example, the corrective phase sees prices retrace their prior gains
by 40%, within the usual 40% to 60% range for MMUs. Sometimes when the
rise leading to the start of the formation is extensive, the corrective phase
becomes long and choppy, resembling a saw-tooth formation marked by quick
rises and sharp declines. In such a case, it might be prudent to wait for prices
Applied Power (Machinery (const./mining), NYSE, APW)
Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
May 95 Jul
Jun
Falling
Wedge
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
Figure 33.2 A falling wedge marks the corrective phase in this measured move
up formation. Note the receding volume trend of the wedge.
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 513

to rise above the high established during the first leg before investing. That
way you can avoid the most common MMU failure.
Avoid. You want to avoid formations that have corrective phases that
descend too near the first leg start. I do not have a set amount for this retrace,
but I would probably steer away from formations that retrace more than 80%
or so of the prior upward move.
In addition, if the first leg does not follow a straight course upward or if
it fails to stay within a well-defined trend channel (as does the first leg in Fig-
ure 33.3), you might want to look elsewhere for a more promising situation.
Sometimes when a chart formation does not feel right or look right, then it is
giving you a warning to stay away. Since this is a common chart pattern, you
can easily find another opportunity.
Focus on Failures
Figure 33.3 shows the most common type of measured move up failure. The
stock forms a double top that kills the second leg rise. The second leg does not
near the price move of the first leg as do most well-behaved measured moves.
Why does this particular formation fail? The figure shows a choppy, horizon-
tal saw-tooth pattern leading to the first leg rise. The first leg soars above the
two tops of the saw-tooth and price moves up smartly. Then prices round over
and start correcting. The figure, at this point, reminds me of a mini bump-and-
run reversal. However, the bump phase just does not meet the two-to-one
Fleet Financial Group Inc. (Bank, NYSE, FLT)
Double Top
Double Top
Confirmation
– 39
– 38
– 37
– 36
– 35
– 34
– 33
– 32
– 31
– 30
– 29
– 28
– 27
Figure 33.3 A measured move up that fails after turning into a double top.
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 514

height ratio of the lead-in phase. Still, it does give you pause about investing in
this situation.
The second leg starts rising with no significant change in volume. This is a
warning sign. There is a common Street axiom that says rising prices need high
volume but falling prices can decline on their own weight. This formation appears
to be an example of that axiom. Since there is little upward buying pressure to
push prices higher, momentum fades out just below the prior top and then prices
tumble. The resulting decline sees prices fall below the start of the first leg.
Before we move on to statistics, I want to alert you to some identification
problems. When prices rise steadily for a long time, say over a year or more,
then begin a MMU, the corrective phase might be excessively choppy. I men-
tioned this behavior in the Identification Guidelines section and in Table 33.1,
but it is something to keep in mind.
Also, do not be too quick to buy into the situation. Remember that the
corrective phase should be proportional to the first leg rise. By that I mean
prices should fall anywhere from 40% to 60% of the first leg move before
beginning the second leg. If prices only fall 15% before turning up, then it
might be a false breakout.
Sometimes prior peaks are a key to how far prices retrace. These minor
highs are often places of support. When prices decline to that level, they pause
and move horizontally for a time before continuing down or rebounding. Vol-
ume is often a key to the level of support you can expect from these types of sit-
uations. A prior peak with high turnover will give more support to a stock on
its way down. That is not to say that the stock will not burn through the sup-
port, just that it might take more of a push to fall off the cliff.
Statistics
The tables in this section differ from those given in other chapters because of
the uniqueness of this chart pattern. Many of the statistics provided elsewhere
do not apply because there is no breakout and no ultimate low or high. Table
33.2 shows general statistics for MMUs.
Number of formations. I found 810 MMUs in the stocks I looked at.
Since the pattern was so plentiful, I did not search all of the stocks in my data-
base. Instead, I used 500 stocks from mid-1991 to mid-1996 and another 200
or so bracketing the bear market from 2000 to 2003.
Reversal or continuation. Most often, the chart pattern acts as a rever-
sal of the price trend. A reversal can happen in two ways: Price may reverse on
entry into the pattern on exit. Occasionally (between 23% and 32% of the
time), price will resume the prevailing price trend after the MMU, so the chart
pattern acts as a continuation of the trend.
Change after trend ends. Once price reaches the highest high in the
MMU, it declines an average of 26% to 27%. The decline measures from the
Statistics 515
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 515

end of the pattern until the trend changes again (using the same method to
gauge the ultimate low a —20% price change).
Corrective phase retrace. I did a frequency distribution and found that
prices most often retrace between 40% and 60% of the first leg move.
Average length. The average MMU length in a bull market is more than
twice as long as in a bear market—180 days versus 85 days. This finding makes
sense, as the rise in a bear market (a counter trend move) is often shorter than
a bull market move.
Average leg price rise. Table 33.2 shows the size of each leg as a per-
centage of the low price in each leg. In a bull market, the first leg rises 46% in
about 3 months but the second leg has an average rise of 32% in about 2
months. The bear market numbers are closer on both a percentage and time
basis.
The corrective phase retrace averages 47% in a bull market and 50% in a
bear market.
In a bull market, the second leg move (on a percentage basis, not a dollar
basis) is about two-thirds the length of the first leg move. In a bear market, the
second leg is shorter than the first, but not by much.
On a dollar basis, the second leg is shorter than the first by 11% in a bull
market, but it is longer by 8% in a bear market. By dollar basis, I mean that I
found the length of each leg, in dollars. After summing the lengths of the first
legs for all bullish MMUs, I compared it to the sum of the lengths of the sec-
ond legs. I made the same measure for the bear market.
Table 33.3 shows volume statistics.
Volume trend. Most of the MMUs have a falling volume trend as mea-
sured from the start of the MMU to the end.
I counted the number of times the percentage price change of the second
leg was longer than the first when volume was trending upward or downward.
In other words, if the first leg climbed 20% and the second leg showed a 25%
Table 33.2
General Statistics
Most frequent corrective phase retrace 40% to 60% 40% to 60%
Average MMU length 180 days 85 days
Average first leg price rise 46% in 87 days 39% in 30 days
Average last leg price rise 32% in 60 days 35% in 33 days
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 516

move in a MMU with rising volume, I counted it. If the sizes were reversed, I
excluded it.
In MMUs with a rising volume trend, the second leg is more likely to be
longer in both bull and bear markets. When you think about it, this finding
makes sense. Analysts often say that a rising volume trend is bullish. Perhaps
this is the proof. MMUs with a rising volume trend show price making a longer
move.
Volume shapes. In a bull market, volume appears dome shaped most
often. In a bear market, the U shape predominates, but the numbers are close.
Volume shape versus leg length. In a bull market, MMUs with dome-
shaped volume performed less well than the other shapes—just 26% of the
time the second leg was longer than the first. That finding means the second
leg is not as long as in MMUs with U or random volume shapes. In a bear mar-
ket, MMUs with a random volume shape performed worst—just 29% had
longer second legs.
In the comparison, I used the percentage price change in each leg, not the
size of the dollar move.
Table 33.4 shows where price stops declining after the MMU ends. This
information is important when you buy into a stock and it completes an MMU.
Should you sell at the top or wait for more gains?
In 19% to 24% of the cases, prices dropped but remained above the top
of the corrective phase. Most often (between 35% and 40%, depending on
Statistics 517
Table 33.3
Volume Statistics
Number with rising volume trend 39% 31%
Number with falling volume trend 61% 69%
Rising volume trend, second leg longer
Falling volume trend, second leg longer 25% 32%
than first leg
Number with U-shaped volume 27% 49%
Number with dome-shaped volume 62% 45%
Number with neither U-shaped nor dome- 11% 6%
shaped volume
U-shaped volume, number of times second
leg longer than first leg 31% 35%
Dome-shaped volume, number of times
second leg longer than first leg 26% 35%
Random volume shape, number of times
second leg longer than first leg 31% 29%
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 517

market conditions), prices stop within the corrective phase. Another 19% to
31% of the time, prices continue moving down but stop before the MMU low.
The remaining 15% to 16% of the time, prices continue tumbling.
Combining the numbers, between 54% and 64% of the time, price will
not drop below the corrective phase. Thus, you could use the bottom of the
corrective phase as a stop loss price. That would allow price to resume its climb
about half the time. The other half of the time, the stop will protect you from
a more massive loss. The bad news is that a decline to the corrective phase may
mean a large profit giveback.
If you are a swing trader, you might sell as price nears the target (the sec-
ond leg high) and buy back after it rebounds in the corrective phase. Holding
onto the stock after the MMU completes means you are willing to suffer
through the average 26% to 27% price decline (see “Change after trend ends”
in Table 33.2).
Trading Tactics
Table 33.5 shows trading tactics for measured move up formations.
Measure rule. The measure rule predicts the level to which prices will
rise. To estimate the target price, compute the height of the first leg. I use the
measured move up formation shown in Figure 33.4 as an example. Locate the
highest high in the first leg. Usually this is somewhere near the beginning of
the corrective phase, and point A indicates this in the figure. From this value
(21.13), subtract the lowest low (14.13) in the first leg, shown as point B. The
difference (7) is the height of the first leg. Add it to point C (18.38)—or the
lowest low in the corrective phase—to arrive at the target price. In this case,
the target price is 25.38. Prices reach the target just 10 trading days after the
corrective phase ends.
Using the full length of first leg projected upward works 45% of the time
in a bull market and 56% of the time in a bear market. A better method is to
use half the first leg move. That would work 85% of the time in a bull market
and 99.6% of the time in a bear market. Do not let the bear market number
fool you. Your trade may be the exception.
Table 33.4
After Pattern Ends
Price stops above corrective phase 19% 24%
Price stops within corrective phase 35% 40%
Price stops below corrective phase but
above MMU low 31% 19%
Price stops below MMU low 15% 16%
4366_33.qxd 2/23/05 12:06 PM Page 518

Once you calculate the target price using the measure rule, ask yourself if
the gain is large enough to justify a trade. If the answer is yes, then look at the
chart again. Are there areas of resistance on the way to the target price where
the stock might get hung up? If so, you might need to lower your target. If you
are lucky and significant resistance is above your target, you can move your
price upward to just below the resistance zone. In all likelihood the stock will
shoot into the resistance zone, so you will have ample opportunity to close out
your position.
Trading Tactics 519
Table 33.5
Trading Tactics
Measure rule Calculate the height of the first leg from highest high to lowest
low. Add the difference to the lowest low in the corrective
phase. The result is the expected target price. For a more
conservative measure, use half the first leg height. Decide if the
predicted move is worth the risk of a trade.
Buy Take a position in the stock sometime after the corrective phase
completes and prices rise during the second leg.
Support/resistance The corrective phase shows future support or resistance.
Pacific Scientific (Precision Instrument, NYSE, PSX)
Target Price
Breakaway Gap
Symetrical
Triangle
Jan 96 Feb Mar Apr
A
B
C
Gap
Closed
Corrective Phase Support Zone
– 28
– 27
– 26
– 25
– 24
– 23
– 22
– 21
– 20
– 19
– 18
– 17
– 16
– 15
– 14
– 13
– 12
– 11
– 10
Figure 33.4 Measured move up formation with symmetrical triangle. As
described in the Sample Trade discussion, Michelle rode this measured move up in
a stock she owned. She sold when the breakaway gap closed. A symmetrical tri

Encyclopedia_of_Chart_Patterns_2005_-_Thomas_Bulkowski.pdf

More Related Content

What's hot (11)

Similar to Encyclopedia_of_Chart_Patterns_2005_-_Thomas_Bulkowski.pdf (20)

Recently uploaded (20)

Encyclopedia_of_Chart_Patterns_2005_-_Thomas_Bulkowski.pdf